We encourage you to contact us with any questions or concerns.

Burke Library - 3rd Floor
helpdesk@hamilton.edu

859-4181
859-4185 - fax

Resource Center Home

Off-campus

Available Resources

:
AVG Antivirus
  • Installing AVG Anti-virus AVG Antivirus Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7 Downloading Free AVG Open a web browser. In the address field type in free.avg.com. When the window loads under the Free basic protection windows on the web page click on Get it now! On the next web page that loads scroll down and in the column AVG Anti-virus Free click on Download. On the next web page that loads click on Download Now. On the next web page that loads click on Download Now. This should initiate the downloading of the AVG installation file. Click Save File.   Installing Free AVG Double click on the downloaded file to install AVG. Click on Run. Click Next. In the Acceptance Notice window click Accept. In the license agreement window click Accept. Install the Standard Installation by clicking Next. Click Next. Click Next. Click Finish.   AVG First Run Wizard When the First Run Wizard window opens click Next. Configure when you would like AVG to scan your computer. Click Next. Click Next. Make sure the box is unchecked for Yes, change my default search engine to Yahoo! and click Next. Click Next to update AVG. Click Next. Click Next. Click Finish.
  • Virus Protection at Hamilton College AVG Antivirus Policy Note: Hamilton College requires all existing and all incoming students to install Anti-Virus software on their personal computers by the end of the second week of classes each semester. Failure to do so can result in the loss of connectivity to the Hamilton College network until up-to-date Anti-virus software is installed. Anti-virus software (AVG for Windows and Sophos &  iAntivirus for Macintosh) is provided free to all students. Other anti-virus products may be substituted for Hamilton supported Anti-Virus as long as they are kept current. Student Anti-virus Installation Instructions: (updated 12/5/2011) AVG for Windows Sophos Home Edition or iAntivirus for Mac (ITS recommended for Students only) The ITS Help Desk at x4181 will provide full support for the above Anti-virus software starting 5/13/2011. Employee Anti-virus Installation Instructions: (updated 2/23/2011) Macintosh Instructions (OS 10.4 & higher) (Employees) Windows XP/Vista/7 Instructions (off-campus) (Employees) If you have changed your Hamilton password and use Sophos on your home computer please use the following documenation to allow Sophos to update on your computer. How to change your password in Sophos (Windows & Mac) Sophos Users Manual Sophos  - Windows (Endpoint Security) Sophos  - Mac Sophos Anti-virus is free to employees for use on college-owned computers and for use on their home computers (for as long as they are employed by the college). Please be advised that this is a licensed software product. You will be asked to provide proper identification before you are allowed to obtain this software. If you prefer to have ITS assist you in installing Sophos on your office computer, please contact the ITS Help Desk at x4181.
Active Directory (AD)
  • Federated ID Error Active Directory (AD) You seem to have experienced an error c0nnecting to one of our Federated ID partners.  Please contact ITS if you are experiencing issues.
  • Student Organization Account Creation Process Active Directory (AD) There are two types of accounts managed using the Student Organization Management system, Mass E-mail Only and Student Organization accounts. Both account types are described below. Mass E-mail Mass E-mail accounts are used by student groups who only need the ability to post messages directly to ListServs. One e-mail addres, specified by the submitter, is given posting privileges. The address can either by a student's Hamilton e-mail address or a generic group account. This system allows submitters to request a group e-mail account. This request is sent to Debby Quayle, who communicates directly with the submitter to create the e-mail account. Once the Mass E-mail Group information is reviewed and approved by Student Activities the necessary ListServ commands are automatically sent and the account is granted ListServ posting privileges.   Student Organization Recognized Student Organizations have to be approved by Student Activities every year, and are required to provide contact and leadership information, a membership roster, and a constitution. By registering, student organizations have benefits including using the College name, access to facilities, vans, funding, supplies and resources, and e-mail and storage server space. Student Organizations have the ability to request an organization e-mail address. This request is sent to Debby Quayle, who works directly with the organization's leadership to create the account.    
Adobe Connect
  • Using Adobe Connect Adobe Connect Connecting to a Meeting To connect to a meeting, click on the URL the meeting host has provided and enter as a guest using your full name. When prompted to join the audio conference, keep Dial-out [Receive a call from the meeting] selected and enter your telephone number in the field provided. Wait for Connect to call your phone and follow the instructions that you hear to join the conference. You should now make sure that meeting audio is being sent through your computer's speakers. Use your phone only when you want to ask a question. To ask a question, raise your hand by selecting the raise hand icon and wait for the presenter to unmute your phone. When the presenter calls your name, use your phone to ask your question. If you have a question, click the raise hand button to notify the moderator. Listen to the audio for your name to be called and then speak into your telephone to ask your question.  
Adobe Premiere
  • Audio voice over in Adobe Premiere Adobe Premiere Note: While you can use the computers built-in microphone to record you voice over, you will most likely want to use a USB headset to reduce room noise while recording. Setting up the microphone Plug the USB headset into the computer. In the Menus, go to Premiere>Preferences>Audio Hardware. Set the Default Device pull down menu to your USB headset (Each model of headset is labeled differently ) Creating a new audio track In the menus go to Sequence>Add tracks. In this window you can create new video and audio tracks. Add "0" video tracks and "1" Audio track. Note the placement option. In this case it will be placed after Audio track three. Make sure the track type is set to mono (USB headset is a mono microphone). Recording the voice over In the Menus go to Window>Audio Mixer>your current sequence. Here you will see all of the audio tracks in you sequence. In the newly created track click the "S" and "R" buttons (see photo). The "R" button enables recording on that track and the "S" button will  mute all other audio tracks (A.K.A. Solo). Click the red record button at the bottom of the audio mixer window to place Premiere into Record standby mode. Move the playhead in the timeline to where you would like the recording to start. In the Audio Mixer window click the Play button at bottom of the window to start recording. The recording will be placed in the timeline and in your Project window.
Anti-spyware
  • Keep Your Computer Healthy and Safe Anti-spyware Ten Ways to Keep Your Computer Healthy and Your Files and Information Safe and Secure How to keep your computer running fast and free of viruses, spyware, and hackers.   1. Use hard to guess passwords Hard to guess passwords have eight or more characters, and include a mix of numbers, lower case letters, capital letters, and special characters.  Do not use words that can be found in the dictionary or common names, and do NOT use your name!   2. Always be suspicious of unexpected e-mail and attachments. Do not open email attachments you are not expecting, even if they are from someone you know.  Viruses from your friend's computer can send themselves to you!   3. Regularly download security updates. Security updates and patches for your operating system and other software will keep your information hidden from hackers. (Windows/MacIntosh)   4. Understand the risks associated with file sharing. Programs to share music/movies make your computer vulnerable and open to attack!  Be sure to never give access to your computer through file sharing programs.   5. Use a firewall. A firewall is the first step in keeping your computer hidden from intruders.  (Windows/MacIntosh)   6. Use anti-virus software. Be sure to keep it up-to-date and to scan for viruses daily.  See the ITS virus support webpage for details.   7. Use anti-spyware software. Keep your anti-spyware programs updated and scan your computer daily.  Do your best to avoid spyware by not clicking on suspicious links or popup windows.  See the ITS spyware/adware support webpage for details.   8. Protect your computer before heading home for breaks. Make sure you are up-to-date with your anti-virus software and operating system.  When home, be sure to practice careful internet browsing.   9. Back-up your important files. Save your important files in your SSS or ESS folder.  This ensures that your files will be available in the event of a hard drive crash or other unexpected event.(Windows/MacIntosh)   10. Turn off your computer when not in use. Turning off your computer is the safest thing to do when it is not in use.  It prevents hackers from gaining entry to your computer, it keeps your computer from overheating, and it saves energy to boot!
  • Spyware and Adware Anti-spyware  Topics covered. What is spyware? How is spyware different from adware? Are cookies considered spyware? How to avoid spyware How to detect and remove spyware   What is spyware? Spyware is software that is installed on your computer without your permission. It often tags along with free software you have downloaded or comes from "infected" web sites and/or links. The most common source of spyware is file sharing software (Kazaa, Blubster, etc.). Even innocent free programs (e.g. Comet Cursor) will come with spyware. In fact, it is best to assume that if the software is free, it comes with spyware attached. Its purpose is to report your browsing habits (web sites you've visited) to the publisher of the spyware software. They use this information to present you with pop-ups when you are browsing the Web. Sometimes the information gathered is also used to send you spam. Spyware can interfere with your network connection, slow down the performance of your computer and prevent legitimate software (such as Internet Explorer) from working properly. Back to top How is spyware different from adware? Spyware and Adware are essentially the same thing. The primary difference is that adware is used to pop-up ads that are meant to be meaningful to you, whereas spyware may pop-up ads that are offensive or have nothing to do with your interests. Both are annoying and can overwhelm your browser with pop-ups. Adware typically does not insert itself into your computer operating system as thoroughly as spyware. Back to top Are cookies considered spyware? Cookies are used in a manner similar to adware and spyware. They report information about you back to the publisher of the cookie. Many, many web sites use cookies. Respectable sites, such as Amazon.com, use cookies responsibly. They only store information directly related to the use of their web pages. For example, it is used to suggest products based on your past purchases. Other sites gather more information than they should. Cookies can safely be deleted and are usually recreated when you revisit the site (sometimes you will have to login to the site before the cookie is reset). Internet Explorer includes a button in its "options" window that allows you to quickly remove all cookies. Back to top How to avoid spyware Do not click on banners that appear at the top of web pages even if they look like a fun game, they say you are a winner or they are going to help you correct a potential problem on your computer (your clock is wrong, you have spyware, etc.). Do not download free software. If you must use free software, be as selective as possible and only install that which is completely necessary. Use trustworthy web sites. Do not click on AIM or MSN profile links unless you are absolutely certain they are real. Ask your friend if they know the link is there before you click on it. Do not follow links in spam e-mail messages. They often take you to sites that install spyware on your computer. Music/file sharing is illegal. It is also a pipeline to spyware, viruses and hackers. Is it worth it? Back to top How to detect and remove spyware ITS is currently suggesting students use AVG Antivirus for Windows computers. Click here for installation instructions:  https://my.hamilton.edu/information-technology-services/resource-center/installing-avg-anti-virus. For Macintosh computers, the ITS recommends iAntivirus or Sophos Home Edition. Click here for installation instructions: http://my.hamilton.edu/information-technology-services/resource-center/sophos-home-edition-for-mac Removing spyware may sometimes disable the software with which it came.  In some cases the spyware cannot be removed until the free software it came with is also removed. Back to top
  • Virus Protection at Hamilton College Anti-spyware Policy Note: Hamilton College requires all existing and all incoming students to install Anti-Virus software on their personal computers by the end of the second week of classes each semester. Failure to do so can result in the loss of connectivity to the Hamilton College network until up-to-date Anti-virus software is installed. Anti-virus software (AVG for Windows and Sophos &  iAntivirus for Macintosh) is provided free to all students. Other anti-virus products may be substituted for Hamilton supported Anti-Virus as long as they are kept current. Student Anti-virus Installation Instructions: (updated 12/5/2011) AVG for Windows Sophos Home Edition or iAntivirus for Mac (ITS recommended for Students only) The ITS Help Desk at x4181 will provide full support for the above Anti-virus software starting 5/13/2011. Employee Anti-virus Installation Instructions: (updated 2/23/2011) Macintosh Instructions (OS 10.4 & higher) (Employees) Windows XP/Vista/7 Instructions (off-campus) (Employees) If you have changed your Hamilton password and use Sophos on your home computer please use the following documenation to allow Sophos to update on your computer. How to change your password in Sophos (Windows & Mac) Sophos Users Manual Sophos  - Windows (Endpoint Security) Sophos  - Mac Sophos Anti-virus is free to employees for use on college-owned computers and for use on their home computers (for as long as they are employed by the college). Please be advised that this is a licensed software product. You will be asked to provide proper identification before you are allowed to obtain this software. If you prefer to have ITS assist you in installing Sophos on your office computer, please contact the ITS Help Desk at x4181.
Antivirus
  • Installing AVG Anti-virus Antivirus Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7 Downloading Free AVG Open a web browser. In the address field type in free.avg.com. When the window loads under the Free basic protection windows on the web page click on Get it now! On the next web page that loads scroll down and in the column AVG Anti-virus Free click on Download. On the next web page that loads click on Download Now. On the next web page that loads click on Download Now. This should initiate the downloading of the AVG installation file. Click Save File.   Installing Free AVG Double click on the downloaded file to install AVG. Click on Run. Click Next. In the Acceptance Notice window click Accept. In the license agreement window click Accept. Install the Standard Installation by clicking Next. Click Next. Click Next. Click Finish.   AVG First Run Wizard When the First Run Wizard window opens click Next. Configure when you would like AVG to scan your computer. Click Next. Click Next. Make sure the box is unchecked for Yes, change my default search engine to Yahoo! and click Next. Click Next to update AVG. Click Next. Click Next. Click Finish.
  • Installing Sophos Anti-Virus on Mac OS 10.4-10.8 for Employees Antivirus For Off Campus Use Removal of old Sophos (if necessary) NOTE: If you already have Sophos on your computer go through the removal steps otherwise go to the section Downloading and Installing Sophos 1. At Finder click on your hard drive icon. 2. Open the folder Library. 3. Open the folder Application Support. 4. Open the folder Sophos Anti-virus. 5. Launch the Remove Sophos Anti-virus. 6. Once Sophos is removed from the computer you can install the new version of Sophos. Downloading and Installing Sophos 1. Launch Firefox. NOTE: Safari will not work to download Sophos. 2. Please replace userid with your hamilton user name as you type in the Address line ftp://hamilton-d\userid@software.hamilton.edu/sophos 3. In the dialog box that appears type in your Hamilton Network password. 4. Click OK. 5. Click on the folder link Sophos Mac OS 10.2 & above. 6. Click on the link ESCOSX.zip to download the Sophos installer on your computer. 7. In the dialog box that appears, choose the bullet in front of Save File. 8. Click OK. 9. Locate the ESCOSX.zip that you downloaded. 10. Double click on the ESCOSX.zip to unpack the file folder.   Installing Sophos 1. Close all other applications. 2. Open the folder ESCOSX file folder on the desktop. 3. Double-click on the file Sophos Anti-Virus.mpkg. a. If the installer launches an Authenticate window, enter your username and password. This will be the username and password you use to log onto the computer when it boots up. After typing them in click OK. 4. Click Continue in window This package contains a program that …  5. The Welcome to the Sophos Anti-Virus Installer screen appears. Click Continue. 6. The Important Information screen appears. Click Continue. 7. The Select a Destination screen appears. Select your computer’s hard drive. Click Continue. 8. The Standard Install screen appears. Click Install. a. If the installer launches an Authenticate window, enter your username and password. This will be the username and password you use to log onto the computer. 9. When the progress bar is complete, you will see a message indicating Install Succeeded. Click Close.   Configuring Sophos 1. Click on the Sophos Shield    located by the Time & Date in the top right corner on the menu bar. 2. Select Open Sophos Anti-virus Preferences. 3. Click on the Lock button labeled Click lock to make changes in the lower left hand corner. 4. An Authenticate window appears. Enter your username and password. This will be the username and password you use to log onto the computer when it boots up. After typing them in click OK. 5. Click on the AutoUpdate tab (see figure below.) 6. On the Update from primary location select Company web server. 7. In the URL: field http://sophosupdate.hamilton.edu/cids/s000/escosx 8. In the User name: field, using your network username in place of “userid,” enter Hamilton-d\userid if you are an employee. For example, if you were a employee named Ulysses Grant, you would type hamilton-d\ugrant in the User name field. 9. In the Password: field, enter your Hamilton Network Password.  This is the password you use to access the ESS or SSS server. 10. Place a check in the box labeled Check for updates on connection  to network or internet. 11. Quit System Preferences by selecting System Preferences (from the main menu bar), and then Quit System Preferences.     What to Expect When You’re Finished 1. After your installation is complete, Sophos will scan for viruses in the background and will automatically remove any that are found. 2. Sophos will update every day automatically via the Internet. Remember that if your computer is not connecting to the Internet Sophos Anti-Virus will not be able to receive up dates, and your virus-protection will be ineffective. 3. We recommend that you repair disk permissions on your computer after the installation is finished, as outlined below. Repairing Disk Permissions 1. In your hard drive, open your Applications folder and then open the Utilities folder. 2. Open Disk Utility. 3. Click on the name of your hard drive in the left section of the window. Under the First Aid tab, click on Repair Disk Permissions. 4. You’ll see a progress bar near the bottom of the window showing the status of the repair. You’ll also see text appear in the blank section of the window as permissions are repaired. Be patient as this process can take several minutes. 5. When finished, you’ll be notified that the Permissions repair is complete. 6. Quit Disk Utility.    
  • Keep Your Computer Healthy and Safe Antivirus Ten Ways to Keep Your Computer Healthy and Your Files and Information Safe and Secure How to keep your computer running fast and free of viruses, spyware, and hackers.   1. Use hard to guess passwords Hard to guess passwords have eight or more characters, and include a mix of numbers, lower case letters, capital letters, and special characters.  Do not use words that can be found in the dictionary or common names, and do NOT use your name!   2. Always be suspicious of unexpected e-mail and attachments. Do not open email attachments you are not expecting, even if they are from someone you know.  Viruses from your friend's computer can send themselves to you!   3. Regularly download security updates. Security updates and patches for your operating system and other software will keep your information hidden from hackers. (Windows/MacIntosh)   4. Understand the risks associated with file sharing. Programs to share music/movies make your computer vulnerable and open to attack!  Be sure to never give access to your computer through file sharing programs.   5. Use a firewall. A firewall is the first step in keeping your computer hidden from intruders.  (Windows/MacIntosh)   6. Use anti-virus software. Be sure to keep it up-to-date and to scan for viruses daily.  See the ITS virus support webpage for details.   7. Use anti-spyware software. Keep your anti-spyware programs updated and scan your computer daily.  Do your best to avoid spyware by not clicking on suspicious links or popup windows.  See the ITS spyware/adware support webpage for details.   8. Protect your computer before heading home for breaks. Make sure you are up-to-date with your anti-virus software and operating system.  When home, be sure to practice careful internet browsing.   9. Back-up your important files. Save your important files in your SSS or ESS folder.  This ensures that your files will be available in the event of a hard drive crash or other unexpected event.(Windows/MacIntosh)   10. Turn off your computer when not in use. Turning off your computer is the safest thing to do when it is not in use.  It prevents hackers from gaining entry to your computer, it keeps your computer from overheating, and it saves energy to boot!
  • Policies - Access to Information Technology Resources Antivirus Policies Access to Information Technology Resources Eligibility Information Technology Resources (computer hardware, software, telephone systems, cable television, networks, services, data, and other information) are made available at Hamilton to support and facilitate the teaching, research and administrative functions of the College. Electronic resources include: Group I (electronic mail, listservs, personal calendar, portal, Blackboard course management system, network storage, campus ID card) Group II (Web Advisor) Group III (Login access to Datatel) Access to electronic resources for employees, students, spouses/partners, and alumni is enabled through username and password provided to individuals according to the following guidelines. Non-Faculty Employees are given access to Group I resources upon notification of hire. Access to Group III resources is by request from the Department Head. Non-Faculty employee access to all resources is removed at the end of business on the last date of employment.  As soon as an employee gives notice, he/she should enable a "vacation" (auto-responder) message to indicate his/her last date of employment and to provide correspondents with an alternate address to which they should address future College business.  Employees should also remove any personal e-mail or files from their accounts during this period.  Faculty are given access to Group I resources and Group II resources upon notification of hire. Access to Group III resources is by request by the Dean of Faculty. Faculty access to all resources is removed at the end of business three months after the last date of employment.    A request for a brief extension of e-mail privileges may be made to the Dean of Faculty. Upon request to the Dean of Faculty an emeritus faculty member can retain his/her Hamilton e-mail address for as long as desired. Students are given access to Group I and Group II resources upon making an acceptance deposit to the College. Students who work in administrative offices may be granted limited access to Group III resources. Student access to all resources is removed three months after withdrawal or graduation.   A request for a brief extension of e-mail privileges may be made to the Director, Help Desk and Training Services in ITS. Graduates are automatically eligible for access to the Hamilton alumni directory. As part of the directory, alumni have access to an e-mail forwarding service. Each alumnus can create a username@alumni.hamilton.edu which will automatically forward e-mail to an e-mail account they have with an Internet Service Provider (e.g. AOL). Information Technology Resources (computer hardware, software, telephone systems, cable television, networks, services, data, and other information) are made available at Hamilton to support and facilitate the teaching, research and administrative functions of the College. Access to these resources is provided to employees of the College (faculty, administration, staff, maintenance and operations) and enrolled students consistent with their responsibilities. E-mail accounts are continued for Hamilton alumni for three months after graduation, and may be extended by special request to the e-mail administrator. Other individuals, upon submission of a request, may be granted access to some, or all, of Hamilton's IT resources by the Vice President for Information Technology. Generally, such individuals will have some association with the College. The terms of access will be stated at the time access is granted. Under no circumstance may anyone use College IT resources for profit-making activities, in ways that are illegal (e.g. copyright violations), that threaten the College's tax-exempt or other status, or interfere with reasonable use by other members of the College community. Convention For User Names The standard Hamilton naming convention for access to electronic systems comprises the first initial of the first name, followed by (up to seven characters of) the last name. If duplicates occur, the middle initial is generally used to resolve ambiguity. Access in Residence Halls Residence hall connections are intended to provide students with access to telephone and cable television services, and the campus data network. One telephone, cable television, and data network connection is provided for each student. Network connections, wiring, equipment, or jacks may not be altered or extended beyond the location of their intended use. Students must provide their own telephones, televisions, computers, software, and Ethernet cards that meet minimum Hamilton standards. Information on current minimum standards and recommended configurations is available online. Network standards are updated annually. Any costs incurred to repair damages to a network, telephone, or cable television jack in a residence hall room will be divided equally, and billed to the students residing in that room. Management of Internet Bandwidth The campus network, including our connection to the Internet, is a critical shared resource for supporting the academic program. Uses of our Internet connection that are central to the academic/administrative mission of the college (e.g. access to Hamilton web, e-mail, and Blackboard Courseinfo servers) will receive higher priority during times when classes are in session, offices are open, and in the evenings when preparation takes place (i.e. critical times). Low priority uses, including recreational uses, are peripheral to our mission and will receive lower priority during critical times. Between the hours of 7 a.m. and 2 a.m. each day (critical times): With the exception of web traffic a fixed percentage of bandwidth is allocated between the residence halls and the Internet. Access to the Hamilton e-mail, web, and Blackboard Courseinfo servers from off-campus is the highest priority. Incoming or outgoing web traffic between the Internet and the campus network is the next highest priority. Peer-to-Peer Internet applications (applications for distributing videos, music, software, etc.) receive the lowest priority. Between the hours of 2 a.m. and 7 a.m. (non-critical times): There will be no restrictions on bandwidth. The quality and volume of our Internet traffic is regularly monitored to assure that critical applications are available to members of the community. Hamilton does not monitor the content of traffic on the network. It is the responsibility of each person using college resources, including the network, to do so in an ethical and legal manner. Particular attention should be given to observing copyright laws for digital materials. Personal Computers on the Network Internet addresses are provided dynamically through a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) system. In order to obtain a static Internet (TCP/IP) computer address the owner of the system must register the computer with ITS network services. The rules and regulations contained in this policy pertaining to electronic mail and Internet access are equally applicable to the use of personal machines for file sharing or as servers. If bandwidth or other problems occur, ITS reserves the right to discontinue access to the machine. Computers connected to the network may not be used as servers for private enterprises, commercial activity, or personal profit. Computers connected to the network may not be used to provide access to the Internet for anyone not formally affiliated with the College. If personal computers on the Hamilton network are used as servers, the administrator has the additional responsibility to respond to any use of the server that is in violation of these policies and procedures. Server administrators must take steps to prevent recurrence of such violations and report these violations to the Hamilton Network Administrator (hostmaster@hamilton.edu). ITS reserves the rights to disconnect any network port whose activity causes an adverse effect on the network or on any other user. Network connections may also be revoked in the case of malicious or inappropriate computing activity on the network. See Noncompliance and Sanctions for examples of these activities. ITS reserves the right to restrict access to the network during expansion, or for diagnostic and maintenance services. Every effort will be made to provide advance notification and to schedule such disruptions during times of minimum impact and traffic. Virus Protection Hamilton College requires all computers connected to the network to have up-to-date virus protection. Failure to do so will result in the loss of connectivity to the Hamilton College network until the situation is corrected. Sophos anti-virus software is provided free to all students. Other anti-virus products may be substituted for Sophos Anti-Virus as long as they are kept current. In addition, all attachments to e-mail sent to the Hamilton mail server are scanned for viruses. If an attachment is found to be infected it is deleted and a text file is attached to the e-mail message (called substitute.txt) informing the receiver that the attachment was infected with a virus. The receiver can then contact the sender to have the message retransmitted after the attachment has been cleaned of the virus. Windows Updates All computers running the Microsoft Windows operating system and connected to the Hamilton College network must be kept up-to-date with critical service updates from Microsoft. Failure to do so will result in the loss of connectivity to the Hamilton College network until the situation is corrected. Individuals wanting to request an exception to the Windows update policy must do so in writing to the Vice President for Information Technology. Network Connections in Departments All offices, laboratories, and classrooms on campus are wired for access to the network. If departments request additional network jacks, or if network connections need to be moved to different locations, the department should request this service through ITS. The department will be billed for charges resulting from moves, additions, and changes. Network connections, wiring, equipment, or jacks may not be altered or extended beyond the location of their intended use. Any costs incurred to repair damages to a network, telephone, or cable television jack in a department will be billed to that department. Dial-Up Connections For all campus users the primary access to Hamilton computing services is through the campus network. Dial-in access via modem is not provided.  
  • Sophos Home Edition on Mac OS X 10.4-10.7 for Students Antivirus Students Only As Macintosh becomes more popular, it is increasingly a target for an emerging group of viruses and spyware designed specifically for the Mac operating system.  It is in the best interests of Mac users to take action now to protect their systems.  This document explains how to download and install Sophos’ free Anti-Virus solution for student Mac users. Download Sophos Anti-Virus 1. Visit the Sophos Anti-Virus for Mac Home Edition page on the Sophos website: http://www.sophos.com/en-us/products/free-tools/sophos-antivirus-for-mac-home-edition.aspx 2. Click on the Download Now button:  3. When prompted, click the Save File button. 4. Select Desktop as the save location and then click the Save button.   Installing Sophos Anti-Virus 1. Double-click the savosx_72_he.dmg file that you just downloaded to the desktop.  It will mount and automatically open Sophos Anti-Virus Home Edition OS X 10.4 . 2. Double-click on Sophos Anti-Virus Home Edition.mpkg. 3. When prompted that “This package will run a program to determine if the software can be installed,” click the Continue button.  This will check your system for any possible conflicts that would prevent Sophos from installing. 4. If there are no conflicts, the Welcome Screen will appear.  Click Continue. 5. At the Software License Agreement screen, click Continue. 6. Click the Agree button. 7. At the Select a Destination screen, click on Macintosh HD (for most, this will be the only option) and then click Continue. 8. At the Sophos Anti-Virus Updates screen, click Continue. 9. At the Standard Install screen, click the Install button to proceed with the installation. 10. When prompted, enter your username and password for your Mac computer. 11. At the Completion screen, take a moment to read through the brief information on how to use Sophos Anti-Virus for Mac Home Edition.  Click Continue. 12. At the Installation was Successful screen, click Close. 13. You should now have a black Sophos shield icon in the Menu Bar at the upper right of your screen.   How Do I Use Sophos Anti-Virus for Mac Home Edition? Sophos runs in the background and scans files for threats whenever the files are opened.  If you want to perform a manual scan of all your files, click the black Sophos shield in the menu bar and select Scan Local Drives.  
  • Spyware and Adware Antivirus  Topics covered. What is spyware? How is spyware different from adware? Are cookies considered spyware? How to avoid spyware How to detect and remove spyware   What is spyware? Spyware is software that is installed on your computer without your permission. It often tags along with free software you have downloaded or comes from "infected" web sites and/or links. The most common source of spyware is file sharing software (Kazaa, Blubster, etc.). Even innocent free programs (e.g. Comet Cursor) will come with spyware. In fact, it is best to assume that if the software is free, it comes with spyware attached. Its purpose is to report your browsing habits (web sites you've visited) to the publisher of the spyware software. They use this information to present you with pop-ups when you are browsing the Web. Sometimes the information gathered is also used to send you spam. Spyware can interfere with your network connection, slow down the performance of your computer and prevent legitimate software (such as Internet Explorer) from working properly. Back to top How is spyware different from adware? Spyware and Adware are essentially the same thing. The primary difference is that adware is used to pop-up ads that are meant to be meaningful to you, whereas spyware may pop-up ads that are offensive or have nothing to do with your interests. Both are annoying and can overwhelm your browser with pop-ups. Adware typically does not insert itself into your computer operating system as thoroughly as spyware. Back to top Are cookies considered spyware? Cookies are used in a manner similar to adware and spyware. They report information about you back to the publisher of the cookie. Many, many web sites use cookies. Respectable sites, such as Amazon.com, use cookies responsibly. They only store information directly related to the use of their web pages. For example, it is used to suggest products based on your past purchases. Other sites gather more information than they should. Cookies can safely be deleted and are usually recreated when you revisit the site (sometimes you will have to login to the site before the cookie is reset). Internet Explorer includes a button in its "options" window that allows you to quickly remove all cookies. Back to top How to avoid spyware Do not click on banners that appear at the top of web pages even if they look like a fun game, they say you are a winner or they are going to help you correct a potential problem on your computer (your clock is wrong, you have spyware, etc.). Do not download free software. If you must use free software, be as selective as possible and only install that which is completely necessary. Use trustworthy web sites. Do not click on AIM or MSN profile links unless you are absolutely certain they are real. Ask your friend if they know the link is there before you click on it. Do not follow links in spam e-mail messages. They often take you to sites that install spyware on your computer. Music/file sharing is illegal. It is also a pipeline to spyware, viruses and hackers. Is it worth it? Back to top How to detect and remove spyware ITS is currently suggesting students use AVG Antivirus for Windows computers. Click here for installation instructions:  https://my.hamilton.edu/information-technology-services/resource-center/installing-avg-anti-virus. For Macintosh computers, the ITS recommends iAntivirus or Sophos Home Edition. Click here for installation instructions: http://my.hamilton.edu/information-technology-services/resource-center/sophos-home-edition-for-mac Removing spyware may sometimes disable the software with which it came.  In some cases the spyware cannot be removed until the free software it came with is also removed. Back to top
  • Virus Protection at Hamilton College Antivirus Policy Note: Hamilton College requires all existing and all incoming students to install Anti-Virus software on their personal computers by the end of the second week of classes each semester. Failure to do so can result in the loss of connectivity to the Hamilton College network until up-to-date Anti-virus software is installed. Anti-virus software (AVG for Windows and Sophos &  iAntivirus for Macintosh) is provided free to all students. Other anti-virus products may be substituted for Hamilton supported Anti-Virus as long as they are kept current. Student Anti-virus Installation Instructions: (updated 12/5/2011) AVG for Windows Sophos Home Edition or iAntivirus for Mac (ITS recommended for Students only) The ITS Help Desk at x4181 will provide full support for the above Anti-virus software starting 5/13/2011. Employee Anti-virus Installation Instructions: (updated 2/23/2011) Macintosh Instructions (OS 10.4 & higher) (Employees) Windows XP/Vista/7 Instructions (off-campus) (Employees) If you have changed your Hamilton password and use Sophos on your home computer please use the following documenation to allow Sophos to update on your computer. How to change your password in Sophos (Windows & Mac) Sophos Users Manual Sophos  - Windows (Endpoint Security) Sophos  - Mac Sophos Anti-virus is free to employees for use on college-owned computers and for use on their home computers (for as long as they are employed by the college). Please be advised that this is a licensed software product. You will be asked to provide proper identification before you are allowed to obtain this software. If you prefer to have ITS assist you in installing Sophos on your office computer, please contact the ITS Help Desk at x4181.
Apple Garage Band
  • Creating a Podcast with GarageBand Apple Garage Band Beginning a New Podcast 1. Launch GarageBand from the Applications folder. 2. Select New Project on the left, then double-click on Podcast. 3. You will then see a box asking you for the name and location of your podcast project file. Save your file to the Scratch Disk if one is available. Otherwise, save your file to the Desktop. When you are finished working, copy this project file to a safe location, preferably to a Hamilton College file server (MSS or SSS). The other settings can be left alone. 4. The GarageBand window will be displayed. If the Media Browser does not appear on the side, click the Media Browser button to display it. 5. To record audio, you must locate a Plantronics Headset or AK5370 microphone or other device and configure the computer and GarageBand to recognize the hardware. a. Click the Apple icon in the upper left hand of the screen and select System Preferences. b. Click on the Sound icon, and then select the Input tab. c. From this menu, select Plantronics Headset (or other device) and then set your volume to about ¾ of maximum. 6. After setting OSX sound preferences, make sure GarageBand is also configured correctly. a. Go to GarageBand menu in the upper left hand corner of the screen and select Preferences from the menu. b. Select the Audio/MIDI icon. Then select Plantronics Headset (or other device) in the Audio Input menu.   Recording Tracks 1. Now you are ready to begin recording your podcast. Click on the Male or Female Voice Track depending on the narrator’s gender. 2. Click the red Record icon and begin to speak into the microphone. Notice that audio waveforms begin appearing in the track. a. You want to make sure that your waveform peaks reach about 2/3 of the way up the track. If it doesn’t, edit the sound input levels in System Preferences. Adding Sounds 1. Once you have recorded your narration, you can add background music, sound effects or jingles. a. Click on the Jingles track on the left and then click on the Loop Browser icon. b. In the Loop View (on the right) you can select from a number of pre-made audio recordings and add them to your Podcast simply by dragging them onto the Jingles or Radio Sounds track. You can also drag the audio below all the tracks to create a new track. c. To bring in a track from an outside source it is recommended that you first import it into an iTunes library and then drag it onto a track, but you may also drag it from your desktop onto a track in GarageBand. d. You may wish to use ducking on your music tracks while your narration is playing. This will cause the music volume to decrease while the narration track plays. To have a track become quieter when another track is played, select the blue Down arrow and to have it play continuously at the specified volume, click the yellow Up arrow. e. To add a new track, go to Track-New Track. f. To delete a track, click on it and go to Track-Delete Track. g. To split a clip, drag the playhead to the desired position on the track and select Edit- Split. Perform two splits to select a portion of audio to remove. h. To delete a portion of audio on a track but not the track itself, click on the portion and then press backspace (labeled Delete) on the keyboard. i. To have the volume fade out at the end of your podcast, go to Track-Show Master Track. You will see a track with a purple line running through it. Click on the line once to create an anchor point and click on it a second time and pull it down to create a volume fade. Adding Photos 1. Once you have finished all your audio editing, you are ready to enhance your Podcast by adding photos. a. Click on the Podcast Track. b. Click the Track Editor icon next to the Loop Browser icon to show the episode artwork area. c. Drag an image from the photos section of the media browser into the Episode Artwork area. This image will appear at the beginning of the podcast and in any gaps between chapters. d. Now make chapter markers so that you can load different pictures to different sections of your Podcast. To do this, put the playhead where you want the picture to start, and click Add Marker. e. As you make chapters, they will appear in the field to the right of the Add Marker icon. f. It is recommended that photos first be imported into an iPhoto library, but they can also be dragged in from the Desktop to their respective chapters. g. You can also rename the chapters by clicking on the Chapter Title and typing in the appropriate text. Sharing 1. You are now ready to share your Podcast. a. Go to Share-Send Podcast to iTunes. This will create an m4a file of your Podcast in iTunes. You also have the option of sending it to iWeb, which will add your podcast to a web page. b. To convert it in iTunes to an MP3, go to iTunes-Preferences-Advanced. Select MP3 Encoder from the Import Using field. c. Now right or control-click on your Podcast in iTunes and select convert selection to MP3.  
  • Creating Music with Apple Loops in GarageBand Apple Garage Band Quick and Easy Music Creation    
Apple Safari
  • Adding a Website to Your Favorites or Bookmarks Bar Apple Safari If you find yourself frequently visiting the same web site (e.g. Google) you can add it to your Favorites bar so that it is only a click away when you need it.  This is also a recommended alternative to installing web site “toolbars”, such as those offered by Google or Yahoo.  Many site-specific toolbars also come with spyware and adware, neither of which is desirable.  NOTE:  This document assumes you are using Internet Explorer on a Windows computer. Creating a link 1. Open Internet Explorer in your usual manner. 2. Navigate to the web site you want to add to your links bar (e.g. Google.com)   3. Click on the Google icon and drag it onto the “links” bar that (usually) appears below the Address bar.                                                                                                     4. Now, when you click on the icon you added to the links bar, it will take you quickly to that site.  Editing the name of the link Sometimes the site name is so long that it may take up a lot of room on your links bar.  You can edit the name as it appears on the links bar by doing the following. 1. Click on Favorites and then select Organize Favorites (shown at right).                                 2. Click on Links (shown at left).     4. Click on the site you’ve added (in this example, Google, shown at right) 5. Click on Rename.                                                                               6. Type the name for the site as you want it to appear in your links bar then click on Close.          7. You may find that after you click on Close your new site (e.g. Google) might not appear in the desired position in the links bar.  You can reposition it within the links bar by clicking on the icon for the site and dragging it to a different location.   For questions or comments regarding this document, please e-mail helpdesk@hamilton.edu.  
  • Clearing Your Cache and Cookies Apple Safari If your computer is not performing at its usual rate when browsing web pages (e.g. it's "slow" or "hangs" sporadically), the first thing you want to do is clear your cache and cookies. Every web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer, Mozilla Firefox, Safari, etc.) caches visited websites to reduce bandwidtch usage and server load. This allows your web browser display pages faster by loading them from the cache stored on your hard drive. However, sometimes the cache can take up disk space and result in slower browser performing. Cookies are used by websites to store informtion about a particular activity. Clearing your cache and cookies will occasically allow the browser to perform faster and free up space on your computer's local hard drive. To learn how to clear your cache and cookies in a particular browser, click below: http://www.google.com/support/accounts/bin/answer.py?answer=32050
  • Comparison of Browser Interfaces Apple Safari   Browsing       Browser History Accessing Browser History       Browser History Interface   Bookmarks Adding a Bookmark     Accessing Bookmarks   Trust Certificates      
Apple iPhoto
  • Creating a Slideshow in iPhoto '11 Apple iPhoto Table of Contents Adding Photos Editing Photos Working with Albums Creating a Slideshow Exporting the Slideshow to Quicktime Adding Photos To add photos to the iPhoto Library, click and drag the photo files from the Finder into the iPhoto window. You can drag single photo files, folder(s,) or entire volumes. Dragging a folder to iPhoto   iPhoto Library with photos in it:   Editing Photos To go into editing mode, double-click a photo, and then click the Edit button at the bottom. The edit view will appear. The Edit Toolbar Rotate – Each click of rotate turns the picture 90°. By default, it turns the image counterclockwise. Enhance – Click to operate “One-Click Enhance.” Fix Red-Eye – Red Eye reduction tool. Straighten – A tool to straighten an image by zooming in slightly while rotating the image a maximum of 10 degrees to the left or right. Crop – Crops out a selected area.         Effects – Brings up the Effects window. Here you can make the image black and white, sepia toned, and make other adjustments. Adjust - Brings up a window of color sliders to adjust the color levels in the photo           Click "Done" when finished editing. Working with Albums To create a new album either select “New Album” from the File menu, or click the Plus symbol on the lower left hand corner of the screen.     To add photos to an album, select the desired photos out of the photo library, and click and drag them to the album icon. To delete a photo from a library, click on the photo, and then hit delete on the keyboard. Alternatively, you can click and drag the photo over to the Trash under Recent on the left.   Creating a Slideshow   To create a new slideshow, create an album, and then select Slideshow from the lower icon bar menu. Photos can be added and deleted from slideshows the same as an album.   The Slideshow Toolbar When you select the Slideshow button, a preview of the slideshow using the program defaults will appear and begin running on the screen. Moving your mouse down to the bottom of the screen brings up your main menu for slideshow editing.   Left Arrow – Backtracks the slideshow to the previous image. Pause Button – Pauses the slideshow. Right Arrow – Advances through the slideshow to the next image. Theme Browser – The two photos on top of each other icon. This allows the user to browse through the various themes built into the iPhoto ’09 library. Music Browser – The musical note icon. This allows the user to browse through the available background music, or to select their own. Settings Tool – Allows the user to adjust slideshow settings. Exit – Returns the user to the iPhoto main page. Theme Browser   Music Browser   Settings Tool       Exporting the Slideshow to QuickTime To export the album as a QuickTime movie, select export from the File menu. Switch to the QuickTime menu, then click Export. Choose a location to save the file to, and then click OK. Export Movie Menu Export Dialog Box    
Audiovisual (AV)
  • Audiovisual Services (AV) Audiovisual (AV) Audiovisual Services   AV Services Personnel Support Services Offered Requesting Films and Videotapes Media Use and Rental Policies Available Equipment Videotaping & Streaming Services Video and Audio Copying Services Duplication Policy and Prices Hamilton College's overall Copyright Policy Copyright Policy (AV topics)   Mission Statement The Audiovisual Services Team of the Information Technology Services department provides quality service and support to the Hamilton College Community for their teaching and multimedia presentation needs. AV Services Personnel The Audiovisual Classroom Services Team is located in Burke Library, Room 363 (within the ITS office area). Tim Hicks Director 315-859-4790 (To be Announced) Staff Assistant/ Film Specialist 315-859-4120 Graham Espe  Multimedia Systems Technician 315-859-4793 Forrest Warner Multimedia Systems Technician 315-859-4076   Support Services Offered Presentation support (sound reinforcement and data projection). Video recording or streaming of campus events (e.g. performances, lectures, and sporting events). Rental of films and DVDs for academic and non-academic use. Maintenance and support of technology enhanced (TE) classrooms. Classroom delivery of projection, video and audio equipment. Loaning of various types of audiovisual equipment. Production work including duplications, editing and off-air recordings. Video conference facilities.   To schedule Audiovisual services, use the R25 room reservation system if applicable. In the Event Options section, check the box for "require A/V support," then write details of your needs in the Comments box.  If R25 is not appropriate for your situation,  or to request equipment loans, please contact the AV Coordinator at 315-859-4120. Equipment requests should be made at least one week in advance so student workers and delivery can be scheduled. To rent movies, please contact the Audiovisual Film Specialist, 315-859-4120. Movie requests should be made 2 to 4 weeks in advance, to allow time for research and ordering. For more information about Audiovisual Classroom Services, please contact the Audiovisual Department Office, 315-859-4120. Requesting films and Videos The Burke Library and the Media Library have materials for researching videos and films available for educational purposes. Contact a Reference Librarian using the Ask a Librarian Form, or call 315-859-4735. To show to your class a DVD or videotape from the Media Library, you must check out the movie and show it yourself. Contact Linda Brennan at 315-859-4923 for information about the media collection and borrowing items. In virtually all classrooms, the AV equipment is operated via a touchscreen control. If you need help getting started, contact AV Services (x4120) to schedule a brief personal training session in your classroom. Audiovisual Services will provide a projectionist if the media item (rented or from our library) is a 16mm film or another unusual format. To request a projectionist, send a written or e-mail request to the Audiovisual Film Specialist (x4120), at least two weeks in advance. Please include the following information when requesting movie rentals: SHOW DATE(S) SHOW TIME: Indicate the start time(s) and whether you plan to show a film in the latter part of a class. LOCATION: If you plan to show media materials at a time or place different from the assigned class period or location you must make room reservations with the Registrar. TITLE: Include the full title, plus an English translation of any foreign title. Other helpful information could include director, actors, country and year, especially if there has been more than one production of the same title. FORMAT: Indicate the format (video, DVD, 16 mm film), only if one type is preferred over another. SOURCE: If you are aware of a source, please provide it. PUBLIC PERFORMANCE: Will the screening be only for the students in your class, or do you plan to advertise it or invite other viewers? Media Use and Rental Policies Most materials from the Media Library are licensed only for classroom-use showings, and cannot be advertised. A public performance license can be purchased for an open showing in many cases, with at least two weeks' advance notice. The Audiovisual Film Specialist will help you with licensing questions. Movies available on videotape or DVD from the Media Library will not be rented in another format unless the instructor can show the necessity of using the other format. The AV Department's film rental budget supports curricular needs and is to be used for classroom-use rentals only. Any academic open showings (public performace with advertisement) and all entertainment showings will require public performance licensing. The AV Film Specialist will order the rental movie and/or licensing for you, but it must be funded by the requester's department or organization. No rented materials can be put on reserve in the Media Library. For additional information about copyright compliance in the use of library materials and rented media, please read the Audiovisual Copyright Policy.    Available Equipment Contact Audiovisual Services one to two weeks in advance to request audiovisual equipment. Many of these items may be borrowed and operated by the requester. Upon request, AV will deliver equipment or provide instruction to those unfamiliar with the equipment. Some types of equipment will require set-up and operation by an AV technician.   Projection Equipment Data/ Video Projector Document Camera 16mm Projection Projection Screen  Video Equipment Camcorder, mini-DV  DVD/VHS Player Laserdisc Player   Audio Equipment Sound Systems, Various  Digital Audio Recorder Compact Disc/Audiotape Boom Box Miscellaneous Equipment Easel  Laser Pointer PowerPoint remote control (Kensington) Slide Projector (35mm)   Videotaping and Streaming Services Location Videotaping Description of Service: Videotaping of classes, lectures, athletic and special events at specified locations on campus. Operation: In most cases, AV provides operators. Restrictions: Written permission to videotape lecturers and performers (including persons affiliated with Hamilton College) must be obtained and given to the AV Department prior to the start of videotaping. Written permission from the publisher is required in order to videotape theater productions and music performances of copyrighted scripts or scores. A printable permission form for a single individual is available or blank forms can be requested from the AV office. If a faculty member wants to arrange for his class to be videotaped, please use the group form. For more information refer to Copyright Policy, Video Recording of Campus Events and Seeking Permission to Use Copyrighted Materials. Disposition of video: The videotapes or DVDs made are usually sent to the requester via campus mail within a week or so after the event. Final disposition of the recording is the responsibility of the requester.  Charges: There is no cost to the original requester for the services of a student cameraperson, or for the original recording (a mini-DV tape), or for the first three (3) copies we make for you onto a medium of your choice (usually DVD). Additional copies made for the original requester will be billed at our current rates for the cost of materials and labor. All copies made for individuals or departments other than the original requester will be billed. For information about pricing and methods of payment, please see our Duplication Policy. Or call the AV Services office at x4120. Video and Audio Copying Services   DVD Duplicating   Availability of Service: DVD duplicating service is available. Limited services availabe for copying from older formats. Call for information.  Restrictions: The AV Department reserves the right to refuse any request which constitutes copyright infringement. Charges: The cost of materials and labor for copies will be charged to a college department. For more information about our duplication policies. prices, and available methods of payment, please see our Duplication Policy. Or contact the AV Services office at x4076.   CD Duplicating Availability: Audio duplicating of materials for classroom use. Restrictions: The AV Department reserves the right to refuse any request that may constitute copyright infringement. Charges: The cost of materials and labor for copies will be charged to a college department. For more information about our duplication policies, prices and available methods of payment, please see our Duplication Policy. Or contact the AV Services office at x4076.
  • Audiovisual Services Copyright Information Audiovisual (AV) Audiovisual Services Copyright Policy Why Care About Copyright? Copyright Defined Fair Use Guidelines for Educators Penalties for Infringement AV Scheduling Reminders References Hamilton College's Overall Copyright Policy Displaying Copyrighted Media on Campus Video Recording of Campus Events AV Production Work Seeking Permission to Use Copyrighted Materials Why Care about Copyright? Please take a moment to review this brief document. This is the Hamilton College Audiovisual Department's interpretation of Federal Copyright Law, based on careful review of the law itself and the Fair Use guidelines. It is by no means the only interpretation. It is, however, what we believe is most ethical and appropriate for this campus. It is our hope that this will help you understand and adhere to the provisions of federal copyright law. Compliance with the federal copyright law and with this policy is the responsibility of every member of the faculty, staff, administration, and student body, and we will all share in the liability if a violation occurs. Each of us should, therefore, take a personal interest in becoming informed about how copyright law affects our work at Hamilton College. Copyright law is complicated and its interpretation is sometimes controversial. This guide has been prepared in an effort to help us all better understand what is allowable by law, and why some audiovisual services that are technically possible may be restricted. We will always remain open to receiving any new information on or interpretation of copyright law. Your support and cooperation is greatly appreciated. If you have questions or concerns about this policy, please contact Tim Hicks, x4790. General Information - Copyright Copyright grants to the author or originator the sole and exclusive privilege of multiplying copies of literary or artistic productions and publishing and selling them. Copyright protection exists for original works fixed in any tangible medium of expression, including: literary works; musical works, including any accompanying words; dramatic works, including any accompanying music; pantomimes and choreographic work; pictorial, graphic, and sculpture work; motion pictures and other audiovisual works; sound recordings. Fair Use Many provisions of the law affect educational uses of copyrighted materials but the most generally applicable is Section 107 - Limitations on Exclusive Rights: Fair Use. Under the law, it is fair use to reproduce copyrighted materials for purposes of criticism, comment, news reporting, teaching, scholarship, or research. Four criteria will be applied in judging whether or not there has been an infringement: The purpose and character of the use; The nature of the copyrighted work; The amount and substantiality of the portion being used; The effect on the potential market for or value of the work. The four criteria for determining fair use listed above are very general. To aid in the interpretation of Fair Use criteria, interested groups of publishers and users have agreed on more specific guidelines, including: Guidelines and fair use in photocopying of copyrighted print materials for educational purposes. Guidelines and fair use of copyrighted musical works in education. Guidelines for photocopying for interlibrary loans by libraries and archives. These guidelines were not written into the law, but they are accepted and used in interpreting the provisions of copyright law. An area left without specific guidelines at this time is audiovisual media. Representatives of copyright owners and users of audiovisual media have agreed that the general principles of fair use can apply to audiovisual media. Penalties and Infringement Substantial penalties are provided for infringement of a copyright: An injunction to stop the infringement is most likely to be the first action. Payment of actual damages for financial loss suffered by the copyright owner may be required. Statutory damages, for which no actual damages need be proved, may be assessed. If the court determines there is an infringement, it must award between $500 and $20,000. An exception to the statutory damages is made in the case of teachers, provided the teacher believed and had reasonable grounds to believe that it was fair use. In this case the teacher may be found guilty but the damages do not have to be paid. This gives the teachers some special consideration under the law, but it also requires that they be thoroughly familiar with what might be considered reasonable fair use practices. AV Scheduling Reminders It is the responsibility of the party requesting services, not the AV department, to secure written permission in advance for videotaping, or video or audio production. The AV department asks that requests for recording services be placed at least one to two weeks in advance to Audiovisual Services, x4120. The AV department does not reserve classroom or auditorium space. References This copyright policy (1996-2010) was prepared with information gathered from the following sources: The Official Fair-Use Guidelines, Fourth Edition, Copyright Information Services, Eugene, Oregon, 1985. The Copyright Directory: 1990-91, Copyright Information Services, Friday Harbor, WA, 1990. Dr. Charles Vlcek, Copyright Policy Development, Second printing, Copyright Information Services, Friday Harbor, WA, 1988. Ruth H. Dukelow, The Library Copyright Guide, Association for Educational Communications and Technology, Copyright Information Services, Washington, DC, 1992. Esther R. Sinofsky, Off-Air Videotaping in Education, R.R. Bowker Company, New York and London, 1984. Jerome K. Miller and others, Video Copyright Permissions, Copyright Information Services, Friday Harbor, WA, 1989.   Return to Audiovisual Services Home
  • Audiovisual Services Copyright, Displaying Media Audiovisual (AV)   Audiovisual Services Displaying Copyrighted Media on Campus   Rented Films and Videos Media Library Materials Music Library Materials Programs Recorded Off-Air Faculty-Owned Videos Use of Media by Guest Lecturers Rented Films and Videos Media materials are rented, by contract, for a specific occasion. If a film is to be open to more than just the students in a class, it must be rented for an "open showing" which allows for on-campus advertising and an audience larger than a class of students. If a student will not be able to attend the scheduled showing, and you want to schedule a second showing, that must be arranged before the rental is ordered and made a part of the film or video rental contract. Many companies charge an extra fee to show a film or video a second time, even if it's for a single student from the original class. Rented materials cannot be placed on reserve at the Media Library. Rented materials cannot be shown in the Media Library for a student who may miss the original showing. The additional showing in a classroom must be scheduled through the AV office and added to the rental contract. College facilities and equipment cannot be used to show media that have not been legally obtained for classroom or public showings. Videos that you have rented from a local video store such as Blockbuster do not constitute legally obtained copies for open showings. It is, however, permissible to use these videos for classroom showings. Media Library Materials Films and videos owned by the Media Library are generally purchased for classroom use only. These media cannot be used for a public showing and therefore cannot be advertised, even to the campus community. Showings of these media cannot be opened to students outside your class. In some cases, you can purchase a public performance license that will allow you to advertise a showing of a library item. Contact the AV Film Specialist for assistance.  Music Library Materials The Music Library collection is a closed collection. Materials cannot be signed out without express consent of the Music Library Coordinator. If the Music Library Coordinator grants permission and the material you want constitutes less than 10% o the total work, a CD copy can be made for you by either the Music Library or the AV Department.   Programs Recorded Off-Air Broadcast programs may be taped off-air only by nonprofit educational institutions, for use in instruction and not for entertainment. A broadcast may be recorded and retained by the educational institution for a period of 45 calendar days after the recording date. At the end of that period, the recording must be erased. Off-air recordings may be used once by a teacher, and can be repeated once for instructional reinforcement. The showing must be in a classroom, and must take place within the first 10 consecutive school days. A teacher must request a program be recorded. Programs cannot be recorded by the AV Department in anticipation of a request. After the first 10 consecutive school days a tape may be used by a teacher only to review and determine whether or not to purchase the program. All copies of off-air recordings must include the copyright notices displayed on the program.   Faculty-Owned Videos Videos purchased by you or by your department may be used by you in your classroom, but cannot be used for an open showing to students outside your class and cannot be advertised on campus. Videos you have taped off-air at your home cannot be shown in the classroom. AV can make an off-air tape at your request, or it may be possible to rent or purchase a program through appropriate channels. Use of Media by Guest Lecturers If a guest artist or lecturer brings audiovisual materials (film or video) for use in their program, we need to know that they have permission to use those items. We have a form for them to sign declaring such. Return to Menu of Copyright Topics Return to Audiovisual Services Home  
  • Audiovisual Services Copyright, Production Work Audiovisual (AV) Audiovisual Services   AV Production Work   EXISTING VIDEO FOOTAGE Existing copyrighted video footage can be incorporated into a video being produced by a student for a class project or by a faculty member for curriculum-based instruction if the borrowed material does not constitute more than 10% o the original, or 3 minutes, whichever is less, nor does it comprise the majority of the finished product. The opening screen of the project and any accompanying print material must include a notice that certain materials have been used under the fair use exemption of the U.S. Copyright Law.   EXISTING COPYRIGHTED MUSIC Existing music (recorded music, lyrics, or music videos) can be incorporated into a student or faculty multimedia project if the borrowed material does not constitute more than 10% o the original, or 30 seconds, whichever is less. Longer portions of music can be used only if a "video synchronization license" is bought from the music publisher or owner of the copyright.   COPYING VIDEO AND AUDIO RECORDINGS No media carrying a copyright will be duplicated by the AV department without express, written consent from the publisher or copyright owner. Personal projects should first be taken to the Multimedia Presentation Center (Information Commons) in the Library, where you can work on your project yourself.   Return to Menu of Copyright Topics Return to Audiovisual Services Home  
  • Audiovisual Services Copyright, Seek Permission Audiovisual (AV) Audiovisual Services   Seeking Permission to Use Copyrighted Materials Educators should be aware that it may be possible to make use of copyrighted materials beyond what's provided under fair use, if permission is granted first. There may or may not be a charge, and permission may be refused, but it never hurts to ask. First, determine ownership of the work. Contact the library using the Ask a Librarian Form or call x4735 and a librarian will be able to help in locating addresses of publishers. Next send a detailed letter of request, including the following: Title and author's/originator's name Editor and edition (if a print material) Exact material to be used, including amount, page numbers, chapters and if possible a photocopy of the material, or other appropriate quantitative description Number of copies to be made Purpose for the duplicated materials Form or method of distribution Whether or not the material is to be sold Type of reproduction (photocopy, slide, videotape, etc.)   You might also do the following: Leave blank spaces (possibly in the form of a checklist) at the end for the publisher to fill in whether or not permission is granted, conditions, authorized signature and date. Make three copies - one for your files and two to send to the publisher. One of these is to be returned to you with the publisher's decision indicated. Include a self-addressed, stamped return envelope. Don't ask for a blanket permission - in most cases it cannot be granted. Send by registered mail when response is crucial, such as for publications that will be sold or printed for distribution.   Return to Menu of Copyright Topics Return to Audiovisual Services Home  
  • Audiovisual Services Copyright, Video Recording Audiovisual (AV) Audiovisual Services   Video Recording of Campus Events   Department and Student Performances Department or student productions can be videotaped if the following criteria are met: If the presentation is an original work by a faculty member or student, and they sign a video recording permission form provided by AV Services. If the presentation is a copyrighted script and written permission is obtained in advance from the publisher or owner of the copyright. Some works which one might believe to be in the public domain may still carry a copyright for translation, stage direction or other modifications, and written permission is still necessary. If the presentation involves copyrighted music (such as a dance concert) and written permission is obtained from the music publisher or owner of the copyright. For information on obtaining permission from a publisher or copyright owner, see Seeking Permission to Use Copyrighted Materials.   Lecturers Lectures or performances presented by guests to the campus will be recorded if the guest signs a permission form, provided by AV Services, prior to the lecture or performance taking place. Permission must also be obtained from members of the Hamilton community (employees, students, alumni, trustees). By signing this video permission form, a speaker or performer is also certifying that any audiovisual materials (movie, PowerPoint, web page) are their own work or that they have obtained proper copyright clearances for displaying them.   Sporting Events According to the rules of NESCAC and other athletic leagues in which Hamilton varsity teams compete, there are no restrictions placed on sporting events. A request must be placed prior to a game and must come from a member of the coaching staff. Return to Menu of Copyright Topics Return to Audiovisual Services Home  
  • Audiovisual Services Duplication Policy Audiovisual (AV) Audiovisual Services   Duplication Policy Charges for Duplication Services   AVS does not accept cash or Transfer of Funds (paper) forms.   AVS will ask requesters for an account number. We submit billings monthly through the Business Office. If you have questions about this method of payment, please contact Tim Hicks or Forrest Warner.   Students must pay for their copies in advance by writing a check, payable to Trustees of Hamilton College.   Billing Policies   For a new academic event that AVS is recording for you, up to 3 copies will be provided to the original requesting department at no charge. Any copies above and beyond these 3 copies will be charged at the rates below. Copies made for additional requesters will be billed at the rates below. The first copy of a student's senior project will be given at no charge. All additional requests will be charged at the rates below.  For media which must be shipped, a minimum $5.00 shipping and handling fee will be added.  Prices for Copies   Type of copy Any number of copies, each Sets in multiple-disc cases DVD or CD w/ case $3.00 Calculated on an individual basis Mini-DV tape, 80min. 10.00 -     Mastering, Editing and Turnaround Time   Duplication (a straight copy made by AVS with no editing work involved) 1-10 copies take 2-3 working days. 10-50 copies 3-5 working days. 50 copies 5-10 working days. Mastering footage (anything that must be edited to another format) 5-10 working days. Major projects (dance performances, theater production, multiple camera events) requiring editing work may take 3 to 4 weeks to complete. Please Note   No media carrying a Copyright will be duplicated by AVS. AVS will copy from VHS, DVD, CD, and/or digital formats. AVS no longer provides duplication service for personal work. To purchase blank media, go to the College Store or Staples, etc. Return to Audiovisual Services home
  • Configuring Computer for Skype Audiovisual (AV) Other Videoconferencing Documents Create a High-Quality Videoconference Videoconferencing for Students Videoconferencing for Employees
  • Create a High-Quality Videoconference Audiovisual (AV) Environment Optimization Regardless which videoconferencing solution is chosen for the communication, it will be important to prepare the location where your call will take place so as to realize the most optimal, standard experience for all involved parties. General Considerations Regardless of the conversation type, if the communication is high-risk/high-value, at least one test should be performed with all participants before the actual conversation. Remember that accidents can happen: pets can meander into the conversation and voice their opinions, cell phones have the potential of ringing, and items can fall and clatter. While all participants should attempt to prepare for these eventualities, it is best to just accept that they are a part of the conversation, a normative experience, and therefore look past them. Remember that participants within the domain of the webcam and the microphone are involved in the videoconference: anything uttered or any act performed within range of either device will be transmitted to all participants. It behooves everyone to be aware (by dint of the Preview available on all computers/software) of what will be seen and heard before the videoconference begins. As the character Doctor Emmett Brown opined in the movie Back to the Future, "no wonder your president has to be an actor, [they] have to look good on television." Lighting Proper lighting is an essential ingredient for a successful, high-quality videoconference. "A webcam isn't the most flattering piece of technology," according to Stephen Winzenburg in an article for the Winter/Spring 2012 edition of the Chronicle of Higher Education, "[it can] make you appear gaunt, overweight, beady eyed, or narcoleptic. And often you look all those things at the same time." To ensure that all participants see each other in the best possible light, everyone should: Ensure your environment is well-lit--turn on as many lights as possible; Be mindful of such issues as camera angle, background, and any other light sources that might affect the conversation; A room with a window might be a nice place to have a chat, but the sun streaming in can wreak havoc on the quality of the conversation; If you must have a conversation in a room with a window, be sure to test your setup around the same time you anticipate having the conversation to ensure a uniform experience; Test, test, test, test, test: almost all software and computers have the ability to provide participants with a preview and this preview is what other participants will actually see--make sure the contents of the preview are what you want the other participants to see.  If a high-quality conversation is desired, it may behoove participants to purchase a dedicated webcam. ITS has enjoyed success with devices like the Microsoft LifeCam HD-6000. Sound Problems with sound are reliable sources of videoconferencing woes. In addition to the ambient noise issue covered in the "Location" section, there are other potential problems one should be aware of: Echo/Feedback A problem arises whenever a sound input is colocated with a sound output: If you put a microphone IN FRONT of a speaker, a positive feedback loop will be generated, i.e. loud, screechy, piercing sound that is painful. Be sure either to place the speaker far away from the microphone, wear headphones to ameliorate the problem, or invest in a microphone with integrate anti-feedback technology. Most laptops, all-in-one desktops (e.g. the iMac), and smartphones have built-in webcameras, microphones, and speakers. While they are sometimes configured to interoperate without generated feedback, one cannot rely on them working perfectly, especially for high-value conversations. All participants are STRONGLY encouraged to wear headphones to eliminate echoing/feedback. Configuration The peripherals required to perform a videoconference interoperate well, but are susceptible to problems.  If participants are unable to hear each other, see each other, or connect, there may be a problem with the configuration of the peripherals, the software for the chat (e.g. Skype, Google Talk), or the drivers that the computer uses to communicate with the devices. While easier with the built-in microphone, webcam, speaker setup, problems can plague those setups. ITS strongly recommends testing the full setup before any videoconference. If problems are identified before the actual conversation, chances are better that they can be troubleshooted and resolved without conflicting with the actual conversation. Accessibility Issues Hearing Aids/Lipreaders All communications conducted using these solutions will be affected to varying degrees by synchronicity issues. For example: participants may notice that mouths move independently of the sound they generate. While this is becoming a normative experience, it can be jarring, especially for those who need to read lips to understand what is being said. Proper balancing of audio is also key to ensure that participants whose hearing is impaired can participate equally in the conversation
. Location Through the miracle of modern technology, these conversations can now take place at any time and in any location, e.g. cafés, libraries, street corners, dorm rooms, hospitals, vel sim. Just because they can take place in every location does not necessarily mean they ought to take place in every location. Both parties should consider: The ambient noise in their respective environments--loud environs equals bad conversations; The people whom they might affect with the conversation--not everyone needs to be privy to the conversation; The speed of the internet conections at the locations--a low-speed DSL connection will not create a good videoconferencing experience (You can test your bandwidth here.)
  • Videoconferencing Guide Audiovisual (AV) Solutions NOTE: Please click the name of the solution to select it. Also, please hover over links in the table for more information. Scenarios Google Talk Skype OoVoo ITS Videochat Cart Person-to-PersoIf your computer does not have a webcam or microphone, ITS recommends you purchase a Logitech HD Pro Webcam C920. ITS maintains a small pool of high-quality external webcams with integrated microphones that EMPLOYEES may check out. Please contact the ITS Help Desk (helpdesk@hamilton.edu, x4181) for reservation information.n Communication ✓ ✓ ✓   Guest SpeakerIf you wish to use a larger display or projector for your conversation, the Hamilton Resource Calendar can help you find an appropriate room on campus for your conversation. Rooms equipped with LCD screens are especially suitable. Audiovisual Services (avs@hamilton.edu, x4120) can offer advice on suitable locations. ✓ ✓     Multi-person Conversations   (!Free: 25 audio 2 video For-Fee Features: 25 Audio 10 Video) ✓12 or fewer participants.   High-Quality, High-Risk ConversationsSolution for EMPLOYEES only. Students who need an extremely high quality video conversation should contact the Career Center (x4346.)       ✓ Share Computer Screen   (!)Available for a fee. Try http://join.me (!)Available for a fee. Try http://join.me    Maximum Number of Participants 2 audio or video Available for a fee.25 Audio 2 Video/25 VideoFor a fee. 12 Audio/Video   Available Resources If you wish to videoconference via a larger display or projector, the Hamilton Resource Calendar can help you find an appropriate room on campus for your conversation. Rooms equipped with LCD screens are especially suitable. Audiovisual Services (avs@hamilton.edu, x4120) can offer advice on locations. If your computer does not have a webcam or microphone, ITS maintains a small pool of high-quality external webcams with integrated microphones that may be checked out by Staff and Faculty for videoconferences. Please contact the ITS Help Desk (helpdesk@hamilton.edu, x4181) for reservation information. Should you wish to purchase your own webcam/microphone unit, ITS recommends you purchase the Logitech HD Pro Webcam C920. If you intend to use your own laptop for the videoconference, please note that you may need an adaptor to connect it to the screens or projectors in various rooms on campus. If needed and based on availability, Audiovisual Services (avs@hamilton.edu, x4120) can provide Staff and Faculty with an adaptor to connect your computer. Please also have a look at our "Create a High-Quality Videoconference Guide" to make your call the highest-possible-quality. 
  • Videoconferencing using Google Talk Audiovisual (AV)
  • Videoconferencing using OoVoo Audiovisual (AV) Description OoVoo is an voice, video, and instant messaging communications tool that permits up to twelve simultaneous voice or video participants for no fee. Unlike Skype, OoVoo Free users cannot share their computer desktops with each other. Procedures Downloading and Installing OoVoo In your internet browser, navigate to http://www.oovoo.com/Download.aspx; Select the appropriate Download for your platform (i.e. Mac, Windows, or Linux;) Wait for the download to commence and finish; Install Skype using the downloaded installer (it should be a relatively straightforward affair;) Skype will automatically launch--log in to continue.
Backup
  • Accessing SSS After Graduation Backup NOTE: These instructions are good for the time period between graduation and when your account is deactivated (3 months after your graduation date). To Connect to Your Folder on SSS Open your web browser - Internet Explorer (Windows only), Firefox, Chrome, Safari (Macintosh only). Windows Internet Explorer (Windows only), Safari (Mac only) & Chrome  (Firefox instructions are found in section 3 below) In the address bar at the top of your screen (where it typically starts with http://www…) completely erase what appears and type:  ftp://sss.hamilton.edu. Then press the enter or return key on your keyboard. When asked to login, enter hamilton-s\ followed by your e-mail ID (e.g. hdstudent). NOTE the direction of the slash after the “–s”.  In this example, you would type hamilton-s\hdstudent. NOTE:  In Safari, do not precede your userID with “hamilton-s\”. Instead, simply enter your ID in its short form (e.g. hdstudent) in the “Name” field. Enter your SSS password in the password field (this is the same password you use for My Hamilton). NOTE: In Internet Explorer, do not include a check mark in the box labeled Log on anonymously.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      FireFox                                                                               Internet Explorer                                             Chrome                                                                                        Safari                             To Download Your File(s) to Your Hard Drive Once you have successfully logged in you can download your file/files to your hard drive. Depending on the browser you are using, the procedure will be slightly different.  See below: Firefox (Mac & Windows) When the SSS folder opens, locate and then open your class year folder. In your class year folder, locate your user folder and open it. Right click on the file you want to download (Windows & Mac) or on a Macintosh, you can press and hold down the command key while clicking once on the file name. Choose Save link as and then choose to Save File. Internet Explorer (Windows) Although it may appear as though you can click on your files to download them, the process is laborious (requiring you to log in several more times) and may or may not work.  The correct way to download your file is to click on the Page menu (on the far right side at the top of IE) and select Open FTP site in Windows Explorer from the drop down menu. Click Allow if you are presented with a security warning. Next, you will be asked to log in a second time.  Enter your login information as before with Hamilton-s\userid. Replace userid with your real user name (e.g. hdstudent) and enter your SSS (My Hamilton) password. Select your class year folder and then select your user folder.  You should now see your files.  The preferred way to download a file is to right click on it and choose Copy to folder.  If you forget this and double click on the file instead, most file types will allow you to Save the file.  However, this may not work with all file types.              c.  Chrome (Mac & Windows) When the SSS folder opens, locate and then open your class year folder. In your class year folder, locate your user folder and open it. After you’ve navigated to your folder, click on the file you wish to download.  The download will happen automatically and the file will be listed along the bottom of your Chrome window. Click on the file name and it will open the application (in the example above, it will open MS Word).  From there you can save the file to the desired location.               d.  Safari (Macintosh) When the SSS folder opens, locate and then open your class year folder. In your class year folder, locate your user folder and open it. Click on the file(s) you want to download and simply drag it/them to your desktop (or into the desired folder on your drive).
  • Accessing the Academic Server Backup Overview As of June 21st, 2012, the Software and MSS servers have been retired. Files have been transferred to the new Academic server. Below are instructions for accessing files on the new server. Accessing Files using a Mac From the main menu bar, select Go - Connect to Server. In the Connect to Server window, type academic in the Server Address field.   Click the Connect button. Accessing Files on a Windows PC From the Start Menu, select Network. In the address bar of the resulting window, type \\academic. Press the Enter key on the keyboard.
  • Data Backup and Storage Backup Introduction Imagine if all of the work that you spent hours completing suddenly disappeared and there were no way to bring it back from oblivion. A nightmarish scenario to be sure! Unfortunately, many face it every semester: ITS often assists students and employees whose computers have malfunctioned while either working on or after finishing some assignment, typically when such a loss is most painful and difficult to recover from. Thankfully, with a very little effort, this scenario can be easily avoided. Backing up your files serves many purposes. Beyond preventing a catastrophic loss of data, proper organization of one's data and easy options for retrieval will facilitate one's work at Hamilton and beyond, viz. graduate school, internships, and possibly future employment Storage Solution Finder External Hard Drive Employee Network Storage 1 Academic Server 2 Google Drive Flash Drive Dropbox or Similar Documents ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Images ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Music ✓   ✓ ✓ Video ✓   ✓     Computer Backup ✓ ✓       Easy Sharing     ✓ ✓   is a solution that should not be used for sensitive or confidential information, e.g. bank account numbers, passwords, social security numbers, health information. 1 This solution is only available to staff and faculty. 2 This solution is for academic purposes (e.g. Coursework) only. And only members of the Faculty and Staff can request folders be created on the Academic Server.              
  • Employee Storage Server (ESS) Backup ESS General Information The ESS provides all Hamilton employees a central location to store and backup critical files from their Macintosh and PC desktop computers. The Employee Storage Server (ESS) provides: Improved printing services for all office/lab/classroom computers. A central, secure area where all employees can backup or store their critical personal files from their on-campus desktop machine. These files will be accessible from any PC or Macintosh on-campus. (i.e. I can backup my own personal files from my computer) A central, secure area where each department can share files with other people in their department. (i.e. I can share files with other people in ITS for collaborative work) A central, secure area where employees can share files with people in various departments (i.e. I can share files with people in the Registrar office).   ESS User Folder Quotas (Size Limits) Overview Every employee at Hamilton College is provided with disk space on the Employee Storage Server (ESS) to back up and/or store their critical documents and other electronic data from their office computer. Each academic and administrative department is also provided shared space for employees within the department to use to share documents or data with each other. Campus space is provided for employees to use to share files with employees in other departments Standards Each employee at Hamilton is given an initial disk quota of three Gigabytes (3 GB) to store their own personal files and data. Each department and campus space is also given an initial quota of One Gigabyte (1 GB). Requests for increases in disk quotas are handled by the ITS Network and Telecommunications Services team on an individual basis. Process for requesting Disk Quota Increases Individual employees or departments may request a permanent increase in their ESS disk quota each year in increments of 500 MB. Requests for space greater than 5 GB in size will be handled on an individual basis. A maximum of 10 GB of space per employee is allowed. Additional ESS disk space is available on a temporary basis for special projects, research, or instructional needs. Any requests for additional space will be referred to the Instructional Technology Services or Desktop Integration Services teams for alternative arrangements. The requestor must provide a time limit for the request, i.e., when he/she expects to no longer need the space (the time should not exceed one semester). Since the increase in disk quota is temporarily allocated, it is the requester's responsibility to either request an extension or to "backup" her/his files to another area when the additional quota expires. The Employment Storage Server (ESS) will not provide: Any access to students. Students have their own storage server (SSS) A place for you to backup your entire hard drive. The storage space we are providing is only to be used to backup or store your critical files. Most of your hard drive space is used to store applications which need to be completely re-installed if there were ever a problem with your machine, so it is pointless to back them up.
  • Formatting an External Hard Drive for Primarily Mac Users Backup 1. Plug the external hard drive into the computer. Access the Disk Utility application which is located in the Utilities folder of the Applications folder at the bottom of the home screen. 2. The Disk Utility window will now open. In this window, double click the name of the attached external hard drive, which will appear in the list of Memory Storage locations at the left of the window. 3. If you're not partitioning your Hard Drive, select the Erase tab at the top of the window. If you are partitioning your hard drive, that process is covered further in the "Formatting an External hard drive for Users Working with Both Platforms" guide. In the Erase tab, make sure the selected format is the correct one. The Mac OS Extended (Journaled) is the default for Mac users. Then go ahed and name your hard drive, so it's easier to recognize on the desktop. When your name and format are correct, click the Erase button at the bottom right. 4. You will be prompted with a window asking if you wish to use your external hard drive to back up the computer with time machine. Unless you know this is something you wish to do and know exactly what time machine is, go ahead and click Don't Use. 5. A Pop-up window will appear asking you to confirm that you wish to erase the disk. Click Erase. The Formatting should take a few moments, and once done an icon for the hard drive will appear on your Desktop. You will now be able to safely move files to and from your hard drive. Remember that if you have any questions or issues, please contact the interns at the MPC desk for assistance.
  • Formatting an External Hard Drive for Primarily PC Users Backup 1.  From the Desktop, click on the windows logo at the bottom left and access the Control Panel.   2.  In the Control Panel, change the View by: option at the top right to Small icons if it isn't already. Now, open the Administrative Tools icon. 3.  In the Administrative Tools window, double click Computer Management from the list of applications. 4. In the Computer Management window, select the Disk Management option from the list at the left of the window. You will now see information pertaining to the disk storage options for the computer. Anchor5. From the Disk Management window, select the storage option that is your external hard drive. Look for something that looks similar to what is below. If you have a 500GB external hard drive, you could expect to see a large block of about 450GB or so under a name other than Disk 0. Once you've selected the storage area, right click, and select the New Simple Volume... option. * If you are reading for the "Formatting for Users working with both OS Platforms" section, know that the representation of the external hard drive in this window will now look different due to the partitions. You are still going to right click the "Unallocated" section and select New Simple Volume... however that section will simply be smaller and there will be other already allocated ones. The differences are highlighted here. 6. Now, the New Simple Volume Wizard will pop up. This is where you will set up how you want your hard drive formatted. Click Next. 7.  The next page you see will be the Specify Volume Size page. Here you will select the size you want the New Simple Volume to be. The Default size is the entire free space you selected earlier, but you can change it if you like. After you've selected your size, click Next. The next page will be the Assign Drive Letter or Path page. It is very unlikely that you will have a reason to change this from the default, so feel free to just click Next. You'll notice the next page says Format Partition at the top. This is where you make your formatting choices. Since you will be working with a PC, the defaults should be fine, so just make sure that File System and Allocation unit size look like they do in the image below. Now you have the option of naming your hard drive, and then you should notice two checkboxes. Quick Format is faster than regular formatting, however it doesn't actually erase all the information on the hard drive. This obviously doesn't matter if the drive is new, so in most cases go ahead and leave this checked. Also, unless you expect issues with limited storage on your device, leave the second box unchecked and click Next. On the next page, you can look over all of your formatting settings. As long as everything looks good and all the choices are to your liking, click Finish. 8. You will now be returned to the Disk Management window and notice that the hard disk is now being formatted. When the disk is done formatting, you will be notified and from there you can safely transfer files to and from your Hard Disk on a PC. If you have any questions or issues, please contact the interns at the MPC desk for assistance.
  • Formatting an External Hard Drive for Users Working with Both Platforms Backup 1. Plug the external hard drive into the computer. Select the Applications folder that is usually located in the dock at the bottom of the home screen. Within that folder select the Utilities folder and then select the Disk Utility application from there.   2. The Disk Utility window will now open. In this window, double click the name of the attached external hard drive, which will appear in the list of memory locations and partitions at the left of the window. 3. Now, click on the Partition tab at the top of the window. Be sure to locate the Volume Scheme: label at the left of all of the information. Underneath this label are options for how you want your hard drive partitioned and a diagram showing the current scheme. 4. In the Partition screen, first select 3 Partitions from the options under the Volume Scheme: label at the left of the window.  5. Now, using the diagram of your current partition scheme shown under the Volume Scheme: label, select the top partition, which should be labeled Untitled 1 by default. This is the partition of your hard drive you will format to work with a Mac. It's a good idea to change the name of this partition to something that will remind you that this is the area that is formatted for a Mac. You can change the name under the Volume Information label. Also under this label is the Format: option, which you can leave the default since this partition is being formatted for a Mac. 6. Next, select the second partition down. This partition will be formatted as FAT-32, which is a format with a limited transfer size however it will work on both OS platforms. This is the partition you will use for transferring information between the Mac and PC partitions. As before, give this partition a name, but this time select the drop-down menu next to the Format: label, and select MS-DOS (FAT). 7. Now, select the third partition. This one will eventually be formatted to work with a PC, but we can't perform that action on a mac. So for now, just give this partition a name to help you remember this is the one you will format for PC use, and then change the Format: option to Free Space. 8. Now your window should look something like this. Notice that in this example the sizes are left to their default. If you wish to change the sizes of your partitions, do this under the Size: option that is under the Volume Information label right below Format. Keep in mind that your FAT-32 partition will ideally only be used for transfering information, so it wouldn't hurt to make that a smaller size, somewhere between 25 to 50 GB will probably do just fine. When all your information is set, click Apply. 9. A dialog box will pop up, asking if you wish to use either of the partitions available to back up your computer with Time Machine. Although Time Machine is a useful tool, for your use at the moment go ahead and click Don't Use. If you have questions about Time Machine or whether you should use it, there is a great deal of information available on the internet. After you click Don't Use, your hard drive will be formatted, and you will be notified when it is finished formatting. You will now be able to transfer files to the Mac and FAT-32 partitions on the drive. When you are ready, attach your drive to a PC, and continue reading to finish the formatting process. 10. Now you have to format the last partition of the hard drive to work with a PC. This is done essentially the same way as formatting the entire hard drive to work with a PC; however there is one key change which is highlighted below and on the Formatting for Primarily PC Users page. If you are unfamiliar with how to format the hard drive to work with a PC, please go to the linked page on the previous line.    *2. (Partitioned Hard Drive) Here is what the partitioned hard drive will look something like, and the section you should select is highlighted.   11. Once you've finished formatting the partition which will be used with a PC, you have successfully formatted your Hard Drive to work with both Platforms. Remember that if you have any questions or issues, please contact the interns at the MPC desk for assistance.  
  • Introduction to External Hard Drives Backup The Basics What is an External Hard Drive? You're probably aware that your computer has memory, or at the very least that you're able to save your various files and documents on the computer and then go back and retrieve them later. All that information that you save to your computer is saved into a hard drive of some sort. We often refer to hard drives as a form of data storage. An external hard drive is essentially just a portable data storage system. Without going into the intricate details of memory, simply know that an external hard drive allows you to save information and documents to a small portable device that you can remove from one computer and bring to another, allowing you to easily transfer that saved information and back it up. For more information about formatting hard drives, see this article.   Why would someone need one? Here at Hamilton, if you are taking a video class you will be required to have an external hard drive of your own. This is because the video files you will be working with are too large to be stored in the student storage server the school provides, and you will want to be able to work on your projects on different computers as well as have them backed up. Students who are not taking a video class may still find it useful to have an external hard drive for the reasons mentioned earlier. Basically, purchasing an external hard drive will provide convenience and security for one's data.   Recommendations Purchasing an external hard drive is a great way to back up important files and keep all of your work in one central location. Think of it as a portfolio of your work! When purchasing a drive, there are some technical details to consider.   Ports While USB ports are found on all computers, there are many versions and some can be slow to transfer large files (think video files). Firewire and Thunderbolt ports are faster, but might only be available on Apple hardware. Look for a drive that has multiple types of connection ports. Portability/Power If you're buying an external drive, portability is important. Some drives can be powered right through their connection port, which means you don't need to carry the "wall wart" power cable. Also consider the size of the case. Small drives are easy to carry Ruggedness Hard drives are delicate and a big bump can destroy the drive and your data. Look for a drive that rugged enough to stand up to trips in your backpack to the computer lab. Capacity Bigger is better, but for the same price point you'll trade features for capacity. Video is the one medium that quickly eats up your hard drive space. If you plan on taking a class that uses video, think big... 500GB should do.   Formatting The platform which you intend to use your external hard drive with will determine the formatting that is required for it. The resource center contains pages explaining ways to format your external hard drive for all of your possible needs, but in this section is some information as to what the different formats are and what they are for.   The Formats   FAT32 (File Allocation Table) Natively read/write FAT32 on Windows and Mac OS. Maximum file size: 4GB NTFS (Windows NT File System) Natively read/write NTFS on Windows. Maximum file size: 16TB HFS (Hierarchical File system, aka Mac OS Extended) Natively read/write HFS on Mac OS. Required for Time Machine Maximum file size: 8EiB  ( Note: More than large enough for any file in the modern world.)   How do the Formats affect you? You will need to select the correct format for the platform you intend on using your external hard drive with. If you are primarily a PC user who will not need to transfer files on a Mac, then NTFS is the format for you, and luckily for you most external hard drives are sold already formatted as NTFS. If you are primarily a Mac user who will not need to transfer files on a PC, then you would choose HFS (Mac OS extended). If you are a user who will have to transfer files across both platforms, then life becomes a bit more complicated. The information about the formats above may lead you to assume that you would simply format as FAT32, since it can read/write on Windows and Mac OS, however this is not a good idea for the following reasons. FAT32 offers no security FAT32 has a max file size of 4GB. This is an issue if you are a video student where you will likely deal with files larger than this. FAT32 is overall a less efficient and reliable format. So what does a user who needs to transfer across platforms do? There are a few solutions, but the one we suggest and provide directions to here at Hamilton is to partition your external hard drive into 3 partitions, and format each partition as a different Format. This will allow the user to read/write files on both platforms, and also transfer files under 4GB in size from either platform. So how does someone format an External Hard Drive? Directions on how to perform all of the above formatting have been included in the ITS Resource Center. The links are included below. Formatting for Primarily PC Users Formatting for Primarily Mac Users Formatting for Users working with Both Platforms
  • SSS File Manager on the WWW Backup Provided you have access to the World Wide Web, it is possible to work with files you have stored in your SSS HOME directory from anywhere in the world.  Your HOME directory is the folder on SSS that bears your e-mail name.  For example, it might be alincoln if you were Abe Lincoln.  You will not have access to department or special shared folders through this interface. Accessing Your Files and Folders on SSS via the Web Open your Internet browser (Internet Explorer for Windows, Netscape for Macintosh, etc.) and navigate to the My Hamilton page: http://my.hamilton.edu/. Login in using your e-mail address (e.g. alincoln) and your e-mail password.  It is important to note that you do NOT use your SSS password.  The web interface will authenticate you via your e-mail login and will not require you to enter your SSS password. Click on the Submit button. Click on the Files tab. You will see a list of the folders and files you have previously created in your SSS folder. To open a folder, simply click on the folder name.  In this example, I clicked on the folder called Documents. You can see this by looking at the top of the screen following the word Folder: To return to the level above the folder you are in, you can either click on the Back button in your browser or click on Parent Directory in the list of files and folders. Reading and Modifying SSS Files You will have to save files to your computer in order to read or work on them. To do so, simply click on the file you wish to access. If you are prompted to choose what to do with the file (open or save), Save it to a convenient location on your computer (e.g. the desktop.) After saving the file, go to the location you chose (e.g. the desktop) and open it there.  It is not recommended that you choose Open since the file will be saved in a temporary folder and won’t be easy to find. IMPORTANT NOTE:  After making modifications to your file you must upload it back to your SSS folder.  Clicking on “save” within the application (e.g. Word) will NOT save the modifications on SSS.    Saving Modified Files Back to your SSS folder NOTE: If you download a file (MS Word document, PowerPoint presentation, etc.) to your computer and modify it, you must upload that file back to SSS to overwrite the unmodified file.  To upload a file from your computer to your SSS folder, click the Upload File link. If you are uploading a modified version of a file to replace the unmodified version of that file on SSS, place a check mark in the box next to Check to overwrite existing file names. If you aren’t replacing a file, leave this unchecked. Click on the Browse button. Browse to the file that you wish to upload. Highlight the file and click Open. Click Submit. The little box will close, the page will refresh, and the file will show up in your SSS folder. Deleting Files and Folders To delete a file or folder, click on Delete next to that file or folder (NOTE: folders must be empty in order to be deleted. If you want to delete a folder with files in it, you must first delete all of the files in that folder and then you can delete the folder. Unless you have no other choice, it is best to save this task for when you return to campus.) A box will pop up asking, “Are you sure you want to delete this file?” Click OK. If the file deletes successfully, the page will refresh and the file will now be deleted. If you attempted to delete a folder that was not empty, you’ll see an error message like the one below. Click Close in order to close the message. You should either delete all of the files within that folder and then delete the folder or wait until you are back on campus to delete the folder. Renaming Files and Folders on SSS To rename a file or folder on SSS, click Rename next to the file or folder In the space provided, enter the name you want to give the file or folder and click Submit. The page will refresh with the new file name showing up. IMPORTANT NOTE: WHENEVER you are finished using My Hamilton or leave your computer, be sure to Log out!
  • Your Hamilton E-mail & SSS Accounts After Graduation Backup Your Hamilton E-mail After You Graduate When is my account deleted? What happens if I miss the deadline? How do I get a deadline extension? How do I get an alumni e-mail account? How do I transfer mail out of my Hamilton account? How do I forward mail to another account? How do tell correspondents my new address? Questions? When is my account deleted? Your Hamilton e-mail account will be deactivated approximately three (3) months after you graduate.  Typically this occurs on August 31 or March 31 (for December graduates).  Once your account is deactivated, no new mail is received.  Your mail remains on the server after deactivation until your account is physically removed (deleted) one month later. Back to top What happens if I miss the deadline to transfer my mail to another account? Although your account is deactivated on the deadline date,  your messages are not physically removed from our server for another month. This allows us to easily restore your messages should you accidentally miss the deadline.  After the one month grace period has passed, your mail is no longer retrievable. Back to top How do I get a deadline extension? Under special circumstances it is possible to obtain a brief extension.  Please address your request to the helpdesk (hd@hamilton.edu).  You should include your reason for requesting the extension and the length of time it is desired. Back to top How do I get an alumni e-mail account? The alumni address available to Hamilton graduates (you@alumni.hamilton.edu) is not an actual e-mail account. Instead, it is a mail forwarding service.  To sign up for this service please visit the Hamilton Alumni Directory Registration page and follow the step-by-step registration process. When you register, you must provide a real address to which mail is forwarded when mail is addressed to you@alumni.hamilton.edu.  The e-mail address you used as a student will not be available for your alumni e-mail address until your old account has been fully deleted as described above.  The advantage to the alumni forwarding service is that it allows you to list a Hamilton Alumni e-mail address on professional correspondence.  It remains in effect after your Hamilton account is removed and as long as the address to which you forward mail remains active. Back to Top How do I transfer mail from my Hamilton e-mail account to another account? To move existing mail from your Hamilton account into another account before your Hamilton account is deleted please refer to the pertinent section below. To transfer your Hamilton mail to an existing Gmail.com account, please visit: http://my.hamilton.edu/information-technology-services/resource-center/moving-your-mail-to-another-account-1 To transfer your Hamilton mail to a non-Gmail web-based e-mail account: Many web-based e-mail accounts like Gmail (e.g.Yahoo), give you the ability to automatically import mail from your Hamilton account.   The settings referenced in the instructions for Gmail may assist you in transferring your mail, however, the screens will be different depending on the application you use. Back to Top How do I forward my Hamilton e-mail to another account? Once you have transferred your mail to your non-Hamilton account, it is wise to start forwarding new mail to that account at the same time.  When forwarding is turned on it only forwards mail received from that point forward.  To transfer mail previously received, please see the section above. For instructions on how to set up forwarding, please refer to Google's help page at:  http://mail.google.com/support/bin/answer.py?answer=10957 Back to Top How do I tell correspondents my new address? To create an auto-reply message to inform correspondents of your new e-mail address, please refer to Google's help page at: http://mail.google.com/support/bin/answer.py?answer=25922 Back to Top Questions? If you have questions regarding your Hamilton E-mail account after graduation, please feel free to contact the ITS Help Desk at helpdesk@hamilton.edu or call 315-859-4181. Back to Top Return to the ITS Home Page
Blackboard Learn
  • Blackboard Browser-Related Issues Blackboard Learn Some behaviors in Blackboard are browser-related and may be fixed by changing your settings. Please also check here for useful tips and tricks. My student submitted a file and I can't open it. My students can't open/download a file; they just get a blank page (IE only). When I click on a link to open a document, I see a Windows Security dialog asking for user name and password. I'm getting security messages asking if I want to display mixed content. What do I do? I'm getting messages asking if I want to trust a certificate. How do I answer? I'm using Microsoft Vista and/or IE 8 and I'm having trouble with Blackboard. I'm using AOL and I got kicked out of Blackboard! I'm clicking a link to take a quiz but nothing happens! I'm trying to join a Collaboration session (Virtual Classroom or Chat) but nothing happens. The text in Blackboard is really small. Can I make it bigger? I sent an e-mail to several students, but now I can't remember which ones (or what exactly I said). Is there a copy of this e-mail in the Sent folder/Out box? I'm entering information into the Text box (or I pasted it in from Word) and it looks really bad. What's going on? My student submitted a file and I can't open it. It's possible that your student prepared the file on a Macintosh computer without the Office file extensions turned on (which produced a file name such as "essay" instead of "essay.doc"). You should be able to open the file if you change the file name to include the .doc file type extension (you may need to use .docx if the .doc doesn't work). Return to top My students can't open/download a file (IE only). When a user of Internet Explorer clicks on a link for a document in Internet Explorer, they see a pop-up blocker (or a yellow message bar). If they agree to enable the download, they're returned to the course home page, and so can't download the file unless they return to the content area page and try again. This results from a security setting in IE and can be changed on a per-user/per-system basis. Go to Tools->Internet Options->Security->Internet->Custom Level Scroll down to the Downloads section Select the Users option Set Downloads->Automatic prompting for file downloads -> Enable. Set Downloads->File Download -> Enable. Click OK. Return to top When I click on a link to open a document, I see a Windows Security dialog asking for user name and password. This problem affects only Internet Explorer 8; therefore, one of the solutions is to use a different browser (Firefox or Chrome). Other solutions are: Click the Cancel option twice (there will be another dialog box that pops open when Word starts to open). Enter your user name and password twice (in each of the two security windows). This should stop the security dialog from opening for subsequent documents. Return to top I'm getting security messages asking if I want to display mixed (secure/insecure) content. What do I do? This issue affects Blackboard as well as the Web mail server. First, click OK. Then, check the following settings on your browser (these instructions apply only to Internet Explorer): Click on "Tools" in the IE menu bar Choose "Internet Options" Click on "Security" tab Click on the "Internet" icon Click on "Custom Level" button Scroll down until you see "Display mixed content" (under Miscellaneous). Set this to "enable". Click on "OK" and again on "OK" CAUTION: Be sure that you don't unintentionally modify any other settings. Return to top I'm getting messages asking if I want to trust a certificate. How do I answer? This type of message will appear differently for Macintosh and for Windows users, but the meaning is the same. You may click the "Trust", "Accept" or "Run" button; the applet referred to in the message is actually a third-party product used by Blackboard. Note: If you click the "Show Details/Certificate" button and then check the "Always trust these certificates" option, this message should never re-appear. Additionally, if you try to use the Virtual Classroom or Chat collaboration tools and receieve a warning message asking whether you want to accept a certificate from the website "blackboard.hamilton.edu," you may also click the "Trust" button (or click the "Show certificate" button and check the "Always" option). Return to top I'm using Microsoft Vista and/or IE 8 and I'm having trouble with Blackboard. A number of Blackboard problems for users of Vista can be fixed by making Blackboard a trusted site in Internet Explorer: Click on "Tools" in the IE menu bar Choose "Internet Options" Click on "Security" tab Click on the "Trusted Sites" icon Click on "Sites" button Enter "http://blackboard.hamilton.edu" in the Add field. Click OK and the click OK again. CAUTION: Be sure that you don't unintentionally modify any other settings. Return to top I'm using AOL and I got kicked out of Blackboard! Internet Service Providers such as AOL or MSN use a proprietary system to connect to the Internet. Blackboard does not work well with these systems; using AOL could result in problems with downloading files, taking exams, or other aspects of Blackboard. If AOL or MSN provides your Internet connection, then follow these steps: Log in to AOL, etc., as usual Locate the "keyword" button to the immediate top right and click on it. Type in "smile4u" in the search field, click on "GO"(submit). A yellow smiley face should appear. Minimize the proprietary browser Open stand-alone browser (IE, Netscape, Opera, Firefox, Safari, etc. -- one can usually download a free version of these browsers from the company's website, if the software is not already on your computer) Log in to Blackboard and go about work as usual If "smile4u" does not keep the connection up, return to AOL occasionally and click a link so the connection remains live. If possible, set preferences with ISP to allow long periods of inactivity on their browser (or go to a website that will do this for you, such as http://www.sector101.fsnet.co.uk/keepalive/ Return to top I'm clicking a link to take a quiz or join a Collaboration session but nothing happens! Blackboard needs to use cookies, popups and Java scripting. Check the following settings on your browser (these intructions assume Internet Explorer on Windows, but other browsers will be similar): To enable cookies in IE: Click on "Tools" in the menu bar Choose "Internet Options" Click on "Privacy" tab Slide bar to medium or low Click on "Apply" To allow popups in IE: Click on "Tools" in the menu bar Choose "Internet Options" Click on "Privacy" tab In the Popup Blocker area, click the Settings button Enter blackboard.hamilton.edu in the "Address of Web Site to Allow" field and click Add Click on "Close" Click on "OK" Note: make sure that any third-party popup blocking software is disabled. To enable Java scripting in IE: Click on "Tools" in the menu bar Choose "Internet Options" Click on "Security" tab Click on the "Internet" icon Click on "Custom Level" button Scroll down until you see "Scripting of Java Applets" (under Scripting). Set this to "enable". Click on "OK" CAUTION: Be sure that you don't unintentionally modify any other settings. Return to top I'm trying to join a Collaboration session (Virtual Classroom or Chat) but nothing happens. First, please be aware that the Collaboration tools (Virtual Classroom and Chat) currently work only with the following configurations: Windows systems, Internet Explorer or Firefox; Macintosh systems, Safari or Firefox. You must remember to unblock popups (this can be done for only the Blackboard site if you wish to block popups for other sites). Second, check all of the settings in the topic above (clicking a link to take a quiz). Also, please check that some other tool (e.g., the Google toolbar) is not blocking popups. Return to top The text in Blackboard is really small. Can I make it bigger? This is actually a browser setting, not a Blackboard problem. Depending on what platform (Windows, Macintosh) and browser (Internet Explorer, Firefox) you are using, look at the top menu bar -- the one that starts File-Edit-View. Under View, look for an option that says Text Size or Text Zoom. Under that option, you should be able to select a different text size for the browser window. Return to top I sent an e-mail to several students, but now I can't remember which ones (or what exactly I said). Is there a copy of this e-mail in the Sent folder/Out box? E-mail sent from Blackboard is routed through the mail server, but does not result in a copy left in your Sent folder or Out box. You should automatically receive a copy of the e-mail you sent (note the comment below the Message area that states "A copy of this email will be sent to the sender."). If you also check the box for "Return Receipt," then this copy will also have the list of recipients (this option is available only from the Send Email tools in the Control Panel). Note: if you receive an error message stating "unable to send mail" but you do receive your copy of the e-mail which you just sent through Blackboard, then it is probable that most of your students received the e-mail also, but one of the students in your course is over-quota or is having some other problem with his/her e-mail account. The students must keep track of their quota usage themselves. Return to top I'm entering information into the Text box (or I pasted it in from Word) and it looks really bad. The WYSIWYG text box editor is a "smart text" editor; that is, it assumes that text entered is in HTML format and treats it accordingly. If you are entering text and hit the Return key to enter a blank line into the text, the editor actually enters the HTML "paragraph" command. This tends to space out the text more than you probably want. The workaround is to hold down the Shift key and then hit Enter; this is read as the HTML "break" command, and will probably be closer to the spacing that you want. If you know something about HTML, you can click the HTML link in the WYSIWYG editor's second toolbar row; this will open a window containing the text with all the HTML formatting and you can edit it directly there. Note: Blackboard does not recommend copying and pasting text from Word into the WYSIWYG editor window. Word puts a lot of formatting commands into the text and this is not handled well by the "smart text" editor (no pun intended). For longer documents (e.g., a syllabus), you can just attach the entire Word document.  You can also select the text from the Word document, paste it into Notepad/WordPad/TextEdit (which will remove the formatting commands), and then select it and copy it into the text window. Second note: We also do not recommend cutting and pasting web pages into the text editor of Blackboard. These pages may contain javascripting commands (such as buttons) that will destroy the navigation in Blackboard window. Final note: if you find the new WYSIWYG editor annoying and would prefer to continue using the old plain-text editor, you can set that option for yourself. Go to the My Blackboard home page. In the Tools area on the left, click Personal Information. On the Personal Information screen, click the last option, Set Text Box Editor Options. Next to Set Availability, select Unavailable. Click Submit and then click OK. Return to top
  • Blackboard Communication Tools Blackboard Learn Communication Sending E-mail Notification System Discussion Board Virtual Classroom Chat Sending E-mail The e-mail functions can be accessed via the Tools area or the Control Panel (Course Tools). Clicking on All Users will send an e-mail to every student registered for the class; Select Users allows you to select individual users. Although you send the e-mail out from Blackboard, it goes to the students' regular Hamilton e-mail accounts, so that they can read it anywhere. Note:  The outgoing message will NOT appear in your Out or Send box, but a copy of the e-mail will be automatically sent to the sender. The All/Select Groups and other options will be active if groups (or other special users) have been defined. It is also possible to attach files to an e-mail. Notification System The Blackboard Notification system provides alerts and emails regarding new material in courses, due dates, assignments, etc. The alerts appear in the "Course Home" of each course (this should be under the Announcements link in the course menu). The emails will be delivered once per day, generated at 4:00 AM, summarizing all changes in any course space you are enrolled in. This Notification system can be configured depending on your individual needs. Go to the "Course Home" of any course. Click the "Edit Notification Settings" button in any of the modules. You can set notification preferences either for all courses or for each course individually. The "alerts" appear in the Course Home modules (under the "Dashboard" of the edit settings pages) and are automatically turned on. The individual emails for courses are off by default and need to be turned on if desired. Discussion Board Discussion Boards enable you or your students to post Discussion Questions and discuss them outside of class. The comments generated are posted as individual "threads" and can be read and responded to at anytime. Blackboard's Discussion Board is subdivided into Forums (one per topic or question, for example) and each forum is further subdivided into threads (comments and responses on the same issue). There are many features available with the Discussion Board; what follows are just the basics. Click on the Tools link on the left-hand side of the main Course page. You should see a page with many different options; click on Discussion Board. Click Create Forum to create a forum (the instructor must carry out this step in order for students to be able to use the discussion board). Fill in the "Name" field (for example, "Origins of World War One") and the "Description" (for example, "various social, economic and political factors which preceded the outbreak of hostilities"). Select the "Forum Settings" options as desired and click Submit. Your new forum should appear with the options you have selected. Note: there are a number of options (including grading forums or threads, rating posts, and subscribing to posts, which are explained fully in the Instructors' Manual. Click the title of the forum in order to begin a discussion thread. If there are no pre-existing messages, click the "Create New Thread" button. Fill in the Subject (for example, "Build-up of War Machine") and the message you wish to post (an intriguing question or provocative statement). You also have the option of attaching a file in the Attachment field. Click Submit. Now you have begun an exciting discussion. Students may read and reply to messages by clicking on the title of the message itself (which will display the message) and then clicking on the Reply button located in the lower-right-hand corner of the message. They will fill in the Message area just as in a regular e-mail. Note that the message to which one is replying appears below. They must also click Submit to post the reply. If you would like to collect messages together and print a discussion forum in order to bring the questions and responses to class, select the messages you wish to print (you may use the Select All button), then click the Collect button. You should see all the selected messages appear on one page. Then click the Print Preview button and you can print from this window. Virtual Classroom and Lightweight Chat Blackboard has two Collaboration Tools, the Virtual Classroom and the Lightweight Chat (both accessible from the Tools area or the Control Panel, under Collaboration). The new Virtual Classroom includes a whiteboard, chat area and other tools in addition to the main display for full-fledged web seminars. The Lightweight Chat contains display and chat areas only and is suitable for more limited purposes such as on-line office hours.
  • Blackboard Compatible Browsers Blackboard Learn Windows Client Configurations Windows XP:  Internet Explorer 8; Firefox 3.6 or Final Release Channel; Google Chrome (stable release channel) Windows Vista:  IE 9 0r 8; Firefox 3.6 or Final Release Channel; Google Chrome (stable release channel) Windows 7:  IE 9 0r 8; Firefox 3.6 or Final Release Channel; Google Chrome (stable release channel) Macintosh Client Configurations OS 10.5 (Leopard): Safari 5 or 4; Firefox 3.6 or Final Release Channel; Google Chrome (stable release channel) OS 10.6 (Snow Leopard): Safari 5 or 4; Firefox 3.6 or Final Release Channel; Google Chrome (stable release channel)
  • Blackboard Course Files Blackboard Learn Any file uploaded to Blackboard (other than student submissions) is visible in the “Course Files” area and can be edited, replaced, and retrieved.  Under “Control Panel,” click the double-arrow symbol TO THE RIGHT OF THE WORD “FILES” (see below).  This will bring you to the “Course Contents” page, which presents information about all files in your course space. If you click the Upload button and select “Upload Files,” you will see the new “drag-and-drop” window for moving files directly from your local computer to the Blackboard server.  This will be very convenient for moving a number of files at the same time from your computer (or ESS space) to the Blackboard course space.  You can also choose to upload a zipped package of files (Blackboard will unpackage them into this content area, maintaining the folder structure). Then, when you are on a Content page (see previous section), pick “Create Item” or “Create File” and select the “Browse Course” option under “Attachments,” you will see all the files you have uploaded to this area and can select one (or more).  You can also change the name of a file if needed when it is linked from a content area. If you click the double-arrow symbol to the right of an individual file’s name, a small menu will pop up with additional options for that file, including the ability to overwrite it with a new version.  The “Permissions” option will show who has access in your course to this file.  You can quickly check the validity and availability of links to all your course content by using the Check Course Links tool in the Packages and Utilities sub-menu under the Control Panel. You can also select all the files in the Course Contents area (or as many as you desire) and then click the “Download Package” button, which will give you a zipped file of all the files in your course, in their original format (Word, PDF, etc.).  This is handy if you need to take your files elsewhere. Finally, the “Setup Web Folder” button allows you to create a direct link from your local computer to the storage space for this course on the Blackboard server.  This will appear (in Windows 7) on the same window as local drives, networked drives, peripheral devices, etc.  You will then be able to access files directly without going through Blackboard.  There are instructions on this page for setting up this folder in Windows 7/Vista/XP and the Mac OS.  
  • Blackboard Course Management Tools Blackboard Learn There are a number of useful available for managing various aspects of a Blackboard course space. Some of these tools are part of Blackboard and some have been written by third-party developers and are not a standard part of Blackboard (and do not appear in the Instructors' manual).  Sign-up Lists Online Attendance Safe Assign (anti-plagiarism service) Add a Test Student Course Groups Sign-up Lists Although Blackboard does not have a full-fledged scheduling system within itself, we do have a third-party tool that will allow the creation of time slots which students can sign up for – a system which can be used, for example, for scheduling advising appointments. For a PDF of these instructions with screen shots, go to: Using the Sign-up Tool documentation. Online Attendance Go to the Control Panel area, expand the Course Tools sub-menu, then click on Online Attendance. Use the Setup page to set semester start/end dates and days of meeting each week, then quickly enter attendance for every class meeting (there are values for present, absent, excused, late, etc.). This tool is not connected to the Grade Center, but does provide a report showing total number of days present, absent, etc. for each student. Safe Assign This is an anti-plagiarism service run by Blackboard; one can either create an assignment that will automatically be submitted for checking against databases of known paper mills, or submit occasional papers manually if you suspect that a bit too much cutting and pasting has gone on. Here's how to submit a single paper: Go to Control Panel area of the course, expand the Course Tools sub-menu and select the SafeAssign tool. Click the Direct Submit link. Under the Private Direct Submit area, click the Submit Papers tool button. In the File Upload area, browse to the paper and click Open to attach it as usual. The other options can remain as is. Click Submit. You should have results back within an hour indicating if the service found any duplicated sections of the paper. Under the SA Report section, you can click the green link to see a full report with likely sources. The SafeAssign service accepts the following formats: Word 2003 (.doc); Word 2007 (.docx); Rich Text Format (.rtf); text files (.txt); Portable Document Format (.pdf); and archive files (.zip). For further information, please see the SafeAssign Wiki. Add a Test Student This tool allows an instructor to create a sample student account to use for checking what a course looks like to students. You can enroll this student account in any course. Go to the Control Panel area, expand the Course Tools sub-menu, then click on Add Test Student.  Course and Section Groups and what to do with them Every course section in Blackboard has a group in the "Groups" area which has a title such as "ITS_100_01_FA2009_Group". This group is created automatically when we create the course shells every semester. It contains all the students for that section and is automatically updated as students add and drop courses. If a course is cross-listed with another department, these groups reflect the enrollments as seen in WebAdvisor. If an instructor requested that multiple sections of the same course be merged, then the enrollments reflect the original sections. These automatically-created groups can be used for a number of different purposes, such as group file exchange, viewing sub-groups of students in the Grade Center, and for group assignments. Group File Exchange For example, if you need an area in Blackboard for students to share files, just tell your students to: Click on "Groups" in the Tools area. Click on the name of the group that looks like a course id and ends in "Group." Click on the "File Exchange" tool in the Group Tools area. Click the "Add File" button and browse to the file to upload. Click "Submit." Filter by sections in the Grade Center If you would like to organize the Grade Center to see the grades of different sections separately, you can create a "Smart View" in the Grade Center using these automatically-created groups: Go to the Grade Center of your course (under the "Evaluation" sub-menu). Under the "Manage" menu, pick "Smart Views." Click the "Create Smart View" button. Enter a name for this view (for example, "Section 01"). Under "Selection Criteria," the "Type of View" should already be "Groups" by default. In the next area, select one of the groups under "Value." Click Submit and go back to the Grade Center. In "Current View," if you mouse over the "Full Grade Center," a list should drop down which includes your newly-created view. Select this view and the Grade Center will load with only the students from that group. Group Assignments You can also create assignments for individual groups. Go to the course area in which you wish to create the assignment. Select "Create Assignment" under the "Evaluate" button. In section 6, you will see that you can set the "Recipients" to "Groups of Students." When you click this radio button, you will see a list of all the groups in your course. Highlight the one you want and click the right-pointing arrow to move it to the "Selected" box. Click Submit. The assignment will now only appear to the members of that group. For more details on using section groups, see the Section Groups in Blackboard documentation.
  • Blackboard Grade Center Overview Blackboard Learn The Blackboard Grade Center is a wonderful tool full of helpful features – so full that it’s often difficult to know where to start.  Here’s an overview of all the basics, plus some time-saving tips.  The Grade Center can do everything from calculate weighted totals, to score online quizzes, to enable you to grade papers completely electronically.  If you’ve never used the Grade Center (or if you’ve been using Excel all these years), take a look and see what Blackboard can do for you. Adding a Column The Grade Center of every course space begins with several default columns:  student names, last course access date, total and weighted total, and more.  Some types of assessments automatically create a grade center column for you (for example, tests, surveys, assignments, discussion boards, and more).  For other types of assessments (exams, papers, participation grades, etc.), you will need to add a column to the Grade Center in order to be able to enter student grades. Click on the Grade Center sub-menu of the Control Panel area, then click on the words “Full Grade Center” to see the Grade Center.  Click the “Create Column” button.
  • Blackboard Grade Center Overview Continued Blackboard Learn Now that you've set up your Blackboard Grade Center, it's time to learn some advanced topics.  First, set up a Weighted Total column to show students their current or final grade.  The Grade Center can accommodate most grading schemes.  Don't forget to check out some of the nifty time-saving tips at the end. Weighting Grades Before starting to set up the weighting scheme, it’s a good idea to make sure that all of your grade center items have a category associated with them.  This will give you additional options when setting up the weighting.  Click the “chevron” for each item and select “Quick Column Information” to check whether there is a category.  If not, then select “Edit Column Information” and add an appropriate category (you can also define your own in Manage --> Categories). You should have a column called “Weighted Total” in your grade center (if not, create one by clicking the “Create Calculated Column” button and selecting “Weighted Column”).  Click the “chevron” for the Weighted Total column and then select “Edit Column Information.”  You will see an area which is unique to the weighted column and this is where you will set up your grade weighting scheme.  Select an item and click the arrow to move it to the “Selected” area. You should be able to replicate the weighting scheme on your syllabus in the “Columns/Categories to Select” area.  As you can see, we can mix categories (quizzes, essays) in with individual columns (exams, attendance).  You can also select calculated columns (total, average, min/max or weighted) which you have created to reflect specific grading needs. As long as each essay-like item has the category “Essay,” it doesn’t matter how many there are; Blackboard will calculate the grade for this category based on however many items are in the category and weight them equally (each one has the same number of points possible) or proportionally (each one has a different number of points possible).  You can also choose to drop the X number of lowest (or highest!) grades or use only the lowest or highest value of the group. A Few Tips and Tricks 1) Shorten column title by adding a Grade Center Display name.  This is a handy option if you use long assignment names.  The descriptive assignment name remains in the content area; you see a name not longer than 15 characters in the Grade Center.  Click the “chevron” next to the column title and select “Edit Column Information.” 2) Use the navigation tools on the Grade Details page to jump from one student to the next or one assignment to the next without reloading the Grade Center page.  This will allow you to go directly from one student to the next while grading assignments without the extra step of reloading the Grade Center when you don’t need to do so. 3)  Email students directly from the Grade Center.  Just check the boxes next to their names and click the “Email” button directly above the name columns. 4) Add a Quick Comment to a student’s grade.  Once a grade has been entered for a student, you should see the option “Quick Comment” in the menu that pops up when you click the “chevron” next to the individual student’s grade.  When you select this option, an entry box will pop up with two fields, one for feedback to the student and one for notes to yourself.  This is faster for quick comments than selecting the “View Grade Details” option. 5) Exempting a single grade from a student’s total grade.  This is another option you will see on the menu that pops up when you click the chevron in a grade cell.  Selecting this option will cause the grade for that student to not be included in that student’s totals.  Once created, it can be cleared if necessary. 6) Overriding Grades.  You also have the ability to override a given grade with an updated grade.  Click the “View Grade Details” option and look in the series of tabs beginning with “Edit.”  Click the “Manually Override” tab and enter a new grade along with comments to the student or notes to yourself. 7) Changing the category of a number of items at once.  Go to the Manage menu and select “Column Organization.”  Select the columns whose category you need to change and then pick the new category from the list under the “Change Category to …” button. 8) Visual Cues for Grade Center statuses.  One may set up a Color Code to set background and text color of Grade Center items based on grading status or grade range
  • Blackboard Learn Support Blackboard Learn The Best Tool Ever That would be the Assignment manager, a clever combination of content and grade book that allows you to assign, retrieve and grade papers completely electronically. Monitoring Student Progress Blackboard has several tools for tracking student performance: the Early Warning System, the Performance Dashboard, Review Status and Adaptive Release of Content. Student-Centered Tools Small Groups, Blogs, Wikis, Podcasts, E-Portfolios, Peer and Self-Assessment Cool Tools Additional tools (mostly in the Control Panel, Course Tools area) for online attendance, plagiarism checking, sign-up sheets, and more. Assessment Blackboard has an extensive online exam-development facility with many options for creating and deploying tests. This is best explained in the Instructor's manual, but here are a few highlights.
  • Blackboard Login and Enrollments Blackboard Learn General Questions How do I access my courses? Using any web browser, go to the "My Hamilton" portal and log in as usual. Your courses will be listed in the My Blackboard Courses channel of the Courses tab (second row of menu items) under "Current Courses."  If you have any trouble logging in to the portal you can go directly to Blackboard at http://blackboard.hamilton.edu. Use your Hamilton network username and password to log in. For example, if your email address is jsmith@hamilton.edu, you would log in using the username jsmith and your current password  You courses will be listed in the "My Courses" module of the "My Blackboard" home page. What if I can't log in to Blackboard? There can be several different reasons. First, you must use your Hamilton network account name and password, even if you do not use Hamilton e-mail. If you want mail sent from Blackboard to go to another e-mail account, you must set up forwarding in the Hamilton web mail interface. Contact the Help Desk (x4181) for help in doing this. If you are a new faculty member or employee, you must have a Hamilton email and Colleague ID in order to log into Blackboard. If you do not have or are not sure if you have these, please contact Human Resources for a Colleague ID and the Help Desk (x4181) for an email account. I've forgotten my password. How can I get a new one? For Hamilton users, you should use your network username and password. If you have forgotten your network password, please go to http://passchg.hamilton.edu to request it. For guest users and people without a Hamilton email address, you can use the user name "guest" and password "guest" to access parts of the Blackboard system which are available to guests. Enrollment Questions (Students) I added a course, but I don't see it in my course list. (Students) I dropped a course, but it still shows up in my course list. All enrollment information in Blackboard comes from the Registrar's system. Only the Registrar's Office can change your enrollment status. First, check your enrollment information in the Web Advisor system. If that information is incorrect, you must contact the Registrar's Office to get it straightened out. Once your Web Advisor records are correct, it may take several hours for Blackboard to correct its records. (The update to Blackboard happens twice daily.) (Faculty) I'm supposed to be teaching a course, but I don't see it in my course list. This may happen if you are a new faculty member and the Registrar has not yet been notified which courses you are teaching. Please contact the Registrar's Office (or have your department chair or secretary do so) and notify them of your teaching assignment. Once your Web Advisor records are correct, it may take several hours for Blackboard to correct its records. (The update to Blackboard happens twice daily. (Faculty) How do I have a TA or grader added to my section? Go to the Control Panel area Expand the Users and Groups section Select the Users option On the page that follows, click the "Find Users to Enroll" button. On the page that follows, enter the user id (e.g., jsmith) in the username field and select a role. Click Submit. Note: The user id is usually the same as the e-mail account; however, many users have user names which include a middle initial or number, so if there is any doubt, please use the Browse button to search by last name. Note: if another instructor is team-teaching your course, you should call the Registrar's office and ask to have this instructor added as the secondary instructor for your course. This information will then transfer from the Registrar's system to Blackboard. (Faculty) When will the next semester's courses appear in Blackboard? Next semester's course spaces are created approximately one week after the end of registration for that semester (early May for the fall, early December for the spring).  You do not need to ask for a course space; course spaces are created automatically every semester, using the Registrar's data. Students and faculty are automatically enrolled in or assigned to courses, again, based on the Registrar's data.  Courses are initially set to "unavailable" so that they may be accessed by faculty but not seen by students.  Approximately two weeks before the start of the semester, courses will be reset to "available." (Faculty and Students) What are the "Departmental" and "Advisee" courses? In addition to regular course spaces, we also provide course spaces for departmental and advising use.  The "advisee" spaces contain all the advisees for each faculty member, as recorded in Web Advisor. The departmental spaces exist for all departments and concentrations. Faculty are enrolled as instructors based on their primary departmental affiliation; this is automatic except for programs, in which faculty need to be enrolled manually (which can be done by any other instructor in the space). Students are enrolled in these spaces based on their declared concentration as recorded in WebAdvisor; if a student has a double major, then that student is enrolled in both spaces. Minors are now being in enrolled in these spaces also. All the students enrolled in the departmental/program spaces can be seen in either the Roster (Tools area) or Users list (Users and Groups sub-menu in the Control Panel area). In either area, pick the "Not Blank" option to see the complete list of students (and faculty in the Users area). One can send e-mail to everyone in the departmental space by using the "All Users" option on the Send Email page; to all students by selecting the "All Student Users" option; or to all faculty by selecting the "All Instructor Users" option. It may be more useful, however, to contact students by class years (status). All the students are also enrolled in class-year groups, which can be seen on the Groups page (from the Users and Groups sub-menu). You will notice that there are groups here for every class year whose students can declare a major and also for minors, by class year. So this year's seniors are in the groups that end in 2012, this year's juniors are in the groups ending in 2013, and when the sophomores declare in February, they will be in the 2014 groups. These groups are maintained and updated automatically as students declare or change their concentrations. New class year groups will be created in the summer and the groups of graduating seniors will be retired. You can see who is in each class year group by clicking on the group name. Majors are in the "Concentration" groups and minors are in the "Minor" groups. To email the students in any single group, click the "chevron" (double down-arrow symbol) next to any group name and select the "Email" option. On the following page, click the "Select All" button and then click the right-pointing arrow to move the selected students to the "Selected" box. You also might want to send an email to all majors and minors of a given year. Go to the "Send Email" function (from the Tools page) and pick the "Select Groups" option. Pick the groups ending in the same year and you will be sending e-mail to every student in the selected groups. Of course, all users have access to all the other tools in a Blackboard course space, such as posting documents, discussion boards, blogs, etc. These spaces are for departments and advisors to use as they see fit.
  • Blackboard Quizzes, Tests and Surveys Blackboard Learn Blackboard has an extensive on-line quiz- and test-creating facility (in the Assessment section of the Control Panel). Blackboard also offers surveys, question banks, and interactive rubrics. Quizzes and Tests Surveys Question Pools Rubrics Quizzes and Tests There are over twenty different question types and numerous options available. Using question types such as multiple choice, true/false and matching (among others), you can create a test which Blackboard will score automatically (and enter the grade in the grade center). Assessment options include partial credit and various types of feedback for students after taking the test. Delivery options include taking tests multiple times, for self-assessment, with a timer or password, etc. Hamilton College currently provides most of the placement exams for incoming students via Blackboard, so many students have already had experience taking on-line exams. The Assessment tools are excellent choices for periodically testing comprehension of material. Surveys Any option used for quizzes can also be used for surveys, including Likert scales. Surveys are anonymous and results are summarized in tabular form. Blackboard surveys are a great way to get mid-semester feedback. Question Pools One may also create a pool of questions which can be drawn from randomly when tests are created. This can be done on-the-fly so that every student has a slightly different exam. It is also possible to import publishers' test banks and other material. New Question types The Assessment tools (quizzes and tests) now have ten new types of questions, including calculated formula, hot spot, fill in multiple blanks, and opinion scale. There are also a number of new management features such as randomizing question blocks and randomizing the answers to multiple-choice questions. Please refer to the Instructors' Manual for complete details on all the assessment features.
  • Blackboard Resources for Students Blackboard Learn Other institutions have created numerous tutorials and tip sheets. Following are links to some of the best available. (Please note that any references to account information, course setup, contacting the helpdesk, etc., on these pages refers to the originating institution, not to Hamilton College.) Hudson Valley Community College has extensive tutorials for students, both PDF and video. USC has produced a several Blackboard Student How-to Movies for students (scroll down below the instructor videos). Montclair State University has a nice set of Documentation and Videos for both students and instructors. Lakeland Community College has produced a five-minute Introduction to Blackboard 9 for students. Framingham State College Student Guide is a 50-page PDF chock-full of great information. And don't forget the User's Manual, accessible from any course (via the Tools area).   
  • Blackboard Section Merge Request Blackboard Learn Faculty have the option of requesting that multiple sections of the same course be merged into one course space in Blackboard (these will remain separate sections in WebAdvisor). (Please note that all cross-listed course sections are already merged when course and enrollment information is downloaded nightly from WebAdvisor to Blackboard.) If multiple sections are merged, groups will be created within the remaining section which reflect the original enrollments as they appear in WebAdvisor. There are several issues to consider when deciding whether to merge sections: Merging sections is an advantage when the same materials will be posted for all sections of a course. All students will have access to the same course space. One important issue to be aware of is that, if students from multiple sections are combined into a single section, they will all appear in the same gradebook; it is not possible to have multiple gradebook files in a single course space. If you will be giving out different assignments to the different sections or need to have a different curve in each section, then you will not want to have the sections merged. If necessary, one can create "Smart Views" which will filter students from different sections into different Grade Center views (especially handy if you have TAs or graders). You can use the new section groups as the basis for these Smart Views. One can also use the new section groups to send e-mail to selected groups from the Send E-mail page. Each group has its own e-mail, drop box and discussion board capability. If you decide not to have multiple sections merged but still need to post the same documents to all sections, it is now easier to do that with the Copy/Move option in the Edit menu (for individual items or folders) or the Copy Course feature in the Control Panel (for entire course areas). You can use these features to copy material from a previous course to a new one or from one section to another. If the different sections of a course to be merged have different instructors (for example, in a team-taught course), you will need to contact Blackboard support directly (x4877 or e-mail blackboard@hamilton.edu.) Section mergers may take up to two business days to be completed after the request is submitted.
  • Blackboard Sign-Up Tool Blackboard Learn Although Blackboard does not have a full-fledged scheduling system within itself, we do have a third-party tool that will allow the creation of time slots which students can sign up for – a system which can be used, for example, for scheduling advising appointments.  Anecdotal evidence has shown that online sign-ups encourage more students to commit to an appointment time than if they had to make a special trip to sign up at your office door. The following instructions will use advising appointments in the advisor spaces as the main example, but this tool is available in any course space and can be used for any purpose, such as signing up for oral exams.  If you need to have students sign up for project-oriented small groups, you can use the Blackboard group set functions (see documentation on our web site). Go to the content area where you would like the appointment slots to appear (for example, the Appointments area of your advisor space).  Here’s a tip:  for ease of management, create a folder to contain all the time slots and call it (for example) “Fall 2010 Advising Appointments.”  Turn Edit Mode On and select “Create Folder” under the “Build” menu button.  
  • Blackboard Tutorials for Faculty Blackboard Learn Several institutions have created wonderful tutorials and videos. Following are links to some of the best available. (Please note that any references to account information, course setup, contacting the helpdesk, etc., on these pages refers to the originating institution, not to Hamilton College.) Blackboard has a new On-Demand Learning Center with video tutorials of many processes. Hamilton has a subscription with Lynda.com, an online software training site which has a large number of Blackboard tutorials. Please contact the Help Desk (4181) to get a user name and password for this site. Hudson Valley Community College has a large set of online tutorials, both PDF and video. Florida Atlantic University has an extensive Blackboard tutorial, broken down into easily-followed steps. USC has produced a number of Blackboard Instructor How-to Movies for both faculty and students. The University of Texas at Austin has a comprehensive set of Blackboard Tutorials for version 9. Montclair State University has a nice set of Documentation and Videos for both instructors and students. Southwestern College Online Learning Center has produced a great set of PDFs on various features of Blackboard version 9. University of Illinois-Chicago has a good set of documentation including Quick Start Guides and short videos. And don't forget the Instructor's Manual, accessible from any course (via the Control Panel).
  • Common Blackboard Problems and Their Solutions Blackboard Learn A number of issues in Blackboard have workarounds described below. You may also wish to check the section on browser-related issues if you don't see your problem here. I can't open PDFs anymore; I'm getting an error message about a missing plugin (Macintosh users only). I've lost the left-hand course menus! All I see are Announcements. The Virtual Classroom seems to load, but then logs me off. I can't see the right-hand scroll bar in my Grade Center (IE only). I'm trying to use weighted grades and I'm getting some error message about Grading Periods. I can't see the last student in my Grade Center. My student is having trouble submitting (uploading) an assignment. I'm having trouble submitting a paper via SafeAssign's Direct Submit tab. I can't copy or paste text in Blackboard anymore! I don't have an option in the Text Editor tools for the Math Editor. I can't open PDFs anymore; I'm getting an error message about a missing plugin (Macintosh users only). This error affects only Macintosh users who are using a recent version of Firefox or Safari. Due to changes in these browsers, PDF documents no longer display within the Blackboard frame. They can be opened just like Microsoft Office documents, however, as long as the browser is set up to download the document first. This setting needs to be changed by the instructor for every PDF. If you are the instructor, you will need to do the following for every file (only if the document was originally uploaded using the "Create File" option in the Build Content menu, instead of the "Create Item" option): Turn Edit Mode to On and go to the item which is the PDF. Click the double drop-down (chevron) next to it and select Edit from the pop-up menu. On the Edit File page, in section 1, look for "Open in New Window" and select Yes. Click Submit. Return to top I've lost the left-hand course menus! All I see are Announcements. This is actually a feature, although it does catch many people by surprise. If you look down the left-hand side of the Announcements area, you will see a small tab sticking out. This is the "Show/Hide Menus" tab, and if you click on it, the course menus will reappear. On occasion, this tab seems to get accidentally clicked into the "Hide" state. The point of this feature is that you can collapse the left-hand menus to get more room on the screen for the material you are looking at. Return to top The Virtual Classroom seems to load, but then logs me off. The solution for this problem is to force the browser to prompt you to accept the certificate to trust the publisher. Close the Virtual Classroom window (if it didn't close itself), then click the link on the "Launching Virtual Classroom" page that says "Click here for an accessible version." Wait for the message that asks you if you want to accept content from the publisher, and click "Yes." If you see a second message asking if you want to trust the certificate, also answer "Yes." Return to top I can't see the right-hand scroll bar in my Grade Center. This is a problem with Internet Explorer 8 only. To fix this, go to the Tools menu of the browser and select "Compatibility Mode." Agree to view all content in compatibility mode, and then the right-hand scroll bar should reappear.  Note:  the right-hand scroll bar will not appear in any browser until there are enough columns in the Grade Center to make scrolling necessary. Return to top I'm trying to assign final grades and I'm getting some error message about Grading Periods. You are working with the Grade Center and you receive a message which looks something like: blackboard.persist.PersistenceException: Unable to generate id. The provided key value is invalid: blackboard.platform.gradebook2.GradingPeriod - - {2} For reference, the Error ID is 3924d6b8-9eb7-4afb-9581-cf7502061e26. Are you using Safari on a Macintosh? If so, then the answer is to (a) use Firefox; or (b) add a grading period. We don't know why Safari is behaving this way, but this seems to only happen with Safari on Macs. Return to top I can't see the last student in my Grade Center. You can't seen the last student in your class, and if you re-order the Grade Center in reverse alphabetical order, you can't see the first student (who should now be at the bottom).  Fix no. 1:  This problem may be happening if the text size is too large. Go to the View menu of your browser, find the Zoom or Text Size option, and make the text smaller. You may need to reload the Grade Center for this change to go into effect. Fix no. 2:  The problem could also be related to the scroll bar setting in Windows XP. This can be fixed by changing the Windows XP scroll bar size back to 20 or smaller. Here is how to change the scroll bar setting in Windows XP: Open the Windows Control Panel, Display Properties Click the Appearance tab Click the Advanced button Select "Scrollbar" from the Item: drop-down list and change the size to < 20 (the default is 17) For Windows 7:  Go to Control Panel  Select (Appearance and) Personalization  In top right-hand search box, type "windows color"  It will bring up Personalization and a list.  Select "Change window colors and metrics".  Click on the Item Dropdown (default says Desktop) and select "Scrollbar" and change to a value less than 20. Return to top When I click on a link to open a document, I see a Windows Security dialog asking for user name and password. This problem affects only Internet Explorer 8; therefore, one of the solutions is to use a different browser (Firefox or Chrome). Other solutions are: Click the Cancel option twice (there will be another dialog box that pops open when Word starts to open). Enter your user name and password twice (in each of the two security windows). This should stop the security dialog from opening for subsequent documents. Return to top My student is having trouble submitting (uploading) an assignment. You student attempts to submit an assignment and receives an error message with a long error id number and a message telling you to contact the System Administrator. This is probably caused by the name of the file containing some character other than letters, numbers, underscores or hyphens. Ask the student to rename the file with a shorter name with no special characters (no commas, extra periods, pound signs (#) or other non-letter, non-numeric characters). If this does not work, then empty the browser cache (Internet Explorer: Tools, Delete Browsing History, delete temporary internet files; or Firefox: Tools, Clear Private Data, make sure Cache is checked) and submit the file again. Return to top I'm having trouble submitting a paper via SafeAssign's Direct Submit tab. You are attempting to submit a paper to be checked and receive an error message stating that you are not logged on. This seems to affect Macintosh users and the solution here is to "enable third-party cookies." How to do this depends on your system and which browser you use: If you are using Firefox, then it's Preferences, click the Privacy tab, check Accept Cookies from Sites and keep until they expire. If you are using Safari, then it's Preferences, click the Security tab, and check Accept Cookies -- Always. And if you are using a Windows computer, it doesn't hurt to check the cookies as well: Firefox: Tools -- Options, Privacy tab, check Accept third-party cookies, keep until they epire. Internet Explorer: Tools -- Internet Options, Privacy tab, set the slider bar to Medium High. Return to top I can't copy or paste text in Blackboard anymore! Firefox does not allow copying or pasting text into a text window for security reasons. You may see a link for some technical information from Mozilla.org which explains how to Set Preferences for Rich Text Editing. We recommend that users make use of the keyboard shortcuts instead: control-V on Windows; apple-V for Mac users. (In addition, the Paste command still seems to be working in the browser menu itself, under the Edit item.) Note: Copying from a Word document may result in some oddly-formatted responses, so you may want to just type directly into the text window. If you are trying to paste material into the Announcements message box, you may want to just add a course link (below the date options) to a content area where you have posted the document instead. For discussion board postings, one may attach long documents to the posts instead of typing in long replies. Return to top I don't have an option in the Text Editor tools for the Math Editor. Most features of Blackboard work with most browsers and on both Windows and Macintosh systems; however, there are a few exceptions. Following are the main cases we know about and which configuration they will work on: The Math Editor, WebEq, works on all browsers for Windows systems, but does not currently work on the Macintosh; this issue is being actively researched. The Virtual Text Box Editor works on Windows systems if one uses Internet Explorer or Firefox. This feature also works fully on the Macintosh with Firefox; if one is using Safari, one gets the "lite" version of the text editor instead. Return to top
  • Getting Started with Blackboard Blackboard Learn Getting Started with Blackboard Creating an Announcement Automatic Class Listserv/Mailing List Put Your Syllabus On Your Course Site Adding Staff Information Creating an announcement Announcements appear on the first page of a course (unless you have set an alternate Course Entry Point). Go to the Announcement page. Click the Edit Mode switch to On (upper right corner of course). Click on the Create Announcements button. Fill out the "Subject" and "Message" fields. You have two options for dates:  Not Date Restricted (the announcement will display for the default period of one week); and Date Restricted (the announcement displays from the date chosen to the date chosen). If you would like an email to be sent to all students with a link to this announcement, then please check the "Send a copy of this announcement immediately" option. In section 3, you can directly link to specific area of the course. Click Submit and you will go back to the Announcements page. Announcements appear in the order they are created, last item created at the top.  If you would like to change that order, drag and drop the double-headed arrows to the left of the announcement. Return to Top Automatic Class Listserv/Mailing List One of the most convenient features of Blackboard is that all of your students' e-mail addresses are already in the system. This means that you can send e-mail to your class without having to look up everyone's e-mail and generate your own mailing list. To send e-mail to everyone in your class: Click on the particular course. Click on the Tools course area (on the left-hand side). Click on Send E-mail. Select the option which best fits your need. Clicking on All Users will send an e-mail to every student registered for the class; Select Users allows you to check individual users. Although you send the e-mail out from Blackboard, it goes to the students' regular Hamilton e-mail accounts, so that they can read it anywhere. Note:  The outgoing message will NOT appear in your Out or Send box, but a copy of the e-mail will be automatically sent to the sender. Return to Top Put Your Syllabus On Your Course Site Adding content to your course is easy with the templates that exist for any content area. We will use a syllabus as an example but you may add many different types of documents in the same manner (including datasets for class exercises). Click the Edit Mode switch to On (upper right of course page). Select the course area where you wish to post the document. Under the title of the area you have selected, you will see three tool buttons. The Build content button will open a menu which contains options for uploading many different types of content.  For this example, you can select "Item" under "create." Enter the Name of this item and any special instructions.  In section 2 you can Browse to wherever your syllabus is stored and select it.   Decide whether you need any date/time restrictions and click Submit. If you hover your mouse over the Create Assessment or Add Interactive Tool buttons, you will see many other options for items you can add to your course space. To see how the document will appear to students, click the Edit Mode switch to Off.  Clicking on the link to the item you just created should open up a window with the syllabus in it. Your students will now be able to access the course syllabus and print it instead of asking you for an extra copy. To modify or remove an item, click the Edit Mode switch to On. Click the "chevron" next to the item title.  This will produce a menu of all the options for this item, including Edit, Copy and Delete. The good news is that you can use this same procedure to upload any file for your course -- not just the syllabus, but articles, exam questions, bibliographies and any other material which currently exists in a standard Microsoft Office file (or other file for which your students have access to the necessary application, for example, datasets for SPSS).  Return to Top Adding Staff Information You can add information about yourself or anyone associated with your course (i.e. lab instructors, student assistants) in the Contacts area. Click the Edit Mode switch to On (upper right of course page). Click on the Contacts link in the course menu. Click on the Create Contact button. Enter your name, e-mail address, phone, office hours and other pertinent information (you may even upload your picture or create a link to a pre-existing home page). Click Submit. Return to Top
  • How to Customize a Blackboard Course Space Blackboard Learn How to Change Your Students' View of a Course Changing the default menu items: a. Click the Edit Mode switch to On (upper-right corner of page). b. Mouse over the double-headed arrow to the left of any menu item (the cursor changes to a four-pointed arrow) to drag-and-drop the item to a new place. c. Click the "chevron" to the right of any item and then select Rename Link, Hide Link or Delete (content areas which are empty will simply not appear to students). Adding new menu items: a. Click the Edit Mode switch to On (upper-right corner of page). b. In the course menu area, click the plus sign in the blue box to add a new content area, external link, course link, divider, etc. Adding or removing course tools: a. Click the Edit Mode switch to On (upper-right corner of page). b. Click on the Tools link. c. Click the "Hide Link" button to make any tools you are not planning to use unavailable to your students (for example, if you do not want students to be able to see their grades, hide the My Grades Tool). Change the default language and other settings: a. Go to the Control Panel area of the course. b. Click the "Customization" sub-menu to expand it and select the "Properties" option. c. Choose a new Language Pack to change the language of your course (the Enforce option will override users' settings for this course only). d. You can change the Availability of your course (you can access the course but students cannot). e. You can change the Name of the course to change the title which displays in the My Courses module. Change the menu style, add a course banner, change entry point: a. Go to the Control Panel area of the course. b. Click the "Customization" sub-menu to expand it and choose the "Style" option. c. In the "Select Menu Style" area, you can choose a button style or change button/text colors. d. In the "Select Banner" area, you can add an image to the Announcements area. e. In the "Select Course Entry Point" area, you can choose a page other than "Announcements" as the initial page of your course.
  • How to Customize Blackboard Blackboard Learn How to Customize Your Own View of Blackboard Remove old courses from your My Courses module (on the My Blackboard page): Click the little round icon in the upper right-hand corner of the module. Uncheck the Display Course and Display Announcement boxes for the courses you no longer wish to see. How to distinguish between similarly-named courses: Click the little round icon in the upper right-hand corner of the My Courses module. Check the Display Course ID box for the courses that have similar names. This will show the section numbers as well as the semester and year. How to change the modules displayed or modify the layout: Click the "Add Module" button to choose which modules you'd like on your home page. Click the "Personalize Page" button in order to choose different colors for the title bars. Mouse over the title bar (until the cursor changes to a four-pointed arrow) in order to drag-and-drop the module to a new place. In the upper-right corner of any module, click the minus sign to collapse the module listing, the restore-window sign to expand it or the "X" to remove it. Change personal information, editing and language options: In the Tools area of the My Blackboard page, click on Personal Information. Click on Edit Personal Information to change your first name or remove your middle name. Select the "Change Personal Settings" option to change your default options for the text editor, Language Pack or Page Instructions as desired. Change the appearance of the navigation area (within a course): At the top of the course menu area, select any one of the display icons to see alternate methods of displaying the menu (list, folder, or separate window). Click the hide/show tab between the navigation area and the course page to create more room for course material (or for the menu).
  • Managing Documents in Blackboard Blackboard Learn Display Mode and Edit Mode Copy or Move documents between areas or courses Other Content Menu Options(tracking views, adaptive release, review status) Adding Material to Blackboard (Documents, Links, Multiple Files, etc.) Special Instructions for Video Files Display Mode and Edit Mode The Display Mode will only show materials which students can see. If you want to add material or change anything about a course, you must be in Edit Mode. Look for the Edit Mode link (switch icon) in the upper-right corner. Click on this link to change the mode from Off to On (or vice versa). When you are done modifying the course, switch the Edit Mode to Off to return to the students' view. Content areas will appear to students only if there is course material in them. Copy or Move documents between areas or courses Do you have some course documents from a previous semester's course which you'd like to copy into this year's course space? Did you change your mind about which folder you'd like a particular document to be in? Documents may be copied from one course to another or moved from one folder to another within the same course. Here's how: Enter the course space which has the document you'd like to copy or move (remember, courses labeled unavailable or inactive can still be accessed by instructors). With Edit Mode on, go to the Content Area where your document or folder is located, click the chevron next to the content item and select Copy from the menu. You will then see a page where you can choose the destination course from a drop-down list (same as the source course if moving between areas in the same course). Click the Browse button to select the area/folder from the Course Map to which to copy or move the document. At the Remove Item after Copy option, select Yes for a Move operation or No for a Copy. Click Submit. If you have a large number of documents, external links, assessments, etc. to move from one course to another, you may wish to use the Course Copy feature instead: In the Control Panel area of the previous semester's course, under Packages and Utilities, click Course Copy. Enter the Course Id of the new course (or click Browse to find it -- this is not the title, but the dept-number-section code). Check which materials should be copied to the new course.  To copy assignments, you must select the Grade Cener as well as the content area in which the assignment is deployed.  To copy quizzes or tests, you must select the Grade Center, the content area in which the quiz or test is deployed, and the Test, Surveys and Pools option.  To copy discussion boards, blogs, journals or wikis, you must copy the Grade Center if any of these items have the "Graded" option turned on.  There is no need to copy enrollments; these are supplied automatically. Click Submit; depending on the size of the files, this may take a few minutes. You will receive a Confirmation message. Other Content Menu Options (tracking views, adaptive release, review status) In addition to the Edit, Copy, and Delete options of a content item's popup menu, you will see a number of other options. These other features include: Statistics Tracking -- see which students accessed this document and when Adaptive Release -- control who sees this document and under what circumstances, by setting rules related to grades, dates, group membership, or review status  (see additional instructions under Monitoring Student Progress) Review Status -- have your students mark when they have read a document (may be tracked in the Performance Dashboard, more information under Monitoring Student Progress) User Progress -- track adaptive release and review status for the entire class Adding Material to Blackboard Uploading a document (or any other type of file, such as a dataset) Turn Edit Mode to On. Go to the area where you'd like to post the document. Hover over the "Build Content" tool button and select the "Item" option from the flyout menu. Enter the name and any instructions in the Text box. Under (2), Content, click the Browse button to navigate to your file. Click Submit. (One may optionally set display from/to dates.)  Adding an Announcement Turn Edit Mode to On. Go to the Announcements area. Click the Create Announcement button at the top. Enter Subject and Message and then click Submit (one may also set Date Display options, include a link to another part of the course, or send an email). Adding an External Link (URL) Turn Edit Mode to On. Hover your mouse over the "Build Content" button and select the "URL" option. Enter the name of the website and the URL (it is often easier to copy and paste it from a browser window opened to that site). Enter information about the website in the Text box. Click Submit. (One may also choose whether to open in a separate window or to track students' views.)   Adding a Link to a YouTube video Turn Edit Mode to On. Hover your mouse over the "Build Content" button and select the "YouTube Video" option under Mashups (righthand side). Search for the video you want. Preview videos from the results returned and click Select when you've found the video you want. And any description desired, select options and click Submit.   Uploading a number of files at once (for folders of Word or PDF files) Compress the files into a single "zipped" file using Stuffit or Windows Compressed Files. Go to the "Files" area of the Control Panel. Hover your mouse over the "Upload" button and select the "Upload Package" option. Click the Browse button to navigate to your zipped file. Click Submit. (Folder structure will be preserved after upload.) Special Instructions for Video Files Putting video clips in Blackboard For copyright compliance, clips should be no longer than three minutes; check with the Library for specifics. The recommended format is Quicktime; search the ITS Support site using the keyword "compression" for details or call 4877 for help in compressing digital video. Turn Edit Mode to "On" and go to the content area where you'd like to upload the file. Hover over the "Build Content" tool button and select the "Video" option. After selecting the file, you can check the playback with the "Preview" tool. Click Submit. When students access the video clip, they will need to wait a few moments for the file to load; then they may click the Play button on the controller bar. Uploading Streaming Media For video clips longer than three minutes, one should upload the file to our Streaming Server and create a link to the file in Blackboard.  This will result in a much better viewing experience for students, since the Blackboard server is not set up to handle large video files.  For assistance, please contact the Instructional Technology Services team (x4877).
  • Monitoring Student Progress in Blackboard Blackboard Learn Performance Dashboard Adaptive Release Review Status Early Warning System Performance Dashboard Located in the Control Panel area, Evaluation section, the Performance Dashboard tool provides a window into all types of user activity in a course. All users enrolled in the course are listed, with pertinent information about that user's progress and activity in the course. An instructor may check last course access, review status and discussion board postings, adaptive release, early warning system and grades for each student. This page may be easily printed. Adaptive (Conditional) Release Adaptive Release of Content provides controls to release content to users based on a set of rules provided by the instructor. The rules may be related to availability, date and time, individual users and user groups (such as course Groups), scores or attempts on any Gradebook item, or review status of another item in the course. An Adaptive Release rule consists of a set of criteria that defines the visibility of a content item to users. Criteria are the parts that make up the rule. For example, date and membership are two types of different criteria. Each content item may have multiple rules, and each rule may consist of multiple criteria. To view an item, a user must meet all of the requirements of the rule. This means that if a rule has multiple criteria, the user must meet all criteria before the item is available. For example, the Instructor may add an Assignment to a course. One rule for this Assignment may allow all users in Group A to view the Assignment after a specific date. This rule would consist of Membership criteria and Date criteria. Another rule for this Assignment may allow all users in Group B to view the Assignment once they had completed Homework #1. This rule would consist of Membership criteria and Gradebook criteria. Here are the basic steps: Go to the Content area containing the item for which you wish to set up adaptive release rules. Click the Edit Mode switch to On. Click the chevron next to the item and select the Adaptive Release option. Choose criteria based on membership, date range, gradebook item and/or review status. Click Submit. The Instructor may check the status of student reviews on the "Adaptive Release and Review Status: User Progress" page or on the Performance Dashboard. One may add, modify or remove rules in the Adaptive Release Advanced area. Review Status The Review Status tool allows the Instructor to track user review of specific content items. Once the Instructor enables the tool for an item, each student tracks their progress. A Mark Reviewed button appears on the item when the user opens the Content Area. After reviewing the item, the student selects this button to mark it Reviewed. Go to the Content area containing the item whose review status you wish to set. Click the Edit Mode switch to On. Click the chevron next to the item and select the Set Review Status option. Click Enable and click Submit. The Instructor may check the status of student reviews on the "Adaptive Release and Review Status: User Progress" page or on the Performance Dashboard. Early Warning System The Early Warning System is an expansion of and addition to the Performance Dashboard which allows instructors to monitor student performance, based on measures set up by the instructor. This feature has two parts: an additional column in the Performance Dashboard (in the Evaluation area of the Control Panel); and the Early Warning System configuration page (also in the Evaluation area) where rules can be set up to flag at-risk students. Rules for determining who is an at-risk student may be set in the Early Warning System configuration pages, within the Evaluation area. Current options are grade-based rules, days since last course access, or rules based on missed due dates for assignments. Once the rules have been created, they are applied by clicking the Refresh button. Click the name of the rule to see results of which students (if any) have triggered the rule. Students may be notified of impending problems by using the Notify tool (message text may be modified); the system also keeps a notification log of warnings sent.
  • New Blackboard Interface Blackboard Learn Navigating the New Interface Blackboard Learn 2012 features an updated interface which is cleaner, easier to navigate and faster to use.  Here are the three things you need to know to get started: Turn Edit Mode On; this will enable you to see all the tools available to instructors.  This setting is located in the upper-right corner of every course.   Hover your mouse (cursor) over what you want to work on; this will reveal all tools for that item.  In the new interface, tools don't all appear on the page at once; mousing over an item will reveal the tools associated with it. Note the reordering tool which appears to the left and the "action button" which appears to the right when you mouse over any item on the page.   Click the "action button" to reveal additional menus of tools and options.  This is the same technique as in the previous version of Blackboard, but the shape of the action button has changed slightly. This pop-up menu appears only when you click the "action button" to the right of the item you want to work with. And one more nifty new feature Quick course-to-course navigation: click the “action button” located next to the “home” icon to quickly jump from one course to the next: The New Course Home Page
  • Online Assignments in Blackboard Blackboard Learn The Assignment Manager is not a separate tool within Blackboard, but rather a tight linkage between content areas and the Grade Center. This capability will be of special interest to those who give daily or weekly assignments and would like the convenience of assigning, grading and returning material in a completely electronic fashion. In addition, you will always have copies of the original and graded versions of the essays. Here's how it works: The key to this process is to create an item of the type "Assignment." Go to the area in which you would like the assignment to appear (for example, the Assignments area). Click the "Edit Mode" link in the upper-right-hand corner to switch into the Instructor's view of the page. Hover your mouse over the "Create Assessment" tool button and select the "Assignment" option. You should now see the Create Assignment template. Fill in the fields as desired and click Submit. You do not need to create a column in the Grade Center; one will be created automatically for each item of the Assignment type.   Click Display Mode to toggle back to the student's view of the course. When students click on the link for this assignment, they will see a page where they can download any files you have attached, enter comments, upload files of their own, and either Save an interim stage or Submit the completed assignment.    When you look in the Grade Center, you will see a column has been automatically entered for your new assignment. To grade this assignment, click the cell for each student, click the chevron, and select "View Grade Details." To access the student's work, click the "Open Attempt" button on the right of the Attempts area.  Files can be printed or downloaded for grading.  Enter the grade and any feedback or notes to yourself, upload the corrected file (to be "handed back") or clear the student's attempt if necessary.   Assignment files can be downloaded (either from selected students or all students together) in a zipped file which can then be unzipped to work on them off-line or away from campus. Each file will have the student's user id as part of the name (handy for all those files named Essay 1). Files can them be deleted when necessary. In the Grade Center, click the chevron next to the title of the assignment in the column header for these features.
  • Student-Centered Tools in Blackboard Blackboard Learn Creating Small Groups Peer and Self-Assessment Blogs, Wikis, Journals Group File Exchange Creating Small Groups If you plan to break your class into smaller groups to work on group projects, Blackboard provides the tools to create a group and enable group tools such as e-mail, discussion boards, blogs, wikis and many more. Instructors can create groups or sets of groups and manually enroll students or allow students to enroll themselves.  Group sets can facilitate groups of students working on small-group projects.  In addition, students can create and personalize their own groups.  Groups can work on assignments together and the group can receive a single grade for the assignment (or individual grades, if desired). In the Control Panel area, expand the sub-menu under "User and Groups" and select Groups. Under "Create Single Group," you can select Manual Enroll or Self-Enroll. Under "Create Group Set," you can select Self-Enroll, Manual Enroll or Random Enroll. The options will differ slightly for these different types of groups, but the basic information required is: Enter a Group Name and any description Select which functions you would like the group to have. Select other options as needed. Click Submit. Once the group has been created, students can reach it from either the Groups page or the Tools area.  Only instructors and group members can access their particular group. If you need to modify a group already created, click the Edit Mode switch to On, then click the chevron next to the group's title and select Edit. Peer and Self-Assessment This is a new tool to allow students to evaluate each others' work.  To set this up: Go to the area of the course in which you would like students to access the assessment (for example, the Assignments area). Click the Edit Mode switch to On, then select "Self and Peer Assessment" from the "Create Assessment" button menu. Fill out information as desired; click Submit (this will automatically add an item to the Grade Center). Now click the Create Question button on the following page and enter questions and model answers for the students to use in the assessment. You can also preview the evaluation and submission samples. You can access all submissions and evaluations and enter grading results in the Grade Center. For a much more in-depth discussion on using self and peer assessment, see the Self and Peer Assessment Guide courtesy of the University of Melbourne. Blogs, Wikis, Journals Blogs Blogs are an open communications tool for students to share their thoughts within a course. Blogs consist of entries by the owners and comments by the readers. There are three different types of blogs: course blogs (all enrolled users can post and comment); individual blogs (only the owner can post, all others can comment); and group blogs (for members of a defined group). Instructors have full access to everything and can grade blogs. Wikis Wikis are used to create a collaborative space within the course where all students can view, contribute, and edit content. Wikis can also be used as a resource for students to view information and content relevant to their course. Wikis can also be set up just for groups and can be graded. Journals A Journal is self-reflective tool for students. Only the student and the instructor are able to view journal entries. Students can enter text, images, links, multimedia, mashups, and attachments. Journals can be graded in the Grade Center. Group File Exchange Every course section in Blackboard has an automatically-created group in the "Groups" area which has a title such as "ITS_100_01_FA2011_Group". It contains all the students for that section and is automatically updated as students add and drop courses. These automatically-created groups can be used for a number of different purposes, such as group file exchange, viewing sub-groups of students in the Grade Center, and for group assignments. For example, if you need an area in Blackboard for students to share files, just tell your students to: Click on "Groups" in the Tools area. Click on the name of the group that looks like a course id and ends in "Group." Click on the "File Exchange" tool in the Group Tools area. Click the "Add File" button and browse to the file to upload. Click "Submit." All students in the course will be able to access all the files in this File Exchange area.
  • Suggestions for Online Test-Taking Blackboard Learn If you are having trouble using Blackboard (especially from home), check the following issues that might resolve your problems: Do not use the AOL browser for working in Blackboard. If you get your internet connection through AOL, then use AOL just to establish a connection to the Internet. Then, minimize the browser window and use some other browser to access Blackboard. There should be a default browser installed on you computer (Internet Explorer on Windows, Safari on the Macintosh) or you can download Firefox for free. Do not use a very slow telephone dial-up Internet connection. If that is what you have at home, use one of the public labs instead. Blackboard is a graphics-intensive application. Be sure to run virus and anti-spyware software regularly. Try rebooting the computer to free up system resources. Enable cookies (check the privacy settings of your browser). Check that Java is installed and enabled (free plugins are available from http://java.sun.com). If you are using Internet Explorer or any other browser with popup blocking turned on, you may need to enable popups from the Blackboard site. Click the yellow message bar in IE or set the options in the Preferences/Tools. You may need to disable your personal firewall software (Norton or McAfee). To eliminate messages about mixed secure and insecure content in IE: Go to Internet Options; Security; Custom Level; Make sure that at "Miscellaneous," "Display mixed content" is set to "Enable." To eliminate spurious trusted site messages in IE: Go to Internet Options; Security; Trusted Sites; List your site as Trusted and uncheck "Require server verification." In Windows XP/SP2 and IE, go to Internet Options; Security; Trusted Sites; Custom Level. Make sure that at "Miscellaneous," "web sites in less privileged web content zone." is set to Enable. Not all features of Blackboard work equally well with all combinations of platforms and browsers. The three biggest problem areas are the Text Box (WYSIWYG) editor; the Math Editor (WebEQ); and the Collaboration tools (Virtual Classroom and Chat sessions). For best results, use a Windows system with Internet Explorer, if possible. Do not resize (minimize or maximize) the browser window while taking a test. Do not open another window and surf the net while taking a test; if a website opens back into the Blackboard window, your work will be lost. Do not take a quiz with other applications running in the background, for example, watching movies, listening to music, sending e-mail or running IM. Do not start a quiz and then walk away for several hours; the Blackboard system has a timeout for security purposes and will end your session (if idle) after one hour. Remember to click Submit (not Save) when done! The Save button will save an interim version of your work, but only the Submit button will allow your work to be graded. For further information, or if you still have questions, please contact blackboard@hamilton.edu, or call 4877.
Buying
  • Purchasing Computers Buying Purchasing Computers This page provides resources and guidelines for computer purchases by students and employees of Hamilton College. If you are interested in purchasing a new computer, Hamilton College works with both Apple and Dell to offer computer configurations guaranteed to work in our campus network environment at discounted prices. Online Computer Stores With Academic Pricing For Hamilton College Apple Dell Apple For Hamilton Online Telephone: 315-859-4242 Dell For Hamilton Online Telephone: 1-888-987-3355 Current computer configurations provided by these vendors will meet or exceed our recommended NEW system requirements.   Table of Contents General Recommendations for Students Microsoft Office for Employees Recommended NEW computer specifications Recommendations for PRE-OWNED computers General Recommendations For Students Word Processing Many academic programs require the use of Microsoft Office (Word, Excel, and PowerPoint) for course work. It is therefore highly recommended that you purchase this software with your new computer, or that you purchase and install it on your existing computer. Please note that this software is not provided by Hamilton College. It can be purchased at the College Bookstore, from computer vendors, from many retail stores, and web sites.  Be sure to ask for an academic discount when purchasing this software. The software product to choose is Microsoft Office Professional (Academic) 2010 (Windows) or Microsoft Office Mac 2011 (Academic)  (Macintosh). Virus Protection All computers on the Hamilton College network are required to have up-to-date anti-virus software installed.  New computers will typically come with a preinstalled trial version of anti-virus software.  We recommend you either purchase the full version of that software, other anti-virus software of your choice,  or install the free anti-virus products we fully support.  Please contact the Help Desk if you have any questions or need assistance (315-859-4181). Backup Drive Hamilton College provides students with a modest amount of server storage.   While the space provided is usually sufficient for storing documents, it is not sufficient for storing backup copies of music, video, photos or exceptionally large project files.  Students may request additional space for academic purposes.  For backing up all your critical files (academic and personal) we recommend purchasing an external hard drive. When selecting a drive, please be certain to confirm it is compatible with the operating system on your computer (Windows or Macintosh).  Some external drives are designed for rugged use (they come with a protective rubberized bumper).  If the drive you are considering does not come with this level of protection, it is wise to purchase a neoprene sleeve or similar protective pouch for the drive.  Lastly, some new computers come with USB 3 and/or Firewire 800 ports.  You may want to purchase a drive that can take advantage of the faster file transfer rates these ports can deliver. Printers Printers are available for student use  in public computing labs located on both sides of campus.  Most are located in academic buildings that are open to students until late at night or, in some cases, all night.  There are no public printers available in any of the residence halls.  Approximately half of our students elect to bring their own printer.  Networking Hamilton College has secure wireless network access available in all campus buildings and most outdoor areas. Connectivity to the wireless network is supported by 802.11b or 802.11g wireless cards, which are available in most new Windows and Macintosh laptops. Please note that the installation of a personal wireless access point (Apple Airport Station, wireless router, etc.), is strictly prohibited on campus. Network jacks are included in all the residence hall rooms for those who want to use a network (Ethernet) cable.  The College does not provide cables. Back to Top   Microsoft Office for Employees Through the College's license agreement with Microsoft,  employees can purchase a license for Microsoft Office at a special discounted rate. For more information, contact ITS at 315-859-4169 or by e-mail at its@hamilton.edu. Hamilton College provides Sophos Anti-Virus free of charge to employees and their households for use on their personal computers. Back to Top Recommended NEW System Requirements ITS recommends that new computers be configured to match or exceed the recommendations listed below. PLEASE NOTE: The minimum system requirements in the last column represent the bare minimum to connect to our network and support our standard software. Platform Recommended Minimum Windows Intel Core i5 or i7 processor, 2 GHz or faster Dedicated 256 MB graphics card Windows 7 Home Premium At least 3 GB DDR3 RAM 250 GB Hard Drive or greater DVD/CD-RW optical disk drive Built-in Gigabit Ethernet Card 802.11n Wireless Card 1.5 GHz Dual Core Processor or faster. Integrated HD video card Windows 7 Home Premium At least 2 GB DDR2 or DDR3 RAM 120 GB Hard Drive or greater CD-ROM/DVD Drive 10/100 Ethernet card 802.11 g/n Wireless Network card Macintosh Intel Core i5 or i7 Processor, 2 GHz or faster. Dedicated 256 MB graphics card Mac OS X 10.6 At least 3 GB RAM 250 GB Hard Drive or greater Superdrive Built-in Gigabit Ethernet card 802.11n Airport Wireless Card. Intel Core 2 Duo Processor or newer Mac OS X 10.5 or newer At least 2 GB RAM Integrated HD graphics card 120 GB Hard Drive or greater Combo CD-ROM/DVD-Drive 10/100 Ethernet Card 802.11 g/n Airport Wireless Ca Back to Top Recommendations for PRE-OWNED computers If your computer is less than four years old, it should work in our network environment and support our standard software (e.g. Web browsing, document authoring.) Please keep in mind that most computers have a four-year lifespan, after which major components (e.g. hard drive, optical drive) are more likely to fail.  These components can sometimes be replaced, though they may be expensive and difficult to come by, especially in much older computers.  Also note that computers older than one year are not typically covered under warranty, making accidental damage costly to repair. If you choose to bring a pre-owned computer to campus, please ensure the computer meets or exceeds the specifications listed below.  It is important to note that a computer that meets these specifications should not be expected to meet a student's needs for all four years. Platform Specifications Windows 1.5 GHz Intel Core Duo or AMD Athlon 64 Processor or newer At least 2 GB of RAM Windows XP, Vista Home Premium, or 7 Home Premium 120 GB Hard Drive or greater Built-in ethernet card Wireless card (optional but recommended) Mac 1.8 GHz Intel Core Duo processor or newer At least 2 GB of RAM OS X 10.5 or newer 100 GB Hard Drive or greater Built-in ethernet card Wireless card (optional but recommended) Back to Top If you have further questions about a personal computer purchase, please contact the ITS Help Desk at 315-859-4181 or by e-mail.
Camtasia Studio
  • Camtasia Studio 7 Instructions Camtasia Studio Table of Contents Recording an In-Person Interview Recording a Videoconference Interview HillConnect configuration Initiating a chat Recording an Interview Notate Bene Recording an In-Person Interview 1. Open Camtasia Studio 7. 2. Go to Tools – Record Camera in the top menu bar. 3. Click Properties - Camera Control to adjust zoom, exposure, and other options.  Click OK once finished. 4. Position the camera so the interviewer and interviewee are nicely framed. 5. Click Start Recording to begin recording. 6. Click Stop Recording once the interview is complete. 7. A window will prompt you to assign the file a name and location. Create a New Folder with the client’s name either on the Desktop or in My Documents.  Give the file an appropriate name, i.e. Fondak11282010 H. Click Save. 8. Close Camtasia Studio 7, choosing to NOT save the Untitled project. 9. Double-click the file in the folder to play it back. Recording a Videoconference Interview 1. HillConnect configuration a. Ensure that the client has installed the Google Voice and Video Chat Plugin.  Electronic documentation for the process is available on the ITS website.  Search keyphrase “Career Center.” b. Ask the student to sign into HillConnect (Webmail) and activate Chat. c. Open your web browser of choice, e.g. Firefox, Internet Explorer, Chrome.  Navigate to HillConnect via My Hamilton or http://hillconnect.hamilton.edu. d. The chat application is located in the left column below your labels.  Click the “ “ icon to the left of your full name. e. Click Sign into Chat.  This option will not be available if you are already logged into chat. f. Click the Add field and type the name of the student with whom you wish to chat. g. When their name is displayed in the menu that appears, hover over it with your mouse and move it over to the menu that appears beside the list of names. h. Select the Invite to Chat option. i. Click Send Invite in the window that pops up. j.  Instruct your client to accept the (instantaneous) invitation. k.  You should see their name prefixed by a colored button in your Chat list.   B. Initiating a Chat a. Mouse over the name of the client in your list with whom you wish to chat and click the Chat button in their contact “card.” b. Click the Camera icon in the chat window to begin the videoconference. c. The videoconference will fully initiate when they click the Accept button in their chat window. 2. Recording an Interview a. Open Camtasia Studio 7. b. Click Tools – Record the Screen. c. In the pop-up toolbar, choose Full Screen and ensure that Audio is on. d. Click the downward-facing triangle to the right of the Microphone. e. Ensure Record System Audio is checked. f. Click rec to record. g. Return to the HillConnect chat and select the nested picture button in the chat window to enter Full Screen mode. h. Press F10 when you are finished recording. i. Click the nested picture button in the upper-left-hand corner to exit Full Screen mode. j. You may review the video in the Preview window using the standard tools at the bottom of the screen. 1. Click Shrink to Fit to see the entire screen. k. Click Produce when you're finished reviewing to save the file. l. Enter appropriate text in the File Name field.  Choose an appropriate, easily-accessible location to save the recorded file. 1. Recommendations: A folder either on the Desktop or in My Documents. m. Click Save. n. The Production Wizard window will appear.  Select HD in the pull-down menu. o. Click Next. p. Re-enter the name you chose in Step 12. q. Save the video to the same location that you chose in Step 12. r. Uncheck Show production results and Play video after production. s. Click Finish. t. Your computer will render the file. u. The video will be available in the folder in which you saved the file. Notate Bene 1. The videos you save will consume a great deal of space on your hard drive.  Please be sure to keep track of your videos regularly, i.e. Delete them once-monthly.  2. Should you wish to preserve videos or share them with clients, please contact Ted Fondak (tfondak@hamilton.edu) for instructions.
Cell Phone
  • Employee Cellular Plan Cell Phone Hamilton College Cellular Phone Guidelines Hamilton College recognizes that cellular telephone service is a valuable tool for business purposes. However, use of cellular phone service is not intended to replace College telephone service. Cellular phones are available for conducting College business if approval has been granted to you by your Deprtment Supervisor, a Senior Staff Member and the VP of Information Technlogy Services. Please contact The Business Office at x4315 to obtain Policies and Procedure Information or view it on the Hamilton College Business Office web page. Network Information Hotline: 315-859-4050 Phone (from on-campus): x5NET (x5638) Fax: 315-859-4185 You can e-mail the Network Services Team at: ns@hamilton.edu
  • Employee Phone Services Cell Phone Employee Phone Services Employee Phone Instructions Employee Voicemail Employee Cell Phones Questions: telephone@hamilton.edu or 315-859-4160
  • Google Sync versus IMAP Cell Phone Return to configuring my mobile device Return to HillConnect Homepage Sync Supports push technology which delivers data to your device as new data is available. There is a single setup for e-mail, calendar, and contacts. The setup is easy. Most devices support only one sync account. Depending on your device, any push connection may use more power than fetching data at scheduled intervals. In some cases the difference in power usage may have a noticeable impact on your phone's battery life. To save battery life, turn off push and set device to fetch data every 30 to 60 minutes. Beta software. IMAP Supports pull technology which fetches data at a scheduled interval set by the user. One setup for e-mail and a separate setup for calendar and contacts. The setup is easy. Devices support multiple accounts. Pull technology allows you to set the interval to fetch new data and therefore improving your phone's battery life.
  • HillConnect Resources Cell Phone Hamilton's e-mail system is HillConnect, powered by Google. The information provided below is designed to address some of the more common questions related to using your e-mail account at Hamilton College.  If you have specific questions regarding the functionality or your account (e.g. how to create "groups"), please try using the Help feature  built-in to your HillConnect account (click on the "gear" icon in the upper right corner of your HillConnect e-mail screen).  If you find that to be insufficient, please contact the ITS Help Desk at 315-859-4181. Topics Covered Requesting an e-mail account Activating your HillConnect account Accessing your e-mail via the Web Using your HillConnect account About the HillConnect environment Changing your existing password Forgotten password Accessing your e-mail via an e-mail client application Configuring your mobile device Mass mailing lists (ListServ) Graduate E-mail Account FAQ Requesting an e-mail account New Student Accounts: ITS automatically creates e-mail accounts for students when they are admitted.  Consequently, there should never be a need for a student to request an e-mail account for their own personal use. New Employee Accounts: ITS automatically creates e-mail accounts for employees when we receive official notification from Human Resources.  New faculty accounts are created when we receive official notification from the Dean of Faculty office. Temporary Employee Accounts:  To request a temporary employee account, please complete the form found at: https://my.hamilton.edu/survey-manager/survey?id=1304.  Please notify ITS as far in advance as possible when requesting an account as there are several processes that must take place to ensure your temp has access to all the resources he/she will need. Departmental Accounts: Accounts for departmental use can be requested by contacting Debby Quayle at x4031 or by e-mail at dquayle@hamilton.edu. Organizational Accounts: Student organizations can request accounts when they register on the Student Activities web site.  If the organization elects not to register, they must have an employee/faculty sponsor. Back to top Activating Your HillConnect Account Your Hamilton e-mail account must be activated before it can be used. Instrucstions can be found at: https://my.hamilton.edu/youraccount Back to top Accessing your e-mail via the web Regardless of whether you are off campus or on campus you can check your e-mail from any computer as long as it has access to the Internet (World Wide Web). Once you are connected to the Internet, point your browser (Internet Explorer, Safari, Firefox, etc.) to http://hillconnect.hamilton.edu. You can also access your e-mail via the e-mail channel in My Hamilton at http://my.hamilton.edu. Back to top Using Your HillConnect Account About the HillConnect Environment Mac/Windows Understanding conversations Google Apps Overview Video How to set up forwarding in HillConnect From Google How to Configure Filters From Lynda.com To view these videos, please email learnit@hamilton.edu for an account Gmail Essentials Video Calendar Essentials Video Changing your existing password There are two ways to change your password. The Change Password Form allows you to enter a new e-mail password that will also become your new network password.  The Synchronize Password link will use your existing network password and will make your e-mail password match it. Change Password Form: Changes your e-mail password and your ESS/SSS at the same time. Synchronize Password Form: Changing your HillConnect Password to Match Your ESS/SSS Password.  Forgotten Password Current students and employees need to contact the ITS Help Desk at 315-859-4181 or e-mail us at helpdesk@hamilton.edu for assistance.  Instructions for other members of the Hamilton Community. Back to top Accessing your e-mail via an e-mail software application You can access your Hamilton e-mail account using e-mail client software that supports the IMAP mail protocol. ITS supports the use of Mozilla Thunderbird and provides comprehensive documentation for configuring and using Thunderbird. College-owned computers for employees have Thunderbird installed and configured for the computer's user. If you want to install and configure Thunderbird on your personal computer to access your e-mail please contact the ITS Help Desk. Thunderbird Installing & Configuring for HillConnect E-mail Outlook How to Configure Microsoft Outlook 2010 Apple Mail How to Configure Apple Mail Windows Mail How to Configure Windows Mail Others If you are comfortable using another e-mail program without support from ITS, you can use the generic settings below as a guide for setting up one of these e-mail clients. If you need further assistance, use the Help feature in the program or refer to the support webster for the respective software company. Settings for any client Configuring Your Mobile Devices Configuring my mobile device for mail, calendar, and contacts Back to top Mass mailing lists (ListServ) The Hamilton ListServ system allows you to quickly send an e-mail to a group of individuals, such as a club or organization, the entire campus community, or certain class year of students. The ListServ groups for the entire campus, all students, all faculty, all employees, or a particular class year are mass mailing lists which are subject to certain policies. For more information on mass mailing policies and how to use ListServ, see the information on our ListServ web page: ListServ Mailing List Info Back to top
Citrix
  • Installing the Citrix Client on your Computer Citrix Installing Citrix Client These instructions only pertain to your personal computer.  If you are on a public lab, or Hamilton-issued computer, the Citrix Client has been preinstalled. This process need be followed only once for any single computer in any academic year. If it has been some time since you last installed the Citrix client on your computer, you may want to update the client for the best performance. The steps for installation are: • On a Windows system: o Log into the Citrixweb page. • A page will appear that prompts you to download the client. Place a check in the check box and click Download. The file will request to be saved to your computer. Please save it to your Desktop. • Double-click on the installer when it when it has downloaded. • Once the installation has completed, click the Continue button on the web page. • Proceed to Launching Citrix Programs. • If this does not seem to be the case for you, follow the directions for updating below. • On a Macintosh system: o After logging in, you will be taken to a screen that will prompt you to download the plugin. o Click Download to download the plugin. o The Citrix Plug-in DMG file will download to your Desktop or Downloads folder. Find the file and double-click on it. o A window will open containing the plug-in installation file—double-click it to launch the installer. o Install the app by clicking Continue and Agree until you see a window that indicates the software has been installed successfully. o Once the installation has completed, click the Continue button on the web page. o Proceed to Launching Citrix Programs. o If this does not seem to be the case for you, follow the directions for updating below. • Updating your Citrix client, any system o Log into the Citrixweb page. o Near the top of the applications page, you will see a horizontal bar with some menu choices in it. The “Applications” menu will probably be dark blue, indicating that the “Applications” screen is what you are seeing. o Click on the “Preferences” menu and select “Connection Preferences”. o Under “Client settings”, click on “Run Client Detection”. • If you are immediately returned to the “Applications” screen, you should see an information message under the menu bar and above the applications list that says “The preferred client is already available on your computer.” • You’re done, there is no update or installation necessary. o If you don’t have the most current version of the client, you will be taken to a screen that allows you to download the client. • Follow the directions on that page to download the client. • If you receive a warning about the file having been downloaded from the internet, click “Save file” or “Open”, according to the screen you see. • Double click the saved file to run. • If asked if you want to allow the program to make changes to your computer, click “Yes”. o You should now be able to return to the Citrixweb Application page, and select the software you wish to use.  
  • Introduction to Citrix Citrix What is Citrix? The computers in public labs deliver some specialized software via Citrix – a client/server configuration that makes software more broadly available to students and faculty. In this model, there is a server which runs the Citrix system, and on which Windows desktop software, like SPSS or Maple, has been installed. There is also a client, a small piece of software that you, the end user, install on your personal computer. Finally, there is a web page (http://citrixweb.hamilton.edu) that allows you to tell the Citrix server which software you want to run. After that, the program you choose runs on the Citrix server, but looks like it is running on your personal computer. You get access to all the same resources you can normally access from your computer. Note that it doesn’t matter whether your personal computer is a Macintosh or Windows computer. Citrix has a client written for either of these computer platforms, and will make the necessary translation so that you can run the software from your computer - that is “from”, not “on”. The actual software, such as Exceed or Stata, never runs on your personal computer, only on the Citrix server. One of the important advantages of the Citrix server for teaching and learning is the ability of the students to access the software from their dormitory rooms, or even away from campus - any location where they can use the web to reach http://citrixweb.hamilton.edu/. It is also possible for faculty to use this URL to reach the software from home as well as the office. However, be aware that you must remain connected to the internet for your entire Citrix work session. Available Programs As of August 2011, the following programs are available through Citrix: • Exceed 14 • iThink 9 • Maple 15 • SPSS Statistics 19 • Stata 11 • StatView 5 If you would like to request a new program be added to the Citrix server, please contact the Instructional Technology Support Services team. Common Citrix Problems and their Solutions Unable to Log In If you are unable to log into the Citrix web portal, make sure your username and password are correct. If you are a student, make sure the Domain drop down menu says students.hamilton.edu.  The default domain (Hamilton.edu) is correct for faculty and other employees of the college. Keyboard Shortcuts Citrix applications are presented in a Windows environment.  Therefore, keyboard shortcuts must be those used in the Windows file management system. Macintosh users should note that the shortcut for copying is and the shortcut for pasting is . You may also use the Edit menu to select these functions. Folder Access If you are experiencing difficulties navigating through folders, make sure the folder you are trying to open does not contain the forward slash ‘/’ symbol. If it does, rename it and try accessing it again. Other ITS Citrix Webpages Registering and Logging into Citrix Installing the Citrix Client on your Computer Launching Citrix Programs, Opening and Saving Files in Citrix Programs, and Printing from Citrix Programs
  • Launching Citrix Programs, Opening and Saving Files in Citrix Programs, and Printing from Citrix Programs Citrix Table of Contents Launching Citrix Programs Opening or Saving Files in Citrix-Served Programs More on Accessing Files Printing from Citrix Programs Launching Citrix Programs Upon successfully logging into Citrix, you will see a number of programs arranged in a matrix. Please click ONCE on the program you wish to launch. NOTE: It might take up to a minute for a Citrix program to launch, during which a number of windows may appear and disappear. Do not try to interact with these windows by clicking them or closing them, as they are a part of the connection process. When you begin using a Citrix-based program, your machine may download a file named Launch.ica. This file is only needed for the current session, and can be safely deleted once you are finished with the Citrix program. You will find it wherever you have directed your web browser to save downloaded files (most commonly on your machine’s Desktop or in Documents). If the Citrix-based program does not launch automatically, double-click on the Launch.ica file to start the application. A window entitled Client File Security may open and request access to local files on your computer. Please select Full Access and Never Ask Me Again and click OK. Opening or Saving Files in Citrix-Served Applications The Citrix-served applications will give you access to your SSS or ESS storage space and other commonly-used areas for file saving. To open or save a file while using an application in Citrix, click the Open File (or Save File) icon in the button bar or File, then Open (File, then Save) in the menu bar of the application.  Click the drop-down arrow at the right end of the Look in field. You will receive a list of locations available to you. NOTE: The various icons you may be familiar with do not necessarily map to the same places as they do on your personal Windows machine. Both the My Documents and the Desktop buttons and menu choices will take you to your SSS or ESS folder, depending on your user role (student vs faculty or employee). NOTE: Remember that you are running a client/server application, which means that the application you are using is actually running on the remote Citrix server.  All file locations are specified from the point of view of the server: they are NOT on the computer you are using. As you can see in the example images on the next few pages, the save screens differ dramatically from previous version of the Citrix client: they are now optimized to hide unavailable save locations and give you ready access both to your network storage folder and your local computer.  Please refer to this guide as needed to ensure your data is properly saved in the desired location. TYPE 1   When attempting to open or save a file, you will be automatically taken to your ESS/SSS user folder. Find the appropriate file and folder and click Open. TYPE 1 To access and save to file repositories other than your ESS/SSS share, please click on the pull-down menu. Your ESS/SSS home folder is available under H:, (if applicable) your department share as M:, and the Campus share as P:.  Your local drives on the computer from which you are accessing Citrix are available and labeled with a letter followed by a dollar sign (e.g. D$ on Client).  On Windows machines, you will be able to access your local hard drive (typically C$).  On a Mac, you will be able to access your home folder (again, C$).  Other drives may be available in addition to the ones displayed. TYPE 2 Note the difference in save options on the left panel.  The tfondak$ on ‘Ess’ link (“A”) will take you to your home folder on network storage. Similarly, the C$ on ‘Client’ option (“B”) will take you to the C: drive on your Windows machine or your User Home folder on the Mac as before. These and other options are also available via the pull-down menu (“C”)on top.   TYPE 2 The My Computer link here will take you to a list of the available mounted drives.  As above, the H: drive will take you to your home folder on network storage (ESS/SSS), and C$ will take you to your hard drive on a PC and your user Home Folder on a Mac. TYPE 3 Some save dialogs may not have icons available on the left side.  Available save points are accessed via the pull-down menu at top. NOTE: the “My Documents” and “My Computer” links will connect you to your home folder on network storage (ESS/SSS).  Others will behave as discussed above. TYPE 4 Though seemingly similar to the TYPE 2 save dialog, this dialog box only has two options on the left: your ESS/SSS share and your local drive. Please choose the appropriate repository or find other options in the pull-down menu above. TYPE 4 (Exceed) This is a screenshot of a save dialog in Exceed.  You can select your save location by clicking on the Directory pulldown list.  Shown here is the p:/ directory, a direct link to the ESS folder.   TYPE 4 (Exceed) This is a screenshot of another save dialog in Exceed.  Shown here is the h:/ directory, a direct link to your home directory on either ESS or SSS.   Accessing Files Located on your local hard drive If you have a file on your local machine’s Desktop or Documents, you will need to navigate to them. On a PC:  Double-click on C$ on Client (your local hard drive), double-click Documents and Settings; open the folder with your user id; and then Desktop or Documents as appropriate. On a Mac:  Double-click on C$ on Client (it being your User Home Folder). Once there, double-click on either Desktop or Documents as appropriate.  Citrix may prompt for permission read and/or write access the local computer – you should click Allow. Located in your ESS or SSS folder If you downloaded a file to your ESS or SSS space, that location is available in the “Look in:” input box by default as “userid$”.  For example, if your user ID is bscott, you will see “bscott$” in the input box.  It is also available in the dropdown menu under “My Computer” as “userid$ on ‘SSS’ (H:)” All mapped network drives are distinguished from others by the shared-drive icon, which indicates that, although the storage area is actually located on another server, it is treated as though it were another drive on your computer.  Your home folder on ESS/SSS is universally mapped as the H: drive. Accessing files on the Software Server If the file you need is on the Software server, you may place your cursor in the File Name field, type \\Software\Academic, press , and you should see all the folders in the Academic share.  Select a file and folder by double-clicking.   A NOTE on Best Practices If you are downloading a file from Blackboard, or using a file from the Software Server, first drag and drop that file into your SSS or ESS space. Then open the folder from within your Citrix-served program from that storage space. Every time you save the file, it will save into that space, and you won’t ever lose it. If you save your work periodically during your session, you can always recover to the “most recent saved” version, and you can do that recovery from any computer on the Hamilton College network. Printing from Citrix Programs  
  • Registering and Logging into Citrix Citrix Registration If this is the first time you are trying to login to Citrix, you MUST REGISTER. The link for registration is on the bottom of the login page. Students will also need to re-register every academic year. Once you register, it will take several minutes (approximately 10) for all of the systems to be updated with your access information. Logging into Citrix Once you are registered, log in to the Citrix Web Portal. The username you should use is the same as your My Hamilton username. The password is the same password you use to access the SSS or ESS servers. If you are a student, you will need to change the Domain dropdown to students.hamilton.edu. If a matrix full of applications appears, please navigate to the Launching Citrix Programs webpage. Else, proceed to the Installing Citrix Client webpage.
Code-Free
  • Audiovisual Services (AV) Code-Free Audiovisual Services   AV Services Personnel Support Services Offered Requesting Films and Videotapes Media Use and Rental Policies Available Equipment Videotaping & Streaming Services Video and Audio Copying Services Duplication Policy and Prices Hamilton College's overall Copyright Policy Copyright Policy (AV topics)   Mission Statement The Audiovisual Services Team of the Information Technology Services department provides quality service and support to the Hamilton College Community for their teaching and multimedia presentation needs. AV Services Personnel The Audiovisual Classroom Services Team is located in Burke Library, Room 363 (within the ITS office area). Tim Hicks Director 315-859-4790 (To be Announced) Staff Assistant/ Film Specialist 315-859-4120 Graham Espe  Multimedia Systems Technician 315-859-4793 Forrest Warner Multimedia Systems Technician 315-859-4076   Support Services Offered Presentation support (sound reinforcement and data projection). Video recording or streaming of campus events (e.g. performances, lectures, and sporting events). Rental of films and DVDs for academic and non-academic use. Maintenance and support of technology enhanced (TE) classrooms. Classroom delivery of projection, video and audio equipment. Loaning of various types of audiovisual equipment. Production work including duplications, editing and off-air recordings. Video conference facilities.   To schedule Audiovisual services, use the R25 room reservation system if applicable. In the Event Options section, check the box for "require A/V support," then write details of your needs in the Comments box.  If R25 is not appropriate for your situation,  or to request equipment loans, please contact the AV Coordinator at 315-859-4120. Equipment requests should be made at least one week in advance so student workers and delivery can be scheduled. To rent movies, please contact the Audiovisual Film Specialist, 315-859-4120. Movie requests should be made 2 to 4 weeks in advance, to allow time for research and ordering. For more information about Audiovisual Classroom Services, please contact the Audiovisual Department Office, 315-859-4120. Requesting films and Videos The Burke Library and the Media Library have materials for researching videos and films available for educational purposes. Contact a Reference Librarian using the Ask a Librarian Form, or call 315-859-4735. To show to your class a DVD or videotape from the Media Library, you must check out the movie and show it yourself. Contact Linda Brennan at 315-859-4923 for information about the media collection and borrowing items. In virtually all classrooms, the AV equipment is operated via a touchscreen control. If you need help getting started, contact AV Services (x4120) to schedule a brief personal training session in your classroom. Audiovisual Services will provide a projectionist if the media item (rented or from our library) is a 16mm film or another unusual format. To request a projectionist, send a written or e-mail request to the Audiovisual Film Specialist (x4120), at least two weeks in advance. Please include the following information when requesting movie rentals: SHOW DATE(S) SHOW TIME: Indicate the start time(s) and whether you plan to show a film in the latter part of a class. LOCATION: If you plan to show media materials at a time or place different from the assigned class period or location you must make room reservations with the Registrar. TITLE: Include the full title, plus an English translation of any foreign title. Other helpful information could include director, actors, country and year, especially if there has been more than one production of the same title. FORMAT: Indicate the format (video, DVD, 16 mm film), only if one type is preferred over another. SOURCE: If you are aware of a source, please provide it. PUBLIC PERFORMANCE: Will the screening be only for the students in your class, or do you plan to advertise it or invite other viewers? Media Use and Rental Policies Most materials from the Media Library are licensed only for classroom-use showings, and cannot be advertised. A public performance license can be purchased for an open showing in many cases, with at least two weeks' advance notice. The Audiovisual Film Specialist will help you with licensing questions. Movies available on videotape or DVD from the Media Library will not be rented in another format unless the instructor can show the necessity of using the other format. The AV Department's film rental budget supports curricular needs and is to be used for classroom-use rentals only. Any academic open showings (public performace with advertisement) and all entertainment showings will require public performance licensing. The AV Film Specialist will order the rental movie and/or licensing for you, but it must be funded by the requester's department or organization. No rented materials can be put on reserve in the Media Library. For additional information about copyright compliance in the use of library materials and rented media, please read the Audiovisual Copyright Policy.    Available Equipment Contact Audiovisual Services one to two weeks in advance to request audiovisual equipment. Many of these items may be borrowed and operated by the requester. Upon request, AV will deliver equipment or provide instruction to those unfamiliar with the equipment. Some types of equipment will require set-up and operation by an AV technician.   Projection Equipment Data/ Video Projector Document Camera 16mm Projection Projection Screen  Video Equipment Camcorder, mini-DV  DVD/VHS Player Laserdisc Player   Audio Equipment Sound Systems, Various  Digital Audio Recorder Compact Disc/Audiotape Boom Box Miscellaneous Equipment Easel  Laser Pointer PowerPoint remote control (Kensington) Slide Projector (35mm)   Videotaping and Streaming Services Location Videotaping Description of Service: Videotaping of classes, lectures, athletic and special events at specified locations on campus. Operation: In most cases, AV provides operators. Restrictions: Written permission to videotape lecturers and performers (including persons affiliated with Hamilton College) must be obtained and given to the AV Department prior to the start of videotaping. Written permission from the publisher is required in order to videotape theater productions and music performances of copyrighted scripts or scores. A printable permission form for a single individual is available or blank forms can be requested from the AV office. If a faculty member wants to arrange for his class to be videotaped, please use the group form. For more information refer to Copyright Policy, Video Recording of Campus Events and Seeking Permission to Use Copyrighted Materials. Disposition of video: The videotapes or DVDs made are usually sent to the requester via campus mail within a week or so after the event. Final disposition of the recording is the responsibility of the requester.  Charges: There is no cost to the original requester for the services of a student cameraperson, or for the original recording (a mini-DV tape), or for the first three (3) copies we make for you onto a medium of your choice (usually DVD). Additional copies made for the original requester will be billed at our current rates for the cost of materials and labor. All copies made for individuals or departments other than the original requester will be billed. For information about pricing and methods of payment, please see our Duplication Policy. Or call the AV Services office at x4120. Video and Audio Copying Services   DVD Duplicating   Availability of Service: DVD duplicating service is available. Limited services availabe for copying from older formats. Call for information.  Restrictions: The AV Department reserves the right to refuse any request which constitutes copyright infringement. Charges: The cost of materials and labor for copies will be charged to a college department. For more information about our duplication policies. prices, and available methods of payment, please see our Duplication Policy. Or contact the AV Services office at x4076.   CD Duplicating Availability: Audio duplicating of materials for classroom use. Restrictions: The AV Department reserves the right to refuse any request that may constitute copyright infringement. Charges: The cost of materials and labor for copies will be charged to a college department. For more information about our duplication policies, prices and available methods of payment, please see our Duplication Policy. Or contact the AV Services office at x4076.
Compact Disc (CD)
  • Audiovisual Services Duplication Policy Compact Disc (CD) Audiovisual Services   Duplication Policy Charges for Duplication Services   AVS does not accept cash or Transfer of Funds (paper) forms.   AVS will ask requesters for an account number. We submit billings monthly through the Business Office. If you have questions about this method of payment, please contact Tim Hicks or Forrest Warner.   Students must pay for their copies in advance by writing a check, payable to Trustees of Hamilton College.   Billing Policies   For a new academic event that AVS is recording for you, up to 3 copies will be provided to the original requesting department at no charge. Any copies above and beyond these 3 copies will be charged at the rates below. Copies made for additional requesters will be billed at the rates below. The first copy of a student's senior project will be given at no charge. All additional requests will be charged at the rates below.  For media which must be shipped, a minimum $5.00 shipping and handling fee will be added.  Prices for Copies   Type of copy Any number of copies, each Sets in multiple-disc cases DVD or CD w/ case $3.00 Calculated on an individual basis Mini-DV tape, 80min. 10.00 -     Mastering, Editing and Turnaround Time   Duplication (a straight copy made by AVS with no editing work involved) 1-10 copies take 2-3 working days. 10-50 copies 3-5 working days. 50 copies 5-10 working days. Mastering footage (anything that must be edited to another format) 5-10 working days. Major projects (dance performances, theater production, multiple camera events) requiring editing work may take 3 to 4 weeks to complete. Please Note   No media carrying a Copyright will be duplicated by AVS. AVS will copy from VHS, DVD, CD, and/or digital formats. AVS no longer provides duplication service for personal work. To purchase blank media, go to the College Store or Staples, etc. Return to Audiovisual Services home
Computer Repair
  • Policies - Repair of Computer Equipment Computer Repair Policies Repair of Computer Equipment Hamilton Computer Equipment All college computer equipment is maintained on a service contract with an outside vendor. Currently that vendor is VITEC Solutions (formerly IKON Technology Services). If a hardware problem is suspected the user should call the Helpdesk (859-4181) during normal business hours for assistance. If hardware service is indicated arrangements will be made with the VITEC technician. VITEC only repairs equipment located in college offices. Repairs will not be done in residence halls or private residences. Personally Owned Equipment VITEC Solutions also provides repair for personally owned computers. Computers are repaired at a discounted commercial rate established by the vendor as part of its contract with Hamilton. There is a minimum charge for examining the equipment if repair is not needed. Equipment must be delivered to the VITEC office in the basement of the Burke Library during regular business hours. The VITEC technician will be available each day between 4 and 5 p.m. to receive equipment, or by special arrangement by calling x4171 or by e-mail (vitec@hamilton.edu). Payment for the repairs must be made by check, credit card, or money order when the equipment is picked up. Charges for repair cannot be applied to your Hamilton College account.     For questions about these Policies, Procedures, Plans and Standards, contact: David Smallen, Vice President for Information Technology 315-859-4169  
Computer Replacement
  • Policies - College Computer Equipment Computer Replacement Replacement of College Computer Equipment Most college computer equipment is replaced every four to five years (see exceptions below). The Goals of the replacement plan are to: assure that appropriate computing resources are available in public and departmental computing facilities, classrooms, and college offices to support the mission of the institution; assure that each faculty and staff member who uses computing resources in his or her position has a computer of sufficient capability to fulfill his/her responsibilities; implement minimum standards for computing equipment on campus; • encourage planning, cost-effective installation of new equipment and disposal of old equipment. Computer equipment is generally replaced during the late spring and summer months (May 1 - August 15). Replacement schedules are distributed annually to departments in early November for review and consultation with ITS staff. Hardware configurations for new equipment are prepared in March and individuals with equipment scheduled for replacement are notified of those details. Generally, individuals will have one college computer provided for them on the replacement plan. By the nature of their responsibilities, some individuals may need to have more than one computer to accomplish their responsibilities - for example, if they must use both Macintosh and Windows platforms in their work. In these cases, department heads/supervisors may request from the appropriate officer of the college (e.g., for faculty, the Dean of the Faculty) that an exception be made. Computers are essential tools for faculty, even when they are on sabbatical leave. For this reason the college permits faculty on leave to continue to use their computer during that period. Computers will be provided to faculty replacements from a pool of computers designated for this purpose. Computers are not to be purchased from departmental operating budgets. Only special funds designated for computer replacement or equipment purchases may be used for this purpose. The officers of the college approve such funds. Certain departments or individuals obtain grants or have special budget allocations for computing equipment. Computers purchased with these grants or budget allocations will not be on the replacement plan unless approval is obtained from the officers at the time the grant is received or the budget is allocated. Loaner Equipment Hamilton College employees can borrow laptop computers for up to seven consecutive days for uses related to college business. Both Macintosh and Windows laptops are available. These computers are enabled for wireless and high-speed internet access. Reservations are required, and should be made at least two business days in advance. For more information, or to make a reservation, call 4LLP (4557), or e-mail: laptop@hamilton.edu Departmental Equipment All college computers are maintained in a central inventory. At the time a computer enters the inventory the replacement cycle, if any, is designated. Computers that are an integral part of a piece of scientific equipment, or are used primarily for research purposes, are not generally part of the replacement plan. Replacement of such equipment is by a special request to the Dean of the Faculty. Old equipment is sold for residual values through Hamilton's official salvage process and must be returned to ITS.  Grant-Funded Equipment Individuals pursuing grants for computing equipment should discuss their plans with the Director, Desktop Integration Services as part of the budgeting process. Computing equipment that is acquired under grants will enter the inventory and be upgraded on a regular replacement cycle only if approved at the time of the application for the grant. Faculty members teaching in various special curricular programs are, under certain conditions, awarded research, or startup, funds. Some faculty members also have research funds available to them when they hold endowed chair positions. These funds may be used to buy additional computers and printers for office or home use, but the equipment will belong to the college. Such equipment should be ordered through the College purchasing process and will not normally be upgraded or replaced by the college, except through further use of research funds. If this equipment is to be on the computer replacement plan the faculty member must obtain a commitment, in writing, from the Dean and the Vice-President for Administration and Finance indicating this. Otherwise, the equipment will not be on a replacement cycle. Printers and Other Peripheral Equipment The college provides networked printing locations for workgroup clusters in every department. Individual desktop printers are not normally provided. Other peripheral pieces of equipment such as scanners are also generally provided in clustered locations instead of individual offices. Since these pieces of equipment are usually used intermittently, clustering allows sharing of specialized technical resources. Responsibility for Equipment Each employee is responsible for taking reasonable safety precautions in regard to Hamilton-owned computer equipment. Employees will be held responsible for damage to such equipment arising out of their negligence or intentional misconduct. Upgrades and Renewal For computer equipment on the replacement plan, ITS staff members consult with users prior to ordering and installing new equipment to determine the current and anticipated equipment needs. Computers that are replaced are returned to ITS. ITS then reassigns the computers or sells them through the campus salvage process. Hamilton will not upgrade non-Hamilton computers.   For questions about these Policies, Procedures, Plans and Standards, contact: David Smallen, Vice President for Information Technology 315-859-4169
Copyright
  • Audiovisual Services (AV) Copyright Audiovisual Services   AV Services Personnel Support Services Offered Requesting Films and Videotapes Media Use and Rental Policies Available Equipment Videotaping & Streaming Services Video and Audio Copying Services Duplication Policy and Prices Hamilton College's overall Copyright Policy Copyright Policy (AV topics)   Mission Statement The Audiovisual Services Team of the Information Technology Services department provides quality service and support to the Hamilton College Community for their teaching and multimedia presentation needs. AV Services Personnel The Audiovisual Classroom Services Team is located in Burke Library, Room 363 (within the ITS office area). Tim Hicks Director 315-859-4790 (To be Announced) Staff Assistant/ Film Specialist 315-859-4120 Graham Espe  Multimedia Systems Technician 315-859-4793 Forrest Warner Multimedia Systems Technician 315-859-4076   Support Services Offered Presentation support (sound reinforcement and data projection). Video recording or streaming of campus events (e.g. performances, lectures, and sporting events). Rental of films and DVDs for academic and non-academic use. Maintenance and support of technology enhanced (TE) classrooms. Classroom delivery of projection, video and audio equipment. Loaning of various types of audiovisual equipment. Production work including duplications, editing and off-air recordings. Video conference facilities.   To schedule Audiovisual services, use the R25 room reservation system if applicable. In the Event Options section, check the box for "require A/V support," then write details of your needs in the Comments box.  If R25 is not appropriate for your situation,  or to request equipment loans, please contact the AV Coordinator at 315-859-4120. Equipment requests should be made at least one week in advance so student workers and delivery can be scheduled. To rent movies, please contact the Audiovisual Film Specialist, 315-859-4120. Movie requests should be made 2 to 4 weeks in advance, to allow time for research and ordering. For more information about Audiovisual Classroom Services, please contact the Audiovisual Department Office, 315-859-4120. Requesting films and Videos The Burke Library and the Media Library have materials for researching videos and films available for educational purposes. Contact a Reference Librarian using the Ask a Librarian Form, or call 315-859-4735. To show to your class a DVD or videotape from the Media Library, you must check out the movie and show it yourself. Contact Linda Brennan at 315-859-4923 for information about the media collection and borrowing items. In virtually all classrooms, the AV equipment is operated via a touchscreen control. If you need help getting started, contact AV Services (x4120) to schedule a brief personal training session in your classroom. Audiovisual Services will provide a projectionist if the media item (rented or from our library) is a 16mm film or another unusual format. To request a projectionist, send a written or e-mail request to the Audiovisual Film Specialist (x4120), at least two weeks in advance. Please include the following information when requesting movie rentals: SHOW DATE(S) SHOW TIME: Indicate the start time(s) and whether you plan to show a film in the latter part of a class. LOCATION: If you plan to show media materials at a time or place different from the assigned class period or location you must make room reservations with the Registrar. TITLE: Include the full title, plus an English translation of any foreign title. Other helpful information could include director, actors, country and year, especially if there has been more than one production of the same title. FORMAT: Indicate the format (video, DVD, 16 mm film), only if one type is preferred over another. SOURCE: If you are aware of a source, please provide it. PUBLIC PERFORMANCE: Will the screening be only for the students in your class, or do you plan to advertise it or invite other viewers? Media Use and Rental Policies Most materials from the Media Library are licensed only for classroom-use showings, and cannot be advertised. A public performance license can be purchased for an open showing in many cases, with at least two weeks' advance notice. The Audiovisual Film Specialist will help you with licensing questions. Movies available on videotape or DVD from the Media Library will not be rented in another format unless the instructor can show the necessity of using the other format. The AV Department's film rental budget supports curricular needs and is to be used for classroom-use rentals only. Any academic open showings (public performace with advertisement) and all entertainment showings will require public performance licensing. The AV Film Specialist will order the rental movie and/or licensing for you, but it must be funded by the requester's department or organization. No rented materials can be put on reserve in the Media Library. For additional information about copyright compliance in the use of library materials and rented media, please read the Audiovisual Copyright Policy.    Available Equipment Contact Audiovisual Services one to two weeks in advance to request audiovisual equipment. Many of these items may be borrowed and operated by the requester. Upon request, AV will deliver equipment or provide instruction to those unfamiliar with the equipment. Some types of equipment will require set-up and operation by an AV technician.   Projection Equipment Data/ Video Projector Document Camera 16mm Projection Projection Screen  Video Equipment Camcorder, mini-DV  DVD/VHS Player Laserdisc Player   Audio Equipment Sound Systems, Various  Digital Audio Recorder Compact Disc/Audiotape Boom Box Miscellaneous Equipment Easel  Laser Pointer PowerPoint remote control (Kensington) Slide Projector (35mm)   Videotaping and Streaming Services Location Videotaping Description of Service: Videotaping of classes, lectures, athletic and special events at specified locations on campus. Operation: In most cases, AV provides operators. Restrictions: Written permission to videotape lecturers and performers (including persons affiliated with Hamilton College) must be obtained and given to the AV Department prior to the start of videotaping. Written permission from the publisher is required in order to videotape theater productions and music performances of copyrighted scripts or scores. A printable permission form for a single individual is available or blank forms can be requested from the AV office. If a faculty member wants to arrange for his class to be videotaped, please use the group form. For more information refer to Copyright Policy, Video Recording of Campus Events and Seeking Permission to Use Copyrighted Materials. Disposition of video: The videotapes or DVDs made are usually sent to the requester via campus mail within a week or so after the event. Final disposition of the recording is the responsibility of the requester.  Charges: There is no cost to the original requester for the services of a student cameraperson, or for the original recording (a mini-DV tape), or for the first three (3) copies we make for you onto a medium of your choice (usually DVD). Additional copies made for the original requester will be billed at our current rates for the cost of materials and labor. All copies made for individuals or departments other than the original requester will be billed. For information about pricing and methods of payment, please see our Duplication Policy. Or call the AV Services office at x4120. Video and Audio Copying Services   DVD Duplicating   Availability of Service: DVD duplicating service is available. Limited services availabe for copying from older formats. Call for information.  Restrictions: The AV Department reserves the right to refuse any request which constitutes copyright infringement. Charges: The cost of materials and labor for copies will be charged to a college department. For more information about our duplication policies. prices, and available methods of payment, please see our Duplication Policy. Or contact the AV Services office at x4076.   CD Duplicating Availability: Audio duplicating of materials for classroom use. Restrictions: The AV Department reserves the right to refuse any request that may constitute copyright infringement. Charges: The cost of materials and labor for copies will be charged to a college department. For more information about our duplication policies, prices and available methods of payment, please see our Duplication Policy. Or contact the AV Services office at x4076.
  • Audiovisual Services Copyright Information Copyright Audiovisual Services Copyright Policy Why Care About Copyright? Copyright Defined Fair Use Guidelines for Educators Penalties for Infringement AV Scheduling Reminders References Hamilton College's Overall Copyright Policy Displaying Copyrighted Media on Campus Video Recording of Campus Events AV Production Work Seeking Permission to Use Copyrighted Materials Why Care about Copyright? Please take a moment to review this brief document. This is the Hamilton College Audiovisual Department's interpretation of Federal Copyright Law, based on careful review of the law itself and the Fair Use guidelines. It is by no means the only interpretation. It is, however, what we believe is most ethical and appropriate for this campus. It is our hope that this will help you understand and adhere to the provisions of federal copyright law. Compliance with the federal copyright law and with this policy is the responsibility of every member of the faculty, staff, administration, and student body, and we will all share in the liability if a violation occurs. Each of us should, therefore, take a personal interest in becoming informed about how copyright law affects our work at Hamilton College. Copyright law is complicated and its interpretation is sometimes controversial. This guide has been prepared in an effort to help us all better understand what is allowable by law, and why some audiovisual services that are technically possible may be restricted. We will always remain open to receiving any new information on or interpretation of copyright law. Your support and cooperation is greatly appreciated. If you have questions or concerns about this policy, please contact Tim Hicks, x4790. General Information - Copyright Copyright grants to the author or originator the sole and exclusive privilege of multiplying copies of literary or artistic productions and publishing and selling them. Copyright protection exists for original works fixed in any tangible medium of expression, including: literary works; musical works, including any accompanying words; dramatic works, including any accompanying music; pantomimes and choreographic work; pictorial, graphic, and sculpture work; motion pictures and other audiovisual works; sound recordings. Fair Use Many provisions of the law affect educational uses of copyrighted materials but the most generally applicable is Section 107 - Limitations on Exclusive Rights: Fair Use. Under the law, it is fair use to reproduce copyrighted materials for purposes of criticism, comment, news reporting, teaching, scholarship, or research. Four criteria will be applied in judging whether or not there has been an infringement: The purpose and character of the use; The nature of the copyrighted work; The amount and substantiality of the portion being used; The effect on the potential market for or value of the work. The four criteria for determining fair use listed above are very general. To aid in the interpretation of Fair Use criteria, interested groups of publishers and users have agreed on more specific guidelines, including: Guidelines and fair use in photocopying of copyrighted print materials for educational purposes. Guidelines and fair use of copyrighted musical works in education. Guidelines for photocopying for interlibrary loans by libraries and archives. These guidelines were not written into the law, but they are accepted and used in interpreting the provisions of copyright law. An area left without specific guidelines at this time is audiovisual media. Representatives of copyright owners and users of audiovisual media have agreed that the general principles of fair use can apply to audiovisual media. Penalties and Infringement Substantial penalties are provided for infringement of a copyright: An injunction to stop the infringement is most likely to be the first action. Payment of actual damages for financial loss suffered by the copyright owner may be required. Statutory damages, for which no actual damages need be proved, may be assessed. If the court determines there is an infringement, it must award between $500 and $20,000. An exception to the statutory damages is made in the case of teachers, provided the teacher believed and had reasonable grounds to believe that it was fair use. In this case the teacher may be found guilty but the damages do not have to be paid. This gives the teachers some special consideration under the law, but it also requires that they be thoroughly familiar with what might be considered reasonable fair use practices. AV Scheduling Reminders It is the responsibility of the party requesting services, not the AV department, to secure written permission in advance for videotaping, or video or audio production. The AV department asks that requests for recording services be placed at least one to two weeks in advance to Audiovisual Services, x4120. The AV department does not reserve classroom or auditorium space. References This copyright policy (1996-2010) was prepared with information gathered from the following sources: The Official Fair-Use Guidelines, Fourth Edition, Copyright Information Services, Eugene, Oregon, 1985. The Copyright Directory: 1990-91, Copyright Information Services, Friday Harbor, WA, 1990. Dr. Charles Vlcek, Copyright Policy Development, Second printing, Copyright Information Services, Friday Harbor, WA, 1988. Ruth H. Dukelow, The Library Copyright Guide, Association for Educational Communications and Technology, Copyright Information Services, Washington, DC, 1992. Esther R. Sinofsky, Off-Air Videotaping in Education, R.R. Bowker Company, New York and London, 1984. Jerome K. Miller and others, Video Copyright Permissions, Copyright Information Services, Friday Harbor, WA, 1989.   Return to Audiovisual Services Home
  • Audiovisual Services Copyright, Displaying Media Copyright   Audiovisual Services Displaying Copyrighted Media on Campus   Rented Films and Videos Media Library Materials Music Library Materials Programs Recorded Off-Air Faculty-Owned Videos Use of Media by Guest Lecturers Rented Films and Videos Media materials are rented, by contract, for a specific occasion. If a film is to be open to more than just the students in a class, it must be rented for an "open showing" which allows for on-campus advertising and an audience larger than a class of students. If a student will not be able to attend the scheduled showing, and you want to schedule a second showing, that must be arranged before the rental is ordered and made a part of the film or video rental contract. Many companies charge an extra fee to show a film or video a second time, even if it's for a single student from the original class. Rented materials cannot be placed on reserve at the Media Library. Rented materials cannot be shown in the Media Library for a student who may miss the original showing. The additional showing in a classroom must be scheduled through the AV office and added to the rental contract. College facilities and equipment cannot be used to show media that have not been legally obtained for classroom or public showings. Videos that you have rented from a local video store such as Blockbuster do not constitute legally obtained copies for open showings. It is, however, permissible to use these videos for classroom showings. Media Library Materials Films and videos owned by the Media Library are generally purchased for classroom use only. These media cannot be used for a public showing and therefore cannot be advertised, even to the campus community. Showings of these media cannot be opened to students outside your class. In some cases, you can purchase a public performance license that will allow you to advertise a showing of a library item. Contact the AV Film Specialist for assistance.  Music Library Materials The Music Library collection is a closed collection. Materials cannot be signed out without express consent of the Music Library Coordinator. If the Music Library Coordinator grants permission and the material you want constitutes less than 10% o the total work, a CD copy can be made for you by either the Music Library or the AV Department.   Programs Recorded Off-Air Broadcast programs may be taped off-air only by nonprofit educational institutions, for use in instruction and not for entertainment. A broadcast may be recorded and retained by the educational institution for a period of 45 calendar days after the recording date. At the end of that period, the recording must be erased. Off-air recordings may be used once by a teacher, and can be repeated once for instructional reinforcement. The showing must be in a classroom, and must take place within the first 10 consecutive school days. A teacher must request a program be recorded. Programs cannot be recorded by the AV Department in anticipation of a request. After the first 10 consecutive school days a tape may be used by a teacher only to review and determine whether or not to purchase the program. All copies of off-air recordings must include the copyright notices displayed on the program.   Faculty-Owned Videos Videos purchased by you or by your department may be used by you in your classroom, but cannot be used for an open showing to students outside your class and cannot be advertised on campus. Videos you have taped off-air at your home cannot be shown in the classroom. AV can make an off-air tape at your request, or it may be possible to rent or purchase a program through appropriate channels. Use of Media by Guest Lecturers If a guest artist or lecturer brings audiovisual materials (film or video) for use in their program, we need to know that they have permission to use those items. We have a form for them to sign declaring such. Return to Menu of Copyright Topics Return to Audiovisual Services Home  
  • Audiovisual Services Copyright, Production Work Copyright Audiovisual Services   AV Production Work   EXISTING VIDEO FOOTAGE Existing copyrighted video footage can be incorporated into a video being produced by a student for a class project or by a faculty member for curriculum-based instruction if the borrowed material does not constitute more than 10% o the original, or 3 minutes, whichever is less, nor does it comprise the majority of the finished product. The opening screen of the project and any accompanying print material must include a notice that certain materials have been used under the fair use exemption of the U.S. Copyright Law.   EXISTING COPYRIGHTED MUSIC Existing music (recorded music, lyrics, or music videos) can be incorporated into a student or faculty multimedia project if the borrowed material does not constitute more than 10% o the original, or 30 seconds, whichever is less. Longer portions of music can be used only if a "video synchronization license" is bought from the music publisher or owner of the copyright.   COPYING VIDEO AND AUDIO RECORDINGS No media carrying a copyright will be duplicated by the AV department without express, written consent from the publisher or copyright owner. Personal projects should first be taken to the Multimedia Presentation Center (Information Commons) in the Library, where you can work on your project yourself.   Return to Menu of Copyright Topics Return to Audiovisual Services Home  
  • Audiovisual Services Copyright, Seek Permission Copyright Audiovisual Services   Seeking Permission to Use Copyrighted Materials Educators should be aware that it may be possible to make use of copyrighted materials beyond what's provided under fair use, if permission is granted first. There may or may not be a charge, and permission may be refused, but it never hurts to ask. First, determine ownership of the work. Contact the library using the Ask a Librarian Form or call x4735 and a librarian will be able to help in locating addresses of publishers. Next send a detailed letter of request, including the following: Title and author's/originator's name Editor and edition (if a print material) Exact material to be used, including amount, page numbers, chapters and if possible a photocopy of the material, or other appropriate quantitative description Number of copies to be made Purpose for the duplicated materials Form or method of distribution Whether or not the material is to be sold Type of reproduction (photocopy, slide, videotape, etc.)   You might also do the following: Leave blank spaces (possibly in the form of a checklist) at the end for the publisher to fill in whether or not permission is granted, conditions, authorized signature and date. Make three copies - one for your files and two to send to the publisher. One of these is to be returned to you with the publisher's decision indicated. Include a self-addressed, stamped return envelope. Don't ask for a blanket permission - in most cases it cannot be granted. Send by registered mail when response is crucial, such as for publications that will be sold or printed for distribution.   Return to Menu of Copyright Topics Return to Audiovisual Services Home  
  • Audiovisual Services Copyright, Video Recording Copyright Audiovisual Services   Video Recording of Campus Events   Department and Student Performances Department or student productions can be videotaped if the following criteria are met: If the presentation is an original work by a faculty member or student, and they sign a video recording permission form provided by AV Services. If the presentation is a copyrighted script and written permission is obtained in advance from the publisher or owner of the copyright. Some works which one might believe to be in the public domain may still carry a copyright for translation, stage direction or other modifications, and written permission is still necessary. If the presentation involves copyrighted music (such as a dance concert) and written permission is obtained from the music publisher or owner of the copyright. For information on obtaining permission from a publisher or copyright owner, see Seeking Permission to Use Copyrighted Materials.   Lecturers Lectures or performances presented by guests to the campus will be recorded if the guest signs a permission form, provided by AV Services, prior to the lecture or performance taking place. Permission must also be obtained from members of the Hamilton community (employees, students, alumni, trustees). By signing this video permission form, a speaker or performer is also certifying that any audiovisual materials (movie, PowerPoint, web page) are their own work or that they have obtained proper copyright clearances for displaying them.   Sporting Events According to the rules of NESCAC and other athletic leagues in which Hamilton varsity teams compete, there are no restrictions placed on sporting events. A request must be placed prior to a game and must come from a member of the coaching staff. Return to Menu of Copyright Topics Return to Audiovisual Services Home  
  • Audiovisual Services Duplication Policy Copyright Audiovisual Services   Duplication Policy Charges for Duplication Services   AVS does not accept cash or Transfer of Funds (paper) forms.   AVS will ask requesters for an account number. We submit billings monthly through the Business Office. If you have questions about this method of payment, please contact Tim Hicks or Forrest Warner.   Students must pay for their copies in advance by writing a check, payable to Trustees of Hamilton College.   Billing Policies   For a new academic event that AVS is recording for you, up to 3 copies will be provided to the original requesting department at no charge. Any copies above and beyond these 3 copies will be charged at the rates below. Copies made for additional requesters will be billed at the rates below. The first copy of a student's senior project will be given at no charge. All additional requests will be charged at the rates below.  For media which must be shipped, a minimum $5.00 shipping and handling fee will be added.  Prices for Copies   Type of copy Any number of copies, each Sets in multiple-disc cases DVD or CD w/ case $3.00 Calculated on an individual basis Mini-DV tape, 80min. 10.00 -     Mastering, Editing and Turnaround Time   Duplication (a straight copy made by AVS with no editing work involved) 1-10 copies take 2-3 working days. 10-50 copies 3-5 working days. 50 copies 5-10 working days. Mastering footage (anything that must be edited to another format) 5-10 working days. Major projects (dance performances, theater production, multiple camera events) requiring editing work may take 3 to 4 weeks to complete. Please Note   No media carrying a Copyright will be duplicated by AVS. AVS will copy from VHS, DVD, CD, and/or digital formats. AVS no longer provides duplication service for personal work. To purchase blank media, go to the College Store or Staples, etc. Return to Audiovisual Services home
DVD
  • Audiovisual Services (AV) DVD Audiovisual Services   AV Services Personnel Support Services Offered Requesting Films and Videotapes Media Use and Rental Policies Available Equipment Videotaping & Streaming Services Video and Audio Copying Services Duplication Policy and Prices Hamilton College's overall Copyright Policy Copyright Policy (AV topics)   Mission Statement The Audiovisual Services Team of the Information Technology Services department provides quality service and support to the Hamilton College Community for their teaching and multimedia presentation needs. AV Services Personnel The Audiovisual Classroom Services Team is located in Burke Library, Room 363 (within the ITS office area). Tim Hicks Director 315-859-4790 (To be Announced) Staff Assistant/ Film Specialist 315-859-4120 Graham Espe  Multimedia Systems Technician 315-859-4793 Forrest Warner Multimedia Systems Technician 315-859-4076   Support Services Offered Presentation support (sound reinforcement and data projection). Video recording or streaming of campus events (e.g. performances, lectures, and sporting events). Rental of films and DVDs for academic and non-academic use. Maintenance and support of technology enhanced (TE) classrooms. Classroom delivery of projection, video and audio equipment. Loaning of various types of audiovisual equipment. Production work including duplications, editing and off-air recordings. Video conference facilities.   To schedule Audiovisual services, use the R25 room reservation system if applicable. In the Event Options section, check the box for "require A/V support," then write details of your needs in the Comments box.  If R25 is not appropriate for your situation,  or to request equipment loans, please contact the AV Coordinator at 315-859-4120. Equipment requests should be made at least one week in advance so student workers and delivery can be scheduled. To rent movies, please contact the Audiovisual Film Specialist, 315-859-4120. Movie requests should be made 2 to 4 weeks in advance, to allow time for research and ordering. For more information about Audiovisual Classroom Services, please contact the Audiovisual Department Office, 315-859-4120. Requesting films and Videos The Burke Library and the Media Library have materials for researching videos and films available for educational purposes. Contact a Reference Librarian using the Ask a Librarian Form, or call 315-859-4735. To show to your class a DVD or videotape from the Media Library, you must check out the movie and show it yourself. Contact Linda Brennan at 315-859-4923 for information about the media collection and borrowing items. In virtually all classrooms, the AV equipment is operated via a touchscreen control. If you need help getting started, contact AV Services (x4120) to schedule a brief personal training session in your classroom. Audiovisual Services will provide a projectionist if the media item (rented or from our library) is a 16mm film or another unusual format. To request a projectionist, send a written or e-mail request to the Audiovisual Film Specialist (x4120), at least two weeks in advance. Please include the following information when requesting movie rentals: SHOW DATE(S) SHOW TIME: Indicate the start time(s) and whether you plan to show a film in the latter part of a class. LOCATION: If you plan to show media materials at a time or place different from the assigned class period or location you must make room reservations with the Registrar. TITLE: Include the full title, plus an English translation of any foreign title. Other helpful information could include director, actors, country and year, especially if there has been more than one production of the same title. FORMAT: Indicate the format (video, DVD, 16 mm film), only if one type is preferred over another. SOURCE: If you are aware of a source, please provide it. PUBLIC PERFORMANCE: Will the screening be only for the students in your class, or do you plan to advertise it or invite other viewers? Media Use and Rental Policies Most materials from the Media Library are licensed only for classroom-use showings, and cannot be advertised. A public performance license can be purchased for an open showing in many cases, with at least two weeks' advance notice. The Audiovisual Film Specialist will help you with licensing questions. Movies available on videotape or DVD from the Media Library will not be rented in another format unless the instructor can show the necessity of using the other format. The AV Department's film rental budget supports curricular needs and is to be used for classroom-use rentals only. Any academic open showings (public performace with advertisement) and all entertainment showings will require public performance licensing. The AV Film Specialist will order the rental movie and/or licensing for you, but it must be funded by the requester's department or organization. No rented materials can be put on reserve in the Media Library. For additional information about copyright compliance in the use of library materials and rented media, please read the Audiovisual Copyright Policy.    Available Equipment Contact Audiovisual Services one to two weeks in advance to request audiovisual equipment. Many of these items may be borrowed and operated by the requester. Upon request, AV will deliver equipment or provide instruction to those unfamiliar with the equipment. Some types of equipment will require set-up and operation by an AV technician.   Projection Equipment Data/ Video Projector Document Camera 16mm Projection Projection Screen  Video Equipment Camcorder, mini-DV  DVD/VHS Player Laserdisc Player   Audio Equipment Sound Systems, Various  Digital Audio Recorder Compact Disc/Audiotape Boom Box Miscellaneous Equipment Easel  Laser Pointer PowerPoint remote control (Kensington) Slide Projector (35mm)   Videotaping and Streaming Services Location Videotaping Description of Service: Videotaping of classes, lectures, athletic and special events at specified locations on campus. Operation: In most cases, AV provides operators. Restrictions: Written permission to videotape lecturers and performers (including persons affiliated with Hamilton College) must be obtained and given to the AV Department prior to the start of videotaping. Written permission from the publisher is required in order to videotape theater productions and music performances of copyrighted scripts or scores. A printable permission form for a single individual is available or blank forms can be requested from the AV office. If a faculty member wants to arrange for his class to be videotaped, please use the group form. For more information refer to Copyright Policy, Video Recording of Campus Events and Seeking Permission to Use Copyrighted Materials. Disposition of video: The videotapes or DVDs made are usually sent to the requester via campus mail within a week or so after the event. Final disposition of the recording is the responsibility of the requester.  Charges: There is no cost to the original requester for the services of a student cameraperson, or for the original recording (a mini-DV tape), or for the first three (3) copies we make for you onto a medium of your choice (usually DVD). Additional copies made for the original requester will be billed at our current rates for the cost of materials and labor. All copies made for individuals or departments other than the original requester will be billed. For information about pricing and methods of payment, please see our Duplication Policy. Or call the AV Services office at x4120. Video and Audio Copying Services   DVD Duplicating   Availability of Service: DVD duplicating service is available. Limited services availabe for copying from older formats. Call for information.  Restrictions: The AV Department reserves the right to refuse any request which constitutes copyright infringement. Charges: The cost of materials and labor for copies will be charged to a college department. For more information about our duplication policies. prices, and available methods of payment, please see our Duplication Policy. Or contact the AV Services office at x4076.   CD Duplicating Availability: Audio duplicating of materials for classroom use. Restrictions: The AV Department reserves the right to refuse any request that may constitute copyright infringement. Charges: The cost of materials and labor for copies will be charged to a college department. For more information about our duplication policies, prices and available methods of payment, please see our Duplication Policy. Or contact the AV Services office at x4076.
  • Audiovisual Services Copyright, Production Work DVD Audiovisual Services   AV Production Work   EXISTING VIDEO FOOTAGE Existing copyrighted video footage can be incorporated into a video being produced by a student for a class project or by a faculty member for curriculum-based instruction if the borrowed material does not constitute more than 10% o the original, or 3 minutes, whichever is less, nor does it comprise the majority of the finished product. The opening screen of the project and any accompanying print material must include a notice that certain materials have been used under the fair use exemption of the U.S. Copyright Law.   EXISTING COPYRIGHTED MUSIC Existing music (recorded music, lyrics, or music videos) can be incorporated into a student or faculty multimedia project if the borrowed material does not constitute more than 10% o the original, or 30 seconds, whichever is less. Longer portions of music can be used only if a "video synchronization license" is bought from the music publisher or owner of the copyright.   COPYING VIDEO AND AUDIO RECORDINGS No media carrying a copyright will be duplicated by the AV department without express, written consent from the publisher or copyright owner. Personal projects should first be taken to the Multimedia Presentation Center (Information Commons) in the Library, where you can work on your project yourself.   Return to Menu of Copyright Topics Return to Audiovisual Services Home  
  • Audiovisual Services Duplication Policy DVD Audiovisual Services   Duplication Policy Charges for Duplication Services   AVS does not accept cash or Transfer of Funds (paper) forms.   AVS will ask requesters for an account number. We submit billings monthly through the Business Office. If you have questions about this method of payment, please contact Tim Hicks or Forrest Warner.   Students must pay for their copies in advance by writing a check, payable to Trustees of Hamilton College.   Billing Policies   For a new academic event that AVS is recording for you, up to 3 copies will be provided to the original requesting department at no charge. Any copies above and beyond these 3 copies will be charged at the rates below. Copies made for additional requesters will be billed at the rates below. The first copy of a student's senior project will be given at no charge. All additional requests will be charged at the rates below.  For media which must be shipped, a minimum $5.00 shipping and handling fee will be added.  Prices for Copies   Type of copy Any number of copies, each Sets in multiple-disc cases DVD or CD w/ case $3.00 Calculated on an individual basis Mini-DV tape, 80min. 10.00 -     Mastering, Editing and Turnaround Time   Duplication (a straight copy made by AVS with no editing work involved) 1-10 copies take 2-3 working days. 10-50 copies 3-5 working days. 50 copies 5-10 working days. Mastering footage (anything that must be edited to another format) 5-10 working days. Major projects (dance performances, theater production, multiple camera events) requiring editing work may take 3 to 4 weeks to complete. Please Note   No media carrying a Copyright will be duplicated by AVS. AVS will copy from VHS, DVD, CD, and/or digital formats. AVS no longer provides duplication service for personal work. To purchase blank media, go to the College Store or Staples, etc. Return to Audiovisual Services home
Data Projector
  • Audiovisual Services (AV) Data Projector Audiovisual Services   AV Services Personnel Support Services Offered Requesting Films and Videotapes Media Use and Rental Policies Available Equipment Videotaping & Streaming Services Video and Audio Copying Services Duplication Policy and Prices Hamilton College's overall Copyright Policy Copyright Policy (AV topics)   Mission Statement The Audiovisual Services Team of the Information Technology Services department provides quality service and support to the Hamilton College Community for their teaching and multimedia presentation needs. AV Services Personnel The Audiovisual Classroom Services Team is located in Burke Library, Room 363 (within the ITS office area). Tim Hicks Director 315-859-4790 (To be Announced) Staff Assistant/ Film Specialist 315-859-4120 Graham Espe  Multimedia Systems Technician 315-859-4793 Forrest Warner Multimedia Systems Technician 315-859-4076   Support Services Offered Presentation support (sound reinforcement and data projection). Video recording or streaming of campus events (e.g. performances, lectures, and sporting events). Rental of films and DVDs for academic and non-academic use. Maintenance and support of technology enhanced (TE) classrooms. Classroom delivery of projection, video and audio equipment. Loaning of various types of audiovisual equipment. Production work including duplications, editing and off-air recordings. Video conference facilities.   To schedule Audiovisual services, use the R25 room reservation system if applicable. In the Event Options section, check the box for "require A/V support," then write details of your needs in the Comments box.  If R25 is not appropriate for your situation,  or to request equipment loans, please contact the AV Coordinator at 315-859-4120. Equipment requests should be made at least one week in advance so student workers and delivery can be scheduled. To rent movies, please contact the Audiovisual Film Specialist, 315-859-4120. Movie requests should be made 2 to 4 weeks in advance, to allow time for research and ordering. For more information about Audiovisual Classroom Services, please contact the Audiovisual Department Office, 315-859-4120. Requesting films and Videos The Burke Library and the Media Library have materials for researching videos and films available for educational purposes. Contact a Reference Librarian using the Ask a Librarian Form, or call 315-859-4735. To show to your class a DVD or videotape from the Media Library, you must check out the movie and show it yourself. Contact Linda Brennan at 315-859-4923 for information about the media collection and borrowing items. In virtually all classrooms, the AV equipment is operated via a touchscreen control. If you need help getting started, contact AV Services (x4120) to schedule a brief personal training session in your classroom. Audiovisual Services will provide a projectionist if the media item (rented or from our library) is a 16mm film or another unusual format. To request a projectionist, send a written or e-mail request to the Audiovisual Film Specialist (x4120), at least two weeks in advance. Please include the following information when requesting movie rentals: SHOW DATE(S) SHOW TIME: Indicate the start time(s) and whether you plan to show a film in the latter part of a class. LOCATION: If you plan to show media materials at a time or place different from the assigned class period or location you must make room reservations with the Registrar. TITLE: Include the full title, plus an English translation of any foreign title. Other helpful information could include director, actors, country and year, especially if there has been more than one production of the same title. FORMAT: Indicate the format (video, DVD, 16 mm film), only if one type is preferred over another. SOURCE: If you are aware of a source, please provide it. PUBLIC PERFORMANCE: Will the screening be only for the students in your class, or do you plan to advertise it or invite other viewers? Media Use and Rental Policies Most materials from the Media Library are licensed only for classroom-use showings, and cannot be advertised. A public performance license can be purchased for an open showing in many cases, with at least two weeks' advance notice. The Audiovisual Film Specialist will help you with licensing questions. Movies available on videotape or DVD from the Media Library will not be rented in another format unless the instructor can show the necessity of using the other format. The AV Department's film rental budget supports curricular needs and is to be used for classroom-use rentals only. Any academic open showings (public performace with advertisement) and all entertainment showings will require public performance licensing. The AV Film Specialist will order the rental movie and/or licensing for you, but it must be funded by the requester's department or organization. No rented materials can be put on reserve in the Media Library. For additional information about copyright compliance in the use of library materials and rented media, please read the Audiovisual Copyright Policy.    Available Equipment Contact Audiovisual Services one to two weeks in advance to request audiovisual equipment. Many of these items may be borrowed and operated by the requester. Upon request, AV will deliver equipment or provide instruction to those unfamiliar with the equipment. Some types of equipment will require set-up and operation by an AV technician.   Projection Equipment Data/ Video Projector Document Camera 16mm Projection Projection Screen  Video Equipment Camcorder, mini-DV  DVD/VHS Player Laserdisc Player   Audio Equipment Sound Systems, Various  Digital Audio Recorder Compact Disc/Audiotape Boom Box Miscellaneous Equipment Easel  Laser Pointer PowerPoint remote control (Kensington) Slide Projector (35mm)   Videotaping and Streaming Services Location Videotaping Description of Service: Videotaping of classes, lectures, athletic and special events at specified locations on campus. Operation: In most cases, AV provides operators. Restrictions: Written permission to videotape lecturers and performers (including persons affiliated with Hamilton College) must be obtained and given to the AV Department prior to the start of videotaping. Written permission from the publisher is required in order to videotape theater productions and music performances of copyrighted scripts or scores. A printable permission form for a single individual is available or blank forms can be requested from the AV office. If a faculty member wants to arrange for his class to be videotaped, please use the group form. For more information refer to Copyright Policy, Video Recording of Campus Events and Seeking Permission to Use Copyrighted Materials. Disposition of video: The videotapes or DVDs made are usually sent to the requester via campus mail within a week or so after the event. Final disposition of the recording is the responsibility of the requester.  Charges: There is no cost to the original requester for the services of a student cameraperson, or for the original recording (a mini-DV tape), or for the first three (3) copies we make for you onto a medium of your choice (usually DVD). Additional copies made for the original requester will be billed at our current rates for the cost of materials and labor. All copies made for individuals or departments other than the original requester will be billed. For information about pricing and methods of payment, please see our Duplication Policy. Or call the AV Services office at x4120. Video and Audio Copying Services   DVD Duplicating   Availability of Service: DVD duplicating service is available. Limited services availabe for copying from older formats. Call for information.  Restrictions: The AV Department reserves the right to refuse any request which constitutes copyright infringement. Charges: The cost of materials and labor for copies will be charged to a college department. For more information about our duplication policies. prices, and available methods of payment, please see our Duplication Policy. Or contact the AV Services office at x4076.   CD Duplicating Availability: Audio duplicating of materials for classroom use. Restrictions: The AV Department reserves the right to refuse any request that may constitute copyright infringement. Charges: The cost of materials and labor for copies will be charged to a college department. For more information about our duplication policies, prices and available methods of payment, please see our Duplication Policy. Or contact the AV Services office at x4076.
Datatel Colleague
  • Central Information Services Mission Statement Datatel Colleague Team Mission, Services and Expectations Mission Statement: The Central Information Services Team provides technical support for the Colleague (Student System, Financials and Alumni Fund Raising) and Kronos (Human Resources and Payroll) systems, and makes the information in those systems available to college constituents as appropriate. Through these services, the CIS Team helps the college operate in an efficient manner.   Services: • Analysis of college business practices • Implementation of new processes and office workflow • Application problem solving • Application software development and support • Daily operational support • Training • Upgrade and maintenance to the administrative system hardware and software • Consulting services for the support of external system interfaces such as TMA, Blackboard Learn, Blackboard Transact, BlackboardConnect, NSLC, etc... • Login and password assignment as well as establishment and maintenance of UniData (database), Colleague and Kronos   Success Measures: • Formal feedback from clients on a periodic basis. One example would be a questionnaire or survey, distributed at to-be-determined intervals to those using the services of the team. • Informal feedback from clients. Examples would be individual conversations, phone calls, written "thank-you" notes or follow-up complaints. • Self-Evaluation at the completion of a task or project. • Degree of project completion in line with the pre-determined project plan or other written or verbal commitment. • Amount of "pro-active" support given to clients.  
  • Colleague and Colleague Advancement Support Datatel Colleague Colleague and Colleague Advancement Support Colleague and Colleague Advancement User Access Information: Department Security Manager Information Administrative Information Systems Security Policy & Procedures Administrative Account Request Form Colleague and Colleague Advancement Usage Tips: Tip # 1 - Using the @ Symbol for Last Record Retrieval Tip # 2 - Using = to Tell Colleague to do it Your Way Tip # 3  - Adding Leading Zeroes to Datatel-Generated EXCEL Spreadsheets Central Information Services Team Datatel Inc.'s Colleague software is used to support the student and financial information offices of the College. The Central Information Services Team provides work flow analysis, design and implementation of new processes and continuing maintenance of the existing application software. The Members of the Central Information Services Team are: Marty Sweeney Director, Central Information Services           msweeney@hamilton.edu x4164 Linda Lacelle Systems Analyst/Administrator llacelle@hamilton.edu x4994 Kathy Kwasniewski Systems Analyst kkwasnie@hamilton.edu x4172 Geoff Pashley Programmer / Analyst gpashley@hamilton.edu x4163 Mary Fiore Programmer / Analyst mfiore@hamilton.edu x4990 Colleague Advancement Datatel Inc.'s Colleague Advancement software is used to support the alumni and fund raising information offices of the College. For questions about the Colleague Advancement software, please contact: Loren Corbin Director of Information Services / Database Administrator Office of Communications and Development lcorbin@hamilton.edu x4633 John Drew Systems Analyst Office of Communications and Development jdrew@hamilton.edu x4674  
  • Department Security Manager Information Datatel Colleague The role of the Department Security Manager (DSM) is to coordinate and approve all access to the administrative system (Colleague) for the users in their respective areas. It is the responsibility of the DSM to insure that new employees read and sign the Administrative Information Systems Security Policy and Procedures document. The signed last page of this document should be returned to the Central Information Services Team - Information Technology Services - 3rd Floor of Burke Library. The DSM should also request the appropriate access for the employee using the Administrative Account Request Form.   Department       Responsible Area(s)       Department Security Manager           Business Office   General Ledger   Shari Whiting     Accounts Payable   Andrea Brown (Alternate)     Purchasing   Erika Mumford (Alternate)     Accounts Receivable         Cash Receipts         Budgets         Investments               Registrar   Student Records   Kristin Friedel     Registration         Dean of Students         Dean of Faculty         Other College offices using student data               C&D   Alumni Records   Loren Corbin     Gift Processing   John Drew (Alternate)           Admission   Admission Data   Sue Donegan           Financial Aid   Financial Aid Data   Melissa Rose           Human Resources   Human Resource Data   Steve Stemkoski         Mike Thayer (Alternate)           Residence Life   Housing / Meal Plan Data   Travis Hill         Jean Burke (Alternate)            ITS   Administrative Access    Linda Lacelle         Marty Sweeney (Alternate)            
  • Tip # 1 - Using the @ Symbol for Last Record Retrieval Datatel Colleague Tip #1 Whenever you've done maintenance on a record and want to bring up the last record you worked on (even on a different form), simply enter:   @ (Get the @ Symbol by pressing Shift 2) at the Person Lookup prompt, then press: Enter
  • Tip # 2 - Using = to Tell Colleague to do it Your Way Datatel Colleague Tip #2 Have you ever entered data into Colleague and had the system change what you typed into upper or lower case? Colleague tries to be helpful, but sometimes that is not the way you want that particular name or piece of data to look! This happens most frequently with names, addresses and code descriptions. If you enter the equals sign immediately followed by your desired text (without a space between them), Colleague will not attempt to change what you typed. For example, if you want Colleague to leave the last name VanSpike alone (instead of changing it to Vanspike - with a lower-case "s") you would enter: =VanSpike directly into the last name field.
  • Tip # 3 - Adding Leading Zeros to Datatel-Generated EXCEL Spreadsheets Datatel Colleague Tip #3 Have you ever used the EXCEL command in Colleague and been frustrated when it drops "leading zeros" from columns of numbers, such as Colleague ID's? In other words, instead of a seven digit Colleague ID like 0145672, you'd see one like 145672 (Note that the "leading zero" has been dropped). Luckily, there's a simple fix for this problem. Once you generate your spreadsheet, follow these steps:  Highlight the column of numbers to be fixed by moving your curser over the column letter at the very top of the column. For example, if you want to highlight the first column on the left, you'd move your curser over the letter "A" at the top of that column. As soon as you do this, you'll see a small downward-facing arrow appear. Click once on the column to highlight it. When the column is highlighted, it will turn blue. From the Format dropdown menu, choose Cells (first choice at the top). In the Format Cells window, choose the Number tab (first on the left, along the top – should already be the default choice). Under the word "Category:" (on the left), there is a dropdown list of choices. Choose Custom (last choice at the bottom). Beneath the word "Type:" (on the right), there is a single-line text box. Directly beneath that is a dropdown list of various choices. The single-line text box will initially have the word "General" in it. Note that the word "General" is also the first item listed in the dropdown list. Double-click on the single-line text box to highlight it. Use your backspace key to remove the word "General" from the single-line text box. If the numbers you are trying to fix are, for example, Colleague ID's, then they all need to uniformly consist of seven digits. Many of the older Colleague ID's on our system contain one or more "leading zeros," as shown in the example above. So in this example, enter 0000000 (seven zeros) into the single-line text box (where you previously removed the word "General"). Click the OK button at the bottom of the Format Cells window. All of your Colleague ID's will now have seven digits, with leading zeros where appropriate. Be sure to save your spreadsheet. 
Document Camera
  • Audiovisual Services (AV) Document Camera Audiovisual Services   AV Services Personnel Support Services Offered Requesting Films and Videotapes Media Use and Rental Policies Available Equipment Videotaping & Streaming Services Video and Audio Copying Services Duplication Policy and Prices Hamilton College's overall Copyright Policy Copyright Policy (AV topics)   Mission Statement The Audiovisual Services Team of the Information Technology Services department provides quality service and support to the Hamilton College Community for their teaching and multimedia presentation needs. AV Services Personnel The Audiovisual Classroom Services Team is located in Burke Library, Room 363 (within the ITS office area). Tim Hicks Director 315-859-4790 (To be Announced) Staff Assistant/ Film Specialist 315-859-4120 Graham Espe  Multimedia Systems Technician 315-859-4793 Forrest Warner Multimedia Systems Technician 315-859-4076   Support Services Offered Presentation support (sound reinforcement and data projection). Video recording or streaming of campus events (e.g. performances, lectures, and sporting events). Rental of films and DVDs for academic and non-academic use. Maintenance and support of technology enhanced (TE) classrooms. Classroom delivery of projection, video and audio equipment. Loaning of various types of audiovisual equipment. Production work including duplications, editing and off-air recordings. Video conference facilities.   To schedule Audiovisual services, use the R25 room reservation system if applicable. In the Event Options section, check the box for "require A/V support," then write details of your needs in the Comments box.  If R25 is not appropriate for your situation,  or to request equipment loans, please contact the AV Coordinator at 315-859-4120. Equipment requests should be made at least one week in advance so student workers and delivery can be scheduled. To rent movies, please contact the Audiovisual Film Specialist, 315-859-4120. Movie requests should be made 2 to 4 weeks in advance, to allow time for research and ordering. For more information about Audiovisual Classroom Services, please contact the Audiovisual Department Office, 315-859-4120. Requesting films and Videos The Burke Library and the Media Library have materials for researching videos and films available for educational purposes. Contact a Reference Librarian using the Ask a Librarian Form, or call 315-859-4735. To show to your class a DVD or videotape from the Media Library, you must check out the movie and show it yourself. Contact Linda Brennan at 315-859-4923 for information about the media collection and borrowing items. In virtually all classrooms, the AV equipment is operated via a touchscreen control. If you need help getting started, contact AV Services (x4120) to schedule a brief personal training session in your classroom. Audiovisual Services will provide a projectionist if the media item (rented or from our library) is a 16mm film or another unusual format. To request a projectionist, send a written or e-mail request to the Audiovisual Film Specialist (x4120), at least two weeks in advance. Please include the following information when requesting movie rentals: SHOW DATE(S) SHOW TIME: Indicate the start time(s) and whether you plan to show a film in the latter part of a class. LOCATION: If you plan to show media materials at a time or place different from the assigned class period or location you must make room reservations with the Registrar. TITLE: Include the full title, plus an English translation of any foreign title. Other helpful information could include director, actors, country and year, especially if there has been more than one production of the same title. FORMAT: Indicate the format (video, DVD, 16 mm film), only if one type is preferred over another. SOURCE: If you are aware of a source, please provide it. PUBLIC PERFORMANCE: Will the screening be only for the students in your class, or do you plan to advertise it or invite other viewers? Media Use and Rental Policies Most materials from the Media Library are licensed only for classroom-use showings, and cannot be advertised. A public performance license can be purchased for an open showing in many cases, with at least two weeks' advance notice. The Audiovisual Film Specialist will help you with licensing questions. Movies available on videotape or DVD from the Media Library will not be rented in another format unless the instructor can show the necessity of using the other format. The AV Department's film rental budget supports curricular needs and is to be used for classroom-use rentals only. Any academic open showings (public performace with advertisement) and all entertainment showings will require public performance licensing. The AV Film Specialist will order the rental movie and/or licensing for you, but it must be funded by the requester's department or organization. No rented materials can be put on reserve in the Media Library. For additional information about copyright compliance in the use of library materials and rented media, please read the Audiovisual Copyright Policy.    Available Equipment Contact Audiovisual Services one to two weeks in advance to request audiovisual equipment. Many of these items may be borrowed and operated by the requester. Upon request, AV will deliver equipment or provide instruction to those unfamiliar with the equipment. Some types of equipment will require set-up and operation by an AV technician.   Projection Equipment Data/ Video Projector Document Camera 16mm Projection Projection Screen  Video Equipment Camcorder, mini-DV  DVD/VHS Player Laserdisc Player   Audio Equipment Sound Systems, Various  Digital Audio Recorder Compact Disc/Audiotape Boom Box Miscellaneous Equipment Easel  Laser Pointer PowerPoint remote control (Kensington) Slide Projector (35mm)   Videotaping and Streaming Services Location Videotaping Description of Service: Videotaping of classes, lectures, athletic and special events at specified locations on campus. Operation: In most cases, AV provides operators. Restrictions: Written permission to videotape lecturers and performers (including persons affiliated with Hamilton College) must be obtained and given to the AV Department prior to the start of videotaping. Written permission from the publisher is required in order to videotape theater productions and music performances of copyrighted scripts or scores. A printable permission form for a single individual is available or blank forms can be requested from the AV office. If a faculty member wants to arrange for his class to be videotaped, please use the group form. For more information refer to Copyright Policy, Video Recording of Campus Events and Seeking Permission to Use Copyrighted Materials. Disposition of video: The videotapes or DVDs made are usually sent to the requester via campus mail within a week or so after the event. Final disposition of the recording is the responsibility of the requester.  Charges: There is no cost to the original requester for the services of a student cameraperson, or for the original recording (a mini-DV tape), or for the first three (3) copies we make for you onto a medium of your choice (usually DVD). Additional copies made for the original requester will be billed at our current rates for the cost of materials and labor. All copies made for individuals or departments other than the original requester will be billed. For information about pricing and methods of payment, please see our Duplication Policy. Or call the AV Services office at x4120. Video and Audio Copying Services   DVD Duplicating   Availability of Service: DVD duplicating service is available. Limited services availabe for copying from older formats. Call for information.  Restrictions: The AV Department reserves the right to refuse any request which constitutes copyright infringement. Charges: The cost of materials and labor for copies will be charged to a college department. For more information about our duplication policies. prices, and available methods of payment, please see our Duplication Policy. Or contact the AV Services office at x4076.   CD Duplicating Availability: Audio duplicating of materials for classroom use. Restrictions: The AV Department reserves the right to refuse any request that may constitute copyright infringement. Charges: The cost of materials and labor for copies will be charged to a college department. For more information about our duplication policies, prices and available methods of payment, please see our Duplication Policy. Or contact the AV Services office at x4076.
Duplication
  • Audiovisual Services (AV) Duplication Audiovisual Services   AV Services Personnel Support Services Offered Requesting Films and Videotapes Media Use and Rental Policies Available Equipment Videotaping & Streaming Services Video and Audio Copying Services Duplication Policy and Prices Hamilton College's overall Copyright Policy Copyright Policy (AV topics)   Mission Statement The Audiovisual Services Team of the Information Technology Services department provides quality service and support to the Hamilton College Community for their teaching and multimedia presentation needs. AV Services Personnel The Audiovisual Classroom Services Team is located in Burke Library, Room 363 (within the ITS office area). Tim Hicks Director 315-859-4790 (To be Announced) Staff Assistant/ Film Specialist 315-859-4120 Graham Espe  Multimedia Systems Technician 315-859-4793 Forrest Warner Multimedia Systems Technician 315-859-4076   Support Services Offered Presentation support (sound reinforcement and data projection). Video recording or streaming of campus events (e.g. performances, lectures, and sporting events). Rental of films and DVDs for academic and non-academic use. Maintenance and support of technology enhanced (TE) classrooms. Classroom delivery of projection, video and audio equipment. Loaning of various types of audiovisual equipment. Production work including duplications, editing and off-air recordings. Video conference facilities.   To schedule Audiovisual services, use the R25 room reservation system if applicable. In the Event Options section, check the box for "require A/V support," then write details of your needs in the Comments box.  If R25 is not appropriate for your situation,  or to request equipment loans, please contact the AV Coordinator at 315-859-4120. Equipment requests should be made at least one week in advance so student workers and delivery can be scheduled. To rent movies, please contact the Audiovisual Film Specialist, 315-859-4120. Movie requests should be made 2 to 4 weeks in advance, to allow time for research and ordering. For more information about Audiovisual Classroom Services, please contact the Audiovisual Department Office, 315-859-4120. Requesting films and Videos The Burke Library and the Media Library have materials for researching videos and films available for educational purposes. Contact a Reference Librarian using the Ask a Librarian Form, or call 315-859-4735. To show to your class a DVD or videotape from the Media Library, you must check out the movie and show it yourself. Contact Linda Brennan at 315-859-4923 for information about the media collection and borrowing items. In virtually all classrooms, the AV equipment is operated via a touchscreen control. If you need help getting started, contact AV Services (x4120) to schedule a brief personal training session in your classroom. Audiovisual Services will provide a projectionist if the media item (rented or from our library) is a 16mm film or another unusual format. To request a projectionist, send a written or e-mail request to the Audiovisual Film Specialist (x4120), at least two weeks in advance. Please include the following information when requesting movie rentals: SHOW DATE(S) SHOW TIME: Indicate the start time(s) and whether you plan to show a film in the latter part of a class. LOCATION: If you plan to show media materials at a time or place different from the assigned class period or location you must make room reservations with the Registrar. TITLE: Include the full title, plus an English translation of any foreign title. Other helpful information could include director, actors, country and year, especially if there has been more than one production of the same title. FORMAT: Indicate the format (video, DVD, 16 mm film), only if one type is preferred over another. SOURCE: If you are aware of a source, please provide it. PUBLIC PERFORMANCE: Will the screening be only for the students in your class, or do you plan to advertise it or invite other viewers? Media Use and Rental Policies Most materials from the Media Library are licensed only for classroom-use showings, and cannot be advertised. A public performance license can be purchased for an open showing in many cases, with at least two weeks' advance notice. The Audiovisual Film Specialist will help you with licensing questions. Movies available on videotape or DVD from the Media Library will not be rented in another format unless the instructor can show the necessity of using the other format. The AV Department's film rental budget supports curricular needs and is to be used for classroom-use rentals only. Any academic open showings (public performace with advertisement) and all entertainment showings will require public performance licensing. The AV Film Specialist will order the rental movie and/or licensing for you, but it must be funded by the requester's department or organization. No rented materials can be put on reserve in the Media Library. For additional information about copyright compliance in the use of library materials and rented media, please read the Audiovisual Copyright Policy.    Available Equipment Contact Audiovisual Services one to two weeks in advance to request audiovisual equipment. Many of these items may be borrowed and operated by the requester. Upon request, AV will deliver equipment or provide instruction to those unfamiliar with the equipment. Some types of equipment will require set-up and operation by an AV technician.   Projection Equipment Data/ Video Projector Document Camera 16mm Projection Projection Screen  Video Equipment Camcorder, mini-DV  DVD/VHS Player Laserdisc Player   Audio Equipment Sound Systems, Various  Digital Audio Recorder Compact Disc/Audiotape Boom Box Miscellaneous Equipment Easel  Laser Pointer PowerPoint remote control (Kensington) Slide Projector (35mm)   Videotaping and Streaming Services Location Videotaping Description of Service: Videotaping of classes, lectures, athletic and special events at specified locations on campus. Operation: In most cases, AV provides operators. Restrictions: Written permission to videotape lecturers and performers (including persons affiliated with Hamilton College) must be obtained and given to the AV Department prior to the start of videotaping. Written permission from the publisher is required in order to videotape theater productions and music performances of copyrighted scripts or scores. A printable permission form for a single individual is available or blank forms can be requested from the AV office. If a faculty member wants to arrange for his class to be videotaped, please use the group form. For more information refer to Copyright Policy, Video Recording of Campus Events and Seeking Permission to Use Copyrighted Materials. Disposition of video: The videotapes or DVDs made are usually sent to the requester via campus mail within a week or so after the event. Final disposition of the recording is the responsibility of the requester.  Charges: There is no cost to the original requester for the services of a student cameraperson, or for the original recording (a mini-DV tape), or for the first three (3) copies we make for you onto a medium of your choice (usually DVD). Additional copies made for the original requester will be billed at our current rates for the cost of materials and labor. All copies made for individuals or departments other than the original requester will be billed. For information about pricing and methods of payment, please see our Duplication Policy. Or call the AV Services office at x4120. Video and Audio Copying Services   DVD Duplicating   Availability of Service: DVD duplicating service is available. Limited services availabe for copying from older formats. Call for information.  Restrictions: The AV Department reserves the right to refuse any request which constitutes copyright infringement. Charges: The cost of materials and labor for copies will be charged to a college department. For more information about our duplication policies. prices, and available methods of payment, please see our Duplication Policy. Or contact the AV Services office at x4076.   CD Duplicating Availability: Audio duplicating of materials for classroom use. Restrictions: The AV Department reserves the right to refuse any request that may constitute copyright infringement. Charges: The cost of materials and labor for copies will be charged to a college department. For more information about our duplication policies, prices and available methods of payment, please see our Duplication Policy. Or contact the AV Services office at x4076.
  • Audiovisual Services Duplication Policy Duplication Audiovisual Services   Duplication Policy Charges for Duplication Services   AVS does not accept cash or Transfer of Funds (paper) forms.   AVS will ask requesters for an account number. We submit billings monthly through the Business Office. If you have questions about this method of payment, please contact Tim Hicks or Forrest Warner.   Students must pay for their copies in advance by writing a check, payable to Trustees of Hamilton College.   Billing Policies   For a new academic event that AVS is recording for you, up to 3 copies will be provided to the original requesting department at no charge. Any copies above and beyond these 3 copies will be charged at the rates below. Copies made for additional requesters will be billed at the rates below. The first copy of a student's senior project will be given at no charge. All additional requests will be charged at the rates below.  For media which must be shipped, a minimum $5.00 shipping and handling fee will be added.  Prices for Copies   Type of copy Any number of copies, each Sets in multiple-disc cases DVD or CD w/ case $3.00 Calculated on an individual basis Mini-DV tape, 80min. 10.00 -     Mastering, Editing and Turnaround Time   Duplication (a straight copy made by AVS with no editing work involved) 1-10 copies take 2-3 working days. 10-50 copies 3-5 working days. 50 copies 5-10 working days. Mastering footage (anything that must be edited to another format) 5-10 working days. Major projects (dance performances, theater production, multiple camera events) requiring editing work may take 3 to 4 weeks to complete. Please Note   No media carrying a Copyright will be duplicated by AVS. AVS will copy from VHS, DVD, CD, and/or digital formats. AVS no longer provides duplication service for personal work. To purchase blank media, go to the College Store or Staples, etc. Return to Audiovisual Services home
ESS
  • Accessing the Academic Server ESS Overview As of June 21st, 2012, the Software and MSS servers have been retired. Files have been transferred to the new Academic server. Below are instructions for accessing files on the new server. Accessing Files using a Mac From the main menu bar, select Go - Connect to Server. In the Connect to Server window, type academic in the Server Address field.   Click the Connect button. Accessing Files on a Windows PC From the Start Menu, select Network. In the address bar of the resulting window, type \\academic. Press the Enter key on the keyboard.
  • Data Backup and Storage ESS Introduction Imagine if all of the work that you spent hours completing suddenly disappeared and there were no way to bring it back from oblivion. A nightmarish scenario to be sure! Unfortunately, many face it every semester: ITS often assists students and employees whose computers have malfunctioned while either working on or after finishing some assignment, typically when such a loss is most painful and difficult to recover from. Thankfully, with a very little effort, this scenario can be easily avoided. Backing up your files serves many purposes. Beyond preventing a catastrophic loss of data, proper organization of one's data and easy options for retrieval will facilitate one's work at Hamilton and beyond, viz. graduate school, internships, and possibly future employment Storage Solution Finder External Hard Drive Employee Network Storage 1 Academic Server 2 Google Drive Flash Drive Dropbox or Similar Documents ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Images ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Music ✓   ✓ ✓ Video ✓   ✓     Computer Backup ✓ ✓       Easy Sharing     ✓ ✓   is a solution that should not be used for sensitive or confidential information, e.g. bank account numbers, passwords, social security numbers, health information. 1 This solution is only available to staff and faculty. 2 This solution is for academic purposes (e.g. Coursework) only. And only members of the Faculty and Staff can request folders be created on the Academic Server.              
  • Employee Storage Server (ESS) ESS ESS General Information The ESS provides all Hamilton employees a central location to store and backup critical files from their Macintosh and PC desktop computers. The Employee Storage Server (ESS) provides: Improved printing services for all office/lab/classroom computers. A central, secure area where all employees can backup or store their critical personal files from their on-campus desktop machine. These files will be accessible from any PC or Macintosh on-campus. (i.e. I can backup my own personal files from my computer) A central, secure area where each department can share files with other people in their department. (i.e. I can share files with other people in ITS for collaborative work) A central, secure area where employees can share files with people in various departments (i.e. I can share files with people in the Registrar office).   ESS User Folder Quotas (Size Limits) Overview Every employee at Hamilton College is provided with disk space on the Employee Storage Server (ESS) to back up and/or store their critical documents and other electronic data from their office computer. Each academic and administrative department is also provided shared space for employees within the department to use to share documents or data with each other. Campus space is provided for employees to use to share files with employees in other departments Standards Each employee at Hamilton is given an initial disk quota of three Gigabytes (3 GB) to store their own personal files and data. Each department and campus space is also given an initial quota of One Gigabyte (1 GB). Requests for increases in disk quotas are handled by the ITS Network and Telecommunications Services team on an individual basis. Process for requesting Disk Quota Increases Individual employees or departments may request a permanent increase in their ESS disk quota each year in increments of 500 MB. Requests for space greater than 5 GB in size will be handled on an individual basis. A maximum of 10 GB of space per employee is allowed. Additional ESS disk space is available on a temporary basis for special projects, research, or instructional needs. Any requests for additional space will be referred to the Instructional Technology Services or Desktop Integration Services teams for alternative arrangements. The requestor must provide a time limit for the request, i.e., when he/she expects to no longer need the space (the time should not exceed one semester). Since the increase in disk quota is temporarily allocated, it is the requester's responsibility to either request an extension or to "backup" her/his files to another area when the additional quota expires. The Employment Storage Server (ESS) will not provide: Any access to students. Students have their own storage server (SSS) A place for you to backup your entire hard drive. The storage space we are providing is only to be used to backup or store your critical files. Most of your hard drive space is used to store applications which need to be completely re-installed if there were ever a problem with your machine, so it is pointless to back them up.
  • ESS File Manager on the WWW ESS ESS File Manager on the WWW Provided you have access to the World Wide Web, it is possible to work with files you have stored in your ESS HOME directory from anywhere in the world.  Your HOME directory is the folder on ESS that bears your e-mail name.  For example, it might be alincoln if you were Abe Lincoln.  You will not have access to department or special shared folders on ESS through this interface. Accessing Your Files and Folders on ESS via the Web Open your Internet browser (Internet Explorer for Windows, Netscape for Macintosh, etc.) and navigate to the My Hamilton page: http://my.hamilton.edu/. Login in using your e-mail address (e.g. alincoln) and your e-mail password.  It is important to note that you do NOT use your ESS password.  The web interface will authenticate you via your e-mail login and will not require you to enter your ESS password. screenshot Click on the Submit button. Click on the Files tab. You will see a list of the folders and files you have previously created in your ESS folder. screenshot To open a folder, simply click on the folder name.  In this example, I clicked on the folder called backups and then the folder named Tbird.  You can see this by looking at the top of the screen following the word Folder: screenshot To return to the level above the folder you are in, you can either click on the Back button in your browser or click on Parent Directory in the list of files and folders. screenshot Reading and Modifying ESS Files You will have to save files to your computer in order to read or work on them. To do so, simply click on the file you wish to access. If you are prompted to choose what to do with the file (open or save), Save it to a convenient location on your computer (e.g. the desktop.) After saving the file, go to the location you chose (e.g. the desktop) and open it there.  It is not recommended that you choose Open since the file will be saved in a temporary folder and won’t be easy to find. IMPORTANT NOTE:  After making modifications to your file you must upload it back to your SSS folder.  Clicking on “save” within the application (e.g. Word) will NOT save the modifications on SSS. Windows    screenshot screenshot     Macintosh (You may or may not see the second screen because the file may automatically download to a default download location on your computer’s hard drive.) screenshot screenshot Saving Modified Files Back to your ESS folder NOTE: If you download a file (MS Word document, PowerPoint presentation, etc.) to your computer and modify it, you must upload that file back to ESS to overwrite the unmodified file.  To upload a file from your computer to your ESS folder, click the Upload File link. screenshot If you are uploading a modified version of a file to replace the unmodified version of that file on ESS, place a check mark in the box next to Check to overwrite existing file names. If you aren’t replacing a file, leave this unchecked. Click on the Browse button. screenshot Browse to the file that you wish to upload. Highlight the file and click Open.  Windows       Macintosh screenshot screenshow Click Submit. The little box will close, the page will refresh, and the file will show up in your ESS folder. screenshot Deleting Files and Folders To delete a file or folder, click on Delete next to that file or folder (NOTE: folders must be empty in order to be deleted. If you want to delete a folder with files in it, you must first delete all of the files in that folder and then you can delete the folder. Unless you have no other choice, it is best to save this task for when you return to campus.) A box will pop up asking, “Are you sure you want to delete this file?” Click OK. Windows        Macintosh screenshot   screenshot If the file deletes successfully, the page will refresh and the file will now be deleted. If you attempted to delete a folder that was not empty, you’ll see an error message like the one below. Click Close in order to close the message. You should either delete all of the files within that folder and then delete the folder or wait until you are back on campus to delete the folder. screenshot Renaming Files and Folders on ESS To rename a file or folder on ESS, click Rename next to the file or folder screenshot In the space provided, enter the name you want to give the file or folder and click Submit. screenshot The page will refresh with the new file name showing up. IMPORTANT NOTE: WHENEVER you are finished using My Hamilton or leave your computer, be sure to Log out! screenshot
Ellucian Colleague
  • Central Information Services Mission Statement Ellucian Colleague Team Mission, Services and Expectations Mission Statement: The Central Information Services Team provides technical support for the Colleague (Student System, Financials and Alumni Fund Raising) and Kronos (Human Resources and Payroll) systems, and makes the information in those systems available to college constituents as appropriate. Through these services, the CIS Team helps the college operate in an efficient manner.   Services: • Analysis of college business practices • Implementation of new processes and office workflow • Application problem solving • Application software development and support • Daily operational support • Training • Upgrade and maintenance to the administrative system hardware and software • Consulting services for the support of external system interfaces such as TMA, Blackboard Learn, Blackboard Transact, BlackboardConnect, NSLC, etc... • Login and password assignment as well as establishment and maintenance of UniData (database), Colleague and Kronos   Success Measures: • Formal feedback from clients on a periodic basis. One example would be a questionnaire or survey, distributed at to-be-determined intervals to those using the services of the team. • Informal feedback from clients. Examples would be individual conversations, phone calls, written "thank-you" notes or follow-up complaints. • Self-Evaluation at the completion of a task or project. • Degree of project completion in line with the pre-determined project plan or other written or verbal commitment. • Amount of "pro-active" support given to clients.  
  • Colleague and Colleague Advancement Support Ellucian Colleague Colleague and Colleague Advancement Support Colleague and Colleague Advancement User Access Information: Department Security Manager Information Administrative Information Systems Security Policy & Procedures Administrative Account Request Form Colleague and Colleague Advancement Usage Tips: Tip # 1 - Using the @ Symbol for Last Record Retrieval Tip # 2 - Using = to Tell Colleague to do it Your Way Tip # 3  - Adding Leading Zeroes to Datatel-Generated EXCEL Spreadsheets Central Information Services Team Datatel Inc.'s Colleague software is used to support the student and financial information offices of the College. The Central Information Services Team provides work flow analysis, design and implementation of new processes and continuing maintenance of the existing application software. The Members of the Central Information Services Team are: Marty Sweeney Director, Central Information Services           msweeney@hamilton.edu x4164 Linda Lacelle Systems Analyst/Administrator llacelle@hamilton.edu x4994 Kathy Kwasniewski Systems Analyst kkwasnie@hamilton.edu x4172 Geoff Pashley Programmer / Analyst gpashley@hamilton.edu x4163 Mary Fiore Programmer / Analyst mfiore@hamilton.edu x4990 Colleague Advancement Datatel Inc.'s Colleague Advancement software is used to support the alumni and fund raising information offices of the College. For questions about the Colleague Advancement software, please contact: Loren Corbin Director of Information Services / Database Administrator Office of Communications and Development lcorbin@hamilton.edu x4633 John Drew Systems Analyst Office of Communications and Development jdrew@hamilton.edu x4674  
  • Department Security Manager Information Ellucian Colleague The role of the Department Security Manager (DSM) is to coordinate and approve all access to the administrative system (Colleague) for the users in their respective areas. It is the responsibility of the DSM to insure that new employees read and sign the Administrative Information Systems Security Policy and Procedures document. The signed last page of this document should be returned to the Central Information Services Team - Information Technology Services - 3rd Floor of Burke Library. The DSM should also request the appropriate access for the employee using the Administrative Account Request Form.   Department       Responsible Area(s)       Department Security Manager           Business Office   General Ledger   Shari Whiting     Accounts Payable   Andrea Brown (Alternate)     Purchasing   Erika Mumford (Alternate)     Accounts Receivable         Cash Receipts         Budgets         Investments               Registrar   Student Records   Kristin Friedel     Registration         Dean of Students         Dean of Faculty         Other College offices using student data               C&D   Alumni Records   Loren Corbin     Gift Processing   John Drew (Alternate)           Admission   Admission Data   Sue Donegan           Financial Aid   Financial Aid Data   Melissa Rose           Human Resources   Human Resource Data   Steve Stemkoski         Mike Thayer (Alternate)           Residence Life   Housing / Meal Plan Data   Travis Hill         Jean Burke (Alternate)            ITS   Administrative Access    Linda Lacelle         Marty Sweeney (Alternate)            
  • Tip # 1 - Using the @ Symbol for Last Record Retrieval Ellucian Colleague Tip #1 Whenever you've done maintenance on a record and want to bring up the last record you worked on (even on a different form), simply enter:   @ (Get the @ Symbol by pressing Shift 2) at the Person Lookup prompt, then press: Enter
  • Tip # 2 - Using = to Tell Colleague to do it Your Way Ellucian Colleague Tip #2 Have you ever entered data into Colleague and had the system change what you typed into upper or lower case? Colleague tries to be helpful, but sometimes that is not the way you want that particular name or piece of data to look! This happens most frequently with names, addresses and code descriptions. If you enter the equals sign immediately followed by your desired text (without a space between them), Colleague will not attempt to change what you typed. For example, if you want Colleague to leave the last name VanSpike alone (instead of changing it to Vanspike - with a lower-case "s") you would enter: =VanSpike directly into the last name field.
  • Tip # 3 - Adding Leading Zeros to Datatel-Generated EXCEL Spreadsheets Ellucian Colleague Tip #3 Have you ever used the EXCEL command in Colleague and been frustrated when it drops "leading zeros" from columns of numbers, such as Colleague ID's? In other words, instead of a seven digit Colleague ID like 0145672, you'd see one like 145672 (Note that the "leading zero" has been dropped). Luckily, there's a simple fix for this problem. Once you generate your spreadsheet, follow these steps:  Highlight the column of numbers to be fixed by moving your curser over the column letter at the very top of the column. For example, if you want to highlight the first column on the left, you'd move your curser over the letter "A" at the top of that column. As soon as you do this, you'll see a small downward-facing arrow appear. Click once on the column to highlight it. When the column is highlighted, it will turn blue. From the Format dropdown menu, choose Cells (first choice at the top). In the Format Cells window, choose the Number tab (first on the left, along the top – should already be the default choice). Under the word "Category:" (on the left), there is a dropdown list of choices. Choose Custom (last choice at the bottom). Beneath the word "Type:" (on the right), there is a single-line text box. Directly beneath that is a dropdown list of various choices. The single-line text box will initially have the word "General" in it. Note that the word "General" is also the first item listed in the dropdown list. Double-click on the single-line text box to highlight it. Use your backspace key to remove the word "General" from the single-line text box. If the numbers you are trying to fix are, for example, Colleague ID's, then they all need to uniformly consist of seven digits. Many of the older Colleague ID's on our system contain one or more "leading zeros," as shown in the example above. So in this example, enter 0000000 (seven zeros) into the single-line text box (where you previously removed the word "General"). Click the OK button at the bottom of the Format Cells window. All of your Colleague ID's will now have seven digits, with leading zeros where appropriate. Be sure to save your spreadsheet. 
Email
  • A Few Things to Know About the HillConnect Environment Email Return to HillConnect Homepage Getting help Google continuously updates its core e-mail and calendar programs so that new features are brought to you as soon as they become available.  Consequently, if you see something new that is unclear, your best bet is to take advantage of the online help built in to HillMail and HillCal. How do I access the HillConnect environment directly? To log in directly to your HillMail account, please go to:   http://hillconnect.hamilton.edu   What is the "Migrated" label/folder? If you had an active e-mail account at Hamilton prior to May 2010 and your account was transitioned to HillConnect, a label/folder with the name "Migrated" was created during the transition process. It's important to know that what the old mail server referred to as a" folder" is now referred to as a "label" in the new system. A fundamental difference between the two storage methods is that with the new Google system multiple labels can be assigned to message where previously in the old SUN system a single message could be assigned to only one folder. Therefore you can delete the label/folder named "Migrated" and not delete the associated messages. I no longer receive a copy of any messages I send to Hamilton Listserv's what do I need to do? Google will not deliver mail to you that you send to a Listserv list.   So that you can tell whether your message was processed, your subscription settings are automatically set so that you will receive an acknowledgment e-mail message from Listserv when your message is delivered to a list. If you still wish to see a copy of your message in your INBOX, you can add your e-mail address to the CC (carbon copy) line when you address your message to the list.  Note that the CC line is processed independently from the TO line.  Therefore, receipt of the message in your INBOX is not confirmation that your message was distributed to the list.  Only the acknowledgement message noted above  can be considered confirmation that your message was distributed. How Can I Change Label Colors? The default color assigned to a label is so light it is almost invisible. To change the color, click the square to the right of the label (folder name) and select a color from the palette that appears.   Our office/organization shares an account, how many connections can we have to our HillMail account through a client? You are limited to ten simultaneous logins via a client, i.e. if you share an account and use Thunderbird/Outlook/AppleMail.  You are not limited by the number of web logins.  
  • Becoming a Listserv List Owner Email Listserv Becoming a ListServ List Owner What is the time commitment involved in owning a list? What skills will I need? How do I become a list owner? Request a new list What is the time commitment involved in owning a list? Depending on the type of mailing list you want to create, your involvement in managing the list will either be minimal or considerable. A list used strictly for the distribution of information from you to the list's subscribers requires very little management. A moderated mailing list requires you to read and approve each mailing that is sent to the list. If your moderated list is very active, your time investment could be considerable. What skills will I need? Lists can be managed either through the Web or through e-mail. Therefore, if you are comfortable with both, you have the necessary software skills with which to start.  Most new list owners prefer to use the Web interface to manage their list. The primary responsibility of each list owner is to subscribe users to their list or inform users how to subscribe themself.  In addition, the list owner may perform other maintenance tasks like removing subscriptions, correcting subscriber names or changing how the list functions.  None of these operations is very complex and can be accomplished easily through the Web.  The list owner, by default, will receive error notices when mail that is sent to the list fails.  The most common error notice is one that lists the subscriber(s) whose address(es) cannot be reached.  The ITS Help Desk can help you interpret error messages. How do I become a list owner? The first step is to decide on a list name and identify its purpose. It is recommended you keep your list name short yet descriptive (about 8 - 10 characters). As an option you can add "-L" to the name in order to differentiate it from an e-mail account that bears a similar name.  However, it is acceptable to use the same name for the e-mail account and the Listserv list. Next you'll need to decide how you want the list to function. For example, will the list be used for two way discussions or will it be used strictly to distribute announcements? As you complete the request form (see link below) you will be asked to choose between 3 types of lists. Samples of each type are available during the request process.  If none of the samples fit your needs, you may start with one of them and modify it as necessary. Contact Debby Quayle at 859-4031 to further discuss your options. When the request is submitted, an auto-reply is sent to you that confirms receipt of the request.  Once the list shell has been created, you will receive a follow-up e-mail from Debby Quayle.  Only then is it ready for subscribers. Documentation to assist you in the management of your list and its subscribers can be found on the Listserv home page. Request a new list Request a new list Return to Listserv Page Return to Main ITS Page
  • Changing Your HillConnect Password to Match Your ESS/SSS Password Email Back to HillConnect home page IMPORTANT NOTE: If you remember your My Hamilton password  but you have forgotten your e-mail password, these instructions will help you synchronize your passwords so that both accounts will use the password you use for My Hamilton.   If you want to change ONLY your ESS/SSS password, please contact the ITS Help Desk at 315-859-4181.  If you remember your HillConnect (e-mail) password and your intention is to make your ESS/SSS password match your e-mail password, please visit the password change form and follow the directions there. To make your E-mail password the same as your current ESS/SSS password: Log in to MY.HAMILTON.EDU Start by going to http://my.hamilton.edu. Use your e-mail ID as your Username (do NOT include @hamilton.edu). Then enter your e-mail password and click on Submit. After logging in, click on the Setup tab. Click on Passwords and Security. Enter your e-mail ID and password. This provides extra security in case you’ve accidentally left yourself logged in on a public computer. Click on Submit. Click on the Synchronize Passwords form link found under the heading Synchronize Passwords. This will automatically begin the synchronization process and change your HillConnect password to match your MyHamilton password. Once done, please try logging onto HillConnect with your MyHamilton password.  
  • Configuring Windows Mail for HillConnect Mail Email Configure Settings for HillMail To change the incoming server settings, click the Tools menu and then select Accounts. Click on your Hamilton Email account and select Properties then click the Servers tab. Set Incoming mail (IMAP) to: imap.gmail.com Set Outgoing mail (SMTP) to: smtp.gmail.com Set E-mail username to: username@hamilton.edu where “username” is your e-mail ID Set User Name to username@hamilton.edu where “username” is your e-mail ID. Check the box that says: My server requires authentication screenshot Click the Advanced tab. Set the Outgoing mail (SMTP) port to: 465 Check the box that says: This server requires a secure connection (SSL) Set the Incoming mail (IMAP) port to: 993 Check the box that says: This server requires a secure connection (SSL) If a window pops up, “Would you like to refresh your folder list?”, click Yes screenshot To change the Hamilton address book settings, click the Tools menu and then select Accounts.  Under Contacts select Hamilton AD and click Properties. Set Contacts Directory Account to: Hamilton AD Set Server Name to bud2c.hamilton.edu Click the box that says: This server requires me to log on Set Account name: to username@hamilton.edu where “username” is your e-mail  ID. screenshot Click the Advanced tab. Set the port for Contacts Directory (LDAP): to 3269 Click the box that says: This server requires a secure connection (SSL). Set the Search base to: dc=Hamilton,dc=edu (no spaces). Click OK and then Close. screenshot Click the Sync icon and type in your e-mail password. Your mail folders should populate with your Hamilton e-mail.
  • Google Sync versus IMAP Email Return to configuring my mobile device Return to HillConnect Homepage Sync Supports push technology which delivers data to your device as new data is available. There is a single setup for e-mail, calendar, and contacts. The setup is easy. Most devices support only one sync account. Depending on your device, any push connection may use more power than fetching data at scheduled intervals. In some cases the difference in power usage may have a noticeable impact on your phone's battery life. To save battery life, turn off push and set device to fetch data every 30 to 60 minutes. Beta software. IMAP Supports pull technology which fetches data at a scheduled interval set by the user. One setup for e-mail and a separate setup for calendar and contacts. The setup is easy. Devices support multiple accounts. Pull technology allows you to set the interval to fetch new data and therefore improving your phone's battery life.
  • HillConnect Resources Email Hamilton's e-mail system is HillConnect, powered by Google. The information provided below is designed to address some of the more common questions related to using your e-mail account at Hamilton College.  If you have specific questions regarding the functionality or your account (e.g. how to create "groups"), please try using the Help feature  built-in to your HillConnect account (click on the "gear" icon in the upper right corner of your HillConnect e-mail screen).  If you find that to be insufficient, please contact the ITS Help Desk at 315-859-4181. Topics Covered Requesting an e-mail account Activating your HillConnect account Accessing your e-mail via the Web Using your HillConnect account About the HillConnect environment Changing your existing password Forgotten password Accessing your e-mail via an e-mail client application Configuring your mobile device Mass mailing lists (ListServ) Graduate E-mail Account FAQ Requesting an e-mail account New Student Accounts: ITS automatically creates e-mail accounts for students when they are admitted.  Consequently, there should never be a need for a student to request an e-mail account for their own personal use. New Employee Accounts: ITS automatically creates e-mail accounts for employees when we receive official notification from Human Resources.  New faculty accounts are created when we receive official notification from the Dean of Faculty office. Temporary Employee Accounts:  To request a temporary employee account, please complete the form found at: https://my.hamilton.edu/survey-manager/survey?id=1304.  Please notify ITS as far in advance as possible when requesting an account as there are several processes that must take place to ensure your temp has access to all the resources he/she will need. Departmental Accounts: Accounts for departmental use can be requested by contacting Debby Quayle at x4031 or by e-mail at dquayle@hamilton.edu. Organizational Accounts: Student organizations can request accounts when they register on the Student Activities web site.  If the organization elects not to register, they must have an employee/faculty sponsor. Back to top Activating Your HillConnect Account Your Hamilton e-mail account must be activated before it can be used. Instrucstions can be found at: https://my.hamilton.edu/youraccount Back to top Accessing your e-mail via the web Regardless of whether you are off campus or on campus you can check your e-mail from any computer as long as it has access to the Internet (World Wide Web). Once you are connected to the Internet, point your browser (Internet Explorer, Safari, Firefox, etc.) to http://hillconnect.hamilton.edu. You can also access your e-mail via the e-mail channel in My Hamilton at http://my.hamilton.edu. Back to top Using Your HillConnect Account About the HillConnect Environment Mac/Windows Understanding conversations Google Apps Overview Video How to set up forwarding in HillConnect From Google How to Configure Filters From Lynda.com To view these videos, please email learnit@hamilton.edu for an account Gmail Essentials Video Calendar Essentials Video Changing your existing password There are two ways to change your password. The Change Password Form allows you to enter a new e-mail password that will also become your new network password.  The Synchronize Password link will use your existing network password and will make your e-mail password match it. Change Password Form: Changes your e-mail password and your ESS/SSS at the same time. Synchronize Password Form: Changing your HillConnect Password to Match Your ESS/SSS Password.  Forgotten Password Current students and employees need to contact the ITS Help Desk at 315-859-4181 or e-mail us at helpdesk@hamilton.edu for assistance.  Instructions for other members of the Hamilton Community. Back to top Accessing your e-mail via an e-mail software application You can access your Hamilton e-mail account using e-mail client software that supports the IMAP mail protocol. ITS supports the use of Mozilla Thunderbird and provides comprehensive documentation for configuring and using Thunderbird. College-owned computers for employees have Thunderbird installed and configured for the computer's user. If you want to install and configure Thunderbird on your personal computer to access your e-mail please contact the ITS Help Desk. Thunderbird Installing & Configuring for HillConnect E-mail Outlook How to Configure Microsoft Outlook 2010 Apple Mail How to Configure Apple Mail Windows Mail How to Configure Windows Mail Others If you are comfortable using another e-mail program without support from ITS, you can use the generic settings below as a guide for setting up one of these e-mail clients. If you need further assistance, use the Help feature in the program or refer to the support webster for the respective software company. Settings for any client Configuring Your Mobile Devices Configuring my mobile device for mail, calendar, and contacts Back to top Mass mailing lists (ListServ) The Hamilton ListServ system allows you to quickly send an e-mail to a group of individuals, such as a club or organization, the entire campus community, or certain class year of students. The ListServ groups for the entire campus, all students, all faculty, all employees, or a particular class year are mass mailing lists which are subject to certain policies. For more information on mass mailing policies and how to use ListServ, see the information on our ListServ web page: ListServ Mailing List Info Back to top
  • How to Change Your ListServ Password Email How to Create or Change a Listserv Password To make changes to your own list subscription settings or to make changes to a list you own, you must first have a Listserv password.  The instructions that follow, explain how to do this via e-mail and via the web. Using E-mail Creating a Listserv password via e-mail (when you have never had one before) Address a new e-mail message to listserv@listserv.hamilton.edu Leave the subject line blank. In the first line of the message type:  PW ADD newpassword (Replace newpassword at left with your desired password.  There is no limit to the number of characters you use.) If you use an automatic "signature" in your e-mail software, it must be disabled before you send your password request. If you do not know what the signature feature is, you are likely not using it. Send your message. Changing an existing Listserv password via e-mail  (whether known or forgotten) Address a new e-mail message to listserv@listserv.hamilton.edu Leave the subject line blank. In the body of the message type the command that applies to  your situation. If you know your current password and you want to change it, you should type  the following into the first line of the message: pw change newpassword pw=oldpassword (replace newpassword with your desired new password and replace oldpassword with the password you are replacing.) If you have forgotten your current password, you should type  the following into the first line of the message: pw change newpassword   (replace newpassword with your desired new password.) You will receive a confirmation message from Listserv as illustrated below.  Click on the blue web link to confirm your password change. If you use an automatic "signature" in your e-mail software, it must be disabled before you send your subscription request. If you do not know what the signature feature is, you are likely not using it. Send your message. Using the Web Creating a Listserv password via the web (when you have never had one before or you have forgotten your password) Go to http://listserv.hamilton.edu and click Get a new LISTSERV password. In the window that opens (shown below) enter your full e-mail address (including @hamilton.edu) and the password you want to use.  Then click Register Password.  Once your password registration has been accepted, you will receive a confirmation e-mail (similar to the one shown above in the previous section in step 3. b. ii.  You must click on the link it includes before your password will take effect. Changing an existing Listserv password via the web (whether known or forgotten) Go to http://listserv.hamilton.edu and click Get a new LISTSERV password. There are two options for changing your password, depending on whether you remember your current password. If you remember your current password, click on the Change Password button as shown and fill in the required fields in the window that opens.  Once you have submitted your change, you can log in with the new password. If you no longer remember your password, refer to the instructions in the previous section (above) for creating a new password. Return to Listserv Page Return to Main ITS Page
  • How to Set Your ListServ Subscription to Digest Mode Email What is Digest Mode? Listserv offers many options for managing the behavior of the lists to which you are subscribed.  One of the most popular settings is Digest Mode.  When it is activated for your subscription, Listserv collects all the messages sent to that list from that point forward for each day and sends them to you in a single message that contains a table of contents followed by the full text of each message.  (NOTE:  Extremely active lists may result in two or more digest messages.)  All of Hamilton's mass mailing lists (e.g. events-all, notices-facutly, etc.) allow you to choose Digest Mode.  The digest message for these lists is sent each day at 4:30 p.m..  Private lists (those for student organizations or departments) are sent at midnight by default.  The list owner can change the time at which the digest is sent.   For assistance, please contact Debby Quayle at 859-4031 (dquayle@hamilton.edu). Getting Started The easiest way to manage your Listserv subscription is through the Listserv web interface.   Before you can use it, however, you must have a Listserv password.  It will allow you to manage your own subscription(s) as well as manage any lists you may own.  If you already have a password, you can proceed to the steps below. Set Your Subscription to Digest Mode In your web browser (Internet Explorer, Firefox, etc.) go to http://listserv.hamilton.edu.  Log in using your full e-mail address and the password you created for yourself for Listserv. In the Listserv web site, click on Subscribers Corner in the menu across the top. The lists to which you are subscribed should appear under the red My Lists tab. Locate the list you wish to set to Digest Mode and click on the word Settings next to the list name.  This will open a page that displays your subscription settings for that list. Click to put a dot next to Digest (HTML format). Scroll to the bottom of the page and click on the Update button. Return to the Subscriber's Corner menu to do the same for other subscriptions you wish to set to Digest Mode. When you are finished, click to Log Out of Listserv (located in the upper right corner of the screen beneeth the green questionmark). Removing Digest Mode Repeat the steps 1-5 described above for setting Digest Mode. In step 6, click to put a dot next to Regular. Scroll to the bottom of the page and click on the Update button. Return to the Subscriber's Corner menu to do the same for other subscriptions you wish to set to Rgular Mode. When you are finished, click to Log Out of Listserv (located in the upper right corner of the screen beneeth the green questionmark).
  • How to Temporarily Turn Mass Mail Off and On Email As a student or employee, you are automatically subscribed to 6 mass mail lists.  For example, if you are a student in the class of 2016 you are subscribed to:  events-all, events-students, events-2016, notices-all, notices-students and notices-2016.  Please review the grid below to determine the lists to which you are subscribed.   Events Notices Example Students All All events-all notices-all   Students Students events-students notices-students   xxxx (class year) xxxx (class year) events-2016 Employees All All events-all notices-all   Employees Employees events-employees notices-employees   admin, faculty, staff or maintop admin, faculty, staff or maintop events-admin notices-faculty How to temporarily turn OFF mass mail If you are going away, for example, and you do not want to receive mass mail during your absence, here is how you can turn off all or some your mass mail.  NOTE:  Unsubscribing from these lists will accomplish the same goal but only if you unsubscribe from all 6 lists.    If your goal is to unsubscribe from only a few of the lists (e.g. only the -all lists) you must use the method described below. Determine the lists you want to temporarily turn off. Address an e-mail message to listserv@listserv.hamilton.edu In the body of the message type something similar to the following (the content will depend on which lists you want to turn off). NOTE: each entry should be on a separate line and there should not be a space between "no" and "mail". set events-all nomail set notices-all nomail set events-students nomail set notices-students nomail If you use an automatic signature in your e-mail, you need to turn it off (or delete it) for this message.  Otherwise, your signature will generate an error message and your change will not be accepted by Listserv.  If you do not know if you use an automatic signature, you are likely not using one. Send your message How to turn mass mail back on NOTE:  If you unsubscribed from the mass mail lists, you must resubscribe to them.  The method described below will not work if you are not subscribed to the list.  Click here for instructions.  Otherwise, proceed with the instructions that follow.  Determine the lists you want to turn back on.  Address an e-mail message to listserv@listserv.hamilton.edu In the body of the message type something similar to the following (the content will depend on which lists you want to turn on). NOTE: Each entry should be on a separate line. set events-all nomail set notices-all nomail set events-students nomail set notices-students nomail If you use an automatic signature in your e-mail, you need to turn it off (or delete it) for this message.  Otherwise, your signature will generate an error message and your change will not be accepted by Listserv.  If you do not know if you use an automatic signature, you are likely not using one. Send your message  
  • Listserv Resources Email ListServ is a commercial software product installed on Hamilton College's E-mail system. It is designed to provide an easy way to create and maintain large or specialized E-mail mailing lists. These lists can be used for E-mail based distribution of information, discussion, questions and answers, etc. Lists are created and "owned" by an E-mail user who manages the list's behavior. Members of the list are subscribed to it either by the list owner or by following instructions provided by the list owner. All lists that are created and maintained at Hamilton College are kept private. Subscriber names and E-mail addresses are only available to the list owner. They are never published. As a list member, you are able to manage certain aspects of your subscription. As the list owner, you are able to manage a wide variety of aspects of the list's behavior. The links that follow will provide you with some basic information about both. If you have a question about ListServ that requires personal attention, please contact the ITS Help Desk at 315-859-4181 or write to helpdesk@hamilton.edu.   Mass Mailing List Guidelines Guidelines for ListServ Mass Mailing Lists Request a New ListServ List Request a New List List Owner Related Documents Becoming a ListServ List Owner Quick Start Guide for List Owners  List User (Subscriber) Related Documents How to Send Mail to One of the Mass E-mail Lists How to Subscribe or Unsubscribe to/from a ListServ List How to Change your ListServ Password How to Set Your Listserv Subscription to Digest Mode
  • Moving Your HillConnect Mail to Another Account Email This document describes how to move your HillConnect mail into another account.  Detailed instructions are provided for moving it into a commercial Gmail account.  Moving your Hamilton mail to a Commercial Gmail Account These instructions assume you have already established an account with Google (gmail.com). Click on the gear icon in the upper right corner of your screen next to your e-mail address.   From the menu that appears, select Mail Settings.        In the Settings screen, click on the link labeled Forwarding and POP/IMAP.  Even though your settings may already indicate that “POP is enabled for all mail….”, go ahead and click in the dot next to “Enable POP for all mail (even mail that’s already been downloaded”.  Then click on the Save Changes button at the bottom of the Settings page. Log in to your commercial Gmail account (http://gmail.google.com).  NOTE: If you have not previously configured your Hamilton account to allow multiple account logins, you will have to log out of your Hamilton account before logging in to your commercial (.com) Gmail account. Once you are in your commercial account, click on the gear icon and select Mail Settings. Click on the link labeled Accounts and Import and then click on the link on that page labeled Import mail and contacts (see below). Enter your HillConnect account address (e.g. dquayle@hamilton.edu) and click on Continue. Enter your HillConnect password and click on Continue. In the next screen enter your password again as prompted. For the next 6 steps, please refer to the image below: Change the POP user name to include @hamilton.edu (e.g. dquayle2@hamilton.edu) Change the SMTP server to pop.gmail.com Click on the link to the right of "Port: 110" labeled Edit Click in the box to select “Use SSL” Change the port to 995 Click on Continue In the next screen select the following check boxes: Import Mail  Optional: Select to “Leave a copy of retrieved messages on the server”. NOTE:  In some cases, checking this option will prevent the transfer from beginning. If that occurs, uncheck it and try again. Add a label to all imported mail [dquayle2@hamilton.edu] This will allow you to easily identify the mail that was imported from your Hamilton account. 18. Click on Start Import. 19. You should see a confirmation page that informs you the import has begun. Click on OK.  NOTE:  The transfer of your mail can take DAYS.  Google gives it a very low priority but it does take place.  You can check on the progress by doing a search in your Gmail.com account for all mail labeled userID@hamilton.edu (substitute your real user ID where “userID” appears”).  If the number of messages found with that label in your Gmail.com account matches the number of messages in your “all mail” label (folder) in your HillConnect account, then it is done!! When the transfer has finished you should do the following: Log in to your Hamilton HillConnect account and set it up to forward your mail to your Gmail.com account.  You can do this by going to the gear icon and again select Mail Settings.  Click on Forwarding & POP/IMAP, fill in the address for your Gmail.com account and click Save Changes. Next, log in to your Gmail.com account.  Click on the gear icon, select Mail Settings and then select Accounts and Import. In the middle of the section, where it is labeled Check mail using POP3, you’ll see a link labeled “delete” to the far right.  Click on the “delete” link.  Doing so will break the tie between your two accounts.  From here on, new mail addressed to your Hamilton account will automatically arrive in your gmail.com account.      
  • Policies - Access to Information Technology Resources Email Policies Access to Information Technology Resources Eligibility Information Technology Resources (computer hardware, software, telephone systems, cable television, networks, services, data, and other information) are made available at Hamilton to support and facilitate the teaching, research and administrative functions of the College. Electronic resources include: Group I (electronic mail, listservs, personal calendar, portal, Blackboard course management system, network storage, campus ID card) Group II (Web Advisor) Group III (Login access to Datatel) Access to electronic resources for employees, students, spouses/partners, and alumni is enabled through username and password provided to individuals according to the following guidelines. Non-Faculty Employees are given access to Group I resources upon notification of hire. Access to Group III resources is by request from the Department Head. Non-Faculty employee access to all resources is removed at the end of business on the last date of employment.  As soon as an employee gives notice, he/she should enable a "vacation" (auto-responder) message to indicate his/her last date of employment and to provide correspondents with an alternate address to which they should address future College business.  Employees should also remove any personal e-mail or files from their accounts during this period.  Faculty are given access to Group I resources and Group II resources upon notification of hire. Access to Group III resources is by request by the Dean of Faculty. Faculty access to all resources is removed at the end of business three months after the last date of employment.    A request for a brief extension of e-mail privileges may be made to the Dean of Faculty. Upon request to the Dean of Faculty an emeritus faculty member can retain his/her Hamilton e-mail address for as long as desired. Students are given access to Group I and Group II resources upon making an acceptance deposit to the College. Students who work in administrative offices may be granted limited access to Group III resources. Student access to all resources is removed three months after withdrawal or graduation.   A request for a brief extension of e-mail privileges may be made to the Director, Help Desk and Training Services in ITS. Graduates are automatically eligible for access to the Hamilton alumni directory. As part of the directory, alumni have access to an e-mail forwarding service. Each alumnus can create a username@alumni.hamilton.edu which will automatically forward e-mail to an e-mail account they have with an Internet Service Provider (e.g. AOL). Information Technology Resources (computer hardware, software, telephone systems, cable television, networks, services, data, and other information) are made available at Hamilton to support and facilitate the teaching, research and administrative functions of the College. Access to these resources is provided to employees of the College (faculty, administration, staff, maintenance and operations) and enrolled students consistent with their responsibilities. E-mail accounts are continued for Hamilton alumni for three months after graduation, and may be extended by special request to the e-mail administrator. Other individuals, upon submission of a request, may be granted access to some, or all, of Hamilton's IT resources by the Vice President for Information Technology. Generally, such individuals will have some association with the College. The terms of access will be stated at the time access is granted. Under no circumstance may anyone use College IT resources for profit-making activities, in ways that are illegal (e.g. copyright violations), that threaten the College's tax-exempt or other status, or interfere with reasonable use by other members of the College community. Convention For User Names The standard Hamilton naming convention for access to electronic systems comprises the first initial of the first name, followed by (up to seven characters of) the last name. If duplicates occur, the middle initial is generally used to resolve ambiguity. Access in Residence Halls Residence hall connections are intended to provide students with access to telephone and cable television services, and the campus data network. One telephone, cable television, and data network connection is provided for each student. Network connections, wiring, equipment, or jacks may not be altered or extended beyond the location of their intended use. Students must provide their own telephones, televisions, computers, software, and Ethernet cards that meet minimum Hamilton standards. Information on current minimum standards and recommended configurations is available online. Network standards are updated annually. Any costs incurred to repair damages to a network, telephone, or cable television jack in a residence hall room will be divided equally, and billed to the students residing in that room. Management of Internet Bandwidth The campus network, including our connection to the Internet, is a critical shared resource for supporting the academic program. Uses of our Internet connection that are central to the academic/administrative mission of the college (e.g. access to Hamilton web, e-mail, and Blackboard Courseinfo servers) will receive higher priority during times when classes are in session, offices are open, and in the evenings when preparation takes place (i.e. critical times). Low priority uses, including recreational uses, are peripheral to our mission and will receive lower priority during critical times. Between the hours of 7 a.m. and 2 a.m. each day (critical times): With the exception of web traffic a fixed percentage of bandwidth is allocated between the residence halls and the Internet. Access to the Hamilton e-mail, web, and Blackboard Courseinfo servers from off-campus is the highest priority. Incoming or outgoing web traffic between the Internet and the campus network is the next highest priority. Peer-to-Peer Internet applications (applications for distributing videos, music, software, etc.) receive the lowest priority. Between the hours of 2 a.m. and 7 a.m. (non-critical times): There will be no restrictions on bandwidth. The quality and volume of our Internet traffic is regularly monitored to assure that critical applications are available to members of the community. Hamilton does not monitor the content of traffic on the network. It is the responsibility of each person using college resources, including the network, to do so in an ethical and legal manner. Particular attention should be given to observing copyright laws for digital materials. Personal Computers on the Network Internet addresses are provided dynamically through a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) system. In order to obtain a static Internet (TCP/IP) computer address the owner of the system must register the computer with ITS network services. The rules and regulations contained in this policy pertaining to electronic mail and Internet access are equally applicable to the use of personal machines for file sharing or as servers. If bandwidth or other problems occur, ITS reserves the right to discontinue access to the machine. Computers connected to the network may not be used as servers for private enterprises, commercial activity, or personal profit. Computers connected to the network may not be used to provide access to the Internet for anyone not formally affiliated with the College. If personal computers on the Hamilton network are used as servers, the administrator has the additional responsibility to respond to any use of the server that is in violation of these policies and procedures. Server administrators must take steps to prevent recurrence of such violations and report these violations to the Hamilton Network Administrator (hostmaster@hamilton.edu). ITS reserves the rights to disconnect any network port whose activity causes an adverse effect on the network or on any other user. Network connections may also be revoked in the case of malicious or inappropriate computing activity on the network. See Noncompliance and Sanctions for examples of these activities. ITS reserves the right to restrict access to the network during expansion, or for diagnostic and maintenance services. Every effort will be made to provide advance notification and to schedule such disruptions during times of minimum impact and traffic. Virus Protection Hamilton College requires all computers connected to the network to have up-to-date virus protection. Failure to do so will result in the loss of connectivity to the Hamilton College network until the situation is corrected. Sophos anti-virus software is provided free to all students. Other anti-virus products may be substituted for Sophos Anti-Virus as long as they are kept current. In addition, all attachments to e-mail sent to the Hamilton mail server are scanned for viruses. If an attachment is found to be infected it is deleted and a text file is attached to the e-mail message (called substitute.txt) informing the receiver that the attachment was infected with a virus. The receiver can then contact the sender to have the message retransmitted after the attachment has been cleaned of the virus. Windows Updates All computers running the Microsoft Windows operating system and connected to the Hamilton College network must be kept up-to-date with critical service updates from Microsoft. Failure to do so will result in the loss of connectivity to the Hamilton College network until the situation is corrected. Individuals wanting to request an exception to the Windows update policy must do so in writing to the Vice President for Information Technology. Network Connections in Departments All offices, laboratories, and classrooms on campus are wired for access to the network. If departments request additional network jacks, or if network connections need to be moved to different locations, the department should request this service through ITS. The department will be billed for charges resulting from moves, additions, and changes. Network connections, wiring, equipment, or jacks may not be altered or extended beyond the location of their intended use. Any costs incurred to repair damages to a network, telephone, or cable television jack in a department will be billed to that department. Dial-Up Connections For all campus users the primary access to Hamilton computing services is through the campus network. Dial-in access via modem is not provided.  
  • Policies - Electronic Mail (E-mail) & Listserv (Mass E-mail lists) Email Department or Group Accounts By special permission, college departments and student groups will be granted a single account to facilitate connections between the department or group and interested parties. The department or group must identify one person to be responsible for the account and to act as the contact person. In addition, student organizations must be registered with the Office of Student Activities before an account will be granted. Appropriate Use of E-mail Hamilton strongly recommends that e-mail not be used for confidential communication. E-mail is now considered a formal written record that carries the same legal weight as a formal memorandum. Users of e-mail should remember that e-mail messages become the possession of the receiver and can be easily duplicated and redistributed by recipients. Messages that have been deleted can unintentionally be retained on system backup files. In addition, even secure passwords are not completely confidential. When a private message needs to be conveyed between two individuals, a conversation is the best way to accomplish it, and messages that should not be preserved should be deleted immediately. College policy prohibits certain types of e-mail. These include mail that may be perceived as harassment, political campaigning, chain mail or commercial solicitation. Violators will be subject to loss of computer access privileges, as well as additional disciplinary action as determined by the Hamilton judiciary procedures. Certain types of e-mail, including but not limited to harassing e-mail, may also subject the sender to civil or criminal penalties. In spite of College policy, e-mail can be abused by malicious users who know the owner's computing ID and password. Users are responsible for protecting their own passwords. ListServ Lists ListServ is a commercial software product installed on our E-mail system. It is designed to provide an easy way to create and maintain large E-mail mailing lists. These lists can be used for the one-way distribution of information, for E-mail based discussion, questions and answers, etc. Lists are created and "owned" by an E-mail user who manages the list?s behavior. Any faculty, staff, or student member of the Hamilton College community is entitled to become a ListServ list owner. Campus-based organizations and departments are also entitled to own lists, but an individual within the group must be designated as the list owner. Students must be in good standing with the Dean of Students office and student organizations must be registered with the Office of Student Activities. All lists must be approved by the ITS ListServ administrator prior to creation, but the following general guidelines apply: The purpose of the list must pertain to Hamilton College business. Lists are not open to off-campus subscribers unless special permission is obtained. However, Hamilton College students or employees who use off-campus E-mail addresses are allowed to own and belong to lists. It is the list owner's responsibility to learn the commands necessary to manage the list's subscribers. Under no circumstances can a list be used to participate in or promote activities that are illegal, violate the Hamilton College code of conduct, or the Hamilton College Honor code. To apply for list ownership and select a list type, please read Becoming a ListServ List Owner from which you can create your list. Return to Main Listserv Page ListServ Mass Mailing Lists Effective July 1, 2010 As a service to the Hamilton College community, several e-mail based mass mailing lists have been created. These are designed to facilitate the timely and cost-effective distribution of information to the campus community. E-mail now reaches almost all faculty, administration and staff (members of M & O generally don't use computers in connection with their responsibilities) and students. Participation in the mass mailing lists is voluntary. In order that these lists remain a reliable means of communication, it is important that members of the Hamilton community abide by a few guidelines. These guidelines are not designed to limit free speech but are intended to keep your mail volume at a reasonable level. Most importantly, anonymous mailings are prohibited. The sender's real name must be identified (in full) within the body of the message - not just at the top in the "from" line. There are two sets of mass mailing lists, one for announcement of events and the other for general campus notices. The guidelines for use of these lists are explained below. Events By an "event" we mean an activity (meeting, performance,, lecture, etc.) that takes place on- or off-campus at a specific date and time and is sponsored, or co-sponsored by either an academic or administrative department/program or a student organization recognized by Student Activities.   Sponsorship means that the chair of a College department, program or organization indicates that the organization supports the event and that members of the College are actively involved in organizing the event (e.g., as speakers). If someone other than the organizer(s) makes the event announcement, they share in the responsibility for adhering to the guidelines. Posting to the lists will be limited to all employees and two* student representatives, or the e-mail account assigned to each student organization recognized by Student Activities. Violations by the student representatives will accrue to the organization they represent regardless of whether the violator acted alone. An event will be limited to two posts to the mass mailing lists. Corrections count as one of the two messages. If an event is cancelled or postponed, two additional notices are allowed. Each message must have a subject line that is descriptive of the event The first 4 lines of the message must contain: Date and time of the event Sponsor of the event Name of the event Location of the event The remainder of the message should be a short description of the event. [Note that if you include graphics you may exceed the limit of 25 MB for the message. Such messages will be rejected.] Clarification: Posting a message to an inappropriate list is a violation (e.g., posting a message intended for students to the events-all  list) The mass e-mail lists for posting events are: a. Events-students@listserv.hamilton.edu (sent only to students) b. Events-20xx@listserv.hamilton.edu (sent to students in a particular class year, where xx is the last two digits of the class year) c. Events-faculty@listserv.hamilton.edu (sent only to members of the faculty) d. Events-staff@listserv.hamilton.edu (sent only to members of the staff) e. Events-admin@listserv.hamilton.edu (sent only to members of the administration) f.  Events-maintop@listserv.hamilton.edu (sent only to members of Maintenance and Operations) g. Events-employees@listserv.hamilton.edu (sent only to employees) h. Events-all@listserv.hamilton.edu (sent to both students and employees) The notices mass e-mail lists will be used only for the following general categories. A non-comprehensive bulleted list of examples is provided for each category. Announcement of Hamilton deadlines, policies and procedures These announcements must come from individuals representing the administrative or academic departments responsible for the deadline, policy or procedure being addressed (e.g. drop-add, parking permits, library books due) Reports from Hamilton organizations or departments These reports must come from individuals representing the academic or administrative offices, or student organizations recognized by Student Activities who generated the reports (e.g., Minutes of Student Assembly, Agendas, reports from faculty meetings, Honor Court decisions, results of campus-wide initiatives or community events such as United Way, Heart Walk & Run, announcement of appointments). Notification of the availability of, or changes in, Hamilton College services or facilities These notices must come from individuals representing the academic or administrative departments, or student organizations recognized by Student Activities who are responsible for the services or facilities being addressed (e.g., dining and fitness center schedules, availability of Hamilton housing, IT and library services, department newsletters, availability of Hamilton-sponsored publications, Campus Safety announcements, sales in the College Store, Physical Plant notices, fund raising activities for Hamilton organizations, fund raising activities approved by Office of the President (for employees) or by the Student Activities Office (for students)). Surveys Student-initiated surveys must be related to the academic program and endorsed by a faculty mentor.  The request for such surveys must be submitted by the faculty mentor. These surveys must be sent to exception@hamilton.edu for prior approval. Student organizations recognized by Student Activities can submit surveys directly to the student lists. These must be surveys that will only be given to students. Surveys related to college business or faculty research may be submitted directly to the lists. Notices from members of the senior staff directly related to their areas of responsibility The mass e-mail lists for posting notices are: a. Notices-students@listserv.hamilton.edu(sent only to students) b. Notices-20xx@listserv.hamilton.edu (sent to students in a particular class year, where xx is the last two digits of the class year) c.  Notices-faculty@listserv.hamilton.edu (sent only to members of the faculty) d. Notices-staff@listserv.hamilton.edu (sent only to members of the staff) e. Notices-admin@listserv.hamilton.edu (sent only to members of the administration) f.  Notices-maintop@listserv.hamilton.edu (sent only to members of Maintenance and Operations) g. Notices-employees@listserv.hamilton.edu (sent only to employees) h. Notices-all@listserv.hamilton.edu (sent to both students and employees) Please consider your audience carefully (e.g., do not send a mailing to "all" if you only need to reach students).Examples of inappropriate uses include, but are not limited to: Personal opinion, public debate, or campaigning Announcements should not attempt to sell the reader on a point of view.   The information provided should be as factual as possible and sufficient enough to explain the purpose of the announcement. If additional background information is necessary, a web link may be included.  A message that contains no actual announcement (e.g. does not meet the criteria listed above for an event or a non-event) is a violation. Give-aways (personal property such as furniture, tickets, equipment, books, etc.) Surveys other than those specified above Chain mail Lost and found (except when it is Hamilton College property, or involves animals) there is a Lost and Found channel in My Hamilton. Requests for rides (there is a Rides channel in My Hamilton) Items for sale - or items desired (including houses, tickets, books, services, etc.) There is a marketplace channel in My Hamilton that can be used for this purpose.   Exceptions to the Guidelines: Messages that Fall Outside the Guidelines, or from senders not approved for Mass Mail: Any individual wanting to post a message to the mass e-mail lists that falls outside of the guidelines, can request that the message be posted by sending a request for an exception to: exception@hamilton.edu. The request will be directed to the appropriate member of the senior staff for approval. Approval or denial will be communicated to the person making the request. Requests for exceptions should be sent at least two business days in advance of the time the posting is to take place. Penalties for Violations: A first time violation will result in the removal of posting (sending) privileges to the mass lists for a period of one month (not including breaks). A second violation will result in the removal of both posting and receiving messages to/from the mass lists for a period of one month (not including breaks). A third violation will result in the loss of posting and receiving privileges for the equivalent of a full semester. A fourth violation will result in the individual being referred to the appropriate judicial body dealing with employees or students. Violations are cumulative for as long as you are at Hamilton (or four years for employees). Loss of privileges applies to all the mass lists. Violators may appeal their penalty by submitting their reasons in writing to the chair of the Committee on Information Technology. The Committee will review the appeal and return a decision within 5 business days. During the appeal process the penalty will be suspended. [Return to Main Listserv Page] For questions about these Policies, Procedures, Plans and Standards, contact: David Smallen Vice President for Information Technology, Hamilton College 315-859-4169
  • Quick Start Guide for List Owners Email For ListServ 16.0 Logging in and Setting your ListServ Preferences Open your web browser software (Internet Explorer, FireFox, Safari, etc.) and go to: http://listserv.hamilton.edu.  Click on Log In (in the upper right corner). If you have a password already established, enter your entire e-mail address (e.g. dquayle@hamilton.edu) and your Listserv password in the fields provided.  Then click on the Log In button (circled at right). If you don’t have a password, or don’t remember your password, click on the link to “get a new LISTSERV password” and follow the on-screen prompts.  When your password has been set, return to http://listserv.hamilton.edu.   After you've logged in, click on Preferences (located in the upper right corner of your screen below the green question mark shown in step 2). Click on the down arrow in the Start Page setting and choose "List Dashboard" from the list.  NOTE: If you are an advanced user and you want to see all the options, you may want to consider setting the Mode to “Expert Mode”. The Mode setting is in the first line in the preferences.   Click on the Update button in the lower right or upper right corner.  The screen will not change.  Viewing, adding or deleting list subscriptions There are two sections in this document that describe how to manage subscriptions.  This first section describes the easiest approach. The steps that follow will satisfy most of your subscription management needs.  However, if you need to add or delete large numbers of subscribers or you need to alter specific settings for a subscriber, then proceed to the next section for a more detailed approach to managing subscriptions. If you are not already in the List Dashboard view, click on the List Management menu and then select List Dashboard from the drop down list.   A list of the lists you own should appear in the bottom half of the screen. To add, delete or search for subscribers and to see a list of your subscribers, click on the [View] link under the Subscribers column heading. In the Subscriber Reports screen that opens, there are several functions you can perform.  Please refer to the illustration after step 3b. To search for a subscriber, enter as much of their name (or address) as you know in the field to the right of "Search Options", and then click on Search. To add a new subscriber, fill in the person's full address (e.g. jdoe@hamilton.edu) followed by his/her full name (e.g. John Doe).  When you click the Add Subscriber button he or she will be added to your list but he or she will NOT be automatically notified of the subscription.    To delete one or more subscribers, refer to the list of subscribers that appears below the search and add fields.  Select a subscriber (or subscribers) by clicking in the checkbox that appears next to the subscriber’s name.  Then, click on the button labeled Delete Selected Subscribers.  No notification will be sent to the subscriber.  NOTE:  If you have more than one page of subscribers, you will need to delete subscribers one page at a time. Managing subscriptions in bulk & managing subscriber settings This section describes how to manage subscriptions in bulk as well as how to manage details for a specific subscriber.  It uses a slightly different technique than described in the previous section. If you have not already done so, log in to Listserv by going to http://listserv.hamilton.edu.  Remember to enter your full e-mail address as your login ID.  If you have forgotten your password, refer to step 2b at the very beginning of this web page. Once logged in, click on the List Management menu and select List Dashboard. Depending on how many lists you own, in the section labeled "Select List",  you will either see the name of your list, names of your lists or alphabetical groupings of lists.  If you have own more than one list, click to select the list you wish to examine or manage so that its name appears in the Select List space.   Click on the List Management menu at the top of your screen and from it select Subscriber Management.    To Add or Remove Subscriptions in Bulk If you need to subscribe or remove a long list of people to your list, the easiest way to accomplish this is through the “bulk” feature. To use the bulk operation tab, you must first create a plain text file that contains a list of the subscribers you wish to add or delete (the format is described in sections a & b below). This file can be created in Microsoft Word but you must take care to choose Save As in order to change the file format to Plain Text (*.txt). On a Windows computer, “Plain Text” is found by selecting the “Save as type” drop-down list. On a Macintosh, “Plain Text” is found in the “Format” drop-down list.  NOTE: Additions and Deletions CANNOT be added to the same file. Insert Screen Shots from Word 2010 & 2011 Here Additions should by typed as follows (full address followed by full name) gwashing@hamilton.edu George Washington alincoln@hamilton.edu Abraham Lincoln ahamilto@hamilton.edu Alexander Hamilton NOTE: Each subscriber appears on a separate line. A tab (not a space) is used to separate the e-mail address from the subscriber’s full name.  Deletions should be typed as follows  (full address only) gwashing@hamilton.edu alincoln@hamilton.edu ahamilto@hamilton.edu NOTE: It is not necessary to include the subscriber’s full name if their subscription is being deleted from the list. Once you have logged in to Listserv (http://listserv.hamilton.edu), proceed to the List Management menu and then choose List Dashboard if you are not already on that screen.  As described in sections above, select the list you wish to manage. Return to the List Management menu and choose  Subscriber Management. In the screen that opens, click on the Bulk Operations tab.   In the Bulk Operations screen, select the operation you wish to perform.  Read each selection carefully before making your choice.  Then, click on the Browse... button and navigate to the location of the plain text file you saved in step 1 above.  Once you click to select the file, its location and file name will appear in the Input File: space to the left of the Browse button.   Review your settings to confirm you are about to perform the correct operation and then click on the Import button. When the operation is complete you will see a summary of the import at the top of the page. The example below is for a list called “Test-L”.  
  • Student Organization Account Creation Process Email There are two types of accounts managed using the Student Organization Management system, Mass E-mail Only and Student Organization accounts. Both account types are described below. Mass E-mail Mass E-mail accounts are used by student groups who only need the ability to post messages directly to ListServs. One e-mail addres, specified by the submitter, is given posting privileges. The address can either by a student's Hamilton e-mail address or a generic group account. This system allows submitters to request a group e-mail account. This request is sent to Debby Quayle, who communicates directly with the submitter to create the e-mail account. Once the Mass E-mail Group information is reviewed and approved by Student Activities the necessary ListServ commands are automatically sent and the account is granted ListServ posting privileges.   Student Organization Recognized Student Organizations have to be approved by Student Activities every year, and are required to provide contact and leadership information, a membership roster, and a constitution. By registering, student organizations have benefits including using the College name, access to facilities, vans, funding, supplies and resources, and e-mail and storage server space. Student Organizations have the ability to request an organization e-mail address. This request is sent to Debby Quayle, who works directly with the organization's leadership to create the account.    
  • Your Hamilton College Electronic Resources Account Email Your Hamilton College Electronic Resources Account   What Your Account Will Access Depending on your role at Hamilton, the account details (username and password) you were provided may be used for e-mail, our wired and wireless network, network printing, and a variety of web resources like My Hamilton, Blackboard and Citrix.  At present, your password is synchronized so that it will work with the various systems to which you may have been given access.  At a minimum, faculty, employees, and students are given access to e-mail, the network (wired and wireless) and to printing. Guidelines for Account Use Good account security depends on keeping your account ID and password private. If your password is easily guessed or discovered it puts the College network and all of your electronic resources at risk. It also means someone can engage in illegal activities on the Internet in your name.  You are encouraged to familiarize yourself with Hamilton’s guidelines and policies regarding the appropriate use of our network resources.  They can be read online by selecting Policies on the left side of this page.  In the Policies section, click on Policies, Procedures, Plans and Standards.  In particular, you are encouraged to read the guidelines for sending mass e-mail. Activating your E-mail Account Prior to using your e-mail account, it must be activated. To do so, go to http://my.hamilton.edu and log in using the ID (username) and password shown on the sheet you received.  Once you have logged in to My Hamilton, click on the link that appears across the top of the My Hamilton page (as illustrated below).  From there, follow the on screen instructions that will guide you through the activation process. Changing your password Instructions for changing your password(s) can be found in the following document: http://www.hamilton.edu/college/its/documentation/e-mail/general/external/hto-changepasswords-all.pdf The extent to which your account has been granted access to Hamilton network resources will determine the best way to change your password.   If the instructions referenced above do not work for this account, please contact the ITS Help Desk at the number below. Using Your E-mail Account Once your account has been activated, you can access your e-mail by logging in to http://my.hamilton.edu and then by clicking on “Read e-mail”.  This will require a second login.   You can also log in to your e-mail account directly by going to http://hillconnect.hamilton.edu.  If this is a network-only account, it can be used immediately at the login prompt on Hamilton College computers (lab and office).   To configure your mobile device for e-mail and wireless access To configure your mobile device for your e-mail account, please visit: http://my.hamilton.edu/information-technology-services/hillconnect.  To configure your mobile devide for our wireless network, please visit: http://my.hamilton.edu/information-technology-services/hillconnect/mobile-wi-fi. To configure your personal computer for Hamilton's wireless network To configure your personally owned computer for Hamilton's wireless network prior to your arrival or once you are here, please visit: https://my.hamilton.edu/information-technology-services/quick-reference-guide/network-1/secure-wireless? Problems? If you experience problems with your Hamilton account, please call  the ITS Help Desk at (315) 859-4181. Hours: Late May - Late August, M-F, 8:00 AM – 4:00 PM Late August–late May, M-F 8:30 AM – 4:30 PM.  
  • Your Hamilton E-mail & SSS Accounts After Graduation Email Your Hamilton E-mail After You Graduate When is my account deleted? What happens if I miss the deadline? How do I get a deadline extension? How do I get an alumni e-mail account? How do I transfer mail out of my Hamilton account? How do I forward mail to another account? How do tell correspondents my new address? Questions? When is my account deleted? Your Hamilton e-mail account will be deactivated approximately three (3) months after you graduate.  Typically this occurs on August 31 or March 31 (for December graduates).  Once your account is deactivated, no new mail is received.  Your mail remains on the server after deactivation until your account is physically removed (deleted) one month later. Back to top What happens if I miss the deadline to transfer my mail to another account? Although your account is deactivated on the deadline date,  your messages are not physically removed from our server for another month. This allows us to easily restore your messages should you accidentally miss the deadline.  After the one month grace period has passed, your mail is no longer retrievable. Back to top How do I get a deadline extension? Under special circumstances it is possible to obtain a brief extension.  Please address your request to the helpdesk (hd@hamilton.edu).  You should include your reason for requesting the extension and the length of time it is desired. Back to top How do I get an alumni e-mail account? The alumni address available to Hamilton graduates (you@alumni.hamilton.edu) is not an actual e-mail account. Instead, it is a mail forwarding service.  To sign up for this service please visit the Hamilton Alumni Directory Registration page and follow the step-by-step registration process. When you register, you must provide a real address to which mail is forwarded when mail is addressed to you@alumni.hamilton.edu.  The e-mail address you used as a student will not be available for your alumni e-mail address until your old account has been fully deleted as described above.  The advantage to the alumni forwarding service is that it allows you to list a Hamilton Alumni e-mail address on professional correspondence.  It remains in effect after your Hamilton account is removed and as long as the address to which you forward mail remains active. Back to Top How do I transfer mail from my Hamilton e-mail account to another account? To move existing mail from your Hamilton account into another account before your Hamilton account is deleted please refer to the pertinent section below. To transfer your Hamilton mail to an existing Gmail.com account, please visit: http://my.hamilton.edu/information-technology-services/resource-center/moving-your-mail-to-another-account-1 To transfer your Hamilton mail to a non-Gmail web-based e-mail account: Many web-based e-mail accounts like Gmail (e.g.Yahoo), give you the ability to automatically import mail from your Hamilton account.   The settings referenced in the instructions for Gmail may assist you in transferring your mail, however, the screens will be different depending on the application you use. Back to Top How do I forward my Hamilton e-mail to another account? Once you have transferred your mail to your non-Hamilton account, it is wise to start forwarding new mail to that account at the same time.  When forwarding is turned on it only forwards mail received from that point forward.  To transfer mail previously received, please see the section above. For instructions on how to set up forwarding, please refer to Google's help page at:  http://mail.google.com/support/bin/answer.py?answer=10957 Back to Top How do I tell correspondents my new address? To create an auto-reply message to inform correspondents of your new e-mail address, please refer to Google's help page at: http://mail.google.com/support/bin/answer.py?answer=25922 Back to Top Questions? If you have questions regarding your Hamilton E-mail account after graduation, please feel free to contact the ITS Help Desk at helpdesk@hamilton.edu or call 315-859-4181. Back to Top Return to the ITS Home Page
Event Support
  • Audiovisual Services (AV) Event Support Audiovisual Services   AV Services Personnel Support Services Offered Requesting Films and Videotapes Media Use and Rental Policies Available Equipment Videotaping & Streaming Services Video and Audio Copying Services Duplication Policy and Prices Hamilton College's overall Copyright Policy Copyright Policy (AV topics)   Mission Statement The Audiovisual Services Team of the Information Technology Services department provides quality service and support to the Hamilton College Community for their teaching and multimedia presentation needs. AV Services Personnel The Audiovisual Classroom Services Team is located in Burke Library, Room 363 (within the ITS office area). Tim Hicks Director 315-859-4790 (To be Announced) Staff Assistant/ Film Specialist 315-859-4120 Graham Espe  Multimedia Systems Technician 315-859-4793 Forrest Warner Multimedia Systems Technician 315-859-4076   Support Services Offered Presentation support (sound reinforcement and data projection). Video recording or streaming of campus events (e.g. performances, lectures, and sporting events). Rental of films and DVDs for academic and non-academic use. Maintenance and support of technology enhanced (TE) classrooms. Classroom delivery of projection, video and audio equipment. Loaning of various types of audiovisual equipment. Production work including duplications, editing and off-air recordings. Video conference facilities.   To schedule Audiovisual services, use the R25 room reservation system if applicable. In the Event Options section, check the box for "require A/V support," then write details of your needs in the Comments box.  If R25 is not appropriate for your situation,  or to request equipment loans, please contact the AV Coordinator at 315-859-4120. Equipment requests should be made at least one week in advance so student workers and delivery can be scheduled. To rent movies, please contact the Audiovisual Film Specialist, 315-859-4120. Movie requests should be made 2 to 4 weeks in advance, to allow time for research and ordering. For more information about Audiovisual Classroom Services, please contact the Audiovisual Department Office, 315-859-4120. Requesting films and Videos The Burke Library and the Media Library have materials for researching videos and films available for educational purposes. Contact a Reference Librarian using the Ask a Librarian Form, or call 315-859-4735. To show to your class a DVD or videotape from the Media Library, you must check out the movie and show it yourself. Contact Linda Brennan at 315-859-4923 for information about the media collection and borrowing items. In virtually all classrooms, the AV equipment is operated via a touchscreen control. If you need help getting started, contact AV Services (x4120) to schedule a brief personal training session in your classroom. Audiovisual Services will provide a projectionist if the media item (rented or from our library) is a 16mm film or another unusual format. To request a projectionist, send a written or e-mail request to the Audiovisual Film Specialist (x4120), at least two weeks in advance. Please include the following information when requesting movie rentals: SHOW DATE(S) SHOW TIME: Indicate the start time(s) and whether you plan to show a film in the latter part of a class. LOCATION: If you plan to show media materials at a time or place different from the assigned class period or location you must make room reservations with the Registrar. TITLE: Include the full title, plus an English translation of any foreign title. Other helpful information could include director, actors, country and year, especially if there has been more than one production of the same title. FORMAT: Indicate the format (video, DVD, 16 mm film), only if one type is preferred over another. SOURCE: If you are aware of a source, please provide it. PUBLIC PERFORMANCE: Will the screening be only for the students in your class, or do you plan to advertise it or invite other viewers? Media Use and Rental Policies Most materials from the Media Library are licensed only for classroom-use showings, and cannot be advertised. A public performance license can be purchased for an open showing in many cases, with at least two weeks' advance notice. The Audiovisual Film Specialist will help you with licensing questions. Movies available on videotape or DVD from the Media Library will not be rented in another format unless the instructor can show the necessity of using the other format. The AV Department's film rental budget supports curricular needs and is to be used for classroom-use rentals only. Any academic open showings (public performace with advertisement) and all entertainment showings will require public performance licensing. The AV Film Specialist will order the rental movie and/or licensing for you, but it must be funded by the requester's department or organization. No rented materials can be put on reserve in the Media Library. For additional information about copyright compliance in the use of library materials and rented media, please read the Audiovisual Copyright Policy.    Available Equipment Contact Audiovisual Services one to two weeks in advance to request audiovisual equipment. Many of these items may be borrowed and operated by the requester. Upon request, AV will deliver equipment or provide instruction to those unfamiliar with the equipment. Some types of equipment will require set-up and operation by an AV technician.   Projection Equipment Data/ Video Projector Document Camera 16mm Projection Projection Screen  Video Equipment Camcorder, mini-DV  DVD/VHS Player Laserdisc Player   Audio Equipment Sound Systems, Various  Digital Audio Recorder Compact Disc/Audiotape Boom Box Miscellaneous Equipment Easel  Laser Pointer PowerPoint remote control (Kensington) Slide Projector (35mm)   Videotaping and Streaming Services Location Videotaping Description of Service: Videotaping of classes, lectures, athletic and special events at specified locations on campus. Operation: In most cases, AV provides operators. Restrictions: Written permission to videotape lecturers and performers (including persons affiliated with Hamilton College) must be obtained and given to the AV Department prior to the start of videotaping. Written permission from the publisher is required in order to videotape theater productions and music performances of copyrighted scripts or scores. A printable permission form for a single individual is available or blank forms can be requested from the AV office. If a faculty member wants to arrange for his class to be videotaped, please use the group form. For more information refer to Copyright Policy, Video Recording of Campus Events and Seeking Permission to Use Copyrighted Materials. Disposition of video: The videotapes or DVDs made are usually sent to the requester via campus mail within a week or so after the event. Final disposition of the recording is the responsibility of the requester.  Charges: There is no cost to the original requester for the services of a student cameraperson, or for the original recording (a mini-DV tape), or for the first three (3) copies we make for you onto a medium of your choice (usually DVD). Additional copies made for the original requester will be billed at our current rates for the cost of materials and labor. All copies made for individuals or departments other than the original requester will be billed. For information about pricing and methods of payment, please see our Duplication Policy. Or call the AV Services office at x4120. Video and Audio Copying Services   DVD Duplicating   Availability of Service: DVD duplicating service is available. Limited services availabe for copying from older formats. Call for information.  Restrictions: The AV Department reserves the right to refuse any request which constitutes copyright infringement. Charges: The cost of materials and labor for copies will be charged to a college department. For more information about our duplication policies. prices, and available methods of payment, please see our Duplication Policy. Or contact the AV Services office at x4076.   CD Duplicating Availability: Audio duplicating of materials for classroom use. Restrictions: The AV Department reserves the right to refuse any request that may constitute copyright infringement. Charges: The cost of materials and labor for copies will be charged to a college department. For more information about our duplication policies, prices and available methods of payment, please see our Duplication Policy. Or contact the AV Services office at x4076.
Exceed
  • Installing the Citrix Client on your Computer Exceed Installing Citrix Client These instructions only pertain to your personal computer.  If you are on a public lab, or Hamilton-issued computer, the Citrix Client has been preinstalled. This process need be followed only once for any single computer in any academic year. If it has been some time since you last installed the Citrix client on your computer, you may want to update the client for the best performance. The steps for installation are: • On a Windows system: o Log into the Citrixweb page. • A page will appear that prompts you to download the client. Place a check in the check box and click Download. The file will request to be saved to your computer. Please save it to your Desktop. • Double-click on the installer when it when it has downloaded. • Once the installation has completed, click the Continue button on the web page. • Proceed to Launching Citrix Programs. • If this does not seem to be the case for you, follow the directions for updating below. • On a Macintosh system: o After logging in, you will be taken to a screen that will prompt you to download the plugin. o Click Download to download the plugin. o The Citrix Plug-in DMG file will download to your Desktop or Downloads folder. Find the file and double-click on it. o A window will open containing the plug-in installation file—double-click it to launch the installer. o Install the app by clicking Continue and Agree until you see a window that indicates the software has been installed successfully. o Once the installation has completed, click the Continue button on the web page. o Proceed to Launching Citrix Programs. o If this does not seem to be the case for you, follow the directions for updating below. • Updating your Citrix client, any system o Log into the Citrixweb page. o Near the top of the applications page, you will see a horizontal bar with some menu choices in it. The “Applications” menu will probably be dark blue, indicating that the “Applications” screen is what you are seeing. o Click on the “Preferences” menu and select “Connection Preferences”. o Under “Client settings”, click on “Run Client Detection”. • If you are immediately returned to the “Applications” screen, you should see an information message under the menu bar and above the applications list that says “The preferred client is already available on your computer.” • You’re done, there is no update or installation necessary. o If you don’t have the most current version of the client, you will be taken to a screen that allows you to download the client. • Follow the directions on that page to download the client. • If you receive a warning about the file having been downloaded from the internet, click “Save file” or “Open”, according to the screen you see. • Double click the saved file to run. • If asked if you want to allow the program to make changes to your computer, click “Yes”. o You should now be able to return to the Citrixweb Application page, and select the software you wish to use.  
  • Introduction to Citrix Exceed What is Citrix? The computers in public labs deliver some specialized software via Citrix – a client/server configuration that makes software more broadly available to students and faculty. In this model, there is a server which runs the Citrix system, and on which Windows desktop software, like SPSS or Maple, has been installed. There is also a client, a small piece of software that you, the end user, install on your personal computer. Finally, there is a web page (http://citrixweb.hamilton.edu) that allows you to tell the Citrix server which software you want to run. After that, the program you choose runs on the Citrix server, but looks like it is running on your personal computer. You get access to all the same resources you can normally access from your computer. Note that it doesn’t matter whether your personal computer is a Macintosh or Windows computer. Citrix has a client written for either of these computer platforms, and will make the necessary translation so that you can run the software from your computer - that is “from”, not “on”. The actual software, such as Exceed or Stata, never runs on your personal computer, only on the Citrix server. One of the important advantages of the Citrix server for teaching and learning is the ability of the students to access the software from their dormitory rooms, or even away from campus - any location where they can use the web to reach http://citrixweb.hamilton.edu/. It is also possible for faculty to use this URL to reach the software from home as well as the office. However, be aware that you must remain connected to the internet for your entire Citrix work session. Available Programs As of August 2011, the following programs are available through Citrix: • Exceed 14 • iThink 9 • Maple 15 • SPSS Statistics 19 • Stata 11 • StatView 5 If you would like to request a new program be added to the Citrix server, please contact the Instructional Technology Support Services team. Common Citrix Problems and their Solutions Unable to Log In If you are unable to log into the Citrix web portal, make sure your username and password are correct. If you are a student, make sure the Domain drop down menu says students.hamilton.edu.  The default domain (Hamilton.edu) is correct for faculty and other employees of the college. Keyboard Shortcuts Citrix applications are presented in a Windows environment.  Therefore, keyboard shortcuts must be those used in the Windows file management system. Macintosh users should note that the shortcut for copying is and the shortcut for pasting is . You may also use the Edit menu to select these functions. Folder Access If you are experiencing difficulties navigating through folders, make sure the folder you are trying to open does not contain the forward slash ‘/’ symbol. If it does, rename it and try accessing it again. Other ITS Citrix Webpages Registering and Logging into Citrix Installing the Citrix Client on your Computer Launching Citrix Programs, Opening and Saving Files in Citrix Programs, and Printing from Citrix Programs
  • Launching Citrix Programs, Opening and Saving Files in Citrix Programs, and Printing from Citrix Programs Exceed Table of Contents Launching Citrix Programs Opening or Saving Files in Citrix-Served Programs More on Accessing Files Printing from Citrix Programs Launching Citrix Programs Upon successfully logging into Citrix, you will see a number of programs arranged in a matrix. Please click ONCE on the program you wish to launch. NOTE: It might take up to a minute for a Citrix program to launch, during which a number of windows may appear and disappear. Do not try to interact with these windows by clicking them or closing them, as they are a part of the connection process. When you begin using a Citrix-based program, your machine may download a file named Launch.ica. This file is only needed for the current session, and can be safely deleted once you are finished with the Citrix program. You will find it wherever you have directed your web browser to save downloaded files (most commonly on your machine’s Desktop or in Documents). If the Citrix-based program does not launch automatically, double-click on the Launch.ica file to start the application. A window entitled Client File Security may open and request access to local files on your computer. Please select Full Access and Never Ask Me Again and click OK. Opening or Saving Files in Citrix-Served Applications The Citrix-served applications will give you access to your SSS or ESS storage space and other commonly-used areas for file saving. To open or save a file while using an application in Citrix, click the Open File (or Save File) icon in the button bar or File, then Open (File, then Save) in the menu bar of the application.  Click the drop-down arrow at the right end of the Look in field. You will receive a list of locations available to you. NOTE: The various icons you may be familiar with do not necessarily map to the same places as they do on your personal Windows machine. Both the My Documents and the Desktop buttons and menu choices will take you to your SSS or ESS folder, depending on your user role (student vs faculty or employee). NOTE: Remember that you are running a client/server application, which means that the application you are using is actually running on the remote Citrix server.  All file locations are specified from the point of view of the server: they are NOT on the computer you are using. As you can see in the example images on the next few pages, the save screens differ dramatically from previous version of the Citrix client: they are now optimized to hide unavailable save locations and give you ready access both to your network storage folder and your local computer.  Please refer to this guide as needed to ensure your data is properly saved in the desired location. TYPE 1   When attempting to open or save a file, you will be automatically taken to your ESS/SSS user folder. Find the appropriate file and folder and click Open. TYPE 1 To access and save to file repositories other than your ESS/SSS share, please click on the pull-down menu. Your ESS/SSS home folder is available under H:, (if applicable) your department share as M:, and the Campus share as P:.  Your local drives on the computer from which you are accessing Citrix are available and labeled with a letter followed by a dollar sign (e.g. D$ on Client).  On Windows machines, you will be able to access your local hard drive (typically C$).  On a Mac, you will be able to access your home folder (again, C$).  Other drives may be available in addition to the ones displayed. TYPE 2 Note the difference in save options on the left panel.  The tfondak$ on ‘Ess’ link (“A”) will take you to your home folder on network storage. Similarly, the C$ on ‘Client’ option (“B”) will take you to the C: drive on your Windows machine or your User Home folder on the Mac as before. These and other options are also available via the pull-down menu (“C”)on top.   TYPE 2 The My Computer link here will take you to a list of the available mounted drives.  As above, the H: drive will take you to your home folder on network storage (ESS/SSS), and C$ will take you to your hard drive on a PC and your user Home Folder on a Mac. TYPE 3 Some save dialogs may not have icons available on the left side.  Available save points are accessed via the pull-down menu at top. NOTE: the “My Documents” and “My Computer” links will connect you to your home folder on network storage (ESS/SSS).  Others will behave as discussed above. TYPE 4 Though seemingly similar to the TYPE 2 save dialog, this dialog box only has two options on the left: your ESS/SSS share and your local drive. Please choose the appropriate repository or find other options in the pull-down menu above. TYPE 4 (Exceed) This is a screenshot of a save dialog in Exceed.  You can select your save location by clicking on the Directory pulldown list.  Shown here is the p:/ directory, a direct link to the ESS folder.   TYPE 4 (Exceed) This is a screenshot of another save dialog in Exceed.  Shown here is the h:/ directory, a direct link to your home directory on either ESS or SSS.   Accessing Files Located on your local hard drive If you have a file on your local machine’s Desktop or Documents, you will need to navigate to them. On a PC:  Double-click on C$ on Client (your local hard drive), double-click Documents and Settings; open the folder with your user id; and then Desktop or Documents as appropriate. On a Mac:  Double-click on C$ on Client (it being your User Home Folder). Once there, double-click on either Desktop or Documents as appropriate.  Citrix may prompt for permission read and/or write access the local computer – you should click Allow. Located in your ESS or SSS folder If you downloaded a file to your ESS or SSS space, that location is available in the “Look in:” input box by default as “userid$”.  For example, if your user ID is bscott, you will see “bscott$” in the input box.  It is also available in the dropdown menu under “My Computer” as “userid$ on ‘SSS’ (H:)” All mapped network drives are distinguished from others by the shared-drive icon, which indicates that, although the storage area is actually located on another server, it is treated as though it were another drive on your computer.  Your home folder on ESS/SSS is universally mapped as the H: drive. Accessing files on the Software Server If the file you need is on the Software server, you may place your cursor in the File Name field, type \\Software\Academic, press , and you should see all the folders in the Academic share.  Select a file and folder by double-clicking.   A NOTE on Best Practices If you are downloading a file from Blackboard, or using a file from the Software Server, first drag and drop that file into your SSS or ESS space. Then open the folder from within your Citrix-served program from that storage space. Every time you save the file, it will save into that space, and you won’t ever lose it. If you save your work periodically during your session, you can always recover to the “most recent saved” version, and you can do that recovery from any computer on the Hamilton College network. Printing from Citrix Programs  
  • Registering and Logging into Citrix Exceed Registration If this is the first time you are trying to login to Citrix, you MUST REGISTER. The link for registration is on the bottom of the login page. Students will also need to re-register every academic year. Once you register, it will take several minutes (approximately 10) for all of the systems to be updated with your access information. Logging into Citrix Once you are registered, log in to the Citrix Web Portal. The username you should use is the same as your My Hamilton username. The password is the same password you use to access the SSS or ESS servers. If you are a student, you will need to change the Domain dropdown to students.hamilton.edu. If a matrix full of applications appears, please navigate to the Launching Citrix Programs webpage. Else, proceed to the Installing Citrix Client webpage.
External Hard Drive
  • Data Backup and Storage External Hard Drive Introduction Imagine if all of the work that you spent hours completing suddenly disappeared and there were no way to bring it back from oblivion. A nightmarish scenario to be sure! Unfortunately, many face it every semester: ITS often assists students and employees whose computers have malfunctioned while either working on or after finishing some assignment, typically when such a loss is most painful and difficult to recover from. Thankfully, with a very little effort, this scenario can be easily avoided. Backing up your files serves many purposes. Beyond preventing a catastrophic loss of data, proper organization of one's data and easy options for retrieval will facilitate one's work at Hamilton and beyond, viz. graduate school, internships, and possibly future employment Storage Solution Finder External Hard Drive Employee Network Storage 1 Academic Server 2 Google Drive Flash Drive Dropbox or Similar Documents ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Images ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Music ✓   ✓ ✓ Video ✓   ✓     Computer Backup ✓ ✓       Easy Sharing     ✓ ✓   is a solution that should not be used for sensitive or confidential information, e.g. bank account numbers, passwords, social security numbers, health information. 1 This solution is only available to staff and faculty. 2 This solution is for academic purposes (e.g. Coursework) only. And only members of the Faculty and Staff can request folders be created on the Academic Server.              
  • Formatting an External Hard Drive for Primarily Mac Users External Hard Drive 1. Plug the external hard drive into the computer. Access the Disk Utility application which is located in the Utilities folder of the Applications folder at the bottom of the home screen. 2. The Disk Utility window will now open. In this window, double click the name of the attached external hard drive, which will appear in the list of Memory Storage locations at the left of the window. 3. If you're not partitioning your Hard Drive, select the Erase tab at the top of the window. If you are partitioning your hard drive, that process is covered further in the "Formatting an External hard drive for Users Working with Both Platforms" guide. In the Erase tab, make sure the selected format is the correct one. The Mac OS Extended (Journaled) is the default for Mac users. Then go ahed and name your hard drive, so it's easier to recognize on the desktop. When your name and format are correct, click the Erase button at the bottom right. 4. You will be prompted with a window asking if you wish to use your external hard drive to back up the computer with time machine. Unless you know this is something you wish to do and know exactly what time machine is, go ahead and click Don't Use. 5. A Pop-up window will appear asking you to confirm that you wish to erase the disk. Click Erase. The Formatting should take a few moments, and once done an icon for the hard drive will appear on your Desktop. You will now be able to safely move files to and from your hard drive. Remember that if you have any questions or issues, please contact the interns at the MPC desk for assistance.
  • Formatting an External Hard Drive for Primarily PC Users External Hard Drive 1.  From the Desktop, click on the windows logo at the bottom left and access the Control Panel.   2.  In the Control Panel, change the View by: option at the top right to Small icons if it isn't already. Now, open the Administrative Tools icon. 3.  In the Administrative Tools window, double click Computer Management from the list of applications. 4. In the Computer Management window, select the Disk Management option from the list at the left of the window. You will now see information pertaining to the disk storage options for the computer. Anchor5. From the Disk Management window, select the storage option that is your external hard drive. Look for something that looks similar to what is below. If you have a 500GB external hard drive, you could expect to see a large block of about 450GB or so under a name other than Disk 0. Once you've selected the storage area, right click, and select the New Simple Volume... option. * If you are reading for the "Formatting for Users working with both OS Platforms" section, know that the representation of the external hard drive in this window will now look different due to the partitions. You are still going to right click the "Unallocated" section and select New Simple Volume... however that section will simply be smaller and there will be other already allocated ones. The differences are highlighted here. 6. Now, the New Simple Volume Wizard will pop up. This is where you will set up how you want your hard drive formatted. Click Next. 7.  The next page you see will be the Specify Volume Size page. Here you will select the size you want the New Simple Volume to be. The Default size is the entire free space you selected earlier, but you can change it if you like. After you've selected your size, click Next. The next page will be the Assign Drive Letter or Path page. It is very unlikely that you will have a reason to change this from the default, so feel free to just click Next. You'll notice the next page says Format Partition at the top. This is where you make your formatting choices. Since you will be working with a PC, the defaults should be fine, so just make sure that File System and Allocation unit size look like they do in the image below. Now you have the option of naming your hard drive, and then you should notice two checkboxes. Quick Format is faster than regular formatting, however it doesn't actually erase all the information on the hard drive. This obviously doesn't matter if the drive is new, so in most cases go ahead and leave this checked. Also, unless you expect issues with limited storage on your device, leave the second box unchecked and click Next. On the next page, you can look over all of your formatting settings. As long as everything looks good and all the choices are to your liking, click Finish. 8. You will now be returned to the Disk Management window and notice that the hard disk is now being formatted. When the disk is done formatting, you will be notified and from there you can safely transfer files to and from your Hard Disk on a PC. If you have any questions or issues, please contact the interns at the MPC desk for assistance.
  • Formatting an External Hard Drive for Users Working with Both Platforms External Hard Drive 1. Plug the external hard drive into the computer. Select the Applications folder that is usually located in the dock at the bottom of the home screen. Within that folder select the Utilities folder and then select the Disk Utility application from there.   2. The Disk Utility window will now open. In this window, double click the name of the attached external hard drive, which will appear in the list of memory locations and partitions at the left of the window. 3. Now, click on the Partition tab at the top of the window. Be sure to locate the Volume Scheme: label at the left of all of the information. Underneath this label are options for how you want your hard drive partitioned and a diagram showing the current scheme. 4. In the Partition screen, first select 3 Partitions from the options under the Volume Scheme: label at the left of the window.  5. Now, using the diagram of your current partition scheme shown under the Volume Scheme: label, select the top partition, which should be labeled Untitled 1 by default. This is the partition of your hard drive you will format to work with a Mac. It's a good idea to change the name of this partition to something that will remind you that this is the area that is formatted for a Mac. You can change the name under the Volume Information label. Also under this label is the Format: option, which you can leave the default since this partition is being formatted for a Mac. 6. Next, select the second partition down. This partition will be formatted as FAT-32, which is a format with a limited transfer size however it will work on both OS platforms. This is the partition you will use for transferring information between the Mac and PC partitions. As before, give this partition a name, but this time select the drop-down menu next to the Format: label, and select MS-DOS (FAT). 7. Now, select the third partition. This one will eventually be formatted to work with a PC, but we can't perform that action on a mac. So for now, just give this partition a name to help you remember this is the one you will format for PC use, and then change the Format: option to Free Space. 8. Now your window should look something like this. Notice that in this example the sizes are left to their default. If you wish to change the sizes of your partitions, do this under the Size: option that is under the Volume Information label right below Format. Keep in mind that your FAT-32 partition will ideally only be used for transfering information, so it wouldn't hurt to make that a smaller size, somewhere between 25 to 50 GB will probably do just fine. When all your information is set, click Apply. 9. A dialog box will pop up, asking if you wish to use either of the partitions available to back up your computer with Time Machine. Although Time Machine is a useful tool, for your use at the moment go ahead and click Don't Use. If you have questions about Time Machine or whether you should use it, there is a great deal of information available on the internet. After you click Don't Use, your hard drive will be formatted, and you will be notified when it is finished formatting. You will now be able to transfer files to the Mac and FAT-32 partitions on the drive. When you are ready, attach your drive to a PC, and continue reading to finish the formatting process. 10. Now you have to format the last partition of the hard drive to work with a PC. This is done essentially the same way as formatting the entire hard drive to work with a PC; however there is one key change which is highlighted below and on the Formatting for Primarily PC Users page. If you are unfamiliar with how to format the hard drive to work with a PC, please go to the linked page on the previous line.    *2. (Partitioned Hard Drive) Here is what the partitioned hard drive will look something like, and the section you should select is highlighted.   11. Once you've finished formatting the partition which will be used with a PC, you have successfully formatted your Hard Drive to work with both Platforms. Remember that if you have any questions or issues, please contact the interns at the MPC desk for assistance.  
  • Introduction to External Hard Drives External Hard Drive The Basics What is an External Hard Drive? You're probably aware that your computer has memory, or at the very least that you're able to save your various files and documents on the computer and then go back and retrieve them later. All that information that you save to your computer is saved into a hard drive of some sort. We often refer to hard drives as a form of data storage. An external hard drive is essentially just a portable data storage system. Without going into the intricate details of memory, simply know that an external hard drive allows you to save information and documents to a small portable device that you can remove from one computer and bring to another, allowing you to easily transfer that saved information and back it up. For more information about formatting hard drives, see this article.   Why would someone need one? Here at Hamilton, if you are taking a video class you will be required to have an external hard drive of your own. This is because the video files you will be working with are too large to be stored in the student storage server the school provides, and you will want to be able to work on your projects on different computers as well as have them backed up. Students who are not taking a video class may still find it useful to have an external hard drive for the reasons mentioned earlier. Basically, purchasing an external hard drive will provide convenience and security for one's data.   Recommendations Purchasing an external hard drive is a great way to back up important files and keep all of your work in one central location. Think of it as a portfolio of your work! When purchasing a drive, there are some technical details to consider.   Ports While USB ports are found on all computers, there are many versions and some can be slow to transfer large files (think video files). Firewire and Thunderbolt ports are faster, but might only be available on Apple hardware. Look for a drive that has multiple types of connection ports. Portability/Power If you're buying an external drive, portability is important. Some drives can be powered right through their connection port, which means you don't need to carry the "wall wart" power cable. Also consider the size of the case. Small drives are easy to carry Ruggedness Hard drives are delicate and a big bump can destroy the drive and your data. Look for a drive that rugged enough to stand up to trips in your backpack to the computer lab. Capacity Bigger is better, but for the same price point you'll trade features for capacity. Video is the one medium that quickly eats up your hard drive space. If you plan on taking a class that uses video, think big... 500GB should do.   Formatting The platform which you intend to use your external hard drive with will determine the formatting that is required for it. The resource center contains pages explaining ways to format your external hard drive for all of your possible needs, but in this section is some information as to what the different formats are and what they are for.   The Formats   FAT32 (File Allocation Table) Natively read/write FAT32 on Windows and Mac OS. Maximum file size: 4GB NTFS (Windows NT File System) Natively read/write NTFS on Windows. Maximum file size: 16TB HFS (Hierarchical File system, aka Mac OS Extended) Natively read/write HFS on Mac OS. Required for Time Machine Maximum file size: 8EiB  ( Note: More than large enough for any file in the modern world.)   How do the Formats affect you? You will need to select the correct format for the platform you intend on using your external hard drive with. If you are primarily a PC user who will not need to transfer files on a Mac, then NTFS is the format for you, and luckily for you most external hard drives are sold already formatted as NTFS. If you are primarily a Mac user who will not need to transfer files on a PC, then you would choose HFS (Mac OS extended). If you are a user who will have to transfer files across both platforms, then life becomes a bit more complicated. The information about the formats above may lead you to assume that you would simply format as FAT32, since it can read/write on Windows and Mac OS, however this is not a good idea for the following reasons. FAT32 offers no security FAT32 has a max file size of 4GB. This is an issue if you are a video student where you will likely deal with files larger than this. FAT32 is overall a less efficient and reliable format. So what does a user who needs to transfer across platforms do? There are a few solutions, but the one we suggest and provide directions to here at Hamilton is to partition your external hard drive into 3 partitions, and format each partition as a different Format. This will allow the user to read/write files on both platforms, and also transfer files under 4GB in size from either platform. So how does someone format an External Hard Drive? Directions on how to perform all of the above formatting have been included in the ITS Resource Center. The links are included below. Formatting for Primarily PC Users Formatting for Primarily Mac Users Formatting for Users working with Both Platforms
FTP
  • Accessing SSS After Graduation FTP NOTE: These instructions are good for the time period between graduation and when your account is deactivated (3 months after your graduation date). To Connect to Your Folder on SSS Open your web browser - Internet Explorer (Windows only), Firefox, Chrome, Safari (Macintosh only). Windows Internet Explorer (Windows only), Safari (Mac only) & Chrome  (Firefox instructions are found in section 3 below) In the address bar at the top of your screen (where it typically starts with http://www…) completely erase what appears and type:  ftp://sss.hamilton.edu. Then press the enter or return key on your keyboard. When asked to login, enter hamilton-s\ followed by your e-mail ID (e.g. hdstudent). NOTE the direction of the slash after the “–s”.  In this example, you would type hamilton-s\hdstudent. NOTE:  In Safari, do not precede your userID with “hamilton-s\”. Instead, simply enter your ID in its short form (e.g. hdstudent) in the “Name” field. Enter your SSS password in the password field (this is the same password you use for My Hamilton). NOTE: In Internet Explorer, do not include a check mark in the box labeled Log on anonymously.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      FireFox                                                                               Internet Explorer                                             Chrome                                                                                        Safari                             To Download Your File(s) to Your Hard Drive Once you have successfully logged in you can download your file/files to your hard drive. Depending on the browser you are using, the procedure will be slightly different.  See below: Firefox (Mac & Windows) When the SSS folder opens, locate and then open your class year folder. In your class year folder, locate your user folder and open it. Right click on the file you want to download (Windows & Mac) or on a Macintosh, you can press and hold down the command key while clicking once on the file name. Choose Save link as and then choose to Save File. Internet Explorer (Windows) Although it may appear as though you can click on your files to download them, the process is laborious (requiring you to log in several more times) and may or may not work.  The correct way to download your file is to click on the Page menu (on the far right side at the top of IE) and select Open FTP site in Windows Explorer from the drop down menu. Click Allow if you are presented with a security warning. Next, you will be asked to log in a second time.  Enter your login information as before with Hamilton-s\userid. Replace userid with your real user name (e.g. hdstudent) and enter your SSS (My Hamilton) password. Select your class year folder and then select your user folder.  You should now see your files.  The preferred way to download a file is to right click on it and choose Copy to folder.  If you forget this and double click on the file instead, most file types will allow you to Save the file.  However, this may not work with all file types.              c.  Chrome (Mac & Windows) When the SSS folder opens, locate and then open your class year folder. In your class year folder, locate your user folder and open it. After you’ve navigated to your folder, click on the file you wish to download.  The download will happen automatically and the file will be listed along the bottom of your Chrome window. Click on the file name and it will open the application (in the example above, it will open MS Word).  From there you can save the file to the desired location.               d.  Safari (Macintosh) When the SSS folder opens, locate and then open your class year folder. In your class year folder, locate your user folder and open it. Click on the file(s) you want to download and simply drag it/them to your desktop (or into the desired folder on your drive).
  • Accessing the Academic Server FTP Overview As of June 21st, 2012, the Software and MSS servers have been retired. Files have been transferred to the new Academic server. Below are instructions for accessing files on the new server. Accessing Files using a Mac From the main menu bar, select Go - Connect to Server. In the Connect to Server window, type academic in the Server Address field.   Click the Connect button. Accessing Files on a Windows PC From the Start Menu, select Network. In the address bar of the resulting window, type \\academic. Press the Enter key on the keyboard.
  • Web Publishing: Using FTP FTP FTP is File Transfer Protocol: it allows personal computers to connect to servers over the Internet, and to copy files to and from the server. ITS recommends the use of the Cyberduck FTP client. Connecting to the Web Server To connect to the web server, you will need to open a session in the FTP application on your personal computer, using the following values to "open a connection": Host: workgroup.hamilton.edu User ID: domain\your_email_id Password: your_network_password (same as My Hamilton password) When using FTP, you must identify the domain (user group) you belong to along with your standard user name. Domains Students: hamilton-s Employees: hamilton-d Examples 1. A student named John Smith would sign in as: hamilton-s\jsmith 2. An instructor names Jane Roberts would log in as: hamilton-d\jroberts   Your Web password should be the same as your My Hamilton password and network password. If you do not know your password, you can send an email to helpdesk@hamilton.edu to get a new one.   Use this information to make your FTP connection, then navigate to your web space by double clicking on the folders shown in your FTP window.
  • Windows Web Publishing FTP Windows users can connect to the web server using Windows networking. This will make your web space appear as a disk or folder on your personal computer, allowing you to drag and drop files and folders to and from the web server, just as you do for other disks on your system.   Windows 7/Vista Connect to the Web Server Open the Start menu Type "\\Polaris\{foldername}" into the search box and hit Enter. {foldername} is the name of the folder that you wish to connect to and should be one of the following: academics hamilton students people The folder will open as a new window.   Map a Drive Open the Start menu Right click on Network and select Map Network Drive... In the Folder field, type "\\Polaris\{foldername}" and hit Enter. {foldername} is the name of the folder that you wish to connect to and should be one of the following: academics hamilton students people The folder will now appear as a shared drive and is accessible from My Computer and Windows Explorer.   Windows XP   Connect to the Web Server Open the Start menu Choose Run In the open field of the dialog box, type \\Polaris Click OK The folder will open as a new window.   Map a Drive Open the Start menu Right click on My Network Places and select Map Network Drive. In the Folder field, type "\\Polaris\{foldername}" and hit Enter. {foldername} is the name of the folder that you wish to connect to and should be one of the following: academics hamilton students people Click OK The folder will now appear as a shared drive and is accessible from My Computer and Windows Explorer.   Troubleshooting Please contact the Help Desk x4181 if you are having trouble connecting to Polaris.
Film
  • Audiovisual Services (AV) Film Audiovisual Services   AV Services Personnel Support Services Offered Requesting Films and Videotapes Media Use and Rental Policies Available Equipment Videotaping & Streaming Services Video and Audio Copying Services Duplication Policy and Prices Hamilton College's overall Copyright Policy Copyright Policy (AV topics)   Mission Statement The Audiovisual Services Team of the Information Technology Services department provides quality service and support to the Hamilton College Community for their teaching and multimedia presentation needs. AV Services Personnel The Audiovisual Classroom Services Team is located in Burke Library, Room 363 (within the ITS office area). Tim Hicks Director 315-859-4790 (To be Announced) Staff Assistant/ Film Specialist 315-859-4120 Graham Espe  Multimedia Systems Technician 315-859-4793 Forrest Warner Multimedia Systems Technician 315-859-4076   Support Services Offered Presentation support (sound reinforcement and data projection). Video recording or streaming of campus events (e.g. performances, lectures, and sporting events). Rental of films and DVDs for academic and non-academic use. Maintenance and support of technology enhanced (TE) classrooms. Classroom delivery of projection, video and audio equipment. Loaning of various types of audiovisual equipment. Production work including duplications, editing and off-air recordings. Video conference facilities.   To schedule Audiovisual services, use the R25 room reservation system if applicable. In the Event Options section, check the box for "require A/V support," then write details of your needs in the Comments box.  If R25 is not appropriate for your situation,  or to request equipment loans, please contact the AV Coordinator at 315-859-4120. Equipment requests should be made at least one week in advance so student workers and delivery can be scheduled. To rent movies, please contact the Audiovisual Film Specialist, 315-859-4120. Movie requests should be made 2 to 4 weeks in advance, to allow time for research and ordering. For more information about Audiovisual Classroom Services, please contact the Audiovisual Department Office, 315-859-4120. Requesting films and Videos The Burke Library and the Media Library have materials for researching videos and films available for educational purposes. Contact a Reference Librarian using the Ask a Librarian Form, or call 315-859-4735. To show to your class a DVD or videotape from the Media Library, you must check out the movie and show it yourself. Contact Linda Brennan at 315-859-4923 for information about the media collection and borrowing items. In virtually all classrooms, the AV equipment is operated via a touchscreen control. If you need help getting started, contact AV Services (x4120) to schedule a brief personal training session in your classroom. Audiovisual Services will provide a projectionist if the media item (rented or from our library) is a 16mm film or another unusual format. To request a projectionist, send a written or e-mail request to the Audiovisual Film Specialist (x4120), at least two weeks in advance. Please include the following information when requesting movie rentals: SHOW DATE(S) SHOW TIME: Indicate the start time(s) and whether you plan to show a film in the latter part of a class. LOCATION: If you plan to show media materials at a time or place different from the assigned class period or location you must make room reservations with the Registrar. TITLE: Include the full title, plus an English translation of any foreign title. Other helpful information could include director, actors, country and year, especially if there has been more than one production of the same title. FORMAT: Indicate the format (video, DVD, 16 mm film), only if one type is preferred over another. SOURCE: If you are aware of a source, please provide it. PUBLIC PERFORMANCE: Will the screening be only for the students in your class, or do you plan to advertise it or invite other viewers? Media Use and Rental Policies Most materials from the Media Library are licensed only for classroom-use showings, and cannot be advertised. A public performance license can be purchased for an open showing in many cases, with at least two weeks' advance notice. The Audiovisual Film Specialist will help you with licensing questions. Movies available on videotape or DVD from the Media Library will not be rented in another format unless the instructor can show the necessity of using the other format. The AV Department's film rental budget supports curricular needs and is to be used for classroom-use rentals only. Any academic open showings (public performace with advertisement) and all entertainment showings will require public performance licensing. The AV Film Specialist will order the rental movie and/or licensing for you, but it must be funded by the requester's department or organization. No rented materials can be put on reserve in the Media Library. For additional information about copyright compliance in the use of library materials and rented media, please read the Audiovisual Copyright Policy.    Available Equipment Contact Audiovisual Services one to two weeks in advance to request audiovisual equipment. Many of these items may be borrowed and operated by the requester. Upon request, AV will deliver equipment or provide instruction to those unfamiliar with the equipment. Some types of equipment will require set-up and operation by an AV technician.   Projection Equipment Data/ Video Projector Document Camera 16mm Projection Projection Screen  Video Equipment Camcorder, mini-DV  DVD/VHS Player Laserdisc Player   Audio Equipment Sound Systems, Various  Digital Audio Recorder Compact Disc/Audiotape Boom Box Miscellaneous Equipment Easel  Laser Pointer PowerPoint remote control (Kensington) Slide Projector (35mm)   Videotaping and Streaming Services Location Videotaping Description of Service: Videotaping of classes, lectures, athletic and special events at specified locations on campus. Operation: In most cases, AV provides operators. Restrictions: Written permission to videotape lecturers and performers (including persons affiliated with Hamilton College) must be obtained and given to the AV Department prior to the start of videotaping. Written permission from the publisher is required in order to videotape theater productions and music performances of copyrighted scripts or scores. A printable permission form for a single individual is available or blank forms can be requested from the AV office. If a faculty member wants to arrange for his class to be videotaped, please use the group form. For more information refer to Copyright Policy, Video Recording of Campus Events and Seeking Permission to Use Copyrighted Materials. Disposition of video: The videotapes or DVDs made are usually sent to the requester via campus mail within a week or so after the event. Final disposition of the recording is the responsibility of the requester.  Charges: There is no cost to the original requester for the services of a student cameraperson, or for the original recording (a mini-DV tape), or for the first three (3) copies we make for you onto a medium of your choice (usually DVD). Additional copies made for the original requester will be billed at our current rates for the cost of materials and labor. All copies made for individuals or departments other than the original requester will be billed. For information about pricing and methods of payment, please see our Duplication Policy. Or call the AV Services office at x4120. Video and Audio Copying Services   DVD Duplicating   Availability of Service: DVD duplicating service is available. Limited services availabe for copying from older formats. Call for information.  Restrictions: The AV Department reserves the right to refuse any request which constitutes copyright infringement. Charges: The cost of materials and labor for copies will be charged to a college department. For more information about our duplication policies. prices, and available methods of payment, please see our Duplication Policy. Or contact the AV Services office at x4076.   CD Duplicating Availability: Audio duplicating of materials for classroom use. Restrictions: The AV Department reserves the right to refuse any request that may constitute copyright infringement. Charges: The cost of materials and labor for copies will be charged to a college department. For more information about our duplication policies, prices and available methods of payment, please see our Duplication Policy. Or contact the AV Services office at x4076.
Geographic Information Systems (GIS)
  • General Resources for Using GIS and Maps in Class Geographic Information Systems (GIS) Google Earth Outreach provides a platform for non-profits and public benefit organizations, helping them give geographic content to their stories. This site includes a Showcase of different topics, Community resources for organizations, and a number of excellent Tutorials. In Time and Place "is a growing library of teaching materials for classroom, distance, or home use focusing on selected topics in American history. You will find many traditional reading, map, and photo related resources, but you will also find GIS (Geographic Information System) data and activities as well." The Learning Network blog at The New York Times provides suggestions on how to teach various topics, including Ten Ways to Teach About Geography. There were also map-related topics in the Year-End Round-Up 2011 and the Year-End Round-Up 2010. Hamilton's own Barb Tewksbury presented a seminar on teaching GIS and Remote Sensing in 2010 at the On the Cutting Edge workshop. Although this program focuses on teaching geoscience, there are a number of tips and resources on teaching with GIS in general, including a list of ideal student outcomes. Academic Commons has an article on three projects at DePauw University to engage students with the  community through GIS. Jeremy Donald and Mike Winiski of Furman University have put together a blended learning module on data classification to "show you how to understand and use classification when both interpreting and creating maps." They include video tutorials, sample exercises, and a sample curriculum for this kind of work. ESRI's ArcLessons "is a resource for you to share lessons for using GIS in the classroom." ESRI also features Case Studies of how GIS is used in a number of fields. ESRI also assisted the the State of Virginia in creating Historical GIS Projects - Using GIS to Teach History which are ten lessons, complete with downloadable data, to help students learn aspects of US history by using GIS. Teach GIS is a new online community and resource for educators, "because no one should face GIS alone." The ESRI Spatial Roundtable for February featured a discussion on GIS in Education with contributions from dozens of educators. The Duke University Teaching and Learning with Google Earth blog features lesson plans, articles, layers and more.
  • GIS and Mapping Blogs Geographic Information Systems (GIS) I tried not to create this page, but I couldn't resist.  I hope you can't resist these blogs, either! Google Earth and Google Maps related blogs Google Maps Mania Google Earth Blog Ogle Earth Blog (Google Earth and other virtual globes) Google Lat-Long Blog Google Earth Community Google Sightseeing Other Mapping Applications GIS Education Community hosted by ESRI (focussing on ArcGIS, ArcGISOnline, and general GIS topics) Bing Maps blog hosted by Microsoft Free and Open Source GIS Ramblings working with free and open source geographic information systems Paul Shapley's Open Source GIS blog Maps, Old and New Strange Maps cartographic curiosities from Frank Jacobs The Map Room (map entries now continue at Jonathan Crowe) The BIG Map Blog interesting maps, historical maps, BIG maps Geographicus Antique Map Blog antique maps and the rare map trade General Observations on Maps and GIS Borderlines commentary on curious  international borders from the NY Times Diana Maps from Diana Sinton, Director of Spatial Curriculum and Research at the University of Redlands The GIS Doctor geospatial analysis, interesting online mapping applications, GIS software ... Spatially Adjusted from the creator of Planet Geospatial AnyGeo anything geospatial from a GIS user for GISusers Mapperz UK-focused, but general news on maps and services Bit more commercial blogs ... All Points Blog at Directions Magazine/Media GIS Lounge
Google Chrome
  • Adding a Website to Your Favorites or Bookmarks Bar Google Chrome If you find yourself frequently visiting the same web site (e.g. Google) you can add it to your Favorites bar so that it is only a click away when you need it.  This is also a recommended alternative to installing web site “toolbars”, such as those offered by Google or Yahoo.  Many site-specific toolbars also come with spyware and adware, neither of which is desirable.  NOTE:  This document assumes you are using Internet Explorer on a Windows computer. Creating a link 1. Open Internet Explorer in your usual manner. 2. Navigate to the web site you want to add to your links bar (e.g. Google.com)   3. Click on the Google icon and drag it onto the “links” bar that (usually) appears below the Address bar.                                                                                                     4. Now, when you click on the icon you added to the links bar, it will take you quickly to that site.  Editing the name of the link Sometimes the site name is so long that it may take up a lot of room on your links bar.  You can edit the name as it appears on the links bar by doing the following. 1. Click on Favorites and then select Organize Favorites (shown at right).                                 2. Click on Links (shown at left).     4. Click on the site you’ve added (in this example, Google, shown at right) 5. Click on Rename.                                                                               6. Type the name for the site as you want it to appear in your links bar then click on Close.          7. You may find that after you click on Close your new site (e.g. Google) might not appear in the desired position in the links bar.  You can reposition it within the links bar by clicking on the icon for the site and dragging it to a different location.   For questions or comments regarding this document, please e-mail helpdesk@hamilton.edu.  
  • Clearing Your Cache and Cookies Google Chrome If your computer is not performing at its usual rate when browsing web pages (e.g. it's "slow" or "hangs" sporadically), the first thing you want to do is clear your cache and cookies. Every web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer, Mozilla Firefox, Safari, etc.) caches visited websites to reduce bandwidtch usage and server load. This allows your web browser display pages faster by loading them from the cache stored on your hard drive. However, sometimes the cache can take up disk space and result in slower browser performing. Cookies are used by websites to store informtion about a particular activity. Clearing your cache and cookies will occasically allow the browser to perform faster and free up space on your computer's local hard drive. To learn how to clear your cache and cookies in a particular browser, click below: http://www.google.com/support/accounts/bin/answer.py?answer=32050
  • Comparison of Browser Interfaces Google Chrome   Browsing       Browser History Accessing Browser History       Browser History Interface   Bookmarks Adding a Bookmark     Accessing Bookmarks   Trust Certificates      
Google Docs
  • Data Backup and Storage Google Docs Introduction Imagine if all of the work that you spent hours completing suddenly disappeared and there were no way to bring it back from oblivion. A nightmarish scenario to be sure! Unfortunately, many face it every semester: ITS often assists students and employees whose computers have malfunctioned while either working on or after finishing some assignment, typically when such a loss is most painful and difficult to recover from. Thankfully, with a very little effort, this scenario can be easily avoided. Backing up your files serves many purposes. Beyond preventing a catastrophic loss of data, proper organization of one's data and easy options for retrieval will facilitate one's work at Hamilton and beyond, viz. graduate school, internships, and possibly future employment Storage Solution Finder External Hard Drive Employee Network Storage 1 Academic Server 2 Google Drive Flash Drive Dropbox or Similar Documents ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Images ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Music ✓   ✓ ✓ Video ✓   ✓     Computer Backup ✓ ✓       Easy Sharing     ✓ ✓   is a solution that should not be used for sensitive or confidential information, e.g. bank account numbers, passwords, social security numbers, health information. 1 This solution is only available to staff and faculty. 2 This solution is for academic purposes (e.g. Coursework) only. And only members of the Faculty and Staff can request folders be created on the Academic Server.              
Google Talk
  • Create a High-Quality Videoconference Google Talk Environment Optimization Regardless which videoconferencing solution is chosen for the communication, it will be important to prepare the location where your call will take place so as to realize the most optimal, standard experience for all involved parties. General Considerations Regardless of the conversation type, if the communication is high-risk/high-value, at least one test should be performed with all participants before the actual conversation. Remember that accidents can happen: pets can meander into the conversation and voice their opinions, cell phones have the potential of ringing, and items can fall and clatter. While all participants should attempt to prepare for these eventualities, it is best to just accept that they are a part of the conversation, a normative experience, and therefore look past them. Remember that participants within the domain of the webcam and the microphone are involved in the videoconference: anything uttered or any act performed within range of either device will be transmitted to all participants. It behooves everyone to be aware (by dint of the Preview available on all computers/software) of what will be seen and heard before the videoconference begins. As the character Doctor Emmett Brown opined in the movie Back to the Future, "no wonder your president has to be an actor, [they] have to look good on television." Lighting Proper lighting is an essential ingredient for a successful, high-quality videoconference. "A webcam isn't the most flattering piece of technology," according to Stephen Winzenburg in an article for the Winter/Spring 2012 edition of the Chronicle of Higher Education, "[it can] make you appear gaunt, overweight, beady eyed, or narcoleptic. And often you look all those things at the same time." To ensure that all participants see each other in the best possible light, everyone should: Ensure your environment is well-lit--turn on as many lights as possible; Be mindful of such issues as camera angle, background, and any other light sources that might affect the conversation; A room with a window might be a nice place to have a chat, but the sun streaming in can wreak havoc on the quality of the conversation; If you must have a conversation in a room with a window, be sure to test your setup around the same time you anticipate having the conversation to ensure a uniform experience; Test, test, test, test, test: almost all software and computers have the ability to provide participants with a preview and this preview is what other participants will actually see--make sure the contents of the preview are what you want the other participants to see.  If a high-quality conversation is desired, it may behoove participants to purchase a dedicated webcam. ITS has enjoyed success with devices like the Microsoft LifeCam HD-6000. Sound Problems with sound are reliable sources of videoconferencing woes. In addition to the ambient noise issue covered in the "Location" section, there are other potential problems one should be aware of: Echo/Feedback A problem arises whenever a sound input is colocated with a sound output: If you put a microphone IN FRONT of a speaker, a positive feedback loop will be generated, i.e. loud, screechy, piercing sound that is painful. Be sure either to place the speaker far away from the microphone, wear headphones to ameliorate the problem, or invest in a microphone with integrate anti-feedback technology. Most laptops, all-in-one desktops (e.g. the iMac), and smartphones have built-in webcameras, microphones, and speakers. While they are sometimes configured to interoperate without generated feedback, one cannot rely on them working perfectly, especially for high-value conversations. All participants are STRONGLY encouraged to wear headphones to eliminate echoing/feedback. Configuration The peripherals required to perform a videoconference interoperate well, but are susceptible to problems.  If participants are unable to hear each other, see each other, or connect, there may be a problem with the configuration of the peripherals, the software for the chat (e.g. Skype, Google Talk), or the drivers that the computer uses to communicate with the devices. While easier with the built-in microphone, webcam, speaker setup, problems can plague those setups. ITS strongly recommends testing the full setup before any videoconference. If problems are identified before the actual conversation, chances are better that they can be troubleshooted and resolved without conflicting with the actual conversation. Accessibility Issues Hearing Aids/Lipreaders All communications conducted using these solutions will be affected to varying degrees by synchronicity issues. For example: participants may notice that mouths move independently of the sound they generate. While this is becoming a normative experience, it can be jarring, especially for those who need to read lips to understand what is being said. Proper balancing of audio is also key to ensure that participants whose hearing is impaired can participate equally in the conversation
. Location Through the miracle of modern technology, these conversations can now take place at any time and in any location, e.g. cafés, libraries, street corners, dorm rooms, hospitals, vel sim. Just because they can take place in every location does not necessarily mean they ought to take place in every location. Both parties should consider: The ambient noise in their respective environments--loud environs equals bad conversations; The people whom they might affect with the conversation--not everyone needs to be privy to the conversation; The speed of the internet conections at the locations--a low-speed DSL connection will not create a good videoconferencing experience (You can test your bandwidth here.)
  • Videoconferencing Guide Google Talk Solutions NOTE: Please click the name of the solution to select it. Also, please hover over links in the table for more information. Scenarios Google Talk Skype OoVoo ITS Videochat Cart Person-to-PersoIf your computer does not have a webcam or microphone, ITS recommends you purchase a Logitech HD Pro Webcam C920. ITS maintains a small pool of high-quality external webcams with integrated microphones that EMPLOYEES may check out. Please contact the ITS Help Desk (helpdesk@hamilton.edu, x4181) for reservation information.n Communication ✓ ✓ ✓   Guest SpeakerIf you wish to use a larger display or projector for your conversation, the Hamilton Resource Calendar can help you find an appropriate room on campus for your conversation. Rooms equipped with LCD screens are especially suitable. Audiovisual Services (avs@hamilton.edu, x4120) can offer advice on suitable locations. ✓ ✓     Multi-person Conversations   (!Free: 25 audio 2 video For-Fee Features: 25 Audio 10 Video) ✓12 or fewer participants.   High-Quality, High-Risk ConversationsSolution for EMPLOYEES only. Students who need an extremely high quality video conversation should contact the Career Center (x4346.)       ✓ Share Computer Screen   (!)Available for a fee. Try http://join.me (!)Available for a fee. Try http://join.me    Maximum Number of Participants 2 audio or video Available for a fee.25 Audio 2 Video/25 VideoFor a fee. 12 Audio/Video   Available Resources If you wish to videoconference via a larger display or projector, the Hamilton Resource Calendar can help you find an appropriate room on campus for your conversation. Rooms equipped with LCD screens are especially suitable. Audiovisual Services (avs@hamilton.edu, x4120) can offer advice on locations. If your computer does not have a webcam or microphone, ITS maintains a small pool of high-quality external webcams with integrated microphones that may be checked out by Staff and Faculty for videoconferences. Please contact the ITS Help Desk (helpdesk@hamilton.edu, x4181) for reservation information. Should you wish to purchase your own webcam/microphone unit, ITS recommends you purchase the Logitech HD Pro Webcam C920. If you intend to use your own laptop for the videoconference, please note that you may need an adaptor to connect it to the screens or projectors in various rooms on campus. If needed and based on availability, Audiovisual Services (avs@hamilton.edu, x4120) can provide Staff and Faculty with an adaptor to connect your computer. Please also have a look at our "Create a High-Quality Videoconference Guide" to make your call the highest-possible-quality. 
  • Videoconferencing using Google Talk Google Talk
Graduation
  • Accessing SSS After Graduation Graduation NOTE: These instructions are good for the time period between graduation and when your account is deactivated (3 months after your graduation date). To Connect to Your Folder on SSS Open your web browser - Internet Explorer (Windows only), Firefox, Chrome, Safari (Macintosh only). Windows Internet Explorer (Windows only), Safari (Mac only) & Chrome  (Firefox instructions are found in section 3 below) In the address bar at the top of your screen (where it typically starts with http://www…) completely erase what appears and type:  ftp://sss.hamilton.edu. Then press the enter or return key on your keyboard. When asked to login, enter hamilton-s\ followed by your e-mail ID (e.g. hdstudent). NOTE the direction of the slash after the “–s”.  In this example, you would type hamilton-s\hdstudent. NOTE:  In Safari, do not precede your userID with “hamilton-s\”. Instead, simply enter your ID in its short form (e.g. hdstudent) in the “Name” field. Enter your SSS password in the password field (this is the same password you use for My Hamilton). NOTE: In Internet Explorer, do not include a check mark in the box labeled Log on anonymously.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      FireFox                                                                               Internet Explorer                                             Chrome                                                                                        Safari                             To Download Your File(s) to Your Hard Drive Once you have successfully logged in you can download your file/files to your hard drive. Depending on the browser you are using, the procedure will be slightly different.  See below: Firefox (Mac & Windows) When the SSS folder opens, locate and then open your class year folder. In your class year folder, locate your user folder and open it. Right click on the file you want to download (Windows & Mac) or on a Macintosh, you can press and hold down the command key while clicking once on the file name. Choose Save link as and then choose to Save File. Internet Explorer (Windows) Although it may appear as though you can click on your files to download them, the process is laborious (requiring you to log in several more times) and may or may not work.  The correct way to download your file is to click on the Page menu (on the far right side at the top of IE) and select Open FTP site in Windows Explorer from the drop down menu. Click Allow if you are presented with a security warning. Next, you will be asked to log in a second time.  Enter your login information as before with Hamilton-s\userid. Replace userid with your real user name (e.g. hdstudent) and enter your SSS (My Hamilton) password. Select your class year folder and then select your user folder.  You should now see your files.  The preferred way to download a file is to right click on it and choose Copy to folder.  If you forget this and double click on the file instead, most file types will allow you to Save the file.  However, this may not work with all file types.              c.  Chrome (Mac & Windows) When the SSS folder opens, locate and then open your class year folder. In your class year folder, locate your user folder and open it. After you’ve navigated to your folder, click on the file you wish to download.  The download will happen automatically and the file will be listed along the bottom of your Chrome window. Click on the file name and it will open the application (in the example above, it will open MS Word).  From there you can save the file to the desired location.               d.  Safari (Macintosh) When the SSS folder opens, locate and then open your class year folder. In your class year folder, locate your user folder and open it. Click on the file(s) you want to download and simply drag it/them to your desktop (or into the desired folder on your drive).
  • Your Hamilton E-mail & SSS Accounts After Graduation Graduation Your Hamilton E-mail After You Graduate When is my account deleted? What happens if I miss the deadline? How do I get a deadline extension? How do I get an alumni e-mail account? How do I transfer mail out of my Hamilton account? How do I forward mail to another account? How do tell correspondents my new address? Questions? When is my account deleted? Your Hamilton e-mail account will be deactivated approximately three (3) months after you graduate.  Typically this occurs on August 31 or March 31 (for December graduates).  Once your account is deactivated, no new mail is received.  Your mail remains on the server after deactivation until your account is physically removed (deleted) one month later. Back to top What happens if I miss the deadline to transfer my mail to another account? Although your account is deactivated on the deadline date,  your messages are not physically removed from our server for another month. This allows us to easily restore your messages should you accidentally miss the deadline.  After the one month grace period has passed, your mail is no longer retrievable. Back to top How do I get a deadline extension? Under special circumstances it is possible to obtain a brief extension.  Please address your request to the helpdesk (hd@hamilton.edu).  You should include your reason for requesting the extension and the length of time it is desired. Back to top How do I get an alumni e-mail account? The alumni address available to Hamilton graduates (you@alumni.hamilton.edu) is not an actual e-mail account. Instead, it is a mail forwarding service.  To sign up for this service please visit the Hamilton Alumni Directory Registration page and follow the step-by-step registration process. When you register, you must provide a real address to which mail is forwarded when mail is addressed to you@alumni.hamilton.edu.  The e-mail address you used as a student will not be available for your alumni e-mail address until your old account has been fully deleted as described above.  The advantage to the alumni forwarding service is that it allows you to list a Hamilton Alumni e-mail address on professional correspondence.  It remains in effect after your Hamilton account is removed and as long as the address to which you forward mail remains active. Back to Top How do I transfer mail from my Hamilton e-mail account to another account? To move existing mail from your Hamilton account into another account before your Hamilton account is deleted please refer to the pertinent section below. To transfer your Hamilton mail to an existing Gmail.com account, please visit: http://my.hamilton.edu/information-technology-services/resource-center/moving-your-mail-to-another-account-1 To transfer your Hamilton mail to a non-Gmail web-based e-mail account: Many web-based e-mail accounts like Gmail (e.g.Yahoo), give you the ability to automatically import mail from your Hamilton account.   The settings referenced in the instructions for Gmail may assist you in transferring your mail, however, the screens will be different depending on the application you use. Back to Top How do I forward my Hamilton e-mail to another account? Once you have transferred your mail to your non-Hamilton account, it is wise to start forwarding new mail to that account at the same time.  When forwarding is turned on it only forwards mail received from that point forward.  To transfer mail previously received, please see the section above. For instructions on how to set up forwarding, please refer to Google's help page at:  http://mail.google.com/support/bin/answer.py?answer=10957 Back to Top How do I tell correspondents my new address? To create an auto-reply message to inform correspondents of your new e-mail address, please refer to Google's help page at: http://mail.google.com/support/bin/answer.py?answer=25922 Back to Top Questions? If you have questions regarding your Hamilton E-mail account after graduation, please feel free to contact the ITS Help Desk at helpdesk@hamilton.edu or call 315-859-4181. Back to Top Return to the ITS Home Page
Hamilton Website
  • Configuring the First Year Student Survey Hamilton Website Notes New students are directed to this survey in mid- to late-July. Matthew Carr administers the system. Each student has a unique ID generated by the Higher Education Research Institute. Matt sends us these IDs in a spreadsheet so we can pre-load the IR_FirstYear table. Each CIRPID is appended to request.cirplink (see below) to create a unique link for each student.   The system is located at http://my.hamilton.edu/oir/first-year-survey Students are passed through this page so they can review the completion status of the CIRP survey and the Qualtrics supplement. The administration area is located at http://my.hamilton.edu/oir/first-year-survey-administration Matt uses this form to upload a spreadsheet nightly. This spreadsheet updates the "submitstatus" and "submitdate" columns in the IR_FirstYear table. Instructions Verify the following parameters in /college/institutional_research/FirstYear/admin/parameters.cfm with Matt Carr: request.cirplink request.supplementlink request.surveyOpenDate   Import the spreadsheet data Matt provides to IR_FirstYear   Test http://my.hamilton.edu/oir/first-year-survey by passing one of the Colleague IDs into the url, e.g.: http://my.hamilton.edu/oir/first-year-survey?colleagueid=1234567. Be sure to verify that both survey links are working properly.
  • My Hamilton Hamilton Website My Hamilton is your personalized view of information at Hamilton, as well as a starting point for accessing information and entertainment from all over the Web. My Hamilton gives you customizable control over the Web resources and information that are available to you, such as your Hamilton E-mail, calendar, ESS/SSS space, Hill Card and Blackboard accounts. My Hamilton uses tabs to group certain resources. Each resource is called a channel. There is an [EDIT] button on each channel which enables you to manage display settings and content for the channel. Home The main section in which you can add channels for direct access to your E-mail, WebAdvisor, Blackboard, Facebook, Personal Calendar etc. Communities These provide access to Listservs to which you are subscribed, campus messages and events and messages from the Hamilton community (e.g marketplace, lost and found, ride board). Tools Access to the following: Resource Applies To Academic Resources  Employees Budget Center Employees Campus Safety - statistics Students,Employees Card Services - for making deposits and activating/deactivating the Hill Card Students, Employees College Business - for paying bills online Students Course Tools - for accessing your WebAdvisor account Students Financial Aid - for accessing your award letter    Students, Employees Human Resources   Employees Library - for accessing the Alex Library Catalog, Reserves, E-Journals, and Databases Students, Employees Mail Center - for retrieving your mail number  and combinations Students Personal Information - view and edit    your contact information Students Physical Plant    Students Student Organizations Students Transportation                                               Students   News Access to the most recent college news new feeds from ABC News, BBC, CNN, New York Times, Washington Post etc.. You can also add your own news feeds.   Links Add your own collection of links to your My Hamilton page. To begin adding your own collection of links, click the "Add Link Group" button. Files Access your personal space through My Hamilton ESS SSS Courses Access Blackboard through My Hamilton. Setup Layout Options - change the number of columns on your home page. You can also reset your tabs, channels, and settings back to the original layout by clicking the RESET CHANNELS. Your data (contacts, links, news, etc.) will not be lost, but your display preferences will be removed. My Profile - update your Hamilton College Profile and your Hamilton Community profile. Passwords and Security - Sync passwords - Your network password will be the same as your My Hamilton/E-mail password. Themes - change the color scheme on your My Hamilton page.
  • SiteManager - How do I add a page or file? Hamilton Website Add a Page or File NOTE: SiteManager can be used both on and off the Hamilton campus. Within the site/section where you want to add the new page, click on Add a page.   Enter a Page Title. The Page Title is what appears in your list of pages and in the blue band at the top of the web page.  If you include spaces within your title, the address will include hyphens where you had spaces. Choose a Page Type. The Page Type can be either Web Page or downloadable file, e.g. PDF, Word or Excel document. If uploading a file, click on Browse and locate and select the file to upload.  If the file is not a PDF and you want to convert it, check the box to Convert to PDF. The page will inherit the template design of the site/section. Click on Submit. Related Links How do I delete a page? How do I edit a page/replace a downloadable file?
  • SiteManager - How do I add audio/video? Hamilton Website Add Audio NOTE: Accepted File Types:  MP3 Select the Audio module. Find Media tab:  search for media you or others have already added. Add New Media tab:  add new audio files for immediate or later use. My Media tab:  see all audio media you have uploaded.   When you’ve found the audio file, select insert. Adding Video NOTE: Accepted File Types:  Flash (FLV) and Quicktime (MOV) (DV) NOTE: Files must be limited to 500 MB Select the Video module. The video media library will look exactly like the audio media library. Find Media tab:  search for media you or others have already added. Add New Media tab:  add new video files for immediate or later use. My Media tab:  see all video media you have uploaded. When you’ve found your video file, select insert.
  • SiteManager - How do I add comments? Hamilton Website Add Comments Select the Comments module. Settings Tab – Set Type of Comments: Moderated – add the list of moderators Not Moderated Comments Tab – See the comments posted, approve to show on page. Add Custom Content NOTE: Only use if you have knowledge of HTML. Select the Custom Content module. Enter your HTML code and click on save. Add Google Forms and Calendars Select the Google Forms and Calendars module. Follow the instructions in the box and click on Save. Add a Google Map Select the Google Map module. Fill in the information and click on Save. Add Hamilton News Select the Hamilton News module. Fill in the information and click on Save. Add Navigation Select the Navigation module. NOTE: Links will appear as the default heading. That can be changed later. Under your heading, enter a title and a URL, either by choosing a page or entering a specific URL, then click save. Repeat the previous step for all other links you want to add. Add Site Contact Information Select the Site Contact module. Fill in the information and click save. If the information is already in the text and correct, click save.
  • SiteManager - How do I add custom content? Hamilton Website Add Custom Content NOTE: Only use if you have knowledge of HTML. Click on an Add Content button and select the Custom Content module. Enter your HTML code and click on save. Add Facebook Like Button Click on Add Content and select the custom content module. In a separate window or tab, go to http://developers.facebook.com/docs/reference/plugins/like/ Enter the URL of the Facebook page for which you want to create a like button. Uncheck send button. Click Get code. Select the IFRAME option and copy the code. In your content module, paste the code and click save. Add Facebook Feed NOTE: Currently doesn't work on the people.hamilton.edu domain Click on an Add Content button and select the Custom Content module. Insert the following code (Include < and at the beginning of the code and remove the spaces in < / iframe>): iframe allowtransparency="true" src="http://www.facebook.com/connect/connect.php?id=###############&connections=0&stream=1" style="border: none; width: 300px; height: 380px;" frameborder="1" scrolling="no"> < / iframe> Insert your Facebook page's 10 or 15-digit id in place of the 15 # symbols. Your page's id is normally at the end of your page's URL. (You will need another tab/window to get to the Facebook page) If not, follow these instructions: On your page, right click and select view page source. In the Source Code, search (Control F on Windows, Cmd F on Mac) for profile_id=. Following that portion of the code is a 10 or 15-digit id. Insert that in place of the 15 # symbols. Click save. Add Twitter Feed NOTE: Currently doesn't work on the people.hamilton.edu domain Click on an Add Content button and select the Custom Content module In a new tab, go to https://twitter.com/about/resources/widgets/widget_profile Select a username (the twitter feed you would like your website to follow). Once you've finished editing the other preferences (we do not recommend editing appearance or dimensions), click finish & grab code. Copy that code and paste it into the custom content module and click save.
  • SiteManager - How do I add Facebook Plugins? Hamilton Website Add Facebook Like Button Click on Add Content and select the custom content module. In a separate window or tab, go to http://developers.facebook.com/docs/reference/plugins/like/ Enter the URL of the Facebook page for which you want to create a like button. Uncheck send button. Click Get code. Select the IFRAME option and copy the code. In your content module, paste the code and click save. Add Facebook Feed NOTE: Currently doesn't work on the people.hamilton.edu domain Click on an Add Content button and select the Custom Content module. Insert the following code (Include < and at the beginning of the code and remove the spaces in < / iframe>): iframe allowtransparency="true" src="http://www.facebook.com/connect/connect.php?id=###############&connections=0&stream=1" style="border: none; width: 300px; height: 380px;" frameborder="1" scrolling="no"> < / iframe> Insert your Facebook page's 10 or 15-digit id in place of the 15 # symbols. Your page's id is normally at the end of your page's URL. (You will need another tab/window to get to the Facebook page) If not, follow these instructions: On your page, right click and select view page source. In the Source Code, search (Control F on Windows, Cmd F on Mac) for profile_id=. Following that portion of the code is a 10 or 15-digit id. Insert that in place of the 15 # symbols. Click save.
  • SiteManager - How do I add Google Forms, Calendars, and Maps? Hamilton Website Add Google Forms and Calendars Click on an Add Content button and select the Google Forms and Calendars module. Follow the instructions in the box and click on Save. Add a Google Map Click on an Add Content button and select the Google Map module. Fill in the information and click on Save.
  • SiteManager - How do I add Hamilton News? Hamilton Website Add Hamilton News NOTE: Academics Sites do not have this module; they have an "Article Database" module, which is currently unusable. Click on an Add Content button and select the Hamilton News module. Fill in the information (be sure to enter tags or no articles will display!) and click on Save.
  • SiteManager - How do I add Navigation? Hamilton Website Add Navigation Click on an Add Content button and select the Navigation module. NOTE: Links will appear as the default heading. That can be changed later. Under your heading, enter a title and a URL, either by choosing a page or entering a specific URL, then click save. (NOTE: If you are linking to a website outside of hamilton.edu, we suggest checking new window.) Repeat the previous step for all other links you want to add. NOTE: All navigation modules on the official (www) Hamilton site must be accordion.
  • SiteManager - How do I add new media? Hamilton Website The Web Media Library The Web Media Library holds image, audio, and video assets. Add Assets to the Web Media Library  You can get to the Web Media Library via: From within SiteManager, click on the Web Media Library tab. When in the editing mode, follow the steps above to Add Content, choosing the Audio, Images, or Video option. When in the text editing mode, click on the Image icon   on the toolbar. Click on the Add New Media tab. NOTE:  Manipulation of assets should be done BEFORE adding them to SiteManager,  For example, you can resize images in SiteManager, but you cannot edit them, e.g. crop or fix red eye. The Name field is required.  Use names that accurately describe the image.  Appropriately named images will allow for easier retrieval by you and by other web editors at a future time. Click on the Select Media button to locate the audio file, image, or video on your hard drive, network space, CD, etc. If you’d like, you can add a Caption or Attribution. If you want to share this asset with others, leave the box next to Private unchecked, otherwise click once in the box to check it.  You will be the only person able to see and edit this image. Click on Save Media.
  • SiteManager - How do I add text? Hamilton Website Add Text Click on an Add Content button and select the Text module. Enter your text in the Edit Content window. Click Save. Paste Text from Word Chances are that you already have the text for your page typed, most likely in Microsoft Word.  When pasting into the Edit Content Window, all of the formatting will be stripped. If, however, you drag and drop the text, the formatting will be preserved. Styles The styles available for you to use when formatting your pages are dependent on the Template.  These are predefined styles and cannot be changed, i.e. use a different color, font or size. Styles for pages on http://www.hamilton.edu need to follow the Web Style Guidelines. Apply a Style Select the text to which you want to apply a style. From the Styles menu, choose the desired style. Remove a Style (subject to change)  Select the text for which you want to remove the style. Click on the Remove Format button on the toolbar.
  • SiteManager - How do I add/edit a slideshow? Hamilton Website Add a Slideshow Click on an Add Content button and select the Slideshow module. Click on Add Image. Search for or upload your images. Click on Insert. Add your next image. Rearrange your images using drag and drop. Click on the Advanced tab to set how your slideshow will play. Click on Save Settings.
  • SiteManager - How do I add/edit images? Hamilton Website Add Images Accepted File Types:  JPG, GIF, and PNG    Images can be added in one of two ways: In their own Content module:  Select the Images module. Within a Text module, e.g. if you want your text to flow around an image:  Click on the Image   button on the toolbar within the text editor.  Click on Browse Server. Does the image you need already exist?  If you are not sure, search for it. Type in a search term under Search and click on Search Images. To use an image that already exists, click on the Insert. On the Basic tab, select the size of the image, choose to include the caption and/or attribution associated with the image. On the Advanced tab, if applicable, define a link to associate with the image, and/or a custom width and height. Click on Insert Media. If you are inserting the image within a Text module, the Image Properties window will appear at which point you can add Alternative Text (important for people using screen readers), change the size of the image (measured in pixels), add a border to it (the images on our site have a border of zero), add horizontal or vertical space (so the image is not so close to the text), and finally, choose how you want it aligned. Click OK. Edit Your Image SiteManager cannot edit images. For advice on editing images, see here.
  • SiteManager - How do I delete a page? Hamilton Website Delete a Page Click on the Delete icon next to the name of the page. Click on OK in the window that appears to delete the page.
  • SiteManager - How do I edit a page/replace a downloadable file? Hamilton Website Edit Pages There are two ways to get into edit mode: Within SiteManager, click on the Edit button next to the page you want to edit. In your browser window navigate to the page you want to edit and hit the key.  If you navigate to the page and you are not logged into My Hamilton, you will be prompted to login. Your page will appear the editing tools layered on top of it, shown below. [NOTE:  If you do not have the rights to edit a page, you will see the message:  You do not have permission to access this page.]
  • SiteManager - How do I edit content modules? Hamilton Website Edit Content When you mouse over a module, it will be highlighted in yellow.  You have three choices: Move the module:  Click on the two vertical lines and drag the module above or below another module.  Please note, you can only move modules within the same content areas. Edit the content:  Click on the Edit button.  The editing options are dependent upon the type of content module. Change Options: Settings:  Change the Layout and Style of the module box. 1/3 Width, 1/2 Width, 2/3 Width, Full Width:  By default a module spans the Full Width of the designated column. Sets how much space the content uses in the column Inherit:  Typically used in conjunction with Lock.  Ensures the selected module will appear on all pages in the site or section. Lock:  Typically used in conjunction with Inherit.  Ensures the Ensures the selected module will appear on all pages in the site or section. Remove: Deletes the content.  
  • SiteManager - How do I edit textboxes? Hamilton Website Table of Contents The Editing Tools Insert/Edit E-mail Link The Edit Toolbar Insert/Edit Anchor Insert/Edit URL Link Insert/Edit Image Remove a Link Insert/Edit Table The Editing Tools SiteManager provides a full set of tools to simplify the process of editing your pages.  Please be aware that although it looks like a toolbar you would find in Microsoft Word, editing a web page differs from editing a Word document.  For example, if you hit "enter" when editing a web page, you will automatically get double spacing, also known as a paragraph break. To get single spacing you have to hit "shift" "enter", also known as a line break. The Edit Toolbar Insert/Edit URL Link  Highlight the text or image you want to become a link. Click on the Insert/Edit Link   button on the toolbar. Under Link Type, select URL. Either type or paste a link in the URL box or click on Browse Server. Navigate to the page. Use the preview button to see a preview of the page. Use the link button to insert the page's URL into the URL box. To have the link open in a new browser window, click on the Target tab and from the drop down menu below Target, select New Window (_blank). Click on OK. Remove a Link Highlight the text currently formatted as a link. Click on the Remove Link button.  Insert/Edit E-mail Link Highlight the text you want to become a link. Click on the Insert/Edit Link   button on the toolbar. Under Link Type, select E-mail Type in the E-mail address and if desired, you can also type in the Message Subject and Message Body so that when a visitor clicks on an e-mail link, a portion of the e-mail message is created for them. Click on OK. Insert/Edit Anchor Anchors are used on a page to quickly take a visitor to a specific section of the page. Place the cursor at the beginning of the line where you want the anchor to be. Click on the Insert/Edit Anchor   button. Enter the name of the anchor in the Anchor Properties window that appears. To use the anchor as a link, click on the Insert/Edit Link  button. Under Link Type, select Link to anchor in the text. Select an anchor name from the drop down list. Click on OK. Insert/Edit Image Follow the instruction under Adding Images on “How do I add/edit images?” Insert/Edit Table Use tables when you need to present information that lends itself to a tabular setup. Place the cursor at the point you need the table to appear. Click on the Insert/Edit Table   button on the toolbar. (NOTE: Pressing "tab" in a table will not move you to the next cell.) Width: Measured either in pixels (200 pixels is the default) or as a percent of the module area you are in.  The width of Hamilton pages is 960 pixels. Height:  Measured in pixels. Cell Spacing: sets the amount of space between adjacent layout cells (in pixels).  This value should be less than 5 Cell padding: sets the amount of space between the content of a layout cell and the cell boundary (in pixels).  This value should be less than 5. Headers:  bolds the first row, first column, or both. Border size: specifies the width, in pixels, of the table’s borders.  A border size of zero will produce a borderless table, but you will see gridlines when editing your table. Alignment:  sets the alignment of the whole table.  Since the default size of the table is 100%, he Center and Right choices will appear to have no effect. Click on OK. Once your table is in place, you can right click in a cell or on the table to see the menu of options you can use to edit your table.
  • SiteManager - Registration Tool Hamilton Website Event Registration Tool The event registration tool is a component of SiteManager that allows you to set up events with limited numbers of attendees. To use this tool for the first time, follow these instructions: Go to https://my.hamilton.edu/sitemanager/applications/events/index.cfm Select Add a new Calendar. Create a name for the calendar and press submit. Add other people to edit the events if necessary. Select Manage Events on this Calendar. This will bring you to the event listing, allowing you to create events, and giving you the public URL to the calendar. This URL can be given out to let people register for your events. To create an event, select Add Event. Be sure to enter your information correctly. Once an event is added, you can copy it and change the date to duplicate it. If people have registered for it, you can also manage them, adding or removing people, or editing their information. If you already have a calendar, it will appear on the opening page, from which you can manage it. To publicize your events, you can either submit the event to the Events Calendar, and include the registration link in the description, or you can use Google Calendar, adding the registration link to the description.
  • SiteManager - What are content modules? How do I add them? Hamilton Website What is Content? Content is the material that makes up the pages you create. Depending on the template you are using, you will see between one and five Add Content buttons: SiteHeader Available on academics, people, students, and courses Sitewide Navigation Available on academics, people, students, and courses Left or Left Column Available on all domains, use depends on template Right or Right Column Available on all domains, use depends on template Center or Main Content Available on all domains, use depends on templat Types of Content Modules Audio - Allows you to insert audio files. Available on all site domains Comments - Allows you to create commemnt boxes for visitors. Available on courses, people, and students Custom Content - Allows you to insert HTML Code. (Facebook Like Button/Facebook Feed/Twitter) Available on courses, people and students Google Forms and Calendars - Allows you to upload Forms and Calendars from Google. Available on all site domains Google Map - Allows you to upload a map to the page. Available on all site domains Hamilton News/Article Database Available only on official/Available on courses, people and students Images - Allows you to upload images. Available on all site domains Navigation - Allows you to create a navigation bar on your site. Available on all site domains Site Contact - Allows you to add contact information for a page. Available on all site domains Slideshow - Allows you to create a slideshow on a page. Available on all site domains Text (Add/Edit) - Allows you to add textboxes to a page. Available on all site domains Video - Allows you to add video to a page. Available on all site domains Add Content Click on the Add Content button in the desired area.  Please note:  it is not possible to drag and drop content between content areas. From the drop down menu, choose the type of module you want to add. Click on Add.
  • SiteManager - What are some good publishing practices? Hamilton Website Web publishing: Best practices We’ve put together a few questions (and comments) to guide you through an examination of the content and structure of your Web site. As you begin to use SiteManager to edit and to update your Web pages, please take a few minutes to review these questions, and to think about how you can apply your answers to your Web site. What is the most important information about you? Publish only the content that you can manage comfortably. That content should give the maximum amount of information to the maximum amount of people. Organize your information in a way that will make the most sense to your audience, even if that conflicts with the way that your office is organized. Think about what information from the rest of our Web site might be useful to your audience, and link to it. Trying to replicate it on your site just makes more work for you. When was the last time your Web site was updated? Current and accurate content is essential. If something on your Web site is obviously outdated, your audience will not trust your information. It’s useful to have a schedule of what you need to update, and when. Review any links that you have to make sure they are still valid and useful. What pages on your site require your audience to scroll down through several screens in order to read everything? On the Web, short and simple is best. Keep your information in easy-to-read chunks that your audience can quickly scan. If your text sounds awkward and wordy, it probably is. When editing a page, make use of “bulleted” information, and use clear and useful subheadings to introduce ideas. Who is your audience? A Web page can’t be all things for all people. Consider who your audience is, and decide what you want them to take away from the page.
  • SiteManager - What is a site? How do I navigate one? Hamilton Website What is a site? A site contains a collection of web files on a related subject.  The sites that you have the rights to edit will appear under My Sites.  Click once on the name link to see the contents of the site. Why don’t I see any sites? 1) You have not been given acess to any sites.  a) Did you take a SiteManager training class?  If not, here is the current schedule.  b) Are you editing an official college site? Access is given during the required Working Sessions. 2) You may be using the wrong address. SiteManager exists on five different Hamilton College domains: a) College departments, official college pages:   http://www.hamilton.edu/sitemanager b) Academic department pages and supporting content/sites:   http://academics.hamilton.edu/sitemanager Please note, pages created and maintained by the departments will not replace the Hamilton marketing pages created and maintained by C&D. Department maintained pages are accessed via a link from the official Hamilton pages that reads, " The [department name] department maintains its own Web site. More..." Only sites that display current information will be linked from the official academic page. c) Student organizations:   http://students.hamilton.edu/sitemanager d) All personal sites:   http://people.hamilton.edu/sitemanager e) Sites and content related to course work, academic projects:   http://courses.hamilton.edu/sitemanager f) Conference sites:   http://conferences.hamilton.edu/sitemanager   Navigating Around SiteManager There is a hierarchy that defines the navigation in SiteManager.  Depending on where you are in the hierarchy, you have different options available to you. Home is at the top.  Sites contain sections (organize like items together) and pages. Pages are made up of modules. SiteManager provides “bread crumb trail” navigation, so you can always quickly get to a site, section, or page. Note:  The first page you make in your site is the “home” page, noted by the icon of the house.  Site options: settings Section options: settings, move, delete “Home” page options: view, edit, settings, move, archive, delete Page options: view, edit, settings, move, make home, archive, delete
  • SiteManager 3.0 Hamilton Website Last Modified on 07/28/10 SiteManager ver. 3.0 Page 1 of 23 SiteManager 3.0 Table of Contents Table of Contents .................................................................................................................1 Log In................................................................................................................................2 What is a site? .....................................................................................................................2 Navigating Around SiteManager .............................................................................................3 Site/Section Settings ............................................................................................................4 Page Settings ......................................................................................................................5 Add a Page..........................................................................................................................6 Delete a Page ......................................................................................................................6 Edit Pages ...........................................................................................................................7 The Content Areas................................................................................................................7 Types of Content Modules .....................................................................................................7 Add Content ........................................................................................................................8 Edit Content ........................................................................................................................8 The Web Media Library .........................................................................................................9 Add Assets to the Web Media Library...................................................................................9 Add Audio (functionality forthcoming) ...................................................................................10 Add Comments ..................................................................................................................11 Add Google Forms ..............................................................................................................12 Add a Google Map ..............................................................................................................12 Add Hamilton News ............................................................................................................12 Add Images.......................................................................................................................13 Edit Your Image (documentation forthcoming)....................................................................14 Add Include Custom File (documentation forthcoming) ...........................................................14 Add Navigation (documentation forthcoming) ........................................................................14 Add Site Contact Information (functionality forthcoming) ........................................................14 Add a Slideshow.................................................................................................................15 Add Text ...........................................................................................................................16 The Editing Tools ............................................................................................................16 The Edit Toolbar .............................................................................................................16 Paste Text from Word......................................................................................................17 Styles...........................................................................................................................17 Insert/Edit URL Link ........................................................................................................18 Remove a Link ............................................................................................................19 Insert/Edit E-mail Link.....................................................................................................19 Insert/Edit Anchor...........................................................................................................20 Insert/Edit Image ...........................................................................................................21 Insert/Edit Table.............................................................................................................21 Adding Video (documentation forthcoming) ...........................................................................22 Log Out............................................................................................................................22 Last Modified on 07/28/10 SiteManager ver. 3.0 Page 2 of 23 Log In http://wwwtest.hamilton.edu/sitemanager Beta site http://www.hamilton.edu/sitemanager College departments, official college pages http://academics.hamilton.edu/sitemanager Academic department pages and supporting content/sites http://students.hamilton.edu/sitemanager Student organizations http://people.hamilton.edu/sitemanager All personal sites http://courses.hamilton.edu/sitemanager Sites and content related to course work, academic projects http://conferences.hamilton.edu/sitemanager Conference sites You will login with you’re my Hamilton username and password. When you login for the first time, you will see the following screen: What is a site? A site contains a collection of web files on a related subject. The sites that you have the rights to edit will appear under My Sites. Click once on the name link to see the contents of the site. Folders representing sections of your site. Pages at the top level of your site. Last Modified on 07/28/10 SiteManager ver. 3.0 Page 3 of 23 Home Site Section/Pages Site Ex. Information Technology Services Section/Pages Ex. Support Section/Pages Ex. Network Services Section/Pages Ex. Index.html Section/Pages Ex. Web Services Site Section/Pages Navigating Around SiteManager There is a hierarchy that defines the navigation in SiteManager. Depending on where you are in the hierarchy, you have different options available to you. SiteManager provides “bread crumb trail” navigation, so you can always quickly get to a site, section, or page. Note: The first page you make in your site is the “home” page, noted by the icon of the house. Site and section options “Home” page options Page options Last Modified on 07/28/10 SiteManager ver. 3.0 Site/Section Settings Functionality Screen Shots The Basic tab includes the name of the site or section as it appears in SiteManager, and the template applied. Note: Template options subject to change. The Security tab controls Viewing permissions. 1. The View Permissions option allows you to control who is allowed to view the pages and files within a site over the Web. By editing these fields, you restrict access to the site to only those groups and users that you specify. The History tab shows the user that made the previous changes to the site/section. Last Modified on 07/28/10 SiteManager ver. 3.0 Page Settings Functionality Screen Shots The Basic tab contains: the Title and Page Type (either Web Page or Downloadable file). If you do not Inherit the template from the site/section, the Templates drop down menu will be available to you. The Security Settings section controls Viewing permissions. 1. The View Permissions option allows you to control who is allowed to view the page over the Web. By editing these fields, you restrict access to those pages to only those groups and users that you specify. The History tab shows the user that made the previous changes to the page. The Metadata Settings tab shows the HTML Title. For the time being, this tab does not need to be used. Last Modified on 07/28/10 SiteManager ver. 3.0 Page 6 of 23 Add a Page 1. Within the site/section where you want to add the new page, click on Add a page. 1. The Page Title is what appears in your list of pages and in the blue band at the top of the web page. If you include spaces within your title, the address will include hyphens where you had spaces. 2. The Page Type can be either Web Page or downloadable file, e.g. PDF, Word or Excel document. 3. If uploading a file, click on Browse and locate and select the file to upload. If the file is not a PDF and you want to convert it, check the box to Convert to PDF. 4. The page will inherit the template design of the site/section. Click on Submit. Delete a Page 1. Click on the Delete icon next to the name of the page. 2. Click on OK in the window that appears to delete the page. Last Modified on 07/28/10 SiteManager ver. 3.0 Page 7 of 23 Edit Pages 1. There are two ways to get into edit mode: a. Within SiteManager, click on the Edit button next to the page you want to edit. b. In your browser window navigate to the page you want to edit and hit the <ESC> key. If you navigate to the page and you are not logged into My Hamilton, you will be prompted to login. 2. Your page will appear the editing tools layered on top of it. [NOTE: If you do not have the rights to edit a page, you will see the message: You do not have permission to access this page.] The Content Areas Depending on the template you are using, you will see between one and five Add Content buttons: SiteHeader Available on academics, people, students, and courses Sitewide Navigation Available on academics, people, students, and courses Left or Left Column Available on all domains, use depends on template Right or Right Column Available on all domains, use depends on template Center or Main Content Available on all domains, use depends on template Types of Content Modules Audio Available on all site domains Comments Available on courses, people, and students Google Forms Available on all site domains Google Map Available on all site domains Hamilton News Available on all site domains Images Available on all site domains Include Custom File Available on courses, people and students Navigation Available on all site domains Site Contact Available on all site domains Slideshow Available on all site domains Text Available on all site domains Video Available on all site domains Last Modified on 07/28/10 SiteManager ver. 3.0 Page 8 of 23 Add Content 1. Click on the Add Content button in the desired area. Please note: it is not possible to drag and drop content between content areas. 2. From the drop down menu, choose the type of module you want to add. 3. Click on Add. Edit Content 1. When you mouse over a module, it will be highlighted in yellow. You have three choices: a. Move the module: Click on the two vertical lines and drag the module above or below another module. Please note, you can only move modules within the same content areas. b. Edit the content: Click on the Edit button. The editing options are dependent upon the type of content module. c. Change Options: i. Settings: Change the Layout and Style of the module box ii. 1/3 Width, 1/2 Width, 2/3 Width, Full Width: By default a module spans the Full Width of the designated column. iii. Inherit: Typically used in conjunction with Lock. Ensures the selected module will appear on all pages in the site or section. iv. Lock: Typically used in conjunction with Inherit. Ensures the Ensures the selected module will appear on all pages in the site or section. Last Modified on 07/28/10 SiteManager ver. 3.0 Page 9 of 23 The Web Media Library New in SiteManager 3.0, the Web Media Library holds image, audio, and video assets. Add Assets to the Web Media Library 1. You can get to the Web Media Library via: a. From within SiteManager, click on the Web Media Library tab. b. When in the editing mode, follow the steps above to Add Content, choosing the Audio, Images, or Video option. c. When in the text editing mode, click on the Image icon on the toolbar. 2. Click on the Add New Media tab. Last Modified on 07/28/10 SiteManager ver. 3.0 Page 10 of 23 3. NOTE: Manipulation of assets should be done BEFORE adding them to SiteManager, For example, you can resize images in SiteManager, but you cannot edit them, e.g. crop or fix red eye. 4. The Name field is required. Use names that accurately describe the image. Appropriately named images will allow for easier retrieval by you and by other web editors at a future time. 5. Click on the Select Media button to locate the audio file, image, or video on your hard drive, network space, CD, etc. 6. If you’d like, you can add a Caption or Attribution. 7. If you want to share this asset with others, leave the box next to Private unchecked, otherwise click once in the box to check it. You will be the only person able to see and edit this image. 8. Click on Save Media. Add Audio (functionality forthcoming) Accepted File Types: MP3 1. Follow the steps at the top of page eight to Add Content, selecting the Audio module. a. Find Media tab: search for media you or others have already added. b. Add New Media tab: add new audio files for immediate or later use. c. My Media tab: see all audio media you have uploaded. Last Modified on 07/28/10 SiteManager ver. 3.0 Page 11 of 23 Add Comments 1. Follow the steps at the top of page eight to Add Content, selecting the Comments module. 2. Settings Tab – Set Type of Comments: a. Moderated – add the list of moderators b. Not Moderated 3. Comments Tab – See the comments posted, approve to show on page. Last Modified on 07/28/10 SiteManager ver. 3.0 Page 12 of 23 Add Google Forms 1. Follow the steps at the top of page eight to Add Content, selecting the Google Forms module. Add a Google Map 1. Follow the steps at the top of page eight to Add Content, selecting the Google Map module. 2. Fill in the information and click on Save. Add Hamilton News 1. Follow the steps at the top of page eight to Add Content, selecting the Hamilton News module. 2. Fill in the information and click on Save. Last Modified on 07/28/10 SiteManager ver. 3.0 Page 13 of 23 Add Images Accepted File Types: JPG, GIF, and PNG 1. Images can be added in one of two ways: a. In their own Content module: Follow the steps at the top of page eight to Add Content, selecting the Images module. 2. Within a Text module, e.g. if you want your text to flow around an image: Click on the Image button on the toolbar within the text editor. Click on Browse Server. 3. Does the image you need already exist? If you are not sure, search for it. 4. Type in a search term under Search and click on Search Images. 5. To use an image that already exists, click on the Insert. a. On the Basic tab, select the size of the image, choose to include the caption and/or attribution associated with the image. b. On the Advanced tab, if applicable, define a link to associate with the image, and/or a custom width and height. c. Click on Insert Media. NOTE: The text that appears in the Preview box to the left is known as “Lorem Ipsum” or “dummy” text. It's mostly Latin, and is used extensively in print to replicate what "real" text would look like, without actually having to write anything. In this case, you will be able to see how the image you insert will appear in relation of text which may surround it. Last Modified on 07/28/10 SiteManager ver. 3.0 Page 14 of 23 6. If you are inserting the image within a Text module, the Image Properties window will appear at which point you can add Alternative Text (important for people using screen readers), change the size of the image (measured in pixels), add a border to it (the images on our site have a border of zero), add horizontal or vertical space (so the image is not so close to the text), and finally, choose how you want it aligned. 7. Click OK. Edit Your Image (documentation forthcoming) Add Include Custom File (documentation forthcoming) Add Navigation (documentation forthcoming) 1. Follow the steps at the top of page eight to Add Content, selecting the Navigation module. 2. Add Site Contact Information (functionality forthcoming) 1. Follow the steps at the top of page eight to Add Content, selecting the Site Contact module. Last Modified on 07/28/10 SiteManager ver. 3.0 Page 15 of 23 Add a Slideshow 2. Follow the steps at the top of page eight to Add Content, selecting the Slideshow module. 3. Click on Add Image. 4. Search for or upload your images. 5. Click on Insert. 6. Add your next image. 7. Rearrange your images using drag and drop. 8. Click on the Advanced tab to set how your slideshow will play. 9. Click on Save Settings. Last Modified on 07/28/10 SiteManager ver. 3.0 Page 16 of 23 Add Text 1. Follow the steps at the top of page eight to Add Content, selecting the Text module. 2. Enter your text in the Edit Content window. 3. Click Save. The Editing Tools SiteManager provides a full set of tools to simplify the process of editing your pages. Please be aware that although it looks like a toolbar you would find in Microsoft Word, editing a web page differs from editing a Word document. For example, if you hit <Enter> when editing a web page, you will automatically get double spacing, also known as a paragraph break. To get single spacing you have to hit <Shift> <Enter>, also known as a line break. The Edit Toolbar Cut Copy Paste Pop-up Window Roll-over text Check Spelling Spell Check As You Type Undo Redo Find Replace Select All Bold Italic Subscript Superscript Insert/Remove Numbered List Insert/Remove Bulleted List Decrease Indent Increase Indent Left Justify Center Justify Right Justify Insert/Edit Link Remove Link Insert/Edit Anchor Maximize Styles Remove Format Insert/Edit Image Insert/Edit Table Insert Special Character Maximize Last Modified on 07/28/10 SiteManager ver. 3.0 Page 17 of 23 Paste Text from Word Chances are that you already have the text for your page typed, most likely in Microsoft Word. When pasting into the Edit Content Window, all of the formatting will be stripped Styles The styles available for you to use when formatting your pages are dependent on the Template. These are predefined styles and cannot be changed, i.e. use a different color, font or size. Styles for pages on http://www.hamilton.edu need to follow the Web Style Guidelines (forthcoming). Apply a Style 1. Select the text to which you want to apply a style. 2. From the Styles menu, choose the desired style. Remove a Style (subject to change) 1. Select the text for which you want to remove the style. 2. Click on the Remove Format button on the toolbar. Last Modified on 07/28/10 SiteManager ver. 3.0 Page 18 of 23 Insert/Edit URL Link 1. Highlight the text or image you want to become a link. 2. Click on the Insert/Edit Link button on the toolbar. 3. Under Link Type, select URL. 4. Either type or paste a link in the URL box or click on Browse Server. 5. Navigate to the page. a. Use the preview button to see a preview of the page. b. Use the link button to Last Modified on 07/28/10 SiteManager ver. 3.0 Page 19 of 23 6. To have the link open in a new browser window, click on the Target tab and from the drop down menu below Target, select New Window (_blank). 7. Click on OK. Remove a Link 1. Highlight the text currently formatted as a link. 2. Click on the Remove Link button. Insert/Edit E-mail Link 1. Highlight the text you want to become a link. 2. Click on the Insert/Edit Link button on the toolbar. 3. Under Link Type, select E-mail. 4. Type in the E-mail address and if desired, you can also type in the Message Subject and Message Body so that when a visitor clicks on an e-mail link, a portion of the e-mail message is created for them. 5. Click on OK. Last Modified on 07/28/10 SiteManager ver. 3.0 Page 20 of 23 Insert/Edit Anchor Anchors are used on a page to quickly take a visitor to a specific section of the page. 1. Place the cursor at the beginning of the line where you want the anchor to be. 2. Click on the Insert/Edit Anchor button. 3. Enter the name of the anchor in the Anchor Properties window that appears. 4. To use the anchor as a link, click on the Insert/Edit Link button. 5. Under Link Type, select Link to anchor in the text. 6. Select an anchor name from the drop down list. 7. Click on OK. Last Modified on 07/28/10 SiteManager ver. 3.0 Page 21 of 23 Insert/Edit Image Follow the instruction under Adding Images on page 13. Insert/Edit Table Known Issue: tables, bulleted lists and numbered lists appear center aligned in the editor, but are aligned correctly (left-aligned) on the actual page. Use tables when you need to present information that lends itself to a tabular setup. 1. Place the cursor at the point you need the table to appear. 2. Click on the Insert/Edit Table button on the toolbar. Width: Measured either in pixels (200 pixels is the default) or as a percent of the module area you are in. The width of Hamilton pages is 960 pixels. Height: Measured in pixels. Cell Spacing: sets the amount of space between adjacent layout cells (in pixels). This value should be less than 5. Cell padding: sets the amount of space between the content of a layout cell and the cell boundary (in pixels). This value should be less than 5. Headers: bolds the first row, first column, or both. Border size: specifies the width, in pixels, of the table’s borders. A border size of zero will produce a borderless table, but you will see gridlines when editing your table. Alignment: sets the alignment of the whole table. Since the default size of the table is 100%, he Center and Right choices will appear to have no effect. 3. Click on OK. Last Modified on 07/28/10 SiteManager ver. 3.0 Page 22 of 23 4. Once your table is in place, you can right click in a cell or on the table to see the menu of options you can use to edit your table. Adding Video (documentation forthcoming) Accepted File Types: Flash (FLV) and Quicktime (MOV) (DV) 1. Follow the steps at the top of page eight to Add Content, selecting the Video module. Log Out When you have finished making changes to your pages, click on Log Out in the top right corner. Last Modified on 07/28/10 SiteManager ver. 3.0 Page 23 of 23 Web publishing: Best practices We’ve put together a few questions (and comments) to guide you through an examination of the content and structure of your Web site. As you begin to use SiteManager to edit and to update your Web pages, please take a few minutes to review these questions, and to think about how you can apply your answers to your Web site. What is the most important information about you? Publish only the content that you can manage comfortably. That content should give the maximum amount of information to the maximum amount of people. Organize your information in a way that will make the most sense to your audience, even if that conflicts with the way that your office is organized. Think about what information from the rest of our Web site might be useful to your audience, and link to it. Trying to replicate it on your site just makes more work for you. When was the last time your Web site was updated? Current and accurate content is essential. If something on your Web site is obviously outdated, your audience will not trust your information. It’s useful to have a schedule of what you need to update, and when. Review any links that you have to make sure they are still valid and useful. What pages on your site require your audience to scroll down through several screens in order to read everything? On the Web, short and simple is best. Keep your information in easy-to-read chunks that your audience can quickly scan. If your text sounds awkward and wordy, it probably is. When editing a page, make use of “bulleted” information, and use clear and useful subheadings to introduce ideas. Who is your audience? A Web page can’t be all things for all people. Consider who your audience is, and decide what you want them to take away from the page.
  • SSS File Manager on the WWW Hamilton Website Provided you have access to the World Wide Web, it is possible to work with files you have stored in your SSS HOME directory from anywhere in the world.  Your HOME directory is the folder on SSS that bears your e-mail name.  For example, it might be alincoln if you were Abe Lincoln.  You will not have access to department or special shared folders through this interface. Accessing Your Files and Folders on SSS via the Web Open your Internet browser (Internet Explorer for Windows, Netscape for Macintosh, etc.) and navigate to the My Hamilton page: http://my.hamilton.edu/. Login in using your e-mail address (e.g. alincoln) and your e-mail password.  It is important to note that you do NOT use your SSS password.  The web interface will authenticate you via your e-mail login and will not require you to enter your SSS password. Click on the Submit button. Click on the Files tab. You will see a list of the folders and files you have previously created in your SSS folder. To open a folder, simply click on the folder name.  In this example, I clicked on the folder called Documents. You can see this by looking at the top of the screen following the word Folder: To return to the level above the folder you are in, you can either click on the Back button in your browser or click on Parent Directory in the list of files and folders. Reading and Modifying SSS Files You will have to save files to your computer in order to read or work on them. To do so, simply click on the file you wish to access. If you are prompted to choose what to do with the file (open or save), Save it to a convenient location on your computer (e.g. the desktop.) After saving the file, go to the location you chose (e.g. the desktop) and open it there.  It is not recommended that you choose Open since the file will be saved in a temporary folder and won’t be easy to find. IMPORTANT NOTE:  After making modifications to your file you must upload it back to your SSS folder.  Clicking on “save” within the application (e.g. Word) will NOT save the modifications on SSS.    Saving Modified Files Back to your SSS folder NOTE: If you download a file (MS Word document, PowerPoint presentation, etc.) to your computer and modify it, you must upload that file back to SSS to overwrite the unmodified file.  To upload a file from your computer to your SSS folder, click the Upload File link. If you are uploading a modified version of a file to replace the unmodified version of that file on SSS, place a check mark in the box next to Check to overwrite existing file names. If you aren’t replacing a file, leave this unchecked. Click on the Browse button. Browse to the file that you wish to upload. Highlight the file and click Open. Click Submit. The little box will close, the page will refresh, and the file will show up in your SSS folder. Deleting Files and Folders To delete a file or folder, click on Delete next to that file or folder (NOTE: folders must be empty in order to be deleted. If you want to delete a folder with files in it, you must first delete all of the files in that folder and then you can delete the folder. Unless you have no other choice, it is best to save this task for when you return to campus.) A box will pop up asking, “Are you sure you want to delete this file?” Click OK. If the file deletes successfully, the page will refresh and the file will now be deleted. If you attempted to delete a folder that was not empty, you’ll see an error message like the one below. Click Close in order to close the message. You should either delete all of the files within that folder and then delete the folder or wait until you are back on campus to delete the folder. Renaming Files and Folders on SSS To rename a file or folder on SSS, click Rename next to the file or folder In the space provided, enter the name you want to give the file or folder and click Submit. The page will refresh with the new file name showing up. IMPORTANT NOTE: WHENEVER you are finished using My Hamilton or leave your computer, be sure to Log out!
  • Survey Tool Hamilton Website The Survey Tool is a system used by Hamilton College to develop, send out, and analyze surveys. It is available to faculty, students, and staff. To access it, go to the tools panel in MyHamilton, and under Info. Tech. Services, select Survey Tool. On the page, you will be asked for your username and password. Creating a Survey To create a survey, select New Survey... in the left-hand panel under survey utilities. After choosing to create a new survey, you will be asked to name your survey. You can choose to require login to access the survey. You can use this to limit the survey to the Hamilton Community, or certain parts of it. You can also choose to submit survey once, preventing participants from takng the survey multiple times. This is useful in preventing duplicates from appearing in your data. You can choose to email upon submission, sending an email to a specified address once a survey is submitted. Adding Content to your Survey Select Add Content under survey utilities, and select the survey to which you want to add content. You will be presented with multiple kinds of questions and descriptions for them. Select the kind of question you want, enter the data, and click next or complete, depending on the amount of data necessary for your question. Editing your Survey Select Edit Content under survey utilities, and select the survey to which you want to edit content. The questions in your survey will appear, along with the options to edit or remove them. Publishing Preferences Select Publishing Preferences under survey utilities, and select the survey to which you want to publish. Set a start date and end date. (Optional) Add a header message and a thank you message. Choose whether or not to use ITS Navigation. Click save preferences. Viewing Statistics Select Publishing Preferences under survey utilities, and select the survey to which you want to see data for. Under each question will be a details button, which will give you information on that question. You can also export the result data using the button unde survey utilities to download the data into an excel file. Distributing your Survey To distribute your survey, select the URL button next to the survey title on the upper right corner of the page. Paste that URL into e-mails and other messages so others can take your survey.
  • Web Publishing at Hamilton Hamilton Website Publishing Your Pages How do you get your work onto Hamilton's web server, and how do you get the old, out of date pages off the server? Move files to and from your space on the web server using one of these methods: On-campus Windows - Microsoft Networking Mac OSX Off-campus FTP (File Transfer Protocol) - Multi-Platform   What Is My Web Address (URL)? Do you find the URLs for Hamilton's web site confusing? Wondering about the difference between www.hamilton.edu and academics.hamilton.edu? Here's a quick overview of the different spaces. Understanding Hamilton's Web space   Sign Up for Student Web Space Student Web space is now available through SiteManager, the College's content management system. Please fill out an account request form to get started. Additional Information Guidelines for Use of Student Web Space
  • Web Publishing Using Mac OSX Hamilton Website OSX 10.6, 10.7, and newer 1.) From the Menu bar, choose Go 2.) Choose Connect to Server... 3.) To connect to: WWW (the main Hamilton site), on the address line, type in smb://polaris/hamilton then click on Connect. Academics (academics.hamilton.edu), on the address line, type in smb://polaris/Academics then click on Connect. Students (students.hamilton.edu), on the address line, type in smb://polaris/Students then click on Connect. 4a.) An Authentication window will appear. Hamilton employees, enter Hamilton-d\username for the Name Hamilton students, enter Hamilton-s\username for the Name 4b.) Enter your network Password, then click Connect to connect.   OSX 10.5 1.) From the Menu bar, choose Go 2.) Choose Connect to Server... 3.) To connect to: WWW (the main Hamilton site), on the address line, type in smb://polaris:139/hamilton then click on Connect. Academics (academics.hamilton.edu), on the address line, type in smb://polaris:139/Academics then click on Connect. Students (students.hamilton.edu), on the address line, type in smb://polaris:139/Students then click on Connect. 4a.) An Authentication window will appear.  Hamilton employees, enter Hamilton-d\username for the Name  Hamilton students, enter Hamilton-s\username for the Name 4b.) Enter your network Password, then click Connect to connect.   OSX 10.4 OSX 10.4 users cannot connect to polaris using the standard on-campus methods.  Please follow the instructions for FTP.
  • Web Support Hamilton Website Before you fill out any of the support forms below, you may be able to find the answer to your question on our Web Publishing at Hamilton page. If you need help, or if you have any questions, about Web development at Hamilton College, please select one of the support areas below... The following forms are for assistance with Web Space, Web Accounts, and Web Development ONLY. If you need help with network passwords, Blackboard CourseInfo, hardware, or other issues please contact the Help Desk at x4181, helpdesk@hamilton.edu, or ITS Support. Technical Support and Problems / Bugs / Updates Examples: Broken links, a bug/error in a Web application, change to content or form fields, unable to connect to a specific Web site at Hamilton. Technical/Bug Problem Report   General Contact Form to submit your issue.)---> Sign Up for Student Web Space Student Web space is now available through SiteManager, the College's content management system. Please fill out an account request form to get started. Sign up / Manage Student Web SpaceCurrently Unavailable Contact Web Services at webhelp@hamilton.edu or call 315-859-4932. --->     Account and Password Issues Examples: Give someone access to one of your Web folders, request organization Web space, and other user account-related issues. Account/Password Request   Projects and New Features Examples: Request to develop and new Web application or site, request to add a new feature to an existing Web application. New Project Request Form Feature Request Form (for an existing application/site) General Questions Examples: Comments, Suggestions, anything not covered above. E-mail Web Services at webhelp@hamilton.edu
  • Windows Web Publishing Hamilton Website Windows users can connect to the web server using Windows networking. This will make your web space appear as a disk or folder on your personal computer, allowing you to drag and drop files and folders to and from the web server, just as you do for other disks on your system.   Windows 7/Vista Connect to the Web Server Open the Start menu Type "\\Polaris\{foldername}" into the search box and hit Enter. {foldername} is the name of the folder that you wish to connect to and should be one of the following: academics hamilton students people The folder will open as a new window.   Map a Drive Open the Start menu Right click on Network and select Map Network Drive... In the Folder field, type "\\Polaris\{foldername}" and hit Enter. {foldername} is the name of the folder that you wish to connect to and should be one of the following: academics hamilton students people The folder will now appear as a shared drive and is accessible from My Computer and Windows Explorer.   Windows XP   Connect to the Web Server Open the Start menu Choose Run In the open field of the dialog box, type \\Polaris Click OK The folder will open as a new window.   Map a Drive Open the Start menu Right click on My Network Places and select Map Network Drive. In the Folder field, type "\\Polaris\{foldername}" and hit Enter. {foldername} is the name of the folder that you wish to connect to and should be one of the following: academics hamilton students people Click OK The folder will now appear as a shared drive and is accessible from My Computer and Windows Explorer.   Troubleshooting Please contact the Help Desk x4181 if you are having trouble connecting to Polaris.
Hardware
  • Policies - Access to Information Technology Resources Hardware Policies Access to Information Technology Resources Eligibility Information Technology Resources (computer hardware, software, telephone systems, cable television, networks, services, data, and other information) are made available at Hamilton to support and facilitate the teaching, research and administrative functions of the College. Electronic resources include: Group I (electronic mail, listservs, personal calendar, portal, Blackboard course management system, network storage, campus ID card) Group II (Web Advisor) Group III (Login access to Datatel) Access to electronic resources for employees, students, spouses/partners, and alumni is enabled through username and password provided to individuals according to the following guidelines. Non-Faculty Employees are given access to Group I resources upon notification of hire. Access to Group III resources is by request from the Department Head. Non-Faculty employee access to all resources is removed at the end of business on the last date of employment.  As soon as an employee gives notice, he/she should enable a "vacation" (auto-responder) message to indicate his/her last date of employment and to provide correspondents with an alternate address to which they should address future College business.  Employees should also remove any personal e-mail or files from their accounts during this period.  Faculty are given access to Group I resources and Group II resources upon notification of hire. Access to Group III resources is by request by the Dean of Faculty. Faculty access to all resources is removed at the end of business three months after the last date of employment.    A request for a brief extension of e-mail privileges may be made to the Dean of Faculty. Upon request to the Dean of Faculty an emeritus faculty member can retain his/her Hamilton e-mail address for as long as desired. Students are given access to Group I and Group II resources upon making an acceptance deposit to the College. Students who work in administrative offices may be granted limited access to Group III resources. Student access to all resources is removed three months after withdrawal or graduation.   A request for a brief extension of e-mail privileges may be made to the Director, Help Desk and Training Services in ITS. Graduates are automatically eligible for access to the Hamilton alumni directory. As part of the directory, alumni have access to an e-mail forwarding service. Each alumnus can create a username@alumni.hamilton.edu which will automatically forward e-mail to an e-mail account they have with an Internet Service Provider (e.g. AOL). Information Technology Resources (computer hardware, software, telephone systems, cable television, networks, services, data, and other information) are made available at Hamilton to support and facilitate the teaching, research and administrative functions of the College. Access to these resources is provided to employees of the College (faculty, administration, staff, maintenance and operations) and enrolled students consistent with their responsibilities. E-mail accounts are continued for Hamilton alumni for three months after graduation, and may be extended by special request to the e-mail administrator. Other individuals, upon submission of a request, may be granted access to some, or all, of Hamilton's IT resources by the Vice President for Information Technology. Generally, such individuals will have some association with the College. The terms of access will be stated at the time access is granted. Under no circumstance may anyone use College IT resources for profit-making activities, in ways that are illegal (e.g. copyright violations), that threaten the College's tax-exempt or other status, or interfere with reasonable use by other members of the College community. Convention For User Names The standard Hamilton naming convention for access to electronic systems comprises the first initial of the first name, followed by (up to seven characters of) the last name. If duplicates occur, the middle initial is generally used to resolve ambiguity. Access in Residence Halls Residence hall connections are intended to provide students with access to telephone and cable television services, and the campus data network. One telephone, cable television, and data network connection is provided for each student. Network connections, wiring, equipment, or jacks may not be altered or extended beyond the location of their intended use. Students must provide their own telephones, televisions, computers, software, and Ethernet cards that meet minimum Hamilton standards. Information on current minimum standards and recommended configurations is available online. Network standards are updated annually. Any costs incurred to repair damages to a network, telephone, or cable television jack in a residence hall room will be divided equally, and billed to the students residing in that room. Management of Internet Bandwidth The campus network, including our connection to the Internet, is a critical shared resource for supporting the academic program. Uses of our Internet connection that are central to the academic/administrative mission of the college (e.g. access to Hamilton web, e-mail, and Blackboard Courseinfo servers) will receive higher priority during times when classes are in session, offices are open, and in the evenings when preparation takes place (i.e. critical times). Low priority uses, including recreational uses, are peripheral to our mission and will receive lower priority during critical times. Between the hours of 7 a.m. and 2 a.m. each day (critical times): With the exception of web traffic a fixed percentage of bandwidth is allocated between the residence halls and the Internet. Access to the Hamilton e-mail, web, and Blackboard Courseinfo servers from off-campus is the highest priority. Incoming or outgoing web traffic between the Internet and the campus network is the next highest priority. Peer-to-Peer Internet applications (applications for distributing videos, music, software, etc.) receive the lowest priority. Between the hours of 2 a.m. and 7 a.m. (non-critical times): There will be no restrictions on bandwidth. The quality and volume of our Internet traffic is regularly monitored to assure that critical applications are available to members of the community. Hamilton does not monitor the content of traffic on the network. It is the responsibility of each person using college resources, including the network, to do so in an ethical and legal manner. Particular attention should be given to observing copyright laws for digital materials. Personal Computers on the Network Internet addresses are provided dynamically through a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) system. In order to obtain a static Internet (TCP/IP) computer address the owner of the system must register the computer with ITS network services. The rules and regulations contained in this policy pertaining to electronic mail and Internet access are equally applicable to the use of personal machines for file sharing or as servers. If bandwidth or other problems occur, ITS reserves the right to discontinue access to the machine. Computers connected to the network may not be used as servers for private enterprises, commercial activity, or personal profit. Computers connected to the network may not be used to provide access to the Internet for anyone not formally affiliated with the College. If personal computers on the Hamilton network are used as servers, the administrator has the additional responsibility to respond to any use of the server that is in violation of these policies and procedures. Server administrators must take steps to prevent recurrence of such violations and report these violations to the Hamilton Network Administrator (hostmaster@hamilton.edu). ITS reserves the rights to disconnect any network port whose activity causes an adverse effect on the network or on any other user. Network connections may also be revoked in the case of malicious or inappropriate computing activity on the network. See Noncompliance and Sanctions for examples of these activities. ITS reserves the right to restrict access to the network during expansion, or for diagnostic and maintenance services. Every effort will be made to provide advance notification and to schedule such disruptions during times of minimum impact and traffic. Virus Protection Hamilton College requires all computers connected to the network to have up-to-date virus protection. Failure to do so will result in the loss of connectivity to the Hamilton College network until the situation is corrected. Sophos anti-virus software is provided free to all students. Other anti-virus products may be substituted for Sophos Anti-Virus as long as they are kept current. In addition, all attachments to e-mail sent to the Hamilton mail server are scanned for viruses. If an attachment is found to be infected it is deleted and a text file is attached to the e-mail message (called substitute.txt) informing the receiver that the attachment was infected with a virus. The receiver can then contact the sender to have the message retransmitted after the attachment has been cleaned of the virus. Windows Updates All computers running the Microsoft Windows operating system and connected to the Hamilton College network must be kept up-to-date with critical service updates from Microsoft. Failure to do so will result in the loss of connectivity to the Hamilton College network until the situation is corrected. Individuals wanting to request an exception to the Windows update policy must do so in writing to the Vice President for Information Technology. Network Connections in Departments All offices, laboratories, and classrooms on campus are wired for access to the network. If departments request additional network jacks, or if network connections need to be moved to different locations, the department should request this service through ITS. The department will be billed for charges resulting from moves, additions, and changes. Network connections, wiring, equipment, or jacks may not be altered or extended beyond the location of their intended use. Any costs incurred to repair damages to a network, telephone, or cable television jack in a department will be billed to that department. Dial-Up Connections For all campus users the primary access to Hamilton computing services is through the campus network. Dial-in access via modem is not provided.  
  • Policies - Hardware and Software Hardware   Supported Products The Committee on Information Technology maintains a list of supported hardware and software. Suggestions for additions and deletions from the list should be submitted to the Chair of the Committee. The Committee will review this list periodically. This list includes the types and brands of hardware and software that are in use at the college and indicates the level of support that ITS can provide. Two levels of service are provided for supported information technology resources, full and limited. Full Support Products designated for full support are those with widespread use on the campus. Examples include generic products (word processors, spreadsheets, Web browsers, etc.). ITS will provide help for the integration of these products with other supported campus technology resources, including services such as installation, training, maintenance, troubleshooting, and upgrades. HelpDesk, hardware repair, and training services for these products will be available through ITS. ITS will maintain sufficient expertise on staff, or through contractual arrangements, to deliver a high level of service for these products. In addition, for these products, ITS will negotiate favorable pricing and maintain a central budget for software upgrades. Limited Support Products designated for limited support are generally used by one or two departments. Examples include computer-assisted instruction programs and simulations. ITS does not have access to these products on a regular basis. Departments acquiring such products should plan to develop their own expertise and be prepared to resolve problems through the vendors' support services. ITS will provide help installing these products. It is unlikely that Helpdesk, repair, or training services will be available for these products. Items in the limited category can move to the full category if they achieve more widespread use and sufficient resources exist within ITS to provide the range of services described above. Licensing of Software The use of all software in the College is protected by copyright laws and must be used in accordance with software licenses. It is against College policy to copy or reproduce any licensed software. Unlicensed software may not be installed on any computers owned by Hamilton. The unauthorized use or copying of software is a serious violation of policy and subject to disciplinary action. Such unauthorized use or copying may also subject the offending individual to law suits by third parties. Software on Personally Owned Equipment Hamilton's educational licensing agreements for software specifically limit installation to machines owned by the college. Therefore, software purchased by Hamilton under these agreements may not be installed on personally owned equipment. Our current license agreement with Microsoft does allow the installation of one copy of Microsoft Office on the home machine of an employee who has Office on the work machine. For information on these programs, Hamilton's current licensing agreements, and exceptions, contact the Director, ITS, Desktop Integration Services.
HillChat
  • Create a High-Quality Videoconference HillChat Environment Optimization Regardless which videoconferencing solution is chosen for the communication, it will be important to prepare the location where your call will take place so as to realize the most optimal, standard experience for all involved parties. General Considerations Regardless of the conversation type, if the communication is high-risk/high-value, at least one test should be performed with all participants before the actual conversation. Remember that accidents can happen: pets can meander into the conversation and voice their opinions, cell phones have the potential of ringing, and items can fall and clatter. While all participants should attempt to prepare for these eventualities, it is best to just accept that they are a part of the conversation, a normative experience, and therefore look past them. Remember that participants within the domain of the webcam and the microphone are involved in the videoconference: anything uttered or any act performed within range of either device will be transmitted to all participants. It behooves everyone to be aware (by dint of the Preview available on all computers/software) of what will be seen and heard before the videoconference begins. As the character Doctor Emmett Brown opined in the movie Back to the Future, "no wonder your president has to be an actor, [they] have to look good on television." Lighting Proper lighting is an essential ingredient for a successful, high-quality videoconference. "A webcam isn't the most flattering piece of technology," according to Stephen Winzenburg in an article for the Winter/Spring 2012 edition of the Chronicle of Higher Education, "[it can] make you appear gaunt, overweight, beady eyed, or narcoleptic. And often you look all those things at the same time." To ensure that all participants see each other in the best possible light, everyone should: Ensure your environment is well-lit--turn on as many lights as possible; Be mindful of such issues as camera angle, background, and any other light sources that might affect the conversation; A room with a window might be a nice place to have a chat, but the sun streaming in can wreak havoc on the quality of the conversation; If you must have a conversation in a room with a window, be sure to test your setup around the same time you anticipate having the conversation to ensure a uniform experience; Test, test, test, test, test: almost all software and computers have the ability to provide participants with a preview and this preview is what other participants will actually see--make sure the contents of the preview are what you want the other participants to see.  If a high-quality conversation is desired, it may behoove participants to purchase a dedicated webcam. ITS has enjoyed success with devices like the Microsoft LifeCam HD-6000. Sound Problems with sound are reliable sources of videoconferencing woes. In addition to the ambient noise issue covered in the "Location" section, there are other potential problems one should be aware of: Echo/Feedback A problem arises whenever a sound input is colocated with a sound output: If you put a microphone IN FRONT of a speaker, a positive feedback loop will be generated, i.e. loud, screechy, piercing sound that is painful. Be sure either to place the speaker far away from the microphone, wear headphones to ameliorate the problem, or invest in a microphone with integrate anti-feedback technology. Most laptops, all-in-one desktops (e.g. the iMac), and smartphones have built-in webcameras, microphones, and speakers. While they are sometimes configured to interoperate without generated feedback, one cannot rely on them working perfectly, especially for high-value conversations. All participants are STRONGLY encouraged to wear headphones to eliminate echoing/feedback. Configuration The peripherals required to perform a videoconference interoperate well, but are susceptible to problems.  If participants are unable to hear each other, see each other, or connect, there may be a problem with the configuration of the peripherals, the software for the chat (e.g. Skype, Google Talk), or the drivers that the computer uses to communicate with the devices. While easier with the built-in microphone, webcam, speaker setup, problems can plague those setups. ITS strongly recommends testing the full setup before any videoconference. If problems are identified before the actual conversation, chances are better that they can be troubleshooted and resolved without conflicting with the actual conversation. Accessibility Issues Hearing Aids/Lipreaders All communications conducted using these solutions will be affected to varying degrees by synchronicity issues. For example: participants may notice that mouths move independently of the sound they generate. While this is becoming a normative experience, it can be jarring, especially for those who need to read lips to understand what is being said. Proper balancing of audio is also key to ensure that participants whose hearing is impaired can participate equally in the conversation
. Location Through the miracle of modern technology, these conversations can now take place at any time and in any location, e.g. cafés, libraries, street corners, dorm rooms, hospitals, vel sim. Just because they can take place in every location does not necessarily mean they ought to take place in every location. Both parties should consider: The ambient noise in their respective environments--loud environs equals bad conversations; The people whom they might affect with the conversation--not everyone needs to be privy to the conversation; The speed of the internet conections at the locations--a low-speed DSL connection will not create a good videoconferencing experience (You can test your bandwidth here.)
HillConnect
  • A Few Things to Know About the HillConnect Environment HillConnect Return to HillConnect Homepage Getting help Google continuously updates its core e-mail and calendar programs so that new features are brought to you as soon as they become available.  Consequently, if you see something new that is unclear, your best bet is to take advantage of the online help built in to HillMail and HillCal. How do I access the HillConnect environment directly? To log in directly to your HillMail account, please go to:   http://hillconnect.hamilton.edu   What is the "Migrated" label/folder? If you had an active e-mail account at Hamilton prior to May 2010 and your account was transitioned to HillConnect, a label/folder with the name "Migrated" was created during the transition process. It's important to know that what the old mail server referred to as a" folder" is now referred to as a "label" in the new system. A fundamental difference between the two storage methods is that with the new Google system multiple labels can be assigned to message where previously in the old SUN system a single message could be assigned to only one folder. Therefore you can delete the label/folder named "Migrated" and not delete the associated messages. I no longer receive a copy of any messages I send to Hamilton Listserv's what do I need to do? Google will not deliver mail to you that you send to a Listserv list.   So that you can tell whether your message was processed, your subscription settings are automatically set so that you will receive an acknowledgment e-mail message from Listserv when your message is delivered to a list. If you still wish to see a copy of your message in your INBOX, you can add your e-mail address to the CC (carbon copy) line when you address your message to the list.  Note that the CC line is processed independently from the TO line.  Therefore, receipt of the message in your INBOX is not confirmation that your message was distributed to the list.  Only the acknowledgement message noted above  can be considered confirmation that your message was distributed. How Can I Change Label Colors? The default color assigned to a label is so light it is almost invisible. To change the color, click the square to the right of the label (folder name) and select a color from the palette that appears.   Our office/organization shares an account, how many connections can we have to our HillMail account through a client? You are limited to ten simultaneous logins via a client, i.e. if you share an account and use Thunderbird/Outlook/AppleMail.  You are not limited by the number of web logins.  
  • Changing Your HillConnect Password to Match Your ESS/SSS Password HillConnect Back to HillConnect home page IMPORTANT NOTE: If you remember your My Hamilton password  but you have forgotten your e-mail password, these instructions will help you synchronize your passwords so that both accounts will use the password you use for My Hamilton.   If you want to change ONLY your ESS/SSS password, please contact the ITS Help Desk at 315-859-4181.  If you remember your HillConnect (e-mail) password and your intention is to make your ESS/SSS password match your e-mail password, please visit the password change form and follow the directions there. To make your E-mail password the same as your current ESS/SSS password: Log in to MY.HAMILTON.EDU Start by going to http://my.hamilton.edu. Use your e-mail ID as your Username (do NOT include @hamilton.edu). Then enter your e-mail password and click on Submit. After logging in, click on the Setup tab. Click on Passwords and Security. Enter your e-mail ID and password. This provides extra security in case you’ve accidentally left yourself logged in on a public computer. Click on Submit. Click on the Synchronize Passwords form link found under the heading Synchronize Passwords. This will automatically begin the synchronization process and change your HillConnect password to match your MyHamilton password. Once done, please try logging onto HillConnect with your MyHamilton password.  
  • Configuring Windows Mail for HillConnect Mail HillConnect Configure Settings for HillMail To change the incoming server settings, click the Tools menu and then select Accounts. Click on your Hamilton Email account and select Properties then click the Servers tab. Set Incoming mail (IMAP) to: imap.gmail.com Set Outgoing mail (SMTP) to: smtp.gmail.com Set E-mail username to: username@hamilton.edu where “username” is your e-mail ID Set User Name to username@hamilton.edu where “username” is your e-mail ID. Check the box that says: My server requires authentication screenshot Click the Advanced tab. Set the Outgoing mail (SMTP) port to: 465 Check the box that says: This server requires a secure connection (SSL) Set the Incoming mail (IMAP) port to: 993 Check the box that says: This server requires a secure connection (SSL) If a window pops up, “Would you like to refresh your folder list?”, click Yes screenshot To change the Hamilton address book settings, click the Tools menu and then select Accounts.  Under Contacts select Hamilton AD and click Properties. Set Contacts Directory Account to: Hamilton AD Set Server Name to bud2c.hamilton.edu Click the box that says: This server requires me to log on Set Account name: to username@hamilton.edu where “username” is your e-mail  ID. screenshot Click the Advanced tab. Set the port for Contacts Directory (LDAP): to 3269 Click the box that says: This server requires a secure connection (SSL). Set the Search base to: dc=Hamilton,dc=edu (no spaces). Click OK and then Close. screenshot Click the Sync icon and type in your e-mail password. Your mail folders should populate with your Hamilton e-mail.
  • HillConnect Resources HillConnect Hamilton's e-mail system is HillConnect, powered by Google. The information provided below is designed to address some of the more common questions related to using your e-mail account at Hamilton College.  If you have specific questions regarding the functionality or your account (e.g. how to create "groups"), please try using the Help feature  built-in to your HillConnect account (click on the "gear" icon in the upper right corner of your HillConnect e-mail screen).  If you find that to be insufficient, please contact the ITS Help Desk at 315-859-4181. Topics Covered Requesting an e-mail account Activating your HillConnect account Accessing your e-mail via the Web Using your HillConnect account About the HillConnect environment Changing your existing password Forgotten password Accessing your e-mail via an e-mail client application Configuring your mobile device Mass mailing lists (ListServ) Graduate E-mail Account FAQ Requesting an e-mail account New Student Accounts: ITS automatically creates e-mail accounts for students when they are admitted.  Consequently, there should never be a need for a student to request an e-mail account for their own personal use. New Employee Accounts: ITS automatically creates e-mail accounts for employees when we receive official notification from Human Resources.  New faculty accounts are created when we receive official notification from the Dean of Faculty office. Temporary Employee Accounts:  To request a temporary employee account, please complete the form found at: https://my.hamilton.edu/survey-manager/survey?id=1304.  Please notify ITS as far in advance as possible when requesting an account as there are several processes that must take place to ensure your temp has access to all the resources he/she will need. Departmental Accounts: Accounts for departmental use can be requested by contacting Debby Quayle at x4031 or by e-mail at dquayle@hamilton.edu. Organizational Accounts: Student organizations can request accounts when they register on the Student Activities web site.  If the organization elects not to register, they must have an employee/faculty sponsor. Back to top Activating Your HillConnect Account Your Hamilton e-mail account must be activated before it can be used. Instrucstions can be found at: https://my.hamilton.edu/youraccount Back to top Accessing your e-mail via the web Regardless of whether you are off campus or on campus you can check your e-mail from any computer as long as it has access to the Internet (World Wide Web). Once you are connected to the Internet, point your browser (Internet Explorer, Safari, Firefox, etc.) to http://hillconnect.hamilton.edu. You can also access your e-mail via the e-mail channel in My Hamilton at http://my.hamilton.edu. Back to top Using Your HillConnect Account About the HillConnect Environment Mac/Windows Understanding conversations Google Apps Overview Video How to set up forwarding in HillConnect From Google How to Configure Filters From Lynda.com To view these videos, please email learnit@hamilton.edu for an account Gmail Essentials Video Calendar Essentials Video Changing your existing password There are two ways to change your password. The Change Password Form allows you to enter a new e-mail password that will also become your new network password.  The Synchronize Password link will use your existing network password and will make your e-mail password match it. Change Password Form: Changes your e-mail password and your ESS/SSS at the same time. Synchronize Password Form: Changing your HillConnect Password to Match Your ESS/SSS Password.  Forgotten Password Current students and employees need to contact the ITS Help Desk at 315-859-4181 or e-mail us at helpdesk@hamilton.edu for assistance.  Instructions for other members of the Hamilton Community. Back to top Accessing your e-mail via an e-mail software application You can access your Hamilton e-mail account using e-mail client software that supports the IMAP mail protocol. ITS supports the use of Mozilla Thunderbird and provides comprehensive documentation for configuring and using Thunderbird. College-owned computers for employees have Thunderbird installed and configured for the computer's user. If you want to install and configure Thunderbird on your personal computer to access your e-mail please contact the ITS Help Desk. Thunderbird Installing & Configuring for HillConnect E-mail Outlook How to Configure Microsoft Outlook 2010 Apple Mail How to Configure Apple Mail Windows Mail How to Configure Windows Mail Others If you are comfortable using another e-mail program without support from ITS, you can use the generic settings below as a guide for setting up one of these e-mail clients. If you need further assistance, use the Help feature in the program or refer to the support webster for the respective software company. Settings for any client Configuring Your Mobile Devices Configuring my mobile device for mail, calendar, and contacts Back to top Mass mailing lists (ListServ) The Hamilton ListServ system allows you to quickly send an e-mail to a group of individuals, such as a club or organization, the entire campus community, or certain class year of students. The ListServ groups for the entire campus, all students, all faculty, all employees, or a particular class year are mass mailing lists which are subject to certain policies. For more information on mass mailing policies and how to use ListServ, see the information on our ListServ web page: ListServ Mailing List Info Back to top
  • Migrating Thunderbird Address Book to HillConnect HillConnect Exporting Contacts from Thunderbird Open Thunderbird. Click on the Address Book icon at the top. PC                                                                                                    Mac             In the Address Book, go to Tools > Export. PC                                                                                                Mac             Select Comma Separated from the Save as Type pull-down menu. Type Contacts in the File Name: field. Click Save. PC                                                                                             Mac               Importing contacts into HillConnect Log into HillConnect at http://hillconnect.hamilton.edu Click on Contacts in the left-hand column. Click Import in the bottom left- hand corner. Click Browse. Locate your Contacts.csv file—by default saved on the Desktop—you just exported from Thunderbird. Click Import. A message will announce the successful completion of the Import process.  Click OK. Click on the imported contacts (in the picture below: Imported 12/13/11). Select More and choose Rename Group. When prompted by a pop-up window, type Thunderbird Contacts. Click OK.      You’re all set!  Your contacts will appear in the middle column and will automatically be referenced when you compose your e-mail.
  • Moving Your HillConnect Mail to Another Account HillConnect This document describes how to move your HillConnect mail into another account.  Detailed instructions are provided for moving it into a commercial Gmail account.  Moving your Hamilton mail to a Commercial Gmail Account These instructions assume you have already established an account with Google (gmail.com). Click on the gear icon in the upper right corner of your screen next to your e-mail address.   From the menu that appears, select Mail Settings.        In the Settings screen, click on the link labeled Forwarding and POP/IMAP.  Even though your settings may already indicate that “POP is enabled for all mail….”, go ahead and click in the dot next to “Enable POP for all mail (even mail that’s already been downloaded”.  Then click on the Save Changes button at the bottom of the Settings page. Log in to your commercial Gmail account (http://gmail.google.com).  NOTE: If you have not previously configured your Hamilton account to allow multiple account logins, you will have to log out of your Hamilton account before logging in to your commercial (.com) Gmail account. Once you are in your commercial account, click on the gear icon and select Mail Settings. Click on the link labeled Accounts and Import and then click on the link on that page labeled Import mail and contacts (see below). Enter your HillConnect account address (e.g. dquayle@hamilton.edu) and click on Continue. Enter your HillConnect password and click on Continue. In the next screen enter your password again as prompted. For the next 6 steps, please refer to the image below: Change the POP user name to include @hamilton.edu (e.g. dquayle2@hamilton.edu) Change the SMTP server to pop.gmail.com Click on the link to the right of "Port: 110" labeled Edit Click in the box to select “Use SSL” Change the port to 995 Click on Continue In the next screen select the following check boxes: Import Mail  Optional: Select to “Leave a copy of retrieved messages on the server”. NOTE:  In some cases, checking this option will prevent the transfer from beginning. If that occurs, uncheck it and try again. Add a label to all imported mail [dquayle2@hamilton.edu] This will allow you to easily identify the mail that was imported from your Hamilton account. 18. Click on Start Import. 19. You should see a confirmation page that informs you the import has begun. Click on OK.  NOTE:  The transfer of your mail can take DAYS.  Google gives it a very low priority but it does take place.  You can check on the progress by doing a search in your Gmail.com account for all mail labeled userID@hamilton.edu (substitute your real user ID where “userID” appears”).  If the number of messages found with that label in your Gmail.com account matches the number of messages in your “all mail” label (folder) in your HillConnect account, then it is done!! When the transfer has finished you should do the following: Log in to your Hamilton HillConnect account and set it up to forward your mail to your Gmail.com account.  You can do this by going to the gear icon and again select Mail Settings.  Click on Forwarding & POP/IMAP, fill in the address for your Gmail.com account and click Save Changes. Next, log in to your Gmail.com account.  Click on the gear icon, select Mail Settings and then select Accounts and Import. In the middle of the section, where it is labeled Check mail using POP3, you’ll see a link labeled “delete” to the far right.  Click on the “delete” link.  Doing so will break the tie between your two accounts.  From here on, new mail addressed to your Hamilton account will automatically arrive in your gmail.com account.      
  • Student Organization Account Creation Process HillConnect There are two types of accounts managed using the Student Organization Management system, Mass E-mail Only and Student Organization accounts. Both account types are described below. Mass E-mail Mass E-mail accounts are used by student groups who only need the ability to post messages directly to ListServs. One e-mail addres, specified by the submitter, is given posting privileges. The address can either by a student's Hamilton e-mail address or a generic group account. This system allows submitters to request a group e-mail account. This request is sent to Debby Quayle, who communicates directly with the submitter to create the e-mail account. Once the Mass E-mail Group information is reviewed and approved by Student Activities the necessary ListServ commands are automatically sent and the account is granted ListServ posting privileges.   Student Organization Recognized Student Organizations have to be approved by Student Activities every year, and are required to provide contact and leadership information, a membership roster, and a constitution. By registering, student organizations have benefits including using the College name, access to facilities, vans, funding, supplies and resources, and e-mail and storage server space. Student Organizations have the ability to request an organization e-mail address. This request is sent to Debby Quayle, who works directly with the organization's leadership to create the account.    
  • Your Hamilton College Electronic Resources Account HillConnect Your Hamilton College Electronic Resources Account   What Your Account Will Access Depending on your role at Hamilton, the account details (username and password) you were provided may be used for e-mail, our wired and wireless network, network printing, and a variety of web resources like My Hamilton, Blackboard and Citrix.  At present, your password is synchronized so that it will work with the various systems to which you may have been given access.  At a minimum, faculty, employees, and students are given access to e-mail, the network (wired and wireless) and to printing. Guidelines for Account Use Good account security depends on keeping your account ID and password private. If your password is easily guessed or discovered it puts the College network and all of your electronic resources at risk. It also means someone can engage in illegal activities on the Internet in your name.  You are encouraged to familiarize yourself with Hamilton’s guidelines and policies regarding the appropriate use of our network resources.  They can be read online by selecting Policies on the left side of this page.  In the Policies section, click on Policies, Procedures, Plans and Standards.  In particular, you are encouraged to read the guidelines for sending mass e-mail. Activating your E-mail Account Prior to using your e-mail account, it must be activated. To do so, go to http://my.hamilton.edu and log in using the ID (username) and password shown on the sheet you received.  Once you have logged in to My Hamilton, click on the link that appears across the top of the My Hamilton page (as illustrated below).  From there, follow the on screen instructions that will guide you through the activation process. Changing your password Instructions for changing your password(s) can be found in the following document: http://www.hamilton.edu/college/its/documentation/e-mail/general/external/hto-changepasswords-all.pdf The extent to which your account has been granted access to Hamilton network resources will determine the best way to change your password.   If the instructions referenced above do not work for this account, please contact the ITS Help Desk at the number below. Using Your E-mail Account Once your account has been activated, you can access your e-mail by logging in to http://my.hamilton.edu and then by clicking on “Read e-mail”.  This will require a second login.   You can also log in to your e-mail account directly by going to http://hillconnect.hamilton.edu.  If this is a network-only account, it can be used immediately at the login prompt on Hamilton College computers (lab and office).   To configure your mobile device for e-mail and wireless access To configure your mobile device for your e-mail account, please visit: http://my.hamilton.edu/information-technology-services/hillconnect.  To configure your mobile devide for our wireless network, please visit: http://my.hamilton.edu/information-technology-services/hillconnect/mobile-wi-fi. To configure your personal computer for Hamilton's wireless network To configure your personally owned computer for Hamilton's wireless network prior to your arrival or once you are here, please visit: https://my.hamilton.edu/information-technology-services/quick-reference-guide/network-1/secure-wireless? Problems? If you experience problems with your Hamilton account, please call  the ITS Help Desk at (315) 859-4181. Hours: Late May - Late August, M-F, 8:00 AM – 4:00 PM Late August–late May, M-F 8:30 AM – 4:30 PM.  
  • Your Hamilton E-mail & SSS Accounts After Graduation HillConnect Your Hamilton E-mail After You Graduate When is my account deleted? What happens if I miss the deadline? How do I get a deadline extension? How do I get an alumni e-mail account? How do I transfer mail out of my Hamilton account? How do I forward mail to another account? How do tell correspondents my new address? Questions? When is my account deleted? Your Hamilton e-mail account will be deactivated approximately three (3) months after you graduate.  Typically this occurs on August 31 or March 31 (for December graduates).  Once your account is deactivated, no new mail is received.  Your mail remains on the server after deactivation until your account is physically removed (deleted) one month later. Back to top What happens if I miss the deadline to transfer my mail to another account? Although your account is deactivated on the deadline date,  your messages are not physically removed from our server for another month. This allows us to easily restore your messages should you accidentally miss the deadline.  After the one month grace period has passed, your mail is no longer retrievable. Back to top How do I get a deadline extension? Under special circumstances it is possible to obtain a brief extension.  Please address your request to the helpdesk (hd@hamilton.edu).  You should include your reason for requesting the extension and the length of time it is desired. Back to top How do I get an alumni e-mail account? The alumni address available to Hamilton graduates (you@alumni.hamilton.edu) is not an actual e-mail account. Instead, it is a mail forwarding service.  To sign up for this service please visit the Hamilton Alumni Directory Registration page and follow the step-by-step registration process. When you register, you must provide a real address to which mail is forwarded when mail is addressed to you@alumni.hamilton.edu.  The e-mail address you used as a student will not be available for your alumni e-mail address until your old account has been fully deleted as described above.  The advantage to the alumni forwarding service is that it allows you to list a Hamilton Alumni e-mail address on professional correspondence.  It remains in effect after your Hamilton account is removed and as long as the address to which you forward mail remains active. Back to Top How do I transfer mail from my Hamilton e-mail account to another account? To move existing mail from your Hamilton account into another account before your Hamilton account is deleted please refer to the pertinent section below. To transfer your Hamilton mail to an existing Gmail.com account, please visit: http://my.hamilton.edu/information-technology-services/resource-center/moving-your-mail-to-another-account-1 To transfer your Hamilton mail to a non-Gmail web-based e-mail account: Many web-based e-mail accounts like Gmail (e.g.Yahoo), give you the ability to automatically import mail from your Hamilton account.   The settings referenced in the instructions for Gmail may assist you in transferring your mail, however, the screens will be different depending on the application you use. Back to Top How do I forward my Hamilton e-mail to another account? Once you have transferred your mail to your non-Hamilton account, it is wise to start forwarding new mail to that account at the same time.  When forwarding is turned on it only forwards mail received from that point forward.  To transfer mail previously received, please see the section above. For instructions on how to set up forwarding, please refer to Google's help page at:  http://mail.google.com/support/bin/answer.py?answer=10957 Back to Top How do I tell correspondents my new address? To create an auto-reply message to inform correspondents of your new e-mail address, please refer to Google's help page at: http://mail.google.com/support/bin/answer.py?answer=25922 Back to Top Questions? If you have questions regarding your Hamilton E-mail account after graduation, please feel free to contact the ITS Help Desk at helpdesk@hamilton.edu or call 315-859-4181. Back to Top Return to the ITS Home Page
HillMail
  • A Few Things to Know About the HillConnect Environment HillMail Return to HillConnect Homepage Getting help Google continuously updates its core e-mail and calendar programs so that new features are brought to you as soon as they become available.  Consequently, if you see something new that is unclear, your best bet is to take advantage of the online help built in to HillMail and HillCal. How do I access the HillConnect environment directly? To log in directly to your HillMail account, please go to:   http://hillconnect.hamilton.edu   What is the "Migrated" label/folder? If you had an active e-mail account at Hamilton prior to May 2010 and your account was transitioned to HillConnect, a label/folder with the name "Migrated" was created during the transition process. It's important to know that what the old mail server referred to as a" folder" is now referred to as a "label" in the new system. A fundamental difference between the two storage methods is that with the new Google system multiple labels can be assigned to message where previously in the old SUN system a single message could be assigned to only one folder. Therefore you can delete the label/folder named "Migrated" and not delete the associated messages. I no longer receive a copy of any messages I send to Hamilton Listserv's what do I need to do? Google will not deliver mail to you that you send to a Listserv list.   So that you can tell whether your message was processed, your subscription settings are automatically set so that you will receive an acknowledgment e-mail message from Listserv when your message is delivered to a list. If you still wish to see a copy of your message in your INBOX, you can add your e-mail address to the CC (carbon copy) line when you address your message to the list.  Note that the CC line is processed independently from the TO line.  Therefore, receipt of the message in your INBOX is not confirmation that your message was distributed to the list.  Only the acknowledgement message noted above  can be considered confirmation that your message was distributed. How Can I Change Label Colors? The default color assigned to a label is so light it is almost invisible. To change the color, click the square to the right of the label (folder name) and select a color from the palette that appears.   Our office/organization shares an account, how many connections can we have to our HillMail account through a client? You are limited to ten simultaneous logins via a client, i.e. if you share an account and use Thunderbird/Outlook/AppleMail.  You are not limited by the number of web logins.  
  • Configuring Windows Mail for HillConnect Mail HillMail Configure Settings for HillMail To change the incoming server settings, click the Tools menu and then select Accounts. Click on your Hamilton Email account and select Properties then click the Servers tab. Set Incoming mail (IMAP) to: imap.gmail.com Set Outgoing mail (SMTP) to: smtp.gmail.com Set E-mail username to: username@hamilton.edu where “username” is your e-mail ID Set User Name to username@hamilton.edu where “username” is your e-mail ID. Check the box that says: My server requires authentication screenshot Click the Advanced tab. Set the Outgoing mail (SMTP) port to: 465 Check the box that says: This server requires a secure connection (SSL) Set the Incoming mail (IMAP) port to: 993 Check the box that says: This server requires a secure connection (SSL) If a window pops up, “Would you like to refresh your folder list?”, click Yes screenshot To change the Hamilton address book settings, click the Tools menu and then select Accounts.  Under Contacts select Hamilton AD and click Properties. Set Contacts Directory Account to: Hamilton AD Set Server Name to bud2c.hamilton.edu Click the box that says: This server requires me to log on Set Account name: to username@hamilton.edu where “username” is your e-mail  ID. screenshot Click the Advanced tab. Set the port for Contacts Directory (LDAP): to 3269 Click the box that says: This server requires a secure connection (SSL). Set the Search base to: dc=Hamilton,dc=edu (no spaces). Click OK and then Close. screenshot Click the Sync icon and type in your e-mail password. Your mail folders should populate with your Hamilton e-mail.
  • Google Sync versus IMAP HillMail Return to configuring my mobile device Return to HillConnect Homepage Sync Supports push technology which delivers data to your device as new data is available. There is a single setup for e-mail, calendar, and contacts. The setup is easy. Most devices support only one sync account. Depending on your device, any push connection may use more power than fetching data at scheduled intervals. In some cases the difference in power usage may have a noticeable impact on your phone's battery life. To save battery life, turn off push and set device to fetch data every 30 to 60 minutes. Beta software. IMAP Supports pull technology which fetches data at a scheduled interval set by the user. One setup for e-mail and a separate setup for calendar and contacts. The setup is easy. Devices support multiple accounts. Pull technology allows you to set the interval to fetch new data and therefore improving your phone's battery life.
  • Moving Your HillConnect Mail to Another Account HillMail This document describes how to move your HillConnect mail into another account.  Detailed instructions are provided for moving it into a commercial Gmail account.  Moving your Hamilton mail to a Commercial Gmail Account These instructions assume you have already established an account with Google (gmail.com). Click on the gear icon in the upper right corner of your screen next to your e-mail address.   From the menu that appears, select Mail Settings.        In the Settings screen, click on the link labeled Forwarding and POP/IMAP.  Even though your settings may already indicate that “POP is enabled for all mail….”, go ahead and click in the dot next to “Enable POP for all mail (even mail that’s already been downloaded”.  Then click on the Save Changes button at the bottom of the Settings page. Log in to your commercial Gmail account (http://gmail.google.com).  NOTE: If you have not previously configured your Hamilton account to allow multiple account logins, you will have to log out of your Hamilton account before logging in to your commercial (.com) Gmail account. Once you are in your commercial account, click on the gear icon and select Mail Settings. Click on the link labeled Accounts and Import and then click on the link on that page labeled Import mail and contacts (see below). Enter your HillConnect account address (e.g. dquayle@hamilton.edu) and click on Continue. Enter your HillConnect password and click on Continue. In the next screen enter your password again as prompted. For the next 6 steps, please refer to the image below: Change the POP user name to include @hamilton.edu (e.g. dquayle2@hamilton.edu) Change the SMTP server to pop.gmail.com Click on the link to the right of "Port: 110" labeled Edit Click in the box to select “Use SSL” Change the port to 995 Click on Continue In the next screen select the following check boxes: Import Mail  Optional: Select to “Leave a copy of retrieved messages on the server”. NOTE:  In some cases, checking this option will prevent the transfer from beginning. If that occurs, uncheck it and try again. Add a label to all imported mail [dquayle2@hamilton.edu] This will allow you to easily identify the mail that was imported from your Hamilton account. 18. Click on Start Import. 19. You should see a confirmation page that informs you the import has begun. Click on OK.  NOTE:  The transfer of your mail can take DAYS.  Google gives it a very low priority but it does take place.  You can check on the progress by doing a search in your Gmail.com account for all mail labeled userID@hamilton.edu (substitute your real user ID where “userID” appears”).  If the number of messages found with that label in your Gmail.com account matches the number of messages in your “all mail” label (folder) in your HillConnect account, then it is done!! When the transfer has finished you should do the following: Log in to your Hamilton HillConnect account and set it up to forward your mail to your Gmail.com account.  You can do this by going to the gear icon and again select Mail Settings.  Click on Forwarding & POP/IMAP, fill in the address for your Gmail.com account and click Save Changes. Next, log in to your Gmail.com account.  Click on the gear icon, select Mail Settings and then select Accounts and Import. In the middle of the section, where it is labeled Check mail using POP3, you’ll see a link labeled “delete” to the far right.  Click on the “delete” link.  Doing so will break the tie between your two accounts.  From here on, new mail addressed to your Hamilton account will automatically arrive in your gmail.com account.      
  • Your Hamilton E-mail & SSS Accounts After Graduation HillMail Your Hamilton E-mail After You Graduate When is my account deleted? What happens if I miss the deadline? How do I get a deadline extension? How do I get an alumni e-mail account? How do I transfer mail out of my Hamilton account? How do I forward mail to another account? How do tell correspondents my new address? Questions? When is my account deleted? Your Hamilton e-mail account will be deactivated approximately three (3) months after you graduate.  Typically this occurs on August 31 or March 31 (for December graduates).  Once your account is deactivated, no new mail is received.  Your mail remains on the server after deactivation until your account is physically removed (deleted) one month later. Back to top What happens if I miss the deadline to transfer my mail to another account? Although your account is deactivated on the deadline date,  your messages are not physically removed from our server for another month. This allows us to easily restore your messages should you accidentally miss the deadline.  After the one month grace period has passed, your mail is no longer retrievable. Back to top How do I get a deadline extension? Under special circumstances it is possible to obtain a brief extension.  Please address your request to the helpdesk (hd@hamilton.edu).  You should include your reason for requesting the extension and the length of time it is desired. Back to top How do I get an alumni e-mail account? The alumni address available to Hamilton graduates (you@alumni.hamilton.edu) is not an actual e-mail account. Instead, it is a mail forwarding service.  To sign up for this service please visit the Hamilton Alumni Directory Registration page and follow the step-by-step registration process. When you register, you must provide a real address to which mail is forwarded when mail is addressed to you@alumni.hamilton.edu.  The e-mail address you used as a student will not be available for your alumni e-mail address until your old account has been fully deleted as described above.  The advantage to the alumni forwarding service is that it allows you to list a Hamilton Alumni e-mail address on professional correspondence.  It remains in effect after your Hamilton account is removed and as long as the address to which you forward mail remains active. Back to Top How do I transfer mail from my Hamilton e-mail account to another account? To move existing mail from your Hamilton account into another account before your Hamilton account is deleted please refer to the pertinent section below. To transfer your Hamilton mail to an existing Gmail.com account, please visit: http://my.hamilton.edu/information-technology-services/resource-center/moving-your-mail-to-another-account-1 To transfer your Hamilton mail to a non-Gmail web-based e-mail account: Many web-based e-mail accounts like Gmail (e.g.Yahoo), give you the ability to automatically import mail from your Hamilton account.   The settings referenced in the instructions for Gmail may assist you in transferring your mail, however, the screens will be different depending on the application you use. Back to Top How do I forward my Hamilton e-mail to another account? Once you have transferred your mail to your non-Hamilton account, it is wise to start forwarding new mail to that account at the same time.  When forwarding is turned on it only forwards mail received from that point forward.  To transfer mail previously received, please see the section above. For instructions on how to set up forwarding, please refer to Google's help page at:  http://mail.google.com/support/bin/answer.py?answer=10957 Back to Top How do I tell correspondents my new address? To create an auto-reply message to inform correspondents of your new e-mail address, please refer to Google's help page at: http://mail.google.com/support/bin/answer.py?answer=25922 Back to Top Questions? If you have questions regarding your Hamilton E-mail account after graduation, please feel free to contact the ITS Help Desk at helpdesk@hamilton.edu or call 315-859-4181. Back to Top Return to the ITS Home Page
IBM SPSS
  • Installing the Citrix Client on your Computer IBM SPSS Installing Citrix Client These instructions only pertain to your personal computer.  If you are on a public lab, or Hamilton-issued computer, the Citrix Client has been preinstalled. This process need be followed only once for any single computer in any academic year. If it has been some time since you last installed the Citrix client on your computer, you may want to update the client for the best performance. The steps for installation are: • On a Windows system: o Log into the Citrixweb page. • A page will appear that prompts you to download the client. Place a check in the check box and click Download. The file will request to be saved to your computer. Please save it to your Desktop. • Double-click on the installer when it when it has downloaded. • Once the installation has completed, click the Continue button on the web page. • Proceed to Launching Citrix Programs. • If this does not seem to be the case for you, follow the directions for updating below. • On a Macintosh system: o After logging in, you will be taken to a screen that will prompt you to download the plugin. o Click Download to download the plugin. o The Citrix Plug-in DMG file will download to your Desktop or Downloads folder. Find the file and double-click on it. o A window will open containing the plug-in installation file—double-click it to launch the installer. o Install the app by clicking Continue and Agree until you see a window that indicates the software has been installed successfully. o Once the installation has completed, click the Continue button on the web page. o Proceed to Launching Citrix Programs. o If this does not seem to be the case for you, follow the directions for updating below. • Updating your Citrix client, any system o Log into the Citrixweb page. o Near the top of the applications page, you will see a horizontal bar with some menu choices in it. The “Applications” menu will probably be dark blue, indicating that the “Applications” screen is what you are seeing. o Click on the “Preferences” menu and select “Connection Preferences”. o Under “Client settings”, click on “Run Client Detection”. • If you are immediately returned to the “Applications” screen, you should see an information message under the menu bar and above the applications list that says “The preferred client is already available on your computer.” • You’re done, there is no update or installation necessary. o If you don’t have the most current version of the client, you will be taken to a screen that allows you to download the client. • Follow the directions on that page to download the client. • If you receive a warning about the file having been downloaded from the internet, click “Save file” or “Open”, according to the screen you see. • Double click the saved file to run. • If asked if you want to allow the program to make changes to your computer, click “Yes”. o You should now be able to return to the Citrixweb Application page, and select the software you wish to use.  
  • Introduction to Citrix IBM SPSS What is Citrix? The computers in public labs deliver some specialized software via Citrix – a client/server configuration that makes software more broadly available to students and faculty. In this model, there is a server which runs the Citrix system, and on which Windows desktop software, like SPSS or Maple, has been installed. There is also a client, a small piece of software that you, the end user, install on your personal computer. Finally, there is a web page (http://citrixweb.hamilton.edu) that allows you to tell the Citrix server which software you want to run. After that, the program you choose runs on the Citrix server, but looks like it is running on your personal computer. You get access to all the same resources you can normally access from your computer. Note that it doesn’t matter whether your personal computer is a Macintosh or Windows computer. Citrix has a client written for either of these computer platforms, and will make the necessary translation so that you can run the software from your computer - that is “from”, not “on”. The actual software, such as Exceed or Stata, never runs on your personal computer, only on the Citrix server. One of the important advantages of the Citrix server for teaching and learning is the ability of the students to access the software from their dormitory rooms, or even away from campus - any location where they can use the web to reach http://citrixweb.hamilton.edu/. It is also possible for faculty to use this URL to reach the software from home as well as the office. However, be aware that you must remain connected to the internet for your entire Citrix work session. Available Programs As of August 2011, the following programs are available through Citrix: • Exceed 14 • iThink 9 • Maple 15 • SPSS Statistics 19 • Stata 11 • StatView 5 If you would like to request a new program be added to the Citrix server, please contact the Instructional Technology Support Services team. Common Citrix Problems and their Solutions Unable to Log In If you are unable to log into the Citrix web portal, make sure your username and password are correct. If you are a student, make sure the Domain drop down menu says students.hamilton.edu.  The default domain (Hamilton.edu) is correct for faculty and other employees of the college. Keyboard Shortcuts Citrix applications are presented in a Windows environment.  Therefore, keyboard shortcuts must be those used in the Windows file management system. Macintosh users should note that the shortcut for copying is and the shortcut for pasting is . You may also use the Edit menu to select these functions. Folder Access If you are experiencing difficulties navigating through folders, make sure the folder you are trying to open does not contain the forward slash ‘/’ symbol. If it does, rename it and try accessing it again. Other ITS Citrix Webpages Registering and Logging into Citrix Installing the Citrix Client on your Computer Launching Citrix Programs, Opening and Saving Files in Citrix Programs, and Printing from Citrix Programs
  • Introduction to Qualtrics IBM SPSS What is Qualtrics? Qualtrics is a suite of services used by Hamilton College to develop and support all aspects of forms and surveys. Various departments, including ITS, the Career Center, the Writing Center, and the Psychology Department already use it. It possesses an incredibly robust set of features to collect and analyze data either within itself, or by downloading datasets into Excel and SPSS. How do I create an account? Contact ITS Course Support (course-support@hamilton.edu, x4877) to get an Access Code. Go to hamilton.qualtrics.com, and select Please click here to create an account. Enter your e-mail address  and select a password, and click get started! Select Hamilton College as the Educational Institution, and click finish. Enter your access code, and click go. (NOTE: Do NOT press sign up now. That will create a trial account that will be deleted). Qualtrics Support Qualtrics has an expansive help suite called "Qualtrics University." To access it, select get help from any screen in Qualtrics. Some specific pages are listed below: Creating a Survey Distributing a Survey Link Inviting Collaborators View Results Downloading Data Creating Panels Creating Samples of a Panel
  • Launching Citrix Programs, Opening and Saving Files in Citrix Programs, and Printing from Citrix Programs IBM SPSS Table of Contents Launching Citrix Programs Opening or Saving Files in Citrix-Served Programs More on Accessing Files Printing from Citrix Programs Launching Citrix Programs Upon successfully logging into Citrix, you will see a number of programs arranged in a matrix. Please click ONCE on the program you wish to launch. NOTE: It might take up to a minute for a Citrix program to launch, during which a number of windows may appear and disappear. Do not try to interact with these windows by clicking them or closing them, as they are a part of the connection process. When you begin using a Citrix-based program, your machine may download a file named Launch.ica. This file is only needed for the current session, and can be safely deleted once you are finished with the Citrix program. You will find it wherever you have directed your web browser to save downloaded files (most commonly on your machine’s Desktop or in Documents). If the Citrix-based program does not launch automatically, double-click on the Launch.ica file to start the application. A window entitled Client File Security may open and request access to local files on your computer. Please select Full Access and Never Ask Me Again and click OK. Opening or Saving Files in Citrix-Served Applications The Citrix-served applications will give you access to your SSS or ESS storage space and other commonly-used areas for file saving. To open or save a file while using an application in Citrix, click the Open File (or Save File) icon in the button bar or File, then Open (File, then Save) in the menu bar of the application.  Click the drop-down arrow at the right end of the Look in field. You will receive a list of locations available to you. NOTE: The various icons you may be familiar with do not necessarily map to the same places as they do on your personal Windows machine. Both the My Documents and the Desktop buttons and menu choices will take you to your SSS or ESS folder, depending on your user role (student vs faculty or employee). NOTE: Remember that you are running a client/server application, which means that the application you are using is actually running on the remote Citrix server.  All file locations are specified from the point of view of the server: they are NOT on the computer you are using. As you can see in the example images on the next few pages, the save screens differ dramatically from previous version of the Citrix client: they are now optimized to hide unavailable save locations and give you ready access both to your network storage folder and your local computer.  Please refer to this guide as needed to ensure your data is properly saved in the desired location. TYPE 1   When attempting to open or save a file, you will be automatically taken to your ESS/SSS user folder. Find the appropriate file and folder and click Open. TYPE 1 To access and save to file repositories other than your ESS/SSS share, please click on the pull-down menu. Your ESS/SSS home folder is available under H:, (if applicable) your department share as M:, and the Campus share as P:.  Your local drives on the computer from which you are accessing Citrix are available and labeled with a letter followed by a dollar sign (e.g. D$ on Client).  On Windows machines, you will be able to access your local hard drive (typically C$).  On a Mac, you will be able to access your home folder (again, C$).  Other drives may be available in addition to the ones displayed. TYPE 2 Note the difference in save options on the left panel.  The tfondak$ on ‘Ess’ link (“A”) will take you to your home folder on network storage. Similarly, the C$ on ‘Client’ option (“B”) will take you to the C: drive on your Windows machine or your User Home folder on the Mac as before. These and other options are also available via the pull-down menu (“C”)on top.   TYPE 2 The My Computer link here will take you to a list of the available mounted drives.  As above, the H: drive will take you to your home folder on network storage (ESS/SSS), and C$ will take you to your hard drive on a PC and your user Home Folder on a Mac. TYPE 3 Some save dialogs may not have icons available on the left side.  Available save points are accessed via the pull-down menu at top. NOTE: the “My Documents” and “My Computer” links will connect you to your home folder on network storage (ESS/SSS).  Others will behave as discussed above. TYPE 4 Though seemingly similar to the TYPE 2 save dialog, this dialog box only has two options on the left: your ESS/SSS share and your local drive. Please choose the appropriate repository or find other options in the pull-down menu above. TYPE 4 (Exceed) This is a screenshot of a save dialog in Exceed.  You can select your save location by clicking on the Directory pulldown list.  Shown here is the p:/ directory, a direct link to the ESS folder.   TYPE 4 (Exceed) This is a screenshot of another save dialog in Exceed.  Shown here is the h:/ directory, a direct link to your home directory on either ESS or SSS.   Accessing Files Located on your local hard drive If you have a file on your local machine’s Desktop or Documents, you will need to navigate to them. On a PC:  Double-click on C$ on Client (your local hard drive), double-click Documents and Settings; open the folder with your user id; and then Desktop or Documents as appropriate. On a Mac:  Double-click on C$ on Client (it being your User Home Folder). Once there, double-click on either Desktop or Documents as appropriate.  Citrix may prompt for permission read and/or write access the local computer – you should click Allow. Located in your ESS or SSS folder If you downloaded a file to your ESS or SSS space, that location is available in the “Look in:” input box by default as “userid$”.  For example, if your user ID is bscott, you will see “bscott$” in the input box.  It is also available in the dropdown menu under “My Computer” as “userid$ on ‘SSS’ (H:)” All mapped network drives are distinguished from others by the shared-drive icon, which indicates that, although the storage area is actually located on another server, it is treated as though it were another drive on your computer.  Your home folder on ESS/SSS is universally mapped as the H: drive. Accessing files on the Software Server If the file you need is on the Software server, you may place your cursor in the File Name field, type \\Software\Academic, press , and you should see all the folders in the Academic share.  Select a file and folder by double-clicking.   A NOTE on Best Practices If you are downloading a file from Blackboard, or using a file from the Software Server, first drag and drop that file into your SSS or ESS space. Then open the folder from within your Citrix-served program from that storage space. Every time you save the file, it will save into that space, and you won’t ever lose it. If you save your work periodically during your session, you can always recover to the “most recent saved” version, and you can do that recovery from any computer on the Hamilton College network. Printing from Citrix Programs  
  • Registering and Logging into Citrix IBM SPSS Registration If this is the first time you are trying to login to Citrix, you MUST REGISTER. The link for registration is on the bottom of the login page. Students will also need to re-register every academic year. Once you register, it will take several minutes (approximately 10) for all of the systems to be updated with your access information. Logging into Citrix Once you are registered, log in to the Citrix Web Portal. The username you should use is the same as your My Hamilton username. The password is the same password you use to access the SSS or ESS servers. If you are a student, you will need to change the Domain dropdown to students.hamilton.edu. If a matrix full of applications appears, please navigate to the Launching Citrix Programs webpage. Else, proceed to the Installing Citrix Client webpage.
Image
  • Resolution, Sizing, and Color Guidelines Image For Scanning Graphics and Images Graphics/Images for Print When scanning a graphic or image that will be printed, the resolution should be set at 300 dpi (dots per inch) at 100% o the final image size. This means, if the image will NOT be resized at all after it is scanned the scanning resolution should be set at 300 dpi. If the image will be resized after scanning the scanning resolution should be adjusted accordingly. Example: Final size = 100% o original ==> scanning resolution = 300 dpi   200% o original ==> scanning resolution = 600 dpi The higher the resolution of an image, the larger the file size of that image will be. After the image is resized to it’s final dimensions, make sure the resolution is 300 dpi. When a graphic/image is scanned, it is scanned in RGB mode.  If an image is going to be printed, the color mode should be changed to CMYK mode. This is because RGB is representative of the colors found in light and CMYK is representative of printer inks or toners. Graphics/Images for Web or Screen Display The resolution of images that are only intended to be viewed on the web or computer monitor only, such as in a PowerPoint presentation, are different than those images that are printed. The recommended scanning resolution for images for the Internet is still 300 dpi. The image size can then be adjusted to appropriate viewing dimensions in PhotoShop. Images that are intended to be viewed only on a monitor should remain in RGB color mode. This is the default mode when scanning; no settings need to be changed.
Import
  • Moving Your HillConnect Mail to Another Account Import This document describes how to move your HillConnect mail into another account.  Detailed instructions are provided for moving it into a commercial Gmail account.  Moving your Hamilton mail to a Commercial Gmail Account These instructions assume you have already established an account with Google (gmail.com). Click on the gear icon in the upper right corner of your screen next to your e-mail address.   From the menu that appears, select Mail Settings.        In the Settings screen, click on the link labeled Forwarding and POP/IMAP.  Even though your settings may already indicate that “POP is enabled for all mail….”, go ahead and click in the dot next to “Enable POP for all mail (even mail that’s already been downloaded”.  Then click on the Save Changes button at the bottom of the Settings page. Log in to your commercial Gmail account (http://gmail.google.com).  NOTE: If you have not previously configured your Hamilton account to allow multiple account logins, you will have to log out of your Hamilton account before logging in to your commercial (.com) Gmail account. Once you are in your commercial account, click on the gear icon and select Mail Settings. Click on the link labeled Accounts and Import and then click on the link on that page labeled Import mail and contacts (see below). Enter your HillConnect account address (e.g. dquayle@hamilton.edu) and click on Continue. Enter your HillConnect password and click on Continue. In the next screen enter your password again as prompted. For the next 6 steps, please refer to the image below: Change the POP user name to include @hamilton.edu (e.g. dquayle2@hamilton.edu) Change the SMTP server to pop.gmail.com Click on the link to the right of "Port: 110" labeled Edit Click in the box to select “Use SSL” Change the port to 995 Click on Continue In the next screen select the following check boxes: Import Mail  Optional: Select to “Leave a copy of retrieved messages on the server”. NOTE:  In some cases, checking this option will prevent the transfer from beginning. If that occurs, uncheck it and try again. Add a label to all imported mail [dquayle2@hamilton.edu] This will allow you to easily identify the mail that was imported from your Hamilton account. 18. Click on Start Import. 19. You should see a confirmation page that informs you the import has begun. Click on OK.  NOTE:  The transfer of your mail can take DAYS.  Google gives it a very low priority but it does take place.  You can check on the progress by doing a search in your Gmail.com account for all mail labeled userID@hamilton.edu (substitute your real user ID where “userID” appears”).  If the number of messages found with that label in your Gmail.com account matches the number of messages in your “all mail” label (folder) in your HillConnect account, then it is done!! When the transfer has finished you should do the following: Log in to your Hamilton HillConnect account and set it up to forward your mail to your Gmail.com account.  You can do this by going to the gear icon and again select Mail Settings.  Click on Forwarding & POP/IMAP, fill in the address for your Gmail.com account and click Save Changes. Next, log in to your Gmail.com account.  Click on the gear icon, select Mail Settings and then select Accounts and Import. In the middle of the section, where it is labeled Check mail using POP3, you’ll see a link labeled “delete” to the far right.  Click on the “delete” link.  Doing so will break the tie between your two accounts.  From here on, new mail addressed to your Hamilton account will automatically arrive in your gmail.com account.      
Install
  • Installing AVG Anti-virus Install Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7 Downloading Free AVG Open a web browser. In the address field type in free.avg.com. When the window loads under the Free basic protection windows on the web page click on Get it now! On the next web page that loads scroll down and in the column AVG Anti-virus Free click on Download. On the next web page that loads click on Download Now. On the next web page that loads click on Download Now. This should initiate the downloading of the AVG installation file. Click Save File.   Installing Free AVG Double click on the downloaded file to install AVG. Click on Run. Click Next. In the Acceptance Notice window click Accept. In the license agreement window click Accept. Install the Standard Installation by clicking Next. Click Next. Click Next. Click Finish.   AVG First Run Wizard When the First Run Wizard window opens click Next. Configure when you would like AVG to scan your computer. Click Next. Click Next. Make sure the box is unchecked for Yes, change my default search engine to Yahoo! and click Next. Click Next to update AVG. Click Next. Click Next. Click Finish.
  • Installing Mozilla Firefox on Windows and Macintosh Computers Install For Personal Windows & Macintosh Computers Click on the link below and follow their instructions for installing Mozilla Firefox on your operating system: http://support.mozilla.com/en-US/kb/Installing Firefox?s=installation&r=0&as= For Hamilton-Owned Macintosh Computers Download the latest version of Firefox from Mozilla's website here.  Choose to Save the file. Go to your Macintosh HD, open the Applications folder, and navigate to Firefox. NOTE: For Macintosh 10.7 (Lion) users, hold CTRL and cllick on the Firefox icon on your dock, choose Options, and select Show in Finder. Move the old version of Firefox to the Trash icon on the dock. Navigate to the file location for the new version of Firefox you just downloaded and double-click it. In the window that appears like the one below, drag the Firefox icon to the Applications folder icon. Follow the instructions. If prompted, enter your Hamilton network credentials. Once the installation is complete, open Firefox.  The message below will only appear the first time you open Firefox after it has been downloaded. Click Open. You have successfully installed the latest version of Mozilla Firefox and can now browse the internet with more security. For Hamilton-Owned Windows Computers NOTE: By default, Mozilla Firefox is set to automatically install the latest updates. If you prefer to install the latest updates yourself and check what version you are using, you can follow the steps below. Open Firefox. Go to the Help menu and select About Firefox. Firefox will now check for updates. You can view its progress by reading the light grey text located below your Firefox version. NOTE: Depending on how you have Firefox setup to install updates, you may see a Check for Updates button. Click that to begin checking your browser for updates.     If any updates need to be installed, click Apply Update and follow the directions on the screen to complete the installation process.
  • Installing Sophos Anti-Virus on Mac OS 10.4-10.8 for Employees Install For Off Campus Use Removal of old Sophos (if necessary) NOTE: If you already have Sophos on your computer go through the removal steps otherwise go to the section Downloading and Installing Sophos 1. At Finder click on your hard drive icon. 2. Open the folder Library. 3. Open the folder Application Support. 4. Open the folder Sophos Anti-virus. 5. Launch the Remove Sophos Anti-virus. 6. Once Sophos is removed from the computer you can install the new version of Sophos. Downloading and Installing Sophos 1. Launch Firefox. NOTE: Safari will not work to download Sophos. 2. Please replace userid with your hamilton user name as you type in the Address line ftp://hamilton-d\userid@software.hamilton.edu/sophos 3. In the dialog box that appears type in your Hamilton Network password. 4. Click OK. 5. Click on the folder link Sophos Mac OS 10.2 & above. 6. Click on the link ESCOSX.zip to download the Sophos installer on your computer. 7. In the dialog box that appears, choose the bullet in front of Save File. 8. Click OK. 9. Locate the ESCOSX.zip that you downloaded. 10. Double click on the ESCOSX.zip to unpack the file folder.   Installing Sophos 1. Close all other applications. 2. Open the folder ESCOSX file folder on the desktop. 3. Double-click on the file Sophos Anti-Virus.mpkg. a. If the installer launches an Authenticate window, enter your username and password. This will be the username and password you use to log onto the computer when it boots up. After typing them in click OK. 4. Click Continue in window This package contains a program that …  5. The Welcome to the Sophos Anti-Virus Installer screen appears. Click Continue. 6. The Important Information screen appears. Click Continue. 7. The Select a Destination screen appears. Select your computer’s hard drive. Click Continue. 8. The Standard Install screen appears. Click Install. a. If the installer launches an Authenticate window, enter your username and password. This will be the username and password you use to log onto the computer. 9. When the progress bar is complete, you will see a message indicating Install Succeeded. Click Close.   Configuring Sophos 1. Click on the Sophos Shield    located by the Time & Date in the top right corner on the menu bar. 2. Select Open Sophos Anti-virus Preferences. 3. Click on the Lock button labeled Click lock to make changes in the lower left hand corner. 4. An Authenticate window appears. Enter your username and password. This will be the username and password you use to log onto the computer when it boots up. After typing them in click OK. 5. Click on the AutoUpdate tab (see figure below.) 6. On the Update from primary location select Company web server. 7. In the URL: field http://sophosupdate.hamilton.edu/cids/s000/escosx 8. In the User name: field, using your network username in place of “userid,” enter Hamilton-d\userid if you are an employee. For example, if you were a employee named Ulysses Grant, you would type hamilton-d\ugrant in the User name field. 9. In the Password: field, enter your Hamilton Network Password.  This is the password you use to access the ESS or SSS server. 10. Place a check in the box labeled Check for updates on connection  to network or internet. 11. Quit System Preferences by selecting System Preferences (from the main menu bar), and then Quit System Preferences.     What to Expect When You’re Finished 1. After your installation is complete, Sophos will scan for viruses in the background and will automatically remove any that are found. 2. Sophos will update every day automatically via the Internet. Remember that if your computer is not connecting to the Internet Sophos Anti-Virus will not be able to receive up dates, and your virus-protection will be ineffective. 3. We recommend that you repair disk permissions on your computer after the installation is finished, as outlined below. Repairing Disk Permissions 1. In your hard drive, open your Applications folder and then open the Utilities folder. 2. Open Disk Utility. 3. Click on the name of your hard drive in the left section of the window. Under the First Aid tab, click on Repair Disk Permissions. 4. You’ll see a progress bar near the bottom of the window showing the status of the repair. You’ll also see text appear in the blank section of the window as permissions are repaired. Be patient as this process can take several minutes. 5. When finished, you’ll be notified that the Permissions repair is complete. 6. Quit Disk Utility.    
  • Installing Sophos Anti-Virus on Windows for Employees Only Install For Off-Campus Use NOTE: If you are using wireless as your connection to install Sophos the installation will fail. Please connect your computer to a wired connection to install Sophos. NOTE: If you have other anti-virus software installed on your computer or an older version of Sophos, you must uninstall it before proceeding with these instructions. Depending on your operating system: Windows XP: Go to the Control Panel and select Add or Remove programs, locate your anti-virus software in the list and click on the Change/Remove button. Windows Vista/7: Go to Control Panel and select Programs, locate your anti-virus software in the list and click on the Uninstall button. Downloading Sophos Connect to the Internet using your ISP (Internet Service Provider) and then launch Windows Explorer. Go to the Start menu, select All Programs, then Accessories, and then Windows Explorer (this is not the same as Internet Explorer 7). In Windows Explorer’s address line type ftp://software.hamilton.edu For User Name type in HAMILTON-D\USERNAME. Your username is your network ID name. Enter your Hamilton network password in the Password box. Click Log On. If you receive the following alert, click Unblock.             Open the Sophos folder, and then open the interchk folder. Drag the file savw_95_sa_sfx.exe to the desktop of your computer.   Close Windows Explorer. Installing Sophos To install Sophos on your computer see the steps for the operating system you are running. Windaws XP - double click on savw_95_sa_sfx.exe then click Run. Windows Vista/7 – Right click on savw_95_sa_sfx.exe and Run as Administrator. When the installation wizard appears, click Install. Click Next. Agree to the License agreement and click Next. Click Next to create the folder. To configure Sophos automatic updating please type in the following: In the Address type in http://sophosupdate.hamilton.edu/per/cids/s000/savscfxp In Username type in hamilton-d\username. Your username is your network ID name. In Password type in your hamilton network password. Confirm password type in your hamilton network password. Click Next. Uncheck the box next to Remove third-party security software and click Next. Click Next. Click Next. Click Finish to complete the installation.
  • Installing the Citrix Client on your Computer Install Installing Citrix Client These instructions only pertain to your personal computer.  If you are on a public lab, or Hamilton-issued computer, the Citrix Client has been preinstalled. This process need be followed only once for any single computer in any academic year. If it has been some time since you last installed the Citrix client on your computer, you may want to update the client for the best performance. The steps for installation are: • On a Windows system: o Log into the Citrixweb page. • A page will appear that prompts you to download the client. Place a check in the check box and click Download. The file will request to be saved to your computer. Please save it to your Desktop. • Double-click on the installer when it when it has downloaded. • Once the installation has completed, click the Continue button on the web page. • Proceed to Launching Citrix Programs. • If this does not seem to be the case for you, follow the directions for updating below. • On a Macintosh system: o After logging in, you will be taken to a screen that will prompt you to download the plugin. o Click Download to download the plugin. o The Citrix Plug-in DMG file will download to your Desktop or Downloads folder. Find the file and double-click on it. o A window will open containing the plug-in installation file—double-click it to launch the installer. o Install the app by clicking Continue and Agree until you see a window that indicates the software has been installed successfully. o Once the installation has completed, click the Continue button on the web page. o Proceed to Launching Citrix Programs. o If this does not seem to be the case for you, follow the directions for updating below. • Updating your Citrix client, any system o Log into the Citrixweb page. o Near the top of the applications page, you will see a horizontal bar with some menu choices in it. The “Applications” menu will probably be dark blue, indicating that the “Applications” screen is what you are seeing. o Click on the “Preferences” menu and select “Connection Preferences”. o Under “Client settings”, click on “Run Client Detection”. • If you are immediately returned to the “Applications” screen, you should see an information message under the menu bar and above the applications list that says “The preferred client is already available on your computer.” • You’re done, there is no update or installation necessary. o If you don’t have the most current version of the client, you will be taken to a screen that allows you to download the client. • Follow the directions on that page to download the client. • If you receive a warning about the file having been downloaded from the internet, click “Save file” or “Open”, according to the screen you see. • Double click the saved file to run. • If asked if you want to allow the program to make changes to your computer, click “Yes”. o You should now be able to return to the Citrixweb Application page, and select the software you wish to use.  
  • Microsoft Office 2010 Work at Home License for Windows Install License Terms and Conditions Hamilton College subscribes to the Microsoft Campus Agreement volume licensing program for the Microsoft Office applications used on campus (Word, Excel, and PowerPoint). This agreement includes “Work at Home” rights for Office according to the following terms and conditions: Faculty and staff who are licensed to use the particular product at school, have the right to run one copy of that product on a home PC that they own or lease for school-related purposes only. (Microsoft Campus and School v.3.2b, 2004). Your DVD is good for two installations: the original installation on your home machine and a reinstall if necessary. Please do not use this DVD to install Microsoft Office on your college-owned computer. NOTE:  If you received three discs in your “at home” CD/DVD pack, please use the DVD labeled Microsoft Office Professional Plus 2010 (Product Key Required).  The other two discs are for installing Microsoft Lync 2010 and Microsoft Business Contact Manager 2010. Recommended System Requirements Processor                               500 megahertz (MHz) processor or higher Operating System                Windows XP (with SP3), Vista (with SP1) or 7 Memory                                 512 MB RAM Disk Space                            Minimum 3.5 GB of hard-disk space required Disk Drive                             DVD drive Note: Office 2010 does not run on the Microsoft Windows Me, Windows 98, Windows 2000, or Windows NT operating systems. Product Key On the back of the DVD sleeve you will find a 25 character alphanumeric code called a product key, similar to the one shown below.  Keep this product key in a safe place, it is a unique code needed to install Office and to verify your license with Microsoft. Uninstall Old Versions of Office Before installing Office 2010, you must uninstall any older versions of Microsoft Office currently installed on your computer. If you do not have an older version of Office on your computer, skip ahead to the Install Office 2010 section. If you do have an older version of Office on your computer, uninstall it as follows: Go to the Start button (lower left corner of your screen) and open the Control Panel. Windows XP: Open Add or Remove Programs Windows Vista/7: Open Programs and Features After the list of programs populates, scroll down and click on “Microsoft Office Professional***” Click Remove or Uninstall. Follow the on-screen prompts to remove Office. Reboot after Office is finished uninstalling. Install Office 2010 We recommend a custom installation to provide the necessary tools, templates, and text converters you are accustomed to using on your college-owned computer. Insert the MS Office DVD.  If “autoplay” is enabled on your system, the installation process will start automatically. In Windows Vista/7, you may be prompted to allow the Microsoft Setup Bootstrapper to make changes to the computer – click Yes. If the DVD does not autoplay, browse to the DVD drive (from My Computer (XP) or Computer (Vista/7)) and manually run setup.exe by double clicking on it. Enter the Product Key (found on the back of the DVD sleeve) in the space provided to the left of the Continue button.  Make sure that Attempt to automatically activate my product online is checked and then click Continue. On the next screen, check the box labeled I accept the terms of this agreement, then click Continue. On the Choose Installation screen, click on the Customize button. Click the down arrow icon next to Microsoft Office at the top of the tree and select Run all from My Computer.  This will select all components. After selecting all components, you can then go down through the list and remove any individual components that you do not use.  Consult the table below for information on each of the available components in Office 2010. Office 2010 Component Description Recommended Microsoft Access Database No Microsoft Excel Spreadsheet Yes Microsoft InfoPath Electronic Forms User Choice Microsoft OneNote Free-form Data Organizer User Choice Microsoft Outlook Email Client User Choice Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation Yes Microsoft Publisher Desktop Publishing User Choice Microsoft SharePoint Workspace Document Collaboration No Microsoft Visio Viewer Diagram software (viewer only) User Choice Microsoft Word Word Processor Yes Office Shared Features Features shared by multiple components Yes Office Tools Features shared by multiple components Yes     Click on the down arrow icon next to each component that you do not wish to install and select Not Available.  Once you have finished customizing your selections, click the Install Now button to begin the installation. After the installation has completed, click Close. You will be prompted to configure updates for Microsoft Office the first time you open one of the Office programs.  We advise selecting the “Recommended Settings” option.
Internet
  • Comparison of Browser Interfaces Internet   Browsing       Browser History Accessing Browser History       Browser History Interface   Bookmarks Adding a Bookmark     Accessing Bookmarks   Trust Certificates      
IrisLink ReadIris Pro
  • Scanning Text with ReadIris and Converting to a Word Document IrisLink ReadIris Pro Using Readiris Pro 11 Getting Started In order to use Readiris Pro to convert your text into a Word document, you have to scan your text onto the computer. Readiris Pro suggests you scan your image at 200 dpi and set to grayscale, for the best results scan black text with a white background. Make sure to save your file. For instruction scanning see documentation: Scanning with SilverFast Ai. Note: Make sure your document is saved as a Tiff file or a Pdf, if you do not Readiris will not be able to convert to a word document. Launching Readiris Pro Once your file is saved, launch Readiris Pro by opening your applications folder located on the dock at the bottom of the screen and selecting the Readiris Pro folder. This will open a separate window; from this window double click on Readiris Pro to launch the program. Opening a File Once Readiris Pro has launched you will notice a blank area in the middle of the interface, this is where your file will be displayed. To the left of the interface in a panel is the Open button; next to the Open button should be a Text button with a chevron, make sure it is set to text. Select the Open button and a window opens that allows you to find your file. Select your file and then press the Open button. Your file will now be displayed in the center of the Readiris Pro interface. Once Readiris Pro has imported your file into the program, the file should be visible in the middle of the interface. The text in your file should have a blue box surrounding it. This means that Readiris Pro is able to recognize the text. If your file does not display this you should attempt to re-scan your file, making sure to use the scanning settings recommended by Readiris Pro.   Converting Your Document On the left hand side of the interface is a panel containing a Recognize button; select this button. Once the Recognize button has been selected it will open a window. This window displays that the file is being saved as an .rtf; choose a location for the file to be saved to.     Your .rtf file will open by default in the TextEdit. If you do not see your text displayed, Readiris Pro was unable to recognize and covert your text. If your text is displayed select File from the TextEdit toolbar and then select Save As. Select File Format and change it to a Word document.
Labs
  • Multimedia Presentation Center Labs What is the MPC The Multimedia Presentation Center (MPC) is a state-of-the-art computing facility equipped with cutting-edge hardware and software, as well as a full range of support services, specifically designed for authoring multimedia-enhanced presentations. The Multimedia Presentation Center, located on the ground floor of Burke Library, has 21 quad core iMacs running Mac OS X Lion. The Macintosh workstations are set up as multimedia editing workstations, and can be used to produce a variety of digital content, as well as standard word processing. Color laser printing is available for academic purposes only. MPC Location and Hours of Operation The MPC is located on the first floor of the Burke Library and follows the same hours of operation, available here.  An Overview of MPC Services The MPC is equipped to support a wide variety of multimedia-enhanced presentation formats including: Large format, photo-quality printing Medium format color laser printing Web content with audio, video and animation PowerPoint with audio and video Mini DV, CD and DVD Please direct any questions or inquiries about large format posters to the MPC professional staff. mpc@hamilton.edu, x4888. To request a large format poster appointment, click here.
Laptop Loaner
  • Policies - College Computer Equipment Laptop Loaner Replacement of College Computer Equipment Most college computer equipment is replaced every four to five years (see exceptions below). The Goals of the replacement plan are to: assure that appropriate computing resources are available in public and departmental computing facilities, classrooms, and college offices to support the mission of the institution; assure that each faculty and staff member who uses computing resources in his or her position has a computer of sufficient capability to fulfill his/her responsibilities; implement minimum standards for computing equipment on campus; • encourage planning, cost-effective installation of new equipment and disposal of old equipment. Computer equipment is generally replaced during the late spring and summer months (May 1 - August 15). Replacement schedules are distributed annually to departments in early November for review and consultation with ITS staff. Hardware configurations for new equipment are prepared in March and individuals with equipment scheduled for replacement are notified of those details. Generally, individuals will have one college computer provided for them on the replacement plan. By the nature of their responsibilities, some individuals may need to have more than one computer to accomplish their responsibilities - for example, if they must use both Macintosh and Windows platforms in their work. In these cases, department heads/supervisors may request from the appropriate officer of the college (e.g., for faculty, the Dean of the Faculty) that an exception be made. Computers are essential tools for faculty, even when they are on sabbatical leave. For this reason the college permits faculty on leave to continue to use their computer during that period. Computers will be provided to faculty replacements from a pool of computers designated for this purpose. Computers are not to be purchased from departmental operating budgets. Only special funds designated for computer replacement or equipment purchases may be used for this purpose. The officers of the college approve such funds. Certain departments or individuals obtain grants or have special budget allocations for computing equipment. Computers purchased with these grants or budget allocations will not be on the replacement plan unless approval is obtained from the officers at the time the grant is received or the budget is allocated. Loaner Equipment Hamilton College employees can borrow laptop computers for up to seven consecutive days for uses related to college business. Both Macintosh and Windows laptops are available. These computers are enabled for wireless and high-speed internet access. Reservations are required, and should be made at least two business days in advance. For more information, or to make a reservation, call 4LLP (4557), or e-mail: laptop@hamilton.edu Departmental Equipment All college computers are maintained in a central inventory. At the time a computer enters the inventory the replacement cycle, if any, is designated. Computers that are an integral part of a piece of scientific equipment, or are used primarily for research purposes, are not generally part of the replacement plan. Replacement of such equipment is by a special request to the Dean of the Faculty. Old equipment is sold for residual values through Hamilton's official salvage process and must be returned to ITS.  Grant-Funded Equipment Individuals pursuing grants for computing equipment should discuss their plans with the Director, Desktop Integration Services as part of the budgeting process. Computing equipment that is acquired under grants will enter the inventory and be upgraded on a regular replacement cycle only if approved at the time of the application for the grant. Faculty members teaching in various special curricular programs are, under certain conditions, awarded research, or startup, funds. Some faculty members also have research funds available to them when they hold endowed chair positions. These funds may be used to buy additional computers and printers for office or home use, but the equipment will belong to the college. Such equipment should be ordered through the College purchasing process and will not normally be upgraded or replaced by the college, except through further use of research funds. If this equipment is to be on the computer replacement plan the faculty member must obtain a commitment, in writing, from the Dean and the Vice-President for Administration and Finance indicating this. Otherwise, the equipment will not be on a replacement cycle. Printers and Other Peripheral Equipment The college provides networked printing locations for workgroup clusters in every department. Individual desktop printers are not normally provided. Other peripheral pieces of equipment such as scanners are also generally provided in clustered locations instead of individual offices. Since these pieces of equipment are usually used intermittently, clustering allows sharing of specialized technical resources. Responsibility for Equipment Each employee is responsible for taking reasonable safety precautions in regard to Hamilton-owned computer equipment. Employees will be held responsible for damage to such equipment arising out of their negligence or intentional misconduct. Upgrades and Renewal For computer equipment on the replacement plan, ITS staff members consult with users prior to ordering and installing new equipment to determine the current and anticipated equipment needs. Computers that are replaced are returned to ITS. ITS then reassigns the computers or sells them through the campus salvage process. Hamilton will not upgrade non-Hamilton computers.   For questions about these Policies, Procedures, Plans and Standards, contact: David Smallen, Vice President for Information Technology 315-859-4169
Large Format Printing (LFP)
  • Large Format Poster PDF Instructions for Office 2007 Large Format Printing (LFP) Office 2007 PowerPoint Large Format Poster PDF Instructions (Windows only)   Instructions 1. Open your PowerPoint file (.pptx) 2. Click on “Office Logo” 3. Select “Save As” from drop down menu, 4. Select “PDF” from side menu 5. Select where you want to save the file, Click on “Publish” button
  • Setting up an 11x17 Poster Using Microsoft Powerpoint Large Format Printing (LFP) Using Microsoft PowerPoint (images from Microsoft Office 2004 running on Mac OS X) 1.  Launch Microsoft PowerPoint and choose New Presentation from the File menu. 2.  Decide if your poster will use Landscape orientation (wider than tall) or Portrait orientation (taller than wide) and then choose Page Setup… from the File menu. Landscape Orientation: In the Size section enter 16 for the width and 10 for the height.  This will format your poster for 17” wide x 11” high paper size. Portrait Orientation: In the Size section enter 10 for the width and 16 for the height.  This will format your poster for 11” wide x 17” high paper size. Portrait Orientation Landscape Orientaion   3. IMPORTANT! Press OK in the Page Setup dialog box. A dialog box will appear alerting you that the current page size exceeds the printable area of the paper.  Make sure and choose OK, and NOT the default choice of Fix. Choosing Fix will cause your poster to be sized for 8.5 x 11 paper and not for the large format paper.  4.  You may now begin authoring your poster.
Listserv
  • A Few Things to Know About the HillConnect Environment Listserv Return to HillConnect Homepage Getting help Google continuously updates its core e-mail and calendar programs so that new features are brought to you as soon as they become available.  Consequently, if you see something new that is unclear, your best bet is to take advantage of the online help built in to HillMail and HillCal. How do I access the HillConnect environment directly? To log in directly to your HillMail account, please go to:   http://hillconnect.hamilton.edu   What is the "Migrated" label/folder? If you had an active e-mail account at Hamilton prior to May 2010 and your account was transitioned to HillConnect, a label/folder with the name "Migrated" was created during the transition process. It's important to know that what the old mail server referred to as a" folder" is now referred to as a "label" in the new system. A fundamental difference between the two storage methods is that with the new Google system multiple labels can be assigned to message where previously in the old SUN system a single message could be assigned to only one folder. Therefore you can delete the label/folder named "Migrated" and not delete the associated messages. I no longer receive a copy of any messages I send to Hamilton Listserv's what do I need to do? Google will not deliver mail to you that you send to a Listserv list.   So that you can tell whether your message was processed, your subscription settings are automatically set so that you will receive an acknowledgment e-mail message from Listserv when your message is delivered to a list. If you still wish to see a copy of your message in your INBOX, you can add your e-mail address to the CC (carbon copy) line when you address your message to the list.  Note that the CC line is processed independently from the TO line.  Therefore, receipt of the message in your INBOX is not confirmation that your message was distributed to the list.  Only the acknowledgement message noted above  can be considered confirmation that your message was distributed. How Can I Change Label Colors? The default color assigned to a label is so light it is almost invisible. To change the color, click the square to the right of the label (folder name) and select a color from the palette that appears.   Our office/organization shares an account, how many connections can we have to our HillMail account through a client? You are limited to ten simultaneous logins via a client, i.e. if you share an account and use Thunderbird/Outlook/AppleMail.  You are not limited by the number of web logins.  
  • Becoming a Listserv List Owner Listserv Listserv Becoming a ListServ List Owner What is the time commitment involved in owning a list? What skills will I need? How do I become a list owner? Request a new list What is the time commitment involved in owning a list? Depending on the type of mailing list you want to create, your involvement in managing the list will either be minimal or considerable. A list used strictly for the distribution of information from you to the list's subscribers requires very little management. A moderated mailing list requires you to read and approve each mailing that is sent to the list. If your moderated list is very active, your time investment could be considerable. What skills will I need? Lists can be managed either through the Web or through e-mail. Therefore, if you are comfortable with both, you have the necessary software skills with which to start.  Most new list owners prefer to use the Web interface to manage their list. The primary responsibility of each list owner is to subscribe users to their list or inform users how to subscribe themself.  In addition, the list owner may perform other maintenance tasks like removing subscriptions, correcting subscriber names or changing how the list functions.  None of these operations is very complex and can be accomplished easily through the Web.  The list owner, by default, will receive error notices when mail that is sent to the list fails.  The most common error notice is one that lists the subscriber(s) whose address(es) cannot be reached.  The ITS Help Desk can help you interpret error messages. How do I become a list owner? The first step is to decide on a list name and identify its purpose. It is recommended you keep your list name short yet descriptive (about 8 - 10 characters). As an option you can add "-L" to the name in order to differentiate it from an e-mail account that bears a similar name.  However, it is acceptable to use the same name for the e-mail account and the Listserv list. Next you'll need to decide how you want the list to function. For example, will the list be used for two way discussions or will it be used strictly to distribute announcements? As you complete the request form (see link below) you will be asked to choose between 3 types of lists. Samples of each type are available during the request process.  If none of the samples fit your needs, you may start with one of them and modify it as necessary. Contact Debby Quayle at 859-4031 to further discuss your options. When the request is submitted, an auto-reply is sent to you that confirms receipt of the request.  Once the list shell has been created, you will receive a follow-up e-mail from Debby Quayle.  Only then is it ready for subscribers. Documentation to assist you in the management of your list and its subscribers can be found on the Listserv home page. Request a new list Request a new list Return to Listserv Page Return to Main ITS Page
  • HillConnect Resources Listserv Hamilton's e-mail system is HillConnect, powered by Google. The information provided below is designed to address some of the more common questions related to using your e-mail account at Hamilton College.  If you have specific questions regarding the functionality or your account (e.g. how to create "groups"), please try using the Help feature  built-in to your HillConnect account (click on the "gear" icon in the upper right corner of your HillConnect e-mail screen).  If you find that to be insufficient, please contact the ITS Help Desk at 315-859-4181. Topics Covered Requesting an e-mail account Activating your HillConnect account Accessing your e-mail via the Web Using your HillConnect account About the HillConnect environment Changing your existing password Forgotten password Accessing your e-mail via an e-mail client application Configuring your mobile device Mass mailing lists (ListServ) Graduate E-mail Account FAQ Requesting an e-mail account New Student Accounts: ITS automatically creates e-mail accounts for students when they are admitted.  Consequently, there should never be a need for a student to request an e-mail account for their own personal use. New Employee Accounts: ITS automatically creates e-mail accounts for employees when we receive official notification from Human Resources.  New faculty accounts are created when we receive official notification from the Dean of Faculty office. Temporary Employee Accounts:  To request a temporary employee account, please complete the form found at: https://my.hamilton.edu/survey-manager/survey?id=1304.  Please notify ITS as far in advance as possible when requesting an account as there are several processes that must take place to ensure your temp has access to all the resources he/she will need. Departmental Accounts: Accounts for departmental use can be requested by contacting Debby Quayle at x4031 or by e-mail at dquayle@hamilton.edu. Organizational Accounts: Student organizations can request accounts when they register on the Student Activities web site.  If the organization elects not to register, they must have an employee/faculty sponsor. Back to top Activating Your HillConnect Account Your Hamilton e-mail account must be activated before it can be used. Instrucstions can be found at: https://my.hamilton.edu/youraccount Back to top Accessing your e-mail via the web Regardless of whether you are off campus or on campus you can check your e-mail from any computer as long as it has access to the Internet (World Wide Web). Once you are connected to the Internet, point your browser (Internet Explorer, Safari, Firefox, etc.) to http://hillconnect.hamilton.edu. You can also access your e-mail via the e-mail channel in My Hamilton at http://my.hamilton.edu. Back to top Using Your HillConnect Account About the HillConnect Environment Mac/Windows Understanding conversations Google Apps Overview Video How to set up forwarding in HillConnect From Google How to Configure Filters From Lynda.com To view these videos, please email learnit@hamilton.edu for an account Gmail Essentials Video Calendar Essentials Video Changing your existing password There are two ways to change your password. The Change Password Form allows you to enter a new e-mail password that will also become your new network password.  The Synchronize Password link will use your existing network password and will make your e-mail password match it. Change Password Form: Changes your e-mail password and your ESS/SSS at the same time. Synchronize Password Form: Changing your HillConnect Password to Match Your ESS/SSS Password.  Forgotten Password Current students and employees need to contact the ITS Help Desk at 315-859-4181 or e-mail us at helpdesk@hamilton.edu for assistance.  Instructions for other members of the Hamilton Community. Back to top Accessing your e-mail via an e-mail software application You can access your Hamilton e-mail account using e-mail client software that supports the IMAP mail protocol. ITS supports the use of Mozilla Thunderbird and provides comprehensive documentation for configuring and using Thunderbird. College-owned computers for employees have Thunderbird installed and configured for the computer's user. If you want to install and configure Thunderbird on your personal computer to access your e-mail please contact the ITS Help Desk. Thunderbird Installing & Configuring for HillConnect E-mail Outlook How to Configure Microsoft Outlook 2010 Apple Mail How to Configure Apple Mail Windows Mail How to Configure Windows Mail Others If you are comfortable using another e-mail program without support from ITS, you can use the generic settings below as a guide for setting up one of these e-mail clients. If you need further assistance, use the Help feature in the program or refer to the support webster for the respective software company. Settings for any client Configuring Your Mobile Devices Configuring my mobile device for mail, calendar, and contacts Back to top Mass mailing lists (ListServ) The Hamilton ListServ system allows you to quickly send an e-mail to a group of individuals, such as a club or organization, the entire campus community, or certain class year of students. The ListServ groups for the entire campus, all students, all faculty, all employees, or a particular class year are mass mailing lists which are subject to certain policies. For more information on mass mailing policies and how to use ListServ, see the information on our ListServ web page: ListServ Mailing List Info Back to top
  • How to Change Your ListServ Password Listserv How to Create or Change a Listserv Password To make changes to your own list subscription settings or to make changes to a list you own, you must first have a Listserv password.  The instructions that follow, explain how to do this via e-mail and via the web. Using E-mail Creating a Listserv password via e-mail (when you have never had one before) Address a new e-mail message to listserv@listserv.hamilton.edu Leave the subject line blank. In the first line of the message type:  PW ADD newpassword (Replace newpassword at left with your desired password.  There is no limit to the number of characters you use.) If you use an automatic "signature" in your e-mail software, it must be disabled before you send your password request. If you do not know what the signature feature is, you are likely not using it. Send your message. Changing an existing Listserv password via e-mail  (whether known or forgotten) Address a new e-mail message to listserv@listserv.hamilton.edu Leave the subject line blank. In the body of the message type the command that applies to  your situation. If you know your current password and you want to change it, you should type  the following into the first line of the message: pw change newpassword pw=oldpassword (replace newpassword with your desired new password and replace oldpassword with the password you are replacing.) If you have forgotten your current password, you should type  the following into the first line of the message: pw change newpassword   (replace newpassword with your desired new password.) You will receive a confirmation message from Listserv as illustrated below.  Click on the blue web link to confirm your password change. If you use an automatic "signature" in your e-mail software, it must be disabled before you send your subscription request. If you do not know what the signature feature is, you are likely not using it. Send your message. Using the Web Creating a Listserv password via the web (when you have never had one before or you have forgotten your password) Go to http://listserv.hamilton.edu and click Get a new LISTSERV password. In the window that opens (shown below) enter your full e-mail address (including @hamilton.edu) and the password you want to use.  Then click Register Password.  Once your password registration has been accepted, you will receive a confirmation e-mail (similar to the one shown above in the previous section in step 3. b. ii.  You must click on the link it includes before your password will take effect. Changing an existing Listserv password via the web (whether known or forgotten) Go to http://listserv.hamilton.edu and click Get a new LISTSERV password. There are two options for changing your password, depending on whether you remember your current password. If you remember your current password, click on the Change Password button as shown and fill in the required fields in the window that opens.  Once you have submitted your change, you can log in with the new password. If you no longer remember your password, refer to the instructions in the previous section (above) for creating a new password. Return to Listserv Page Return to Main ITS Page
  • How to Send Mail to One of the Mass E-mail Lists Listserv Listserv How to send a message to one of the mass e-mail lists: Determine which list is the most appropriate audience for your announcement (see E-mail Policy link below) and then address your message to the list you have chosen (e.g. events-all@listserv.hamilton.edu). A list of mass mail lists and who they reach is found on the E-mail Policy web page   Add a subject line that is informative but brief (e.g. Spanish Club Meeting Tonight). In the body of your message, type your announcement following the mass mail guidelines. You are required to sign your message with your complete name (or the full name of your organization), and (if applicable) the department you are representing. It is not sufficient to assume your return address will identify you. After you send your message you will receive a confirmation e-mail request from the Hamilton College LISTSERV Server. Carefully review the content of your message in the confirmation request.  It will often be represented both as plain text and as you intended it (with colors and font changes).  This is your chance to catch any errors and omissions.  If any are found, DO NOT approve the confirmation request message.  Simply correct the error in your original message and re-send it to the same list.  When the second confirmation request arrives, you should review it and, if appropriate, approve that version.   To confirm the message, click on the web link that appears toward the top of the confirmation request message.  This will open a web page on which text will appear stating your message was successfully confirmed. NOTE:  Occasionally the confirmation request message is slightly delayed (10-15 minutes maximum).  If you get impatient and re-send your message  too soon, you may receive two confirmation requests.  Only reply to the first! Otherwise, you will send your message twice and use up your "two message" quota for that event. To send the same message to multiple lists at once, you may string them together on the "TO:" line of your message. For example: notices-faculty@listserv.hamilton.edu,notices-students@listserv.hamilton.edu. Please do not include a space after the comma. You will receive a separate confirmation request for each list in the "To" line and you must approve each confirmation request separately.  IMPORTANT NOTE: You should take care not to send your message to multiple lists if the lists overlap.  For example, you should not send a message to notices-all and to notices-faculty becuase members of the faculty are subscribed to both lists. If you have any questions or problems sending mail to the mass lists, please contact the ITS Help Desk at 859-4181. For questions about the mass mail guidelines, contact Debby Quayle (extension 4031 or dquayle@hamilton.edu) Return to Listserv Page Return to Main ITS Page
  • How to Set Your ListServ Subscription to Digest Mode Listserv What is Digest Mode? Listserv offers many options for managing the behavior of the lists to which you are subscribed.  One of the most popular settings is Digest Mode.  When it is activated for your subscription, Listserv collects all the messages sent to that list from that point forward for each day and sends them to you in a single message that contains a table of contents followed by the full text of each message.  (NOTE:  Extremely active lists may result in two or more digest messages.)  All of Hamilton's mass mailing lists (e.g. events-all, notices-facutly, etc.) allow you to choose Digest Mode.  The digest message for these lists is sent each day at 4:30 p.m..  Private lists (those for student organizations or departments) are sent at midnight by default.  The list owner can change the time at which the digest is sent.   For assistance, please contact Debby Quayle at 859-4031 (dquayle@hamilton.edu). Getting Started The easiest way to manage your Listserv subscription is through the Listserv web interface.   Before you can use it, however, you must have a Listserv password.  It will allow you to manage your own subscription(s) as well as manage any lists you may own.  If you already have a password, you can proceed to the steps below. Set Your Subscription to Digest Mode In your web browser (Internet Explorer, Firefox, etc.) go to http://listserv.hamilton.edu.  Log in using your full e-mail address and the password you created for yourself for Listserv. In the Listserv web site, click on Subscribers Corner in the menu across the top. The lists to which you are subscribed should appear under the red My Lists tab. Locate the list you wish to set to Digest Mode and click on the word Settings next to the list name.  This will open a page that displays your subscription settings for that list. Click to put a dot next to Digest (HTML format). Scroll to the bottom of the page and click on the Update button. Return to the Subscriber's Corner menu to do the same for other subscriptions you wish to set to Digest Mode. When you are finished, click to Log Out of Listserv (located in the upper right corner of the screen beneeth the green questionmark). Removing Digest Mode Repeat the steps 1-5 described above for setting Digest Mode. In step 6, click to put a dot next to Regular. Scroll to the bottom of the page and click on the Update button. Return to the Subscriber's Corner menu to do the same for other subscriptions you wish to set to Rgular Mode. When you are finished, click to Log Out of Listserv (located in the upper right corner of the screen beneeth the green questionmark).
  • How to Subscribe To or Unsubscribe From a Listserv List Listserv Listserv How to Subscribe to a ListServ ListAll members of the Hamilton College community are automatically subscribed to the mass mailing lists that apply to them.  For example, employees, faculty and students are subscribed to the events-all and notices-all lists and either the events/notices- emloyees or the events/notices-students lists as applicable.  In addition, employees are subscribed to the group lists to which they belong (e.g. events/notices-admin or events/notices-faculty) and students are subscribed to their class year lists (events/notices-20xx). Consequently, it is rarely necessary to manually subscribe yourself to these lists.   For a complete list of the mass mailing list addresses, please refer to the ITS Policies, Procedures Plans, and Standards page for e-mail. NOTE: You may not subscribe to a mass list if you are not a member of that group.  For example, a student may not subscribe to the faculty lists and an administrator may not subscribe to one of the student class lists.  You may request an exception by writing to Debby Quayle (dquayle@hamilton.edu). To subscribe to a special interest list (e.g. student organization list, departmental list, college initiative list, etc.), please follow the instructions below. Open a new message window in your preferred e-mail program and address your message to listserv@listserv.hamilton.edu. In the body of the message type the following on the first line:  Subscribe listname First Last  (replace listname with the name of the list to which you are subscribing. Then, replace "First Last" with your real first and last name.   For example, to subscribe to a list called "tabletennis" you might type the following:  subscribe tabletennis Mary Smith If you use an automatic "signature" in your e-mail software, it must be disabled before you send your subscription request. If you do not know what the signature feature is, you are likely not using it. Send your message. Once your subscription is successfully processed, you will receive an e-mail message that contains generic information describing how to unsubscribe from the list, how to turn mail off temporarily, and how to change to digest mode.  You may want to save this message for future reference. For most special interest lists, this is all that is required.  Some lists, however, will require you to confirm your subscription request.  If that occurs, you will receive an e-mail message from the Hamilton College LISTSERV Server with a subject line similar to the following: Command Confirmation Request (0B621502).  Open the message and click on the web link it contains.  This will open a web page in your browser (Internet Explorer or FireFox) that confirms whether your confirmation was successful. Once your subscription is successfully processed, you will receive an e-mail message that contains generic information describing how to unsubscribe from the list, how to turn mail off temporarily, and how to change to digest mode.  You may want to save this message for future reference. Return to Listserv Page Return to Main ITS Page
  • How to Temporarily Turn Mass Mail Off and On Listserv As a student or employee, you are automatically subscribed to 6 mass mail lists.  For example, if you are a student in the class of 2016 you are subscribed to:  events-all, events-students, events-2016, notices-all, notices-students and notices-2016.  Please review the grid below to determine the lists to which you are subscribed.   Events Notices Example Students All All events-all notices-all   Students Students events-students notices-students   xxxx (class year) xxxx (class year) events-2016 Employees All All events-all notices-all   Employees Employees events-employees notices-employees   admin, faculty, staff or maintop admin, faculty, staff or maintop events-admin notices-faculty How to temporarily turn OFF mass mail If you are going away, for example, and you do not want to receive mass mail during your absence, here is how you can turn off all or some your mass mail.  NOTE:  Unsubscribing from these lists will accomplish the same goal but only if you unsubscribe from all 6 lists.    If your goal is to unsubscribe from only a few of the lists (e.g. only the -all lists) you must use the method described below. Determine the lists you want to temporarily turn off. Address an e-mail message to listserv@listserv.hamilton.edu In the body of the message type something similar to the following (the content will depend on which lists you want to turn off). NOTE: each entry should be on a separate line and there should not be a space between "no" and "mail". set events-all nomail set notices-all nomail set events-students nomail set notices-students nomail If you use an automatic signature in your e-mail, you need to turn it off (or delete it) for this message.  Otherwise, your signature will generate an error message and your change will not be accepted by Listserv.  If you do not know if you use an automatic signature, you are likely not using one. Send your message How to turn mass mail back on NOTE:  If you unsubscribed from the mass mail lists, you must resubscribe to them.  The method described below will not work if you are not subscribed to the list.  Click here for instructions.  Otherwise, proceed with the instructions that follow.  Determine the lists you want to turn back on.  Address an e-mail message to listserv@listserv.hamilton.edu In the body of the message type something similar to the following (the content will depend on which lists you want to turn on). NOTE: Each entry should be on a separate line. set events-all nomail set notices-all nomail set events-students nomail set notices-students nomail If you use an automatic signature in your e-mail, you need to turn it off (or delete it) for this message.  Otherwise, your signature will generate an error message and your change will not be accepted by Listserv.  If you do not know if you use an automatic signature, you are likely not using one. Send your message  
  • Listserv Resources Listserv ListServ is a commercial software product installed on Hamilton College's E-mail system. It is designed to provide an easy way to create and maintain large or specialized E-mail mailing lists. These lists can be used for E-mail based distribution of information, discussion, questions and answers, etc. Lists are created and "owned" by an E-mail user who manages the list's behavior. Members of the list are subscribed to it either by the list owner or by following instructions provided by the list owner. All lists that are created and maintained at Hamilton College are kept private. Subscriber names and E-mail addresses are only available to the list owner. They are never published. As a list member, you are able to manage certain aspects of your subscription. As the list owner, you are able to manage a wide variety of aspects of the list's behavior. The links that follow will provide you with some basic information about both. If you have a question about ListServ that requires personal attention, please contact the ITS Help Desk at 315-859-4181 or write to helpdesk@hamilton.edu.   Mass Mailing List Guidelines Guidelines for ListServ Mass Mailing Lists Request a New ListServ List Request a New List List Owner Related Documents Becoming a ListServ List Owner Quick Start Guide for List Owners  List User (Subscriber) Related Documents How to Send Mail to One of the Mass E-mail Lists How to Subscribe or Unsubscribe to/from a ListServ List How to Change your ListServ Password How to Set Your Listserv Subscription to Digest Mode
  • Policies - Electronic Mail (E-mail) & Listserv (Mass E-mail lists) Listserv Department or Group Accounts By special permission, college departments and student groups will be granted a single account to facilitate connections between the department or group and interested parties. The department or group must identify one person to be responsible for the account and to act as the contact person. In addition, student organizations must be registered with the Office of Student Activities before an account will be granted. Appropriate Use of E-mail Hamilton strongly recommends that e-mail not be used for confidential communication. E-mail is now considered a formal written record that carries the same legal weight as a formal memorandum. Users of e-mail should remember that e-mail messages become the possession of the receiver and can be easily duplicated and redistributed by recipients. Messages that have been deleted can unintentionally be retained on system backup files. In addition, even secure passwords are not completely confidential. When a private message needs to be conveyed between two individuals, a conversation is the best way to accomplish it, and messages that should not be preserved should be deleted immediately. College policy prohibits certain types of e-mail. These include mail that may be perceived as harassment, political campaigning, chain mail or commercial solicitation. Violators will be subject to loss of computer access privileges, as well as additional disciplinary action as determined by the Hamilton judiciary procedures. Certain types of e-mail, including but not limited to harassing e-mail, may also subject the sender to civil or criminal penalties. In spite of College policy, e-mail can be abused by malicious users who know the owner's computing ID and password. Users are responsible for protecting their own passwords. ListServ Lists ListServ is a commercial software product installed on our E-mail system. It is designed to provide an easy way to create and maintain large E-mail mailing lists. These lists can be used for the one-way distribution of information, for E-mail based discussion, questions and answers, etc. Lists are created and "owned" by an E-mail user who manages the list?s behavior. Any faculty, staff, or student member of the Hamilton College community is entitled to become a ListServ list owner. Campus-based organizations and departments are also entitled to own lists, but an individual within the group must be designated as the list owner. Students must be in good standing with the Dean of Students office and student organizations must be registered with the Office of Student Activities. All lists must be approved by the ITS ListServ administrator prior to creation, but the following general guidelines apply: The purpose of the list must pertain to Hamilton College business. Lists are not open to off-campus subscribers unless special permission is obtained. However, Hamilton College students or employees who use off-campus E-mail addresses are allowed to own and belong to lists. It is the list owner's responsibility to learn the commands necessary to manage the list's subscribers. Under no circumstances can a list be used to participate in or promote activities that are illegal, violate the Hamilton College code of conduct, or the Hamilton College Honor code. To apply for list ownership and select a list type, please read Becoming a ListServ List Owner from which you can create your list. Return to Main Listserv Page ListServ Mass Mailing Lists Effective July 1, 2010 As a service to the Hamilton College community, several e-mail based mass mailing lists have been created. These are designed to facilitate the timely and cost-effective distribution of information to the campus community. E-mail now reaches almost all faculty, administration and staff (members of M & O generally don't use computers in connection with their responsibilities) and students. Participation in the mass mailing lists is voluntary. In order that these lists remain a reliable means of communication, it is important that members of the Hamilton community abide by a few guidelines. These guidelines are not designed to limit free speech but are intended to keep your mail volume at a reasonable level. Most importantly, anonymous mailings are prohibited. The sender's real name must be identified (in full) within the body of the message - not just at the top in the "from" line. There are two sets of mass mailing lists, one for announcement of events and the other for general campus notices. The guidelines for use of these lists are explained below. Events By an "event" we mean an activity (meeting, performance,, lecture, etc.) that takes place on- or off-campus at a specific date and time and is sponsored, or co-sponsored by either an academic or administrative department/program or a student organization recognized by Student Activities.   Sponsorship means that the chair of a College department, program or organization indicates that the organization supports the event and that members of the College are actively involved in organizing the event (e.g., as speakers). If someone other than the organizer(s) makes the event announcement, they share in the responsibility for adhering to the guidelines. Posting to the lists will be limited to all employees and two* student representatives, or the e-mail account assigned to each student organization recognized by Student Activities. Violations by the student representatives will accrue to the organization they represent regardless of whether the violator acted alone. An event will be limited to two posts to the mass mailing lists. Corrections count as one of the two messages. If an event is cancelled or postponed, two additional notices are allowed. Each message must have a subject line that is descriptive of the event The first 4 lines of the message must contain: Date and time of the event Sponsor of the event Name of the event Location of the event The remainder of the message should be a short description of the event. [Note that if you include graphics you may exceed the limit of 25 MB for the message. Such messages will be rejected.] Clarification: Posting a message to an inappropriate list is a violation (e.g., posting a message intended for students to the events-all  list) The mass e-mail lists for posting events are: a. Events-students@listserv.hamilton.edu (sent only to students) b. Events-20xx@listserv.hamilton.edu (sent to students in a particular class year, where xx is the last two digits of the class year) c. Events-faculty@listserv.hamilton.edu (sent only to members of the faculty) d. Events-staff@listserv.hamilton.edu (sent only to members of the staff) e. Events-admin@listserv.hamilton.edu (sent only to members of the administration) f.  Events-maintop@listserv.hamilton.edu (sent only to members of Maintenance and Operations) g. Events-employees@listserv.hamilton.edu (sent only to employees) h. Events-all@listserv.hamilton.edu (sent to both students and employees) The notices mass e-mail lists will be used only for the following general categories. A non-comprehensive bulleted list of examples is provided for each category. Announcement of Hamilton deadlines, policies and procedures These announcements must come from individuals representing the administrative or academic departments responsible for the deadline, policy or procedure being addressed (e.g. drop-add, parking permits, library books due) Reports from Hamilton organizations or departments These reports must come from individuals representing the academic or administrative offices, or student organizations recognized by Student Activities who generated the reports (e.g., Minutes of Student Assembly, Agendas, reports from faculty meetings, Honor Court decisions, results of campus-wide initiatives or community events such as United Way, Heart Walk & Run, announcement of appointments). Notification of the availability of, or changes in, Hamilton College services or facilities These notices must come from individuals representing the academic or administrative departments, or student organizations recognized by Student Activities who are responsible for the services or facilities being addressed (e.g., dining and fitness center schedules, availability of Hamilton housing, IT and library services, department newsletters, availability of Hamilton-sponsored publications, Campus Safety announcements, sales in the College Store, Physical Plant notices, fund raising activities for Hamilton organizations, fund raising activities approved by Office of the President (for employees) or by the Student Activities Office (for students)). Surveys Student-initiated surveys must be related to the academic program and endorsed by a faculty mentor.  The request for such surveys must be submitted by the faculty mentor. These surveys must be sent to exception@hamilton.edu for prior approval. Student organizations recognized by Student Activities can submit surveys directly to the student lists. These must be surveys that will only be given to students. Surveys related to college business or faculty research may be submitted directly to the lists. Notices from members of the senior staff directly related to their areas of responsibility The mass e-mail lists for posting notices are: a. Notices-students@listserv.hamilton.edu(sent only to students) b. Notices-20xx@listserv.hamilton.edu (sent to students in a particular class year, where xx is the last two digits of the class year) c.  Notices-faculty@listserv.hamilton.edu (sent only to members of the faculty) d. Notices-staff@listserv.hamilton.edu (sent only to members of the staff) e. Notices-admin@listserv.hamilton.edu (sent only to members of the administration) f.  Notices-maintop@listserv.hamilton.edu (sent only to members of Maintenance and Operations) g. Notices-employees@listserv.hamilton.edu (sent only to employees) h. Notices-all@listserv.hamilton.edu (sent to both students and employees) Please consider your audience carefully (e.g., do not send a mailing to "all" if you only need to reach students).Examples of inappropriate uses include, but are not limited to: Personal opinion, public debate, or campaigning Announcements should not attempt to sell the reader on a point of view.   The information provided should be as factual as possible and sufficient enough to explain the purpose of the announcement. If additional background information is necessary, a web link may be included.  A message that contains no actual announcement (e.g. does not meet the criteria listed above for an event or a non-event) is a violation. Give-aways (personal property such as furniture, tickets, equipment, books, etc.) Surveys other than those specified above Chain mail Lost and found (except when it is Hamilton College property, or involves animals) there is a Lost and Found channel in My Hamilton. Requests for rides (there is a Rides channel in My Hamilton) Items for sale - or items desired (including houses, tickets, books, services, etc.) There is a marketplace channel in My Hamilton that can be used for this purpose.   Exceptions to the Guidelines: Messages that Fall Outside the Guidelines, or from senders not approved for Mass Mail: Any individual wanting to post a message to the mass e-mail lists that falls outside of the guidelines, can request that the message be posted by sending a request for an exception to: exception@hamilton.edu. The request will be directed to the appropriate member of the senior staff for approval. Approval or denial will be communicated to the person making the request. Requests for exceptions should be sent at least two business days in advance of the time the posting is to take place. Penalties for Violations: A first time violation will result in the removal of posting (sending) privileges to the mass lists for a period of one month (not including breaks). A second violation will result in the removal of both posting and receiving messages to/from the mass lists for a period of one month (not including breaks). A third violation will result in the loss of posting and receiving privileges for the equivalent of a full semester. A fourth violation will result in the individual being referred to the appropriate judicial body dealing with employees or students. Violations are cumulative for as long as you are at Hamilton (or four years for employees). Loss of privileges applies to all the mass lists. Violators may appeal their penalty by submitting their reasons in writing to the chair of the Committee on Information Technology. The Committee will review the appeal and return a decision within 5 business days. During the appeal process the penalty will be suspended. [Return to Main Listserv Page] For questions about these Policies, Procedures, Plans and Standards, contact: David Smallen Vice President for Information Technology, Hamilton College 315-859-4169
  • Quick Start Guide for List Owners Listserv For ListServ 16.0 Logging in and Setting your ListServ Preferences Open your web browser software (Internet Explorer, FireFox, Safari, etc.) and go to: http://listserv.hamilton.edu.  Click on Log In (in the upper right corner). If you have a password already established, enter your entire e-mail address (e.g. dquayle@hamilton.edu) and your Listserv password in the fields provided.  Then click on the Log In button (circled at right). If you don’t have a password, or don’t remember your password, click on the link to “get a new LISTSERV password” and follow the on-screen prompts.  When your password has been set, return to http://listserv.hamilton.edu.   After you've logged in, click on Preferences (located in the upper right corner of your screen below the green question mark shown in step 2). Click on the down arrow in the Start Page setting and choose "List Dashboard" from the list.  NOTE: If you are an advanced user and you want to see all the options, you may want to consider setting the Mode to “Expert Mode”. The Mode setting is in the first line in the preferences.   Click on the Update button in the lower right or upper right corner.  The screen will not change.  Viewing, adding or deleting list subscriptions There are two sections in this document that describe how to manage subscriptions.  This first section describes the easiest approach. The steps that follow will satisfy most of your subscription management needs.  However, if you need to add or delete large numbers of subscribers or you need to alter specific settings for a subscriber, then proceed to the next section for a more detailed approach to managing subscriptions. If you are not already in the List Dashboard view, click on the List Management menu and then select List Dashboard from the drop down list.   A list of the lists you own should appear in the bottom half of the screen. To add, delete or search for subscribers and to see a list of your subscribers, click on the [View] link under the Subscribers column heading. In the Subscriber Reports screen that opens, there are several functions you can perform.  Please refer to the illustration after step 3b. To search for a subscriber, enter as much of their name (or address) as you know in the field to the right of "Search Options", and then click on Search. To add a new subscriber, fill in the person's full address (e.g. jdoe@hamilton.edu) followed by his/her full name (e.g. John Doe).  When you click the Add Subscriber button he or she will be added to your list but he or she will NOT be automatically notified of the subscription.    To delete one or more subscribers, refer to the list of subscribers that appears below the search and add fields.  Select a subscriber (or subscribers) by clicking in the checkbox that appears next to the subscriber’s name.  Then, click on the button labeled Delete Selected Subscribers.  No notification will be sent to the subscriber.  NOTE:  If you have more than one page of subscribers, you will need to delete subscribers one page at a time. Managing subscriptions in bulk & managing subscriber settings This section describes how to manage subscriptions in bulk as well as how to manage details for a specific subscriber.  It uses a slightly different technique than described in the previous section. If you have not already done so, log in to Listserv by going to http://listserv.hamilton.edu.  Remember to enter your full e-mail address as your login ID.  If you have forgotten your password, refer to step 2b at the very beginning of this web page. Once logged in, click on the List Management menu and select List Dashboard. Depending on how many lists you own, in the section labeled "Select List",  you will either see the name of your list, names of your lists or alphabetical groupings of lists.  If you have own more than one list, click to select the list you wish to examine or manage so that its name appears in the Select List space.   Click on the List Management menu at the top of your screen and from it select Subscriber Management.    To Add or Remove Subscriptions in Bulk If you need to subscribe or remove a long list of people to your list, the easiest way to accomplish this is through the “bulk” feature. To use the bulk operation tab, you must first create a plain text file that contains a list of the subscribers you wish to add or delete (the format is described in sections a & b below). This file can be created in Microsoft Word but you must take care to choose Save As in order to change the file format to Plain Text (*.txt). On a Windows computer, “Plain Text” is found by selecting the “Save as type” drop-down list. On a Macintosh, “Plain Text” is found in the “Format” drop-down list.  NOTE: Additions and Deletions CANNOT be added to the same file. Insert Screen Shots from Word 2010 & 2011 Here Additions should by typed as follows (full address followed by full name) gwashing@hamilton.edu George Washington alincoln@hamilton.edu Abraham Lincoln ahamilto@hamilton.edu Alexander Hamilton NOTE: Each subscriber appears on a separate line. A tab (not a space) is used to separate the e-mail address from the subscriber’s full name.  Deletions should be typed as follows  (full address only) gwashing@hamilton.edu alincoln@hamilton.edu ahamilto@hamilton.edu NOTE: It is not necessary to include the subscriber’s full name if their subscription is being deleted from the list. Once you have logged in to Listserv (http://listserv.hamilton.edu), proceed to the List Management menu and then choose List Dashboard if you are not already on that screen.  As described in sections above, select the list you wish to manage. Return to the List Management menu and choose  Subscriber Management. In the screen that opens, click on the Bulk Operations tab.   In the Bulk Operations screen, select the operation you wish to perform.  Read each selection carefully before making your choice.  Then, click on the Browse... button and navigate to the location of the plain text file you saved in step 1 above.  Once you click to select the file, its location and file name will appear in the Input File: space to the left of the Browse button.   Review your settings to confirm you are about to perform the correct operation and then click on the Import button. When the operation is complete you will see a summary of the import at the top of the page. The example below is for a list called “Test-L”.  
  • Student Organization Account Creation Process Listserv There are two types of accounts managed using the Student Organization Management system, Mass E-mail Only and Student Organization accounts. Both account types are described below. Mass E-mail Mass E-mail accounts are used by student groups who only need the ability to post messages directly to ListServs. One e-mail addres, specified by the submitter, is given posting privileges. The address can either by a student's Hamilton e-mail address or a generic group account. This system allows submitters to request a group e-mail account. This request is sent to Debby Quayle, who communicates directly with the submitter to create the e-mail account. Once the Mass E-mail Group information is reviewed and approved by Student Activities the necessary ListServ commands are automatically sent and the account is granted ListServ posting privileges.   Student Organization Recognized Student Organizations have to be approved by Student Activities every year, and are required to provide contact and leadership information, a membership roster, and a constitution. By registering, student organizations have benefits including using the College name, access to facilities, vans, funding, supplies and resources, and e-mail and storage server space. Student Organizations have the ability to request an organization e-mail address. This request is sent to Debby Quayle, who works directly with the organization's leadership to create the account.    
Mac OS 10.4 Tiger
  • Burning a Disc Using Burn Folder in OSX Mac OS 10.4 Tiger
  • Creating a PDF in OS X Mac OS 10.4 Tiger Open the document in its native application. From the File menu, select Print. From the File menu, select Page Setup… The Page Setup window will pop up. Format for Any Printer and set Paper Size equal to the size of your document. Click OK. Click on the PDF… button in the lower left corner of the Print window, and select Save as PDF…  Save window will pop up. After you name your file and choose where to save it, click Save.
  • Installing Sophos Anti-Virus on Mac OS 10.4-10.8 for Employees Mac OS 10.4 Tiger For Off Campus Use Removal of old Sophos (if necessary) NOTE: If you already have Sophos on your computer go through the removal steps otherwise go to the section Downloading and Installing Sophos 1. At Finder click on your hard drive icon. 2. Open the folder Library. 3. Open the folder Application Support. 4. Open the folder Sophos Anti-virus. 5. Launch the Remove Sophos Anti-virus. 6. Once Sophos is removed from the computer you can install the new version of Sophos. Downloading and Installing Sophos 1. Launch Firefox. NOTE: Safari will not work to download Sophos. 2. Please replace userid with your hamilton user name as you type in the Address line ftp://hamilton-d\userid@software.hamilton.edu/sophos 3. In the dialog box that appears type in your Hamilton Network password. 4. Click OK. 5. Click on the folder link Sophos Mac OS 10.2 & above. 6. Click on the link ESCOSX.zip to download the Sophos installer on your computer. 7. In the dialog box that appears, choose the bullet in front of Save File. 8. Click OK. 9. Locate the ESCOSX.zip that you downloaded. 10. Double click on the ESCOSX.zip to unpack the file folder.   Installing Sophos 1. Close all other applications. 2. Open the folder ESCOSX file folder on the desktop. 3. Double-click on the file Sophos Anti-Virus.mpkg. a. If the installer launches an Authenticate window, enter your username and password. This will be the username and password you use to log onto the computer when it boots up. After typing them in click OK. 4. Click Continue in window This package contains a program that …  5. The Welcome to the Sophos Anti-Virus Installer screen appears. Click Continue. 6. The Important Information screen appears. Click Continue. 7. The Select a Destination screen appears. Select your computer’s hard drive. Click Continue. 8. The Standard Install screen appears. Click Install. a. If the installer launches an Authenticate window, enter your username and password. This will be the username and password you use to log onto the computer. 9. When the progress bar is complete, you will see a message indicating Install Succeeded. Click Close.   Configuring Sophos 1. Click on the Sophos Shield    located by the Time & Date in the top right corner on the menu bar. 2. Select Open Sophos Anti-virus Preferences. 3. Click on the Lock button labeled Click lock to make changes in the lower left hand corner. 4. An Authenticate window appears. Enter your username and password. This will be the username and password you use to log onto the computer when it boots up. After typing them in click OK. 5. Click on the AutoUpdate tab (see figure below.) 6. On the Update from primary location select Company web server. 7. In the URL: field http://sophosupdate.hamilton.edu/cids/s000/escosx 8. In the User name: field, using your network username in place of “userid,” enter Hamilton-d\userid if you are an employee. For example, if you were a employee named Ulysses Grant, you would type hamilton-d\ugrant in the User name field. 9. In the Password: field, enter your Hamilton Network Password.  This is the password you use to access the ESS or SSS server. 10. Place a check in the box labeled Check for updates on connection  to network or internet. 11. Quit System Preferences by selecting System Preferences (from the main menu bar), and then Quit System Preferences.     What to Expect When You’re Finished 1. After your installation is complete, Sophos will scan for viruses in the background and will automatically remove any that are found. 2. Sophos will update every day automatically via the Internet. Remember that if your computer is not connecting to the Internet Sophos Anti-Virus will not be able to receive up dates, and your virus-protection will be ineffective. 3. We recommend that you repair disk permissions on your computer after the installation is finished, as outlined below. Repairing Disk Permissions 1. In your hard drive, open your Applications folder and then open the Utilities folder. 2. Open Disk Utility. 3. Click on the name of your hard drive in the left section of the window. Under the First Aid tab, click on Repair Disk Permissions. 4. You’ll see a progress bar near the bottom of the window showing the status of the repair. You’ll also see text appear in the blank section of the window as permissions are repaired. Be patient as this process can take several minutes. 5. When finished, you’ll be notified that the Permissions repair is complete. 6. Quit Disk Utility.    
  • Sophos Home Edition on Mac OS X 10.4-10.7 for Students Mac OS 10.4 Tiger Students Only As Macintosh becomes more popular, it is increasingly a target for an emerging group of viruses and spyware designed specifically for the Mac operating system.  It is in the best interests of Mac users to take action now to protect their systems.  This document explains how to download and install Sophos’ free Anti-Virus solution for student Mac users. Download Sophos Anti-Virus 1. Visit the Sophos Anti-Virus for Mac Home Edition page on the Sophos website: http://www.sophos.com/en-us/products/free-tools/sophos-antivirus-for-mac-home-edition.aspx 2. Click on the Download Now button:  3. When prompted, click the Save File button. 4. Select Desktop as the save location and then click the Save button.   Installing Sophos Anti-Virus 1. Double-click the savosx_72_he.dmg file that you just downloaded to the desktop.  It will mount and automatically open Sophos Anti-Virus Home Edition OS X 10.4 . 2. Double-click on Sophos Anti-Virus Home Edition.mpkg. 3. When prompted that “This package will run a program to determine if the software can be installed,” click the Continue button.  This will check your system for any possible conflicts that would prevent Sophos from installing. 4. If there are no conflicts, the Welcome Screen will appear.  Click Continue. 5. At the Software License Agreement screen, click Continue. 6. Click the Agree button. 7. At the Select a Destination screen, click on Macintosh HD (for most, this will be the only option) and then click Continue. 8. At the Sophos Anti-Virus Updates screen, click Continue. 9. At the Standard Install screen, click the Install button to proceed with the installation. 10. When prompted, enter your username and password for your Mac computer. 11. At the Completion screen, take a moment to read through the brief information on how to use Sophos Anti-Virus for Mac Home Edition.  Click Continue. 12. At the Installation was Successful screen, click Close. 13. You should now have a black Sophos shield icon in the Menu Bar at the upper right of your screen.   How Do I Use Sophos Anti-Virus for Mac Home Edition? Sophos runs in the background and scans files for threats whenever the files are opened.  If you want to perform a manual scan of all your files, click the black Sophos shield in the menu bar and select Scan Local Drives.  
  • Using Remote Desktop in Mac OS X to Connect to Windows XP Mac OS 10.4 Tiger NOTE: These instructions are for connecting to Windows XP SP2 and 7 from Mac OS X 10.2.8 or later. NOTE: It is recommended that the Windows Firewall be active at all times on your office computer. To turn it on or confirm its status please follow the steps below.  Click on Start, select Control Panel, then select Windows Firewall. (Windows 7) On the left taskbar, click on Turn Windows Firewall on or off Verify that there is a bullet in front of the option On (recommended) (in Windows XP) or Turn on Windows Firewall (in Windows 7) Windows XP (left) and Windows 7 (right)      Configuring Windows Firewall to Allow a Remote Desktop Connection With the Windows Firewall window still open, complete the following steps: Click on the Exceptions tab. In Windows 7, click on Allow a program or feature through Windows Firewall. Place a check mark in the box in front of Remote Desktop. In Windows 7, scroll down to check that the Domain and Home/Work (Private) is checked for Remote Desktop (for Windows 7 users, complete this step and skip to the section Configuring your Office Computer for Remote Desktop Connection).    Click on the Advanced tab. Click on Local Area Connection to highlight it. Click on the Settings button. Place a checkmark in the box labeled Remote Desktop. If a window labeled Service Settings appears, Click OK. Click OK on both the Advanced Settings and the Windows Firewall window.    Configuring Your Office Computer for a Remote Desktop Connection Click on Start, right-click My Computer and choose Properties. Click on the Remote tab and place a checkmark in the Allow users to connect remotely to this computer box, as shown below. On Windows 7, click on Remote Settings and place a bullet next to Allow connections from computers running any version of Remote Desktop (less secure).　 Windows XP (left) and Windows 7 (right)            Verify that you have the proper permission to connect to your computer by clicking Select Remote Users… or Select Users (Windows 7). Your domain and username should be listed as already having access (as shown below.)    NOTE: If you do not already have access, click on the Add... button as shown above and a window similar to the one below will appear. In the space labeled Enter the object names to select (examples):, type your domain (the domain for employees is Hamilton-d) and user ID.  For example, Hamilton-d\dhubbard. Click Check Names and, if it is a valid username, the domain name will disappear and your username will become underlined. For example, in the illustration below, hamilton-d\dhubbard will change to dhubbard. Click OK to close the Select Users window. Click OK to close the Remote Desktop Users window and click OK again to close the System Properties window. Click on Start and then click on Run… In the Open: field, type cmd and click OK. A box with a black background and white text will appear. Type ipconfig at the blinking cursor and press on your keyboard. Make note of the IP Address (as shown above,) you will need to take it with you to access your computer remotely. (NOTE:  You should do this each time you plan to use Remote Desktop Access as IP addresses change periodically.) Close the window. To access your computer using Remote Desktop, your office computer must be on and connected to the Hamilton Network. You can log off of your computer and leave it turned on or you can lock your desktop while logged on. To lock your computer, press the , , and keys simultaneously, and then click on Lock Computer. This completes setting up your office computer. These settings will remain in effect and do not need to be repeated. Installing Remote Desktop Connection on Mac OS X On your OS X computer, go to Microsoft’s webpage for the Remote Desktop Connection Client for Mac OS X: http://www.microsoft.com/mac/downloads?pid=Mactopia_RDC&fid=68346E0D-44D3-4065-99BB-B664B27EE1F0#viewer Click on Download Now to download the file. If your browser asks you what to do with this file, tell it to save the file. If your browser automatically opens the file with Stuffit, skip to step 5. After the file finishes downloading, go to the location the file was downloaded to (most likely the desktop) and double-click the RDC_2.1.1_ALL.dmg file. You’ll now have a white volume on your desktop called RDC. Open this white volume if it isn’t already open. To install the application, double-click on the RDC Installer and follow the instructions to install the application onto your computer. You should now see the Remote Desktop Connection application on your dock. Connecting to Your Office Computer from a Remote OS X Computer Open the Remote Desktop Connection application. The first time you open the application, the End User License Agreement will pop up. Accept the license agreement. Then a window will pop up asking you to register. Click Register Later. You will not see these windows when you open the program in the future. In the Computer: field, type the IP address (from step 10 on page 4) for your office computer. Click Connect. In the Log On to Windows dialog box, type your network username, password, and domain and then click OK. You may be prompted with the below message. Click Connect. Once connected, go to the RDC menu and select Preferences. Click the Security icon and select Always connect, even if authentication fails. This will remove future message prompts like the one below.  The Remote Desktop window will open and you will see the desktop settings, files, and programs that are on your office computer. Your office computer will remain locked and no one will be able to use it without a password, nor will anyone see the work you are doing on your office computer remotely. To improve performance, you will not see your usual desktop picture if you have one set up. To Log Off and End a Session In the Remote Desktop Session, click Start and select Disconnect.       When it asks you if you are sure you want to disconnect, click Disconnect.
  • Web Publishing Using Mac OSX Mac OS 10.4 Tiger OSX 10.6, 10.7, and newer 1.) From the Menu bar, choose Go 2.) Choose Connect to Server... 3.) To connect to: WWW (the main Hamilton site), on the address line, type in smb://polaris/hamilton then click on Connect. Academics (academics.hamilton.edu), on the address line, type in smb://polaris/Academics then click on Connect. Students (students.hamilton.edu), on the address line, type in smb://polaris/Students then click on Connect. 4a.) An Authentication window will appear. Hamilton employees, enter Hamilton-d\username for the Name Hamilton students, enter Hamilton-s\username for the Name 4b.) Enter your network Password, then click Connect to connect.   OSX 10.5 1.) From the Menu bar, choose Go 2.) Choose Connect to Server... 3.) To connect to: WWW (the main Hamilton site), on the address line, type in smb://polaris:139/hamilton then click on Connect. Academics (academics.hamilton.edu), on the address line, type in smb://polaris:139/Academics then click on Connect. Students (students.hamilton.edu), on the address line, type in smb://polaris:139/Students then click on Connect. 4a.) An Authentication window will appear.  Hamilton employees, enter Hamilton-d\username for the Name  Hamilton students, enter Hamilton-s\username for the Name 4b.) Enter your network Password, then click Connect to connect.   OSX 10.4 OSX 10.4 users cannot connect to polaris using the standard on-campus methods.  Please follow the instructions for FTP.
Mac OS 10.5 Leopard
  • Burning a Disc Using Burn Folder in OSX Mac OS 10.5 Leopard
  • Creating a PDF in OS X Mac OS 10.5 Leopard Open the document in its native application. From the File menu, select Print. From the File menu, select Page Setup… The Page Setup window will pop up. Format for Any Printer and set Paper Size equal to the size of your document. Click OK. Click on the PDF… button in the lower left corner of the Print window, and select Save as PDF…  Save window will pop up. After you name your file and choose where to save it, click Save.
  • Installing Sophos Anti-Virus on Mac OS 10.4-10.8 for Employees Mac OS 10.5 Leopard For Off Campus Use Removal of old Sophos (if necessary) NOTE: If you already have Sophos on your computer go through the removal steps otherwise go to the section Downloading and Installing Sophos 1. At Finder click on your hard drive icon. 2. Open the folder Library. 3. Open the folder Application Support. 4. Open the folder Sophos Anti-virus. 5. Launch the Remove Sophos Anti-virus. 6. Once Sophos is removed from the computer you can install the new version of Sophos. Downloading and Installing Sophos 1. Launch Firefox. NOTE: Safari will not work to download Sophos. 2. Please replace userid with your hamilton user name as you type in the Address line ftp://hamilton-d\userid@software.hamilton.edu/sophos 3. In the dialog box that appears type in your Hamilton Network password. 4. Click OK. 5. Click on the folder link Sophos Mac OS 10.2 & above. 6. Click on the link ESCOSX.zip to download the Sophos installer on your computer. 7. In the dialog box that appears, choose the bullet in front of Save File. 8. Click OK. 9. Locate the ESCOSX.zip that you downloaded. 10. Double click on the ESCOSX.zip to unpack the file folder.   Installing Sophos 1. Close all other applications. 2. Open the folder ESCOSX file folder on the desktop. 3. Double-click on the file Sophos Anti-Virus.mpkg. a. If the installer launches an Authenticate window, enter your username and password. This will be the username and password you use to log onto the computer when it boots up. After typing them in click OK. 4. Click Continue in window This package contains a program that …  5. The Welcome to the Sophos Anti-Virus Installer screen appears. Click Continue. 6. The Important Information screen appears. Click Continue. 7. The Select a Destination screen appears. Select your computer’s hard drive. Click Continue. 8. The Standard Install screen appears. Click Install. a. If the installer launches an Authenticate window, enter your username and password. This will be the username and password you use to log onto the computer. 9. When the progress bar is complete, you will see a message indicating Install Succeeded. Click Close.   Configuring Sophos 1. Click on the Sophos Shield    located by the Time & Date in the top right corner on the menu bar. 2. Select Open Sophos Anti-virus Preferences. 3. Click on the Lock button labeled Click lock to make changes in the lower left hand corner. 4. An Authenticate window appears. Enter your username and password. This will be the username and password you use to log onto the computer when it boots up. After typing them in click OK. 5. Click on the AutoUpdate tab (see figure below.) 6. On the Update from primary location select Company web server. 7. In the URL: field http://sophosupdate.hamilton.edu/cids/s000/escosx 8. In the User name: field, using your network username in place of “userid,” enter Hamilton-d\userid if you are an employee. For example, if you were a employee named Ulysses Grant, you would type hamilton-d\ugrant in the User name field. 9. In the Password: field, enter your Hamilton Network Password.  This is the password you use to access the ESS or SSS server. 10. Place a check in the box labeled Check for updates on connection  to network or internet. 11. Quit System Preferences by selecting System Preferences (from the main menu bar), and then Quit System Preferences.     What to Expect When You’re Finished 1. After your installation is complete, Sophos will scan for viruses in the background and will automatically remove any that are found. 2. Sophos will update every day automatically via the Internet. Remember that if your computer is not connecting to the Internet Sophos Anti-Virus will not be able to receive up dates, and your virus-protection will be ineffective. 3. We recommend that you repair disk permissions on your computer after the installation is finished, as outlined below. Repairing Disk Permissions 1. In your hard drive, open your Applications folder and then open the Utilities folder. 2. Open Disk Utility. 3. Click on the name of your hard drive in the left section of the window. Under the First Aid tab, click on Repair Disk Permissions. 4. You’ll see a progress bar near the bottom of the window showing the status of the repair. You’ll also see text appear in the blank section of the window as permissions are repaired. Be patient as this process can take several minutes. 5. When finished, you’ll be notified that the Permissions repair is complete. 6. Quit Disk Utility.    
  • Sophos Home Edition on Mac OS X 10.4-10.7 for Students Mac OS 10.5 Leopard Students Only As Macintosh becomes more popular, it is increasingly a target for an emerging group of viruses and spyware designed specifically for the Mac operating system.  It is in the best interests of Mac users to take action now to protect their systems.  This document explains how to download and install Sophos’ free Anti-Virus solution for student Mac users. Download Sophos Anti-Virus 1. Visit the Sophos Anti-Virus for Mac Home Edition page on the Sophos website: http://www.sophos.com/en-us/products/free-tools/sophos-antivirus-for-mac-home-edition.aspx 2. Click on the Download Now button:  3. When prompted, click the Save File button. 4. Select Desktop as the save location and then click the Save button.   Installing Sophos Anti-Virus 1. Double-click the savosx_72_he.dmg file that you just downloaded to the desktop.  It will mount and automatically open Sophos Anti-Virus Home Edition OS X 10.4 . 2. Double-click on Sophos Anti-Virus Home Edition.mpkg. 3. When prompted that “This package will run a program to determine if the software can be installed,” click the Continue button.  This will check your system for any possible conflicts that would prevent Sophos from installing. 4. If there are no conflicts, the Welcome Screen will appear.  Click Continue. 5. At the Software License Agreement screen, click Continue. 6. Click the Agree button. 7. At the Select a Destination screen, click on Macintosh HD (for most, this will be the only option) and then click Continue. 8. At the Sophos Anti-Virus Updates screen, click Continue. 9. At the Standard Install screen, click the Install button to proceed with the installation. 10. When prompted, enter your username and password for your Mac computer. 11. At the Completion screen, take a moment to read through the brief information on how to use Sophos Anti-Virus for Mac Home Edition.  Click Continue. 12. At the Installation was Successful screen, click Close. 13. You should now have a black Sophos shield icon in the Menu Bar at the upper right of your screen.   How Do I Use Sophos Anti-Virus for Mac Home Edition? Sophos runs in the background and scans files for threats whenever the files are opened.  If you want to perform a manual scan of all your files, click the black Sophos shield in the menu bar and select Scan Local Drives.  
  • Using Remote Desktop in Mac OS X to Connect to Windows XP Mac OS 10.5 Leopard NOTE: These instructions are for connecting to Windows XP SP2 and 7 from Mac OS X 10.2.8 or later. NOTE: It is recommended that the Windows Firewall be active at all times on your office computer. To turn it on or confirm its status please follow the steps below.  Click on Start, select Control Panel, then select Windows Firewall. (Windows 7) On the left taskbar, click on Turn Windows Firewall on or off Verify that there is a bullet in front of the option On (recommended) (in Windows XP) or Turn on Windows Firewall (in Windows 7) Windows XP (left) and Windows 7 (right)      Configuring Windows Firewall to Allow a Remote Desktop Connection With the Windows Firewall window still open, complete the following steps: Click on the Exceptions tab. In Windows 7, click on Allow a program or feature through Windows Firewall. Place a check mark in the box in front of Remote Desktop. In Windows 7, scroll down to check that the Domain and Home/Work (Private) is checked for Remote Desktop (for Windows 7 users, complete this step and skip to the section Configuring your Office Computer for Remote Desktop Connection).    Click on the Advanced tab. Click on Local Area Connection to highlight it. Click on the Settings button. Place a checkmark in the box labeled Remote Desktop. If a window labeled Service Settings appears, Click OK. Click OK on both the Advanced Settings and the Windows Firewall window.    Configuring Your Office Computer for a Remote Desktop Connection Click on Start, right-click My Computer and choose Properties. Click on the Remote tab and place a checkmark in the Allow users to connect remotely to this computer box, as shown below. On Windows 7, click on Remote Settings and place a bullet next to Allow connections from computers running any version of Remote Desktop (less secure).　 Windows XP (left) and Windows 7 (right)            Verify that you have the proper permission to connect to your computer by clicking Select Remote Users… or Select Users (Windows 7). Your domain and username should be listed as already having access (as shown below.)    NOTE: If you do not already have access, click on the Add... button as shown above and a window similar to the one below will appear. In the space labeled Enter the object names to select (examples):, type your domain (the domain for employees is Hamilton-d) and user ID.  For example, Hamilton-d\dhubbard. Click Check Names and, if it is a valid username, the domain name will disappear and your username will become underlined. For example, in the illustration below, hamilton-d\dhubbard will change to dhubbard. Click OK to close the Select Users window. Click OK to close the Remote Desktop Users window and click OK again to close the System Properties window. Click on Start and then click on Run… In the Open: field, type cmd and click OK. A box with a black background and white text will appear. Type ipconfig at the blinking cursor and press on your keyboard. Make note of the IP Address (as shown above,) you will need to take it with you to access your computer remotely. (NOTE:  You should do this each time you plan to use Remote Desktop Access as IP addresses change periodically.) Close the window. To access your computer using Remote Desktop, your office computer must be on and connected to the Hamilton Network. You can log off of your computer and leave it turned on or you can lock your desktop while logged on. To lock your computer, press the , , and keys simultaneously, and then click on Lock Computer. This completes setting up your office computer. These settings will remain in effect and do not need to be repeated. Installing Remote Desktop Connection on Mac OS X On your OS X computer, go to Microsoft’s webpage for the Remote Desktop Connection Client for Mac OS X: http://www.microsoft.com/mac/downloads?pid=Mactopia_RDC&fid=68346E0D-44D3-4065-99BB-B664B27EE1F0#viewer Click on Download Now to download the file. If your browser asks you what to do with this file, tell it to save the file. If your browser automatically opens the file with Stuffit, skip to step 5. After the file finishes downloading, go to the location the file was downloaded to (most likely the desktop) and double-click the RDC_2.1.1_ALL.dmg file. You’ll now have a white volume on your desktop called RDC. Open this white volume if it isn’t already open. To install the application, double-click on the RDC Installer and follow the instructions to install the application onto your computer. You should now see the Remote Desktop Connection application on your dock. Connecting to Your Office Computer from a Remote OS X Computer Open the Remote Desktop Connection application. The first time you open the application, the End User License Agreement will pop up. Accept the license agreement. Then a window will pop up asking you to register. Click Register Later. You will not see these windows when you open the program in the future. In the Computer: field, type the IP address (from step 10 on page 4) for your office computer. Click Connect. In the Log On to Windows dialog box, type your network username, password, and domain and then click OK. You may be prompted with the below message. Click Connect. Once connected, go to the RDC menu and select Preferences. Click the Security icon and select Always connect, even if authentication fails. This will remove future message prompts like the one below.  The Remote Desktop window will open and you will see the desktop settings, files, and programs that are on your office computer. Your office computer will remain locked and no one will be able to use it without a password, nor will anyone see the work you are doing on your office computer remotely. To improve performance, you will not see your usual desktop picture if you have one set up. To Log Off and End a Session In the Remote Desktop Session, click Start and select Disconnect.       When it asks you if you are sure you want to disconnect, click Disconnect.
  • Web Publishing Using Mac OSX Mac OS 10.5 Leopard OSX 10.6, 10.7, and newer 1.) From the Menu bar, choose Go 2.) Choose Connect to Server... 3.) To connect to: WWW (the main Hamilton site), on the address line, type in smb://polaris/hamilton then click on Connect. Academics (academics.hamilton.edu), on the address line, type in smb://polaris/Academics then click on Connect. Students (students.hamilton.edu), on the address line, type in smb://polaris/Students then click on Connect. 4a.) An Authentication window will appear. Hamilton employees, enter Hamilton-d\username for the Name Hamilton students, enter Hamilton-s\username for the Name 4b.) Enter your network Password, then click Connect to connect.   OSX 10.5 1.) From the Menu bar, choose Go 2.) Choose Connect to Server... 3.) To connect to: WWW (the main Hamilton site), on the address line, type in smb://polaris:139/hamilton then click on Connect. Academics (academics.hamilton.edu), on the address line, type in smb://polaris:139/Academics then click on Connect. Students (students.hamilton.edu), on the address line, type in smb://polaris:139/Students then click on Connect. 4a.) An Authentication window will appear.  Hamilton employees, enter Hamilton-d\username for the Name  Hamilton students, enter Hamilton-s\username for the Name 4b.) Enter your network Password, then click Connect to connect.   OSX 10.4 OSX 10.4 users cannot connect to polaris using the standard on-campus methods.  Please follow the instructions for FTP.
Mac OS 10.6 Snow Leopard
  • Burning a Disc Using Burn Folder in OSX Mac OS 10.6 Snow Leopard
  • Creating a PDF in OS X Mac OS 10.6 Snow Leopard Open the document in its native application. From the File menu, select Print. From the File menu, select Page Setup… The Page Setup window will pop up. Format for Any Printer and set Paper Size equal to the size of your document. Click OK. Click on the PDF… button in the lower left corner of the Print window, and select Save as PDF…  Save window will pop up. After you name your file and choose where to save it, click Save.
  • Installing Sophos Anti-Virus on Mac OS 10.4-10.8 for Employees Mac OS 10.6 Snow Leopard For Off Campus Use Removal of old Sophos (if necessary) NOTE: If you already have Sophos on your computer go through the removal steps otherwise go to the section Downloading and Installing Sophos 1. At Finder click on your hard drive icon. 2. Open the folder Library. 3. Open the folder Application Support. 4. Open the folder Sophos Anti-virus. 5. Launch the Remove Sophos Anti-virus. 6. Once Sophos is removed from the computer you can install the new version of Sophos. Downloading and Installing Sophos 1. Launch Firefox. NOTE: Safari will not work to download Sophos. 2. Please replace userid with your hamilton user name as you type in the Address line ftp://hamilton-d\userid@software.hamilton.edu/sophos 3. In the dialog box that appears type in your Hamilton Network password. 4. Click OK. 5. Click on the folder link Sophos Mac OS 10.2 & above. 6. Click on the link ESCOSX.zip to download the Sophos installer on your computer. 7. In the dialog box that appears, choose the bullet in front of Save File. 8. Click OK. 9. Locate the ESCOSX.zip that you downloaded. 10. Double click on the ESCOSX.zip to unpack the file folder.   Installing Sophos 1. Close all other applications. 2. Open the folder ESCOSX file folder on the desktop. 3. Double-click on the file Sophos Anti-Virus.mpkg. a. If the installer launches an Authenticate window, enter your username and password. This will be the username and password you use to log onto the computer when it boots up. After typing them in click OK. 4. Click Continue in window This package contains a program that …  5. The Welcome to the Sophos Anti-Virus Installer screen appears. Click Continue. 6. The Important Information screen appears. Click Continue. 7. The Select a Destination screen appears. Select your computer’s hard drive. Click Continue. 8. The Standard Install screen appears. Click Install. a. If the installer launches an Authenticate window, enter your username and password. This will be the username and password you use to log onto the computer. 9. When the progress bar is complete, you will see a message indicating Install Succeeded. Click Close.   Configuring Sophos 1. Click on the Sophos Shield    located by the Time & Date in the top right corner on the menu bar. 2. Select Open Sophos Anti-virus Preferences. 3. Click on the Lock button labeled Click lock to make changes in the lower left hand corner. 4. An Authenticate window appears. Enter your username and password. This will be the username and password you use to log onto the computer when it boots up. After typing them in click OK. 5. Click on the AutoUpdate tab (see figure below.) 6. On the Update from primary location select Company web server. 7. In the URL: field http://sophosupdate.hamilton.edu/cids/s000/escosx 8. In the User name: field, using your network username in place of “userid,” enter Hamilton-d\userid if you are an employee. For example, if you were a employee named Ulysses Grant, you would type hamilton-d\ugrant in the User name field. 9. In the Password: field, enter your Hamilton Network Password.  This is the password you use to access the ESS or SSS server. 10. Place a check in the box labeled Check for updates on connection  to network or internet. 11. Quit System Preferences by selecting System Preferences (from the main menu bar), and then Quit System Preferences.     What to Expect When You’re Finished 1. After your installation is complete, Sophos will scan for viruses in the background and will automatically remove any that are found. 2. Sophos will update every day automatically via the Internet. Remember that if your computer is not connecting to the Internet Sophos Anti-Virus will not be able to receive up dates, and your virus-protection will be ineffective. 3. We recommend that you repair disk permissions on your computer after the installation is finished, as outlined below. Repairing Disk Permissions 1. In your hard drive, open your Applications folder and then open the Utilities folder. 2. Open Disk Utility. 3. Click on the name of your hard drive in the left section of the window. Under the First Aid tab, click on Repair Disk Permissions. 4. You’ll see a progress bar near the bottom of the window showing the status of the repair. You’ll also see text appear in the blank section of the window as permissions are repaired. Be patient as this process can take several minutes. 5. When finished, you’ll be notified that the Permissions repair is complete. 6. Quit Disk Utility.    
  • Scanning Text with ReadIris and Converting to a Word Document Mac OS 10.6 Snow Leopard Using Readiris Pro 11 Getting Started In order to use Readiris Pro to convert your text into a Word document, you have to scan your text onto the computer. Readiris Pro suggests you scan your image at 200 dpi and set to grayscale, for the best results scan black text with a white background. Make sure to save your file. For instruction scanning see documentation: Scanning with SilverFast Ai. Note: Make sure your document is saved as a Tiff file or a Pdf, if you do not Readiris will not be able to convert to a word document. Launching Readiris Pro Once your file is saved, launch Readiris Pro by opening your applications folder located on the dock at the bottom of the screen and selecting the Readiris Pro folder. This will open a separate window; from this window double click on Readiris Pro to launch the program. Opening a File Once Readiris Pro has launched you will notice a blank area in the middle of the interface, this is where your file will be displayed. To the left of the interface in a panel is the Open button; next to the Open button should be a Text button with a chevron, make sure it is set to text. Select the Open button and a window opens that allows you to find your file. Select your file and then press the Open button. Your file will now be displayed in the center of the Readiris Pro interface. Once Readiris Pro has imported your file into the program, the file should be visible in the middle of the interface. The text in your file should have a blue box surrounding it. This means that Readiris Pro is able to recognize the text. If your file does not display this you should attempt to re-scan your file, making sure to use the scanning settings recommended by Readiris Pro.   Converting Your Document On the left hand side of the interface is a panel containing a Recognize button; select this button. Once the Recognize button has been selected it will open a window. This window displays that the file is being saved as an .rtf; choose a location for the file to be saved to.     Your .rtf file will open by default in the TextEdit. If you do not see your text displayed, Readiris Pro was unable to recognize and covert your text. If your text is displayed select File from the TextEdit toolbar and then select Save As. Select File Format and change it to a Word document.
  • Sophos Home Edition on Mac OS X 10.4-10.7 for Students Mac OS 10.6 Snow Leopard Students Only As Macintosh becomes more popular, it is increasingly a target for an emerging group of viruses and spyware designed specifically for the Mac operating system.  It is in the best interests of Mac users to take action now to protect their systems.  This document explains how to download and install Sophos’ free Anti-Virus solution for student Mac users. Download Sophos Anti-Virus 1. Visit the Sophos Anti-Virus for Mac Home Edition page on the Sophos website: http://www.sophos.com/en-us/products/free-tools/sophos-antivirus-for-mac-home-edition.aspx 2. Click on the Download Now button:  3. When prompted, click the Save File button. 4. Select Desktop as the save location and then click the Save button.   Installing Sophos Anti-Virus 1. Double-click the savosx_72_he.dmg file that you just downloaded to the desktop.  It will mount and automatically open Sophos Anti-Virus Home Edition OS X 10.4 . 2. Double-click on Sophos Anti-Virus Home Edition.mpkg. 3. When prompted that “This package will run a program to determine if the software can be installed,” click the Continue button.  This will check your system for any possible conflicts that would prevent Sophos from installing. 4. If there are no conflicts, the Welcome Screen will appear.  Click Continue. 5. At the Software License Agreement screen, click Continue. 6. Click the Agree button. 7. At the Select a Destination screen, click on Macintosh HD (for most, this will be the only option) and then click Continue. 8. At the Sophos Anti-Virus Updates screen, click Continue. 9. At the Standard Install screen, click the Install button to proceed with the installation. 10. When prompted, enter your username and password for your Mac computer. 11. At the Completion screen, take a moment to read through the brief information on how to use Sophos Anti-Virus for Mac Home Edition.  Click Continue. 12. At the Installation was Successful screen, click Close. 13. You should now have a black Sophos shield icon in the Menu Bar at the upper right of your screen.   How Do I Use Sophos Anti-Virus for Mac Home Edition? Sophos runs in the background and scans files for threats whenever the files are opened.  If you want to perform a manual scan of all your files, click the black Sophos shield in the menu bar and select Scan Local Drives.  
  • Using Remote Desktop in Mac OS X to Connect to Windows XP Mac OS 10.6 Snow Leopard NOTE: These instructions are for connecting to Windows XP SP2 and 7 from Mac OS X 10.2.8 or later. NOTE: It is recommended that the Windows Firewall be active at all times on your office computer. To turn it on or confirm its status please follow the steps below.  Click on Start, select Control Panel, then select Windows Firewall. (Windows 7) On the left taskbar, click on Turn Windows Firewall on or off Verify that there is a bullet in front of the option On (recommended) (in Windows XP) or Turn on Windows Firewall (in Windows 7) Windows XP (left) and Windows 7 (right)      Configuring Windows Firewall to Allow a Remote Desktop Connection With the Windows Firewall window still open, complete the following steps: Click on the Exceptions tab. In Windows 7, click on Allow a program or feature through Windows Firewall. Place a check mark in the box in front of Remote Desktop. In Windows 7, scroll down to check that the Domain and Home/Work (Private) is checked for Remote Desktop (for Windows 7 users, complete this step and skip to the section Configuring your Office Computer for Remote Desktop Connection).    Click on the Advanced tab. Click on Local Area Connection to highlight it. Click on the Settings button. Place a checkmark in the box labeled Remote Desktop. If a window labeled Service Settings appears, Click OK. Click OK on both the Advanced Settings and the Windows Firewall window.    Configuring Your Office Computer for a Remote Desktop Connection Click on Start, right-click My Computer and choose Properties. Click on the Remote tab and place a checkmark in the Allow users to connect remotely to this computer box, as shown below. On Windows 7, click on Remote Settings and place a bullet next to Allow connections from computers running any version of Remote Desktop (less secure).　 Windows XP (left) and Windows 7 (right)            Verify that you have the proper permission to connect to your computer by clicking Select Remote Users… or Select Users (Windows 7). Your domain and username should be listed as already having access (as shown below.)    NOTE: If you do not already have access, click on the Add... button as shown above and a window similar to the one below will appear. In the space labeled Enter the object names to select (examples):, type your domain (the domain for employees is Hamilton-d) and user ID.  For example, Hamilton-d\dhubbard. Click Check Names and, if it is a valid username, the domain name will disappear and your username will become underlined. For example, in the illustration below, hamilton-d\dhubbard will change to dhubbard. Click OK to close the Select Users window. Click OK to close the Remote Desktop Users window and click OK again to close the System Properties window. Click on Start and then click on Run… In the Open: field, type cmd and click OK. A box with a black background and white text will appear. Type ipconfig at the blinking cursor and press on your keyboard. Make note of the IP Address (as shown above,) you will need to take it with you to access your computer remotely. (NOTE:  You should do this each time you plan to use Remote Desktop Access as IP addresses change periodically.) Close the window. To access your computer using Remote Desktop, your office computer must be on and connected to the Hamilton Network. You can log off of your computer and leave it turned on or you can lock your desktop while logged on. To lock your computer, press the , , and keys simultaneously, and then click on Lock Computer. This completes setting up your office computer. These settings will remain in effect and do not need to be repeated. Installing Remote Desktop Connection on Mac OS X On your OS X computer, go to Microsoft’s webpage for the Remote Desktop Connection Client for Mac OS X: http://www.microsoft.com/mac/downloads?pid=Mactopia_RDC&fid=68346E0D-44D3-4065-99BB-B664B27EE1F0#viewer Click on Download Now to download the file. If your browser asks you what to do with this file, tell it to save the file. If your browser automatically opens the file with Stuffit, skip to step 5. After the file finishes downloading, go to the location the file was downloaded to (most likely the desktop) and double-click the RDC_2.1.1_ALL.dmg file. You’ll now have a white volume on your desktop called RDC. Open this white volume if it isn’t already open. To install the application, double-click on the RDC Installer and follow the instructions to install the application onto your computer. You should now see the Remote Desktop Connection application on your dock. Connecting to Your Office Computer from a Remote OS X Computer Open the Remote Desktop Connection application. The first time you open the application, the End User License Agreement will pop up. Accept the license agreement. Then a window will pop up asking you to register. Click Register Later. You will not see these windows when you open the program in the future. In the Computer: field, type the IP address (from step 10 on page 4) for your office computer. Click Connect. In the Log On to Windows dialog box, type your network username, password, and domain and then click OK. You may be prompted with the below message. Click Connect. Once connected, go to the RDC menu and select Preferences. Click the Security icon and select Always connect, even if authentication fails. This will remove future message prompts like the one below.  The Remote Desktop window will open and you will see the desktop settings, files, and programs that are on your office computer. Your office computer will remain locked and no one will be able to use it without a password, nor will anyone see the work you are doing on your office computer remotely. To improve performance, you will not see your usual desktop picture if you have one set up. To Log Off and End a Session In the Remote Desktop Session, click Start and select Disconnect.       When it asks you if you are sure you want to disconnect, click Disconnect.
  • Web Publishing Using Mac OSX Mac OS 10.6 Snow Leopard OSX 10.6, 10.7, and newer 1.) From the Menu bar, choose Go 2.) Choose Connect to Server... 3.) To connect to: WWW (the main Hamilton site), on the address line, type in smb://polaris/hamilton then click on Connect. Academics (academics.hamilton.edu), on the address line, type in smb://polaris/Academics then click on Connect. Students (students.hamilton.edu), on the address line, type in smb://polaris/Students then click on Connect. 4a.) An Authentication window will appear. Hamilton employees, enter Hamilton-d\username for the Name Hamilton students, enter Hamilton-s\username for the Name 4b.) Enter your network Password, then click Connect to connect.   OSX 10.5 1.) From the Menu bar, choose Go 2.) Choose Connect to Server... 3.) To connect to: WWW (the main Hamilton site), on the address line, type in smb://polaris:139/hamilton then click on Connect. Academics (academics.hamilton.edu), on the address line, type in smb://polaris:139/Academics then click on Connect. Students (students.hamilton.edu), on the address line, type in smb://polaris:139/Students then click on Connect. 4a.) An Authentication window will appear.  Hamilton employees, enter Hamilton-d\username for the Name  Hamilton students, enter Hamilton-s\username for the Name 4b.) Enter your network Password, then click Connect to connect.   OSX 10.4 OSX 10.4 users cannot connect to polaris using the standard on-campus methods.  Please follow the instructions for FTP.
Mac OS 10.7 Lion
  • Burning a Disc Using Burn Folder in OSX Mac OS 10.7 Lion
  • Creating a PDF in OS X Mac OS 10.7 Lion Open the document in its native application. From the File menu, select Print. From the File menu, select Page Setup… The Page Setup window will pop up. Format for Any Printer and set Paper Size equal to the size of your document. Click OK. Click on the PDF… button in the lower left corner of the Print window, and select Save as PDF…  Save window will pop up. After you name your file and choose where to save it, click Save.
  • Installing Sophos Anti-Virus on Mac OS 10.4-10.8 for Employees Mac OS 10.7 Lion For Off Campus Use Removal of old Sophos (if necessary) NOTE: If you already have Sophos on your computer go through the removal steps otherwise go to the section Downloading and Installing Sophos 1. At Finder click on your hard drive icon. 2. Open the folder Library. 3. Open the folder Application Support. 4. Open the folder Sophos Anti-virus. 5. Launch the Remove Sophos Anti-virus. 6. Once Sophos is removed from the computer you can install the new version of Sophos. Downloading and Installing Sophos 1. Launch Firefox. NOTE: Safari will not work to download Sophos. 2. Please replace userid with your hamilton user name as you type in the Address line ftp://hamilton-d\userid@software.hamilton.edu/sophos 3. In the dialog box that appears type in your Hamilton Network password. 4. Click OK. 5. Click on the folder link Sophos Mac OS 10.2 & above. 6. Click on the link ESCOSX.zip to download the Sophos installer on your computer. 7. In the dialog box that appears, choose the bullet in front of Save File. 8. Click OK. 9. Locate the ESCOSX.zip that you downloaded. 10. Double click on the ESCOSX.zip to unpack the file folder.   Installing Sophos 1. Close all other applications. 2. Open the folder ESCOSX file folder on the desktop. 3. Double-click on the file Sophos Anti-Virus.mpkg. a. If the installer launches an Authenticate window, enter your username and password. This will be the username and password you use to log onto the computer when it boots up. After typing them in click OK. 4. Click Continue in window This package contains a program that …  5. The Welcome to the Sophos Anti-Virus Installer screen appears. Click Continue. 6. The Important Information screen appears. Click Continue. 7. The Select a Destination screen appears. Select your computer’s hard drive. Click Continue. 8. The Standard Install screen appears. Click Install. a. If the installer launches an Authenticate window, enter your username and password. This will be the username and password you use to log onto the computer. 9. When the progress bar is complete, you will see a message indicating Install Succeeded. Click Close.   Configuring Sophos 1. Click on the Sophos Shield    located by the Time & Date in the top right corner on the menu bar. 2. Select Open Sophos Anti-virus Preferences. 3. Click on the Lock button labeled Click lock to make changes in the lower left hand corner. 4. An Authenticate window appears. Enter your username and password. This will be the username and password you use to log onto the computer when it boots up. After typing them in click OK. 5. Click on the AutoUpdate tab (see figure below.) 6. On the Update from primary location select Company web server. 7. In the URL: field http://sophosupdate.hamilton.edu/cids/s000/escosx 8. In the User name: field, using your network username in place of “userid,” enter Hamilton-d\userid if you are an employee. For example, if you were a employee named Ulysses Grant, you would type hamilton-d\ugrant in the User name field. 9. In the Password: field, enter your Hamilton Network Password.  This is the password you use to access the ESS or SSS server. 10. Place a check in the box labeled Check for updates on connection  to network or internet. 11. Quit System Preferences by selecting System Preferences (from the main menu bar), and then Quit System Preferences.     What to Expect When You’re Finished 1. After your installation is complete, Sophos will scan for viruses in the background and will automatically remove any that are found. 2. Sophos will update every day automatically via the Internet. Remember that if your computer is not connecting to the Internet Sophos Anti-Virus will not be able to receive up dates, and your virus-protection will be ineffective. 3. We recommend that you repair disk permissions on your computer after the installation is finished, as outlined below. Repairing Disk Permissions 1. In your hard drive, open your Applications folder and then open the Utilities folder. 2. Open Disk Utility. 3. Click on the name of your hard drive in the left section of the window. Under the First Aid tab, click on Repair Disk Permissions. 4. You’ll see a progress bar near the bottom of the window showing the status of the repair. You’ll also see text appear in the blank section of the window as permissions are repaired. Be patient as this process can take several minutes. 5. When finished, you’ll be notified that the Permissions repair is complete. 6. Quit Disk Utility.    
  • Sophos Home Edition on Mac OS X 10.4-10.7 for Students Mac OS 10.7 Lion Students Only As Macintosh becomes more popular, it is increasingly a target for an emerging group of viruses and spyware designed specifically for the Mac operating system.  It is in the best interests of Mac users to take action now to protect their systems.  This document explains how to download and install Sophos’ free Anti-Virus solution for student Mac users. Download Sophos Anti-Virus 1. Visit the Sophos Anti-Virus for Mac Home Edition page on the Sophos website: http://www.sophos.com/en-us/products/free-tools/sophos-antivirus-for-mac-home-edition.aspx 2. Click on the Download Now button:  3. When prompted, click the Save File button. 4. Select Desktop as the save location and then click the Save button.   Installing Sophos Anti-Virus 1. Double-click the savosx_72_he.dmg file that you just downloaded to the desktop.  It will mount and automatically open Sophos Anti-Virus Home Edition OS X 10.4 . 2. Double-click on Sophos Anti-Virus Home Edition.mpkg. 3. When prompted that “This package will run a program to determine if the software can be installed,” click the Continue button.  This will check your system for any possible conflicts that would prevent Sophos from installing. 4. If there are no conflicts, the Welcome Screen will appear.  Click Continue. 5. At the Software License Agreement screen, click Continue. 6. Click the Agree button. 7. At the Select a Destination screen, click on Macintosh HD (for most, this will be the only option) and then click Continue. 8. At the Sophos Anti-Virus Updates screen, click Continue. 9. At the Standard Install screen, click the Install button to proceed with the installation. 10. When prompted, enter your username and password for your Mac computer. 11. At the Completion screen, take a moment to read through the brief information on how to use Sophos Anti-Virus for Mac Home Edition.  Click Continue. 12. At the Installation was Successful screen, click Close. 13. You should now have a black Sophos shield icon in the Menu Bar at the upper right of your screen.   How Do I Use Sophos Anti-Virus for Mac Home Edition? Sophos runs in the background and scans files for threats whenever the files are opened.  If you want to perform a manual scan of all your files, click the black Sophos shield in the menu bar and select Scan Local Drives.  
  • Using Remote Desktop in Mac OS X to Connect to Windows XP Mac OS 10.7 Lion NOTE: These instructions are for connecting to Windows XP SP2 and 7 from Mac OS X 10.2.8 or later. NOTE: It is recommended that the Windows Firewall be active at all times on your office computer. To turn it on or confirm its status please follow the steps below.  Click on Start, select Control Panel, then select Windows Firewall. (Windows 7) On the left taskbar, click on Turn Windows Firewall on or off Verify that there is a bullet in front of the option On (recommended) (in Windows XP) or Turn on Windows Firewall (in Windows 7) Windows XP (left) and Windows 7 (right)      Configuring Windows Firewall to Allow a Remote Desktop Connection With the Windows Firewall window still open, complete the following steps: Click on the Exceptions tab. In Windows 7, click on Allow a program or feature through Windows Firewall. Place a check mark in the box in front of Remote Desktop. In Windows 7, scroll down to check that the Domain and Home/Work (Private) is checked for Remote Desktop (for Windows 7 users, complete this step and skip to the section Configuring your Office Computer for Remote Desktop Connection).    Click on the Advanced tab. Click on Local Area Connection to highlight it. Click on the Settings button. Place a checkmark in the box labeled Remote Desktop. If a window labeled Service Settings appears, Click OK. Click OK on both the Advanced Settings and the Windows Firewall window.    Configuring Your Office Computer for a Remote Desktop Connection Click on Start, right-click My Computer and choose Properties. Click on the Remote tab and place a checkmark in the Allow users to connect remotely to this computer box, as shown below. On Windows 7, click on Remote Settings and place a bullet next to Allow connections from computers running any version of Remote Desktop (less secure).　 Windows XP (left) and Windows 7 (right)            Verify that you have the proper permission to connect to your computer by clicking Select Remote Users… or Select Users (Windows 7). Your domain and username should be listed as already having access (as shown below.)    NOTE: If you do not already have access, click on the Add... button as shown above and a window similar to the one below will appear. In the space labeled Enter the object names to select (examples):, type your domain (the domain for employees is Hamilton-d) and user ID.  For example, Hamilton-d\dhubbard. Click Check Names and, if it is a valid username, the domain name will disappear and your username will become underlined. For example, in the illustration below, hamilton-d\dhubbard will change to dhubbard. Click OK to close the Select Users window. Click OK to close the Remote Desktop Users window and click OK again to close the System Properties window. Click on Start and then click on Run… In the Open: field, type cmd and click OK. A box with a black background and white text will appear. Type ipconfig at the blinking cursor and press on your keyboard. Make note of the IP Address (as shown above,) you will need to take it with you to access your computer remotely. (NOTE:  You should do this each time you plan to use Remote Desktop Access as IP addresses change periodically.) Close the window. To access your computer using Remote Desktop, your office computer must be on and connected to the Hamilton Network. You can log off of your computer and leave it turned on or you can lock your desktop while logged on. To lock your computer, press the , , and keys simultaneously, and then click on Lock Computer. This completes setting up your office computer. These settings will remain in effect and do not need to be repeated. Installing Remote Desktop Connection on Mac OS X On your OS X computer, go to Microsoft’s webpage for the Remote Desktop Connection Client for Mac OS X: http://www.microsoft.com/mac/downloads?pid=Mactopia_RDC&fid=68346E0D-44D3-4065-99BB-B664B27EE1F0#viewer Click on Download Now to download the file. If your browser asks you what to do with this file, tell it to save the file. If your browser automatically opens the file with Stuffit, skip to step 5. After the file finishes downloading, go to the location the file was downloaded to (most likely the desktop) and double-click the RDC_2.1.1_ALL.dmg file. You’ll now have a white volume on your desktop called RDC. Open this white volume if it isn’t already open. To install the application, double-click on the RDC Installer and follow the instructions to install the application onto your computer. You should now see the Remote Desktop Connection application on your dock. Connecting to Your Office Computer from a Remote OS X Computer Open the Remote Desktop Connection application. The first time you open the application, the End User License Agreement will pop up. Accept the license agreement. Then a window will pop up asking you to register. Click Register Later. You will not see these windows when you open the program in the future. In the Computer: field, type the IP address (from step 10 on page 4) for your office computer. Click Connect. In the Log On to Windows dialog box, type your network username, password, and domain and then click OK. You may be prompted with the below message. Click Connect. Once connected, go to the RDC menu and select Preferences. Click the Security icon and select Always connect, even if authentication fails. This will remove future message prompts like the one below.  The Remote Desktop window will open and you will see the desktop settings, files, and programs that are on your office computer. Your office computer will remain locked and no one will be able to use it without a password, nor will anyone see the work you are doing on your office computer remotely. To improve performance, you will not see your usual desktop picture if you have one set up. To Log Off and End a Session In the Remote Desktop Session, click Start and select Disconnect.       When it asks you if you are sure you want to disconnect, click Disconnect.
  • Web Publishing Using Mac OSX Mac OS 10.7 Lion OSX 10.6, 10.7, and newer 1.) From the Menu bar, choose Go 2.) Choose Connect to Server... 3.) To connect to: WWW (the main Hamilton site), on the address line, type in smb://polaris/hamilton then click on Connect. Academics (academics.hamilton.edu), on the address line, type in smb://polaris/Academics then click on Connect. Students (students.hamilton.edu), on the address line, type in smb://polaris/Students then click on Connect. 4a.) An Authentication window will appear. Hamilton employees, enter Hamilton-d\username for the Name Hamilton students, enter Hamilton-s\username for the Name 4b.) Enter your network Password, then click Connect to connect.   OSX 10.5 1.) From the Menu bar, choose Go 2.) Choose Connect to Server... 3.) To connect to: WWW (the main Hamilton site), on the address line, type in smb://polaris:139/hamilton then click on Connect. Academics (academics.hamilton.edu), on the address line, type in smb://polaris:139/Academics then click on Connect. Students (students.hamilton.edu), on the address line, type in smb://polaris:139/Students then click on Connect. 4a.) An Authentication window will appear.  Hamilton employees, enter Hamilton-d\username for the Name  Hamilton students, enter Hamilton-s\username for the Name 4b.) Enter your network Password, then click Connect to connect.   OSX 10.4 OSX 10.4 users cannot connect to polaris using the standard on-campus methods.  Please follow the instructions for FTP.
Mapelsoft Maple
  • Installing the Citrix Client on your Computer Mapelsoft Maple Installing Citrix Client These instructions only pertain to your personal computer.  If you are on a public lab, or Hamilton-issued computer, the Citrix Client has been preinstalled. This process need be followed only once for any single computer in any academic year. If it has been some time since you last installed the Citrix client on your computer, you may want to update the client for the best performance. The steps for installation are: • On a Windows system: o Log into the Citrixweb page. • A page will appear that prompts you to download the client. Place a check in the check box and click Download. The file will request to be saved to your computer. Please save it to your Desktop. • Double-click on the installer when it when it has downloaded. • Once the installation has completed, click the Continue button on the web page. • Proceed to Launching Citrix Programs. • If this does not seem to be the case for you, follow the directions for updating below. • On a Macintosh system: o After logging in, you will be taken to a screen that will prompt you to download the plugin. o Click Download to download the plugin. o The Citrix Plug-in DMG file will download to your Desktop or Downloads folder. Find the file and double-click on it. o A window will open containing the plug-in installation file—double-click it to launch the installer. o Install the app by clicking Continue and Agree until you see a window that indicates the software has been installed successfully. o Once the installation has completed, click the Continue button on the web page. o Proceed to Launching Citrix Programs. o If this does not seem to be the case for you, follow the directions for updating below. • Updating your Citrix client, any system o Log into the Citrixweb page. o Near the top of the applications page, you will see a horizontal bar with some menu choices in it. The “Applications” menu will probably be dark blue, indicating that the “Applications” screen is what you are seeing. o Click on the “Preferences” menu and select “Connection Preferences”. o Under “Client settings”, click on “Run Client Detection”. • If you are immediately returned to the “Applications” screen, you should see an information message under the menu bar and above the applications list that says “The preferred client is already available on your computer.” • You’re done, there is no update or installation necessary. o If you don’t have the most current version of the client, you will be taken to a screen that allows you to download the client. • Follow the directions on that page to download the client. • If you receive a warning about the file having been downloaded from the internet, click “Save file” or “Open”, according to the screen you see. • Double click the saved file to run. • If asked if you want to allow the program to make changes to your computer, click “Yes”. o You should now be able to return to the Citrixweb Application page, and select the software you wish to use.  
  • Introduction to Citrix Mapelsoft Maple What is Citrix? The computers in public labs deliver some specialized software via Citrix – a client/server configuration that makes software more broadly available to students and faculty. In this model, there is a server which runs the Citrix system, and on which Windows desktop software, like SPSS or Maple, has been installed. There is also a client, a small piece of software that you, the end user, install on your personal computer. Finally, there is a web page (http://citrixweb.hamilton.edu) that allows you to tell the Citrix server which software you want to run. After that, the program you choose runs on the Citrix server, but looks like it is running on your personal computer. You get access to all the same resources you can normally access from your computer. Note that it doesn’t matter whether your personal computer is a Macintosh or Windows computer. Citrix has a client written for either of these computer platforms, and will make the necessary translation so that you can run the software from your computer - that is “from”, not “on”. The actual software, such as Exceed or Stata, never runs on your personal computer, only on the Citrix server. One of the important advantages of the Citrix server for teaching and learning is the ability of the students to access the software from their dormitory rooms, or even away from campus - any location where they can use the web to reach http://citrixweb.hamilton.edu/. It is also possible for faculty to use this URL to reach the software from home as well as the office. However, be aware that you must remain connected to the internet for your entire Citrix work session. Available Programs As of August 2011, the following programs are available through Citrix: • Exceed 14 • iThink 9 • Maple 15 • SPSS Statistics 19 • Stata 11 • StatView 5 If you would like to request a new program be added to the Citrix server, please contact the Instructional Technology Support Services team. Common Citrix Problems and their Solutions Unable to Log In If you are unable to log into the Citrix web portal, make sure your username and password are correct. If you are a student, make sure the Domain drop down menu says students.hamilton.edu.  The default domain (Hamilton.edu) is correct for faculty and other employees of the college. Keyboard Shortcuts Citrix applications are presented in a Windows environment.  Therefore, keyboard shortcuts must be those used in the Windows file management system. Macintosh users should note that the shortcut for copying is and the shortcut for pasting is . You may also use the Edit menu to select these functions. Folder Access If you are experiencing difficulties navigating through folders, make sure the folder you are trying to open does not contain the forward slash ‘/’ symbol. If it does, rename it and try accessing it again. Other ITS Citrix Webpages Registering and Logging into Citrix Installing the Citrix Client on your Computer Launching Citrix Programs, Opening and Saving Files in Citrix Programs, and Printing from Citrix Programs
  • Registering and Logging into Citrix Mapelsoft Maple Registration If this is the first time you are trying to login to Citrix, you MUST REGISTER. The link for registration is on the bottom of the login page. Students will also need to re-register every academic year. Once you register, it will take several minutes (approximately 10) for all of the systems to be updated with your access information. Logging into Citrix Once you are registered, log in to the Citrix Web Portal. The username you should use is the same as your My Hamilton username. The password is the same password you use to access the SSS or ESS servers. If you are a student, you will need to change the Domain dropdown to students.hamilton.edu. If a matrix full of applications appears, please navigate to the Launching Citrix Programs webpage. Else, proceed to the Installing Citrix Client webpage.
Maps
  • GIS and Mapping Blogs Maps I tried not to create this page, but I couldn't resist.  I hope you can't resist these blogs, either! Google Earth and Google Maps related blogs Google Maps Mania Google Earth Blog Ogle Earth Blog (Google Earth and other virtual globes) Google Lat-Long Blog Google Earth Community Google Sightseeing Other Mapping Applications GIS Education Community hosted by ESRI (focussing on ArcGIS, ArcGISOnline, and general GIS topics) Bing Maps blog hosted by Microsoft Free and Open Source GIS Ramblings working with free and open source geographic information systems Paul Shapley's Open Source GIS blog Maps, Old and New Strange Maps cartographic curiosities from Frank Jacobs The Map Room (map entries now continue at Jonathan Crowe) The BIG Map Blog interesting maps, historical maps, BIG maps Geographicus Antique Map Blog antique maps and the rare map trade General Observations on Maps and GIS Borderlines commentary on curious  international borders from the NY Times Diana Maps from Diana Sinton, Director of Spatial Curriculum and Research at the University of Redlands The GIS Doctor geospatial analysis, interesting online mapping applications, GIS software ... Spatially Adjusted from the creator of Planet Geospatial AnyGeo anything geospatial from a GIS user for GISusers Mapperz UK-focused, but general news on maps and services Bit more commercial blogs ... All Points Blog at Directions Magazine/Media GIS Lounge
  • Map-Related Teaching Resources Maps History The University of Oregon has produced an interactive web site featuring Giambattista Nolli's 1748 map of Rome in addition to explanatory articles on architecture, landscape and social/political features of this historical map. The University of Sydney has produced an interactive map of Harlem featuring information drawn from newspapers, legal records and other historical sources of life between 1915-1930. Mapping Dubois is a "research, education, and outreach project ... dedicated to using new technology and archival data to recreate the survey W.E.B. Du Bois conducted of Philadelphia's Seventh Ward for his 1899 classic book, The Philadelphia Negro." The New York Public Library's Maps Division developed the Map Warper, an online tool that allows the easy alignment of historical (mostly fire insurance) and digital maps. This alignment allows one to connect historical maps to many other sources of data to further the analysis of the history of New York City and environs. For projects involving historical census data, try GIS for History, funded by the NEH, to "give history students and teachers the power ... to investigate critical moments in American history." Mapping Gothic France "builds upon a theoretical framework derived from the work of Henri Lefèbvre that seeks to establish linkages between the architectural space of individual buildings, geo-political space, and the social space resulting from the interaction (collaboration and conflict) between multiple agents -- builders and users." Harvard University's China Historical GIS is a project "to establish a database of populated places and historical administrative units for the period of Chinese history between 221 BCE and 1911 CE." This site also features some resources for Japan. Three great resources for the Peutinger Map: the multi-layered viewer Peutinger Map from Richard Talbert's Rome's World; the clickable Complete Tabula Peutingeriana compared with a modern map; and Omnes Viae, the map reconstructed over Google Maps with a Latin route planner. The US Holocaust Museum uses Google Earth to map various aspects of the Holocaust and World War II. This site includes additional resources and bibliographies. Literature Walking Ulysses "is designed to represent, through an exploration of each of the senses, the experience of living in Dublin on a typical day around the turn of the twentieth century. Our map narrates the journey of Stephen Dedalus and Leopold Bloom over the course of a single day, paralleling the progress of James Joyce’s Ulysses." Funded by the British Academy, Mapping the Lakes "maps out two textual accounts of journeys through the landscape of the Lake District: Thomas Gray's tour of the region in the autumn of 1769; and Samuel Taylor Coleridge's 'circumcursion' of the area in August 1802." Social Sciences Social Explorer provides data maps -- including time series -- of census data. One may also explore census data and demographic trends with Census Scope, brought to you by the Social Science Data Analysis Network (SSDAN) at the University of Michigan. The US 2010 Research Project examines changes in American society in the recent past. Create maps of census data for counties and neighborhoods anywhere in the U.S. and as far back as 1940. Another tool for census data exploration via mapping is the Historical Census Browser from UVA Library. Get a quick view of unemployment statistics at the Bureau of Labor Statistics with interactive state/county/MSA maps. The Associated Press provides the Economic Stress Index, which maps economic stress by county (unemployment/foreclosure/bankruptcy rates) and also offers a time series from October 2007 to the present. Science CIESIN/The Beacon Institute has developed The Hudson River Watershed Mapper.
  • Sample Student Mapping Projects Maps Wondering how to use maps in your classes? Here are a number of examples of student and class projects using a variety of mapping tools, plus some general resources (bottom of page). Students at Colby College have created the Atlas of Maine as part of their introductory GIS course. Students at Trinity College have created several Google mash-ups for their course on "Invisible Cities." Another project at Trinity College led to the creation of Smart Choices for school choice and the On The Line project, a public history web-book which studies "How Schooling, Housing, and Civil Rights Shaped Hartford and its Suburbs." Students at Middlebury College have created a number of interesting maps in their Spatial Visualization course. Amherst College has started Cityscapes, an online discovery tool for urban and cultural studies. Introduction to German Literature and Culture. Dr. Eric Klaus (Hobart and William Smith Colleges) assigns students in this German Studies course a Google Earth-based project focused on understanding the German people and language in relation to their physical landscape. Here is an example project file created by one student in 2009 to aggregate artistic works linked to the Rhine River. I've included Eric's first iteration of the assignment instructions and a subsequent revision based on a few lessons learned. Textual geographies: Spanish Travel Narratives. Eduardo Lage-Otero (Trinity College) Asks his students to analyze and write about a series of excerpts from various adventure books and short stories from the Spanish‐speaking world to study the relationship between fictional characters and the very real geographical and social worlds they inhabit. Using online mapping tools (Google Earth/Google Maps) and other online resources  students develop a deeper understanding of the different micro‐worlds created by each story. Campus Mapping at Smith College. Jon Caris(Smith College)  facilitates a number of Google Earth and Google Maps (as well as GIS) projects on campus. This website lends context to some of these projects. Jon also works with faculty at Smith College to facilitate a student inquiry for incoming freshman. In this context, he uses Google Earth  to help students interpret the environment of Northampton environment, past and present. As part of a Psychology of Space project, Jon worked with student, Stephanie Keep (02), and faculty member Dr. Peter DeVilliers to map perceptions of student safety on campus. Food Mapping at Middlebury College - William Hegman oversees a mapping project first initiated by Middlebury undergraduates in the Environmental Studies Program to help people visualize connections to their food system in a fun and compelling way. Here is an example of the work. Modeling the Alfred University Campus - Justin Grigg coordinates a project to create a 3-dimensional model of the campus using Google Earth and Sketchup. A number of multi-media elements are included (survey forms, video, environmental data etc). See this project file for more information. Bionic Teaching - Tom Woodward (formerly University of Richmond) uses Google Maps to create a classroom visualization based on the novel Whirligig by Bob Fleischman Writing Nature: Digital Storytelling - Prof. Betsy Bolton (Swarthmore College) has students use Google Maps embedded within blogs to share their poems and related written reflections. Spatial Visualization - Dr. Jeff Howarth (Middlebury College) uses a variety of applications to help students develop skills in information design and spatial reasoning. Researching Hip-Hop in the Bronx - Dr. Steve Pond (Cornell U). This mapping project was created by students enrolled in Music 2501 "Researching Hip Hop" during the fall 2009 semester. The students examined original party and event flyers preserved in Cornell University's Hip Hop Collection to create a geographical overview of the roots of hip hop culture in the Bronx.  Due to copyright restrictions, only a representative sampling of the project is publicly accessible at this time. Mapwalk for Urban History - Dr. Lloyd Benson and Mike Winiski (Furman University) use mobile technologies and Google Maps to include students in virtual tours of urban areas and to help them understand how humans interact with, and are influenced by, their built environment.  The pedagogical value of this practice can be discerned from these student reactions. Historical Maps - Alex Chaucer (Skidmore College) is using Google Maps to distribute historical aerial photographs as image files online. San Antonio College has a page of Web Mapping Modules which illustrate how to "bring GIS to the humanities." Google Earth Outreach provides a platform for non-profits and public benefit organizations, helping them give geographic content to their stories. This site includes a Showcase of different topics, Community resources for organizations, and a number of excellent Tutorials. Hamilton's own Barb Tewksbury presented a seminar on teaching GIS and Remote Sensing in 2010 at the On the Cutting Edge workshop. Although this program focuses on teaching geoscience, there are a number of tips and resources on teaching with GIS in general, including a list of ideal student outcomes. Academic Commons has an article on three projects at DePauw University to engage students with the  community through GIS. ESRI's ArcLessons "is a resource for you to share lessons for using GIS in the classroom." ESRI also features Case Studies of how GIS is used in a number of fields. The Duke University Teaching and Learning with Google Earth blog features lesson plans, articles, layers and more.
Mass Mailing Lists
  • How to Set Your ListServ Subscription to Digest Mode Mass Mailing Lists What is Digest Mode? Listserv offers many options for managing the behavior of the lists to which you are subscribed.  One of the most popular settings is Digest Mode.  When it is activated for your subscription, Listserv collects all the messages sent to that list from that point forward for each day and sends them to you in a single message that contains a table of contents followed by the full text of each message.  (NOTE:  Extremely active lists may result in two or more digest messages.)  All of Hamilton's mass mailing lists (e.g. events-all, notices-facutly, etc.) allow you to choose Digest Mode.  The digest message for these lists is sent each day at 4:30 p.m..  Private lists (those for student organizations or departments) are sent at midnight by default.  The list owner can change the time at which the digest is sent.   For assistance, please contact Debby Quayle at 859-4031 (dquayle@hamilton.edu). Getting Started The easiest way to manage your Listserv subscription is through the Listserv web interface.   Before you can use it, however, you must have a Listserv password.  It will allow you to manage your own subscription(s) as well as manage any lists you may own.  If you already have a password, you can proceed to the steps below. Set Your Subscription to Digest Mode In your web browser (Internet Explorer, Firefox, etc.) go to http://listserv.hamilton.edu.  Log in using your full e-mail address and the password you created for yourself for Listserv. In the Listserv web site, click on Subscribers Corner in the menu across the top. The lists to which you are subscribed should appear under the red My Lists tab. Locate the list you wish to set to Digest Mode and click on the word Settings next to the list name.  This will open a page that displays your subscription settings for that list. Click to put a dot next to Digest (HTML format). Scroll to the bottom of the page and click on the Update button. Return to the Subscriber's Corner menu to do the same for other subscriptions you wish to set to Digest Mode. When you are finished, click to Log Out of Listserv (located in the upper right corner of the screen beneeth the green questionmark). Removing Digest Mode Repeat the steps 1-5 described above for setting Digest Mode. In step 6, click to put a dot next to Regular. Scroll to the bottom of the page and click on the Update button. Return to the Subscriber's Corner menu to do the same for other subscriptions you wish to set to Rgular Mode. When you are finished, click to Log Out of Listserv (located in the upper right corner of the screen beneeth the green questionmark).
  • Listserv Resources Mass Mailing Lists ListServ is a commercial software product installed on Hamilton College's E-mail system. It is designed to provide an easy way to create and maintain large or specialized E-mail mailing lists. These lists can be used for E-mail based distribution of information, discussion, questions and answers, etc. Lists are created and "owned" by an E-mail user who manages the list's behavior. Members of the list are subscribed to it either by the list owner or by following instructions provided by the list owner. All lists that are created and maintained at Hamilton College are kept private. Subscriber names and E-mail addresses are only available to the list owner. They are never published. As a list member, you are able to manage certain aspects of your subscription. As the list owner, you are able to manage a wide variety of aspects of the list's behavior. The links that follow will provide you with some basic information about both. If you have a question about ListServ that requires personal attention, please contact the ITS Help Desk at 315-859-4181 or write to helpdesk@hamilton.edu.   Mass Mailing List Guidelines Guidelines for ListServ Mass Mailing Lists Request a New ListServ List Request a New List List Owner Related Documents Becoming a ListServ List Owner Quick Start Guide for List Owners  List User (Subscriber) Related Documents How to Send Mail to One of the Mass E-mail Lists How to Subscribe or Unsubscribe to/from a ListServ List How to Change your ListServ Password How to Set Your Listserv Subscription to Digest Mode
  • Student Organization Account Creation Process Mass Mailing Lists There are two types of accounts managed using the Student Organization Management system, Mass E-mail Only and Student Organization accounts. Both account types are described below. Mass E-mail Mass E-mail accounts are used by student groups who only need the ability to post messages directly to ListServs. One e-mail addres, specified by the submitter, is given posting privileges. The address can either by a student's Hamilton e-mail address or a generic group account. This system allows submitters to request a group e-mail account. This request is sent to Debby Quayle, who communicates directly with the submitter to create the e-mail account. Once the Mass E-mail Group information is reviewed and approved by Student Activities the necessary ListServ commands are automatically sent and the account is granted ListServ posting privileges.   Student Organization Recognized Student Organizations have to be approved by Student Activities every year, and are required to provide contact and leadership information, a membership roster, and a constitution. By registering, student organizations have benefits including using the College name, access to facilities, vans, funding, supplies and resources, and e-mail and storage server space. Student Organizations have the ability to request an organization e-mail address. This request is sent to Debby Quayle, who works directly with the organization's leadership to create the account.    
Microsoft Internet Explorer
  • Adding a Website to Your Favorites or Bookmarks Bar Microsoft Internet Explorer If you find yourself frequently visiting the same web site (e.g. Google) you can add it to your Favorites bar so that it is only a click away when you need it.  This is also a recommended alternative to installing web site “toolbars”, such as those offered by Google or Yahoo.  Many site-specific toolbars also come with spyware and adware, neither of which is desirable.  NOTE:  This document assumes you are using Internet Explorer on a Windows computer. Creating a link 1. Open Internet Explorer in your usual manner. 2. Navigate to the web site you want to add to your links bar (e.g. Google.com)   3. Click on the Google icon and drag it onto the “links” bar that (usually) appears below the Address bar.                                                                                                     4. Now, when you click on the icon you added to the links bar, it will take you quickly to that site.  Editing the name of the link Sometimes the site name is so long that it may take up a lot of room on your links bar.  You can edit the name as it appears on the links bar by doing the following. 1. Click on Favorites and then select Organize Favorites (shown at right).                                 2. Click on Links (shown at left).     4. Click on the site you’ve added (in this example, Google, shown at right) 5. Click on Rename.                                                                               6. Type the name for the site as you want it to appear in your links bar then click on Close.          7. You may find that after you click on Close your new site (e.g. Google) might not appear in the desired position in the links bar.  You can reposition it within the links bar by clicking on the icon for the site and dragging it to a different location.   For questions or comments regarding this document, please e-mail helpdesk@hamilton.edu.  
  • Clearing Your Cache and Cookies Microsoft Internet Explorer If your computer is not performing at its usual rate when browsing web pages (e.g. it's "slow" or "hangs" sporadically), the first thing you want to do is clear your cache and cookies. Every web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer, Mozilla Firefox, Safari, etc.) caches visited websites to reduce bandwidtch usage and server load. This allows your web browser display pages faster by loading them from the cache stored on your hard drive. However, sometimes the cache can take up disk space and result in slower browser performing. Cookies are used by websites to store informtion about a particular activity. Clearing your cache and cookies will occasically allow the browser to perform faster and free up space on your computer's local hard drive. To learn how to clear your cache and cookies in a particular browser, click below: http://www.google.com/support/accounts/bin/answer.py?answer=32050
  • Comparison of Browser Interfaces Microsoft Internet Explorer   Browsing       Browser History Accessing Browser History       Browser History Interface   Bookmarks Adding a Bookmark     Accessing Bookmarks   Trust Certificates      
Microsoft Office 2007
  • Embedding Video in Microsoft PowerPoint on Mac OS X Microsoft Office 2007 Embedding Video in Microsoft PowerPoint 2007 on a Macintosh Computer Using a compressed video 1. First create a folder and place the movie you want to add to the PowerPoint inside the folder. NOTE: If you want to be able to play this video in PowerPoint on a Windows computer, use a compression type such as wmv.   2. Save your PowerPoint to the same location of the movie. 3. To embed a compressed video clip in Microsoft PowerPoint, go to Insert -> Movie, and then navigate to the folder that contains the movie. Once you highlighted the movie you want, click the Choose button. 4. PowerPoint will ask you if you want the video clip to play When Clicked or Automatically. Chose your desired setting by clicking on either button. 5. To change the size of the video hover over one of the corners until a diagonal double-sided arrow appears,  then click and drag the video to a desired size. 6. To change the location hover over one of the sides of the video until a four arrow cross appears, now click and hold down the mouse while dragging to a desired location. 7. To view your PowerPoint video click the Slide Show button. 8. Save the PowerPoint and Copy the folder with the video and PowerPoint to the location you want to store it (i.e. SSS, USB Drive, etc.) NOTE: Not all computers have the same specifications; so make sure you are using a compressed file type that will work on the computer you will be presenting.
  • Embedding Video in Microsoft PowerPoint on Windows XP Microsoft Office 2007 Embedding Video in Microsoft PowerPoint 2007 on a Windows XP Computer Using a compressed video 1. First create a folder and place the movie you want to add to the PowerPoint inside the folder. NOTE: If you want to be able to play this video on another computer, make sure the file type you are using is supported. 2. Save your PowerPoint to the same location of the movie. 3. To embed a compressed video clip in Microsoft PowerPoint, go to the Insert tab, click Movie-> Movie from File, and then navigate to the folder that contains the movie. Once you highlighted the movie you want, click the OK button. 4. PowerPoint will ask you if you want the video clip to play When Clicked or Automatically. Chose you desired setting by clicking on either button. 5. To change the size of the video hover over one of the corners until a diagonal double-sided arrow appears, now click and drag the video to a desired size. 6. To change the location hover over one of the sides of the video until a four arrow cross appears, now click and hold down the mouse while dragging to a desired location. 7. To view your PowerPoint video click the View Tab and click the Slide Show button. 8. Save the PowerPoint and Copy the folder with the video and PowerPoint to the location you want to store it (i.e. SSS, USB Drive, etc.) NOTE: Not all computers have the same specifications; so make sure you are using a compressed file type that will work on the computer you will be presenting.
  • Large Format Poster PDF Instructions for Office 2007 Microsoft Office 2007 Office 2007 PowerPoint Large Format Poster PDF Instructions (Windows only)   Instructions 1. Open your PowerPoint file (.pptx) 2. Click on “Office Logo” 3. Select “Save As” from drop down menu, 4. Select “PDF” from side menu 5. Select where you want to save the file, Click on “Publish” button
Microsoft Office 2010
  • Microsoft Office 2010 Work at Home License for Windows Microsoft Office 2010 License Terms and Conditions Hamilton College subscribes to the Microsoft Campus Agreement volume licensing program for the Microsoft Office applications used on campus (Word, Excel, and PowerPoint). This agreement includes “Work at Home” rights for Office according to the following terms and conditions: Faculty and staff who are licensed to use the particular product at school, have the right to run one copy of that product on a home PC that they own or lease for school-related purposes only. (Microsoft Campus and School v.3.2b, 2004). Your DVD is good for two installations: the original installation on your home machine and a reinstall if necessary. Please do not use this DVD to install Microsoft Office on your college-owned computer. NOTE:  If you received three discs in your “at home” CD/DVD pack, please use the DVD labeled Microsoft Office Professional Plus 2010 (Product Key Required).  The other two discs are for installing Microsoft Lync 2010 and Microsoft Business Contact Manager 2010. Recommended System Requirements Processor                               500 megahertz (MHz) processor or higher Operating System                Windows XP (with SP3), Vista (with SP1) or 7 Memory                                 512 MB RAM Disk Space                            Minimum 3.5 GB of hard-disk space required Disk Drive                             DVD drive Note: Office 2010 does not run on the Microsoft Windows Me, Windows 98, Windows 2000, or Windows NT operating systems. Product Key On the back of the DVD sleeve you will find a 25 character alphanumeric code called a product key, similar to the one shown below.  Keep this product key in a safe place, it is a unique code needed to install Office and to verify your license with Microsoft. Uninstall Old Versions of Office Before installing Office 2010, you must uninstall any older versions of Microsoft Office currently installed on your computer. If you do not have an older version of Office on your computer, skip ahead to the Install Office 2010 section. If you do have an older version of Office on your computer, uninstall it as follows: Go to the Start button (lower left corner of your screen) and open the Control Panel. Windows XP: Open Add or Remove Programs Windows Vista/7: Open Programs and Features After the list of programs populates, scroll down and click on “Microsoft Office Professional***” Click Remove or Uninstall. Follow the on-screen prompts to remove Office. Reboot after Office is finished uninstalling. Install Office 2010 We recommend a custom installation to provide the necessary tools, templates, and text converters you are accustomed to using on your college-owned computer. Insert the MS Office DVD.  If “autoplay” is enabled on your system, the installation process will start automatically. In Windows Vista/7, you may be prompted to allow the Microsoft Setup Bootstrapper to make changes to the computer – click Yes. If the DVD does not autoplay, browse to the DVD drive (from My Computer (XP) or Computer (Vista/7)) and manually run setup.exe by double clicking on it. Enter the Product Key (found on the back of the DVD sleeve) in the space provided to the left of the Continue button.  Make sure that Attempt to automatically activate my product online is checked and then click Continue. On the next screen, check the box labeled I accept the terms of this agreement, then click Continue. On the Choose Installation screen, click on the Customize button. Click the down arrow icon next to Microsoft Office at the top of the tree and select Run all from My Computer.  This will select all components. After selecting all components, you can then go down through the list and remove any individual components that you do not use.  Consult the table below for information on each of the available components in Office 2010. Office 2010 Component Description Recommended Microsoft Access Database No Microsoft Excel Spreadsheet Yes Microsoft InfoPath Electronic Forms User Choice Microsoft OneNote Free-form Data Organizer User Choice Microsoft Outlook Email Client User Choice Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation Yes Microsoft Publisher Desktop Publishing User Choice Microsoft SharePoint Workspace Document Collaboration No Microsoft Visio Viewer Diagram software (viewer only) User Choice Microsoft Word Word Processor Yes Office Shared Features Features shared by multiple components Yes Office Tools Features shared by multiple components Yes     Click on the down arrow icon next to each component that you do not wish to install and select Not Available.  Once you have finished customizing your selections, click the Install Now button to begin the installation. After the installation has completed, click Close. You will be prompted to configure updates for Microsoft Office the first time you open one of the Office programs.  We advise selecting the “Recommended Settings” option.
Microsoft Office XP
  • Global IME for Japanese on Office XP Microsoft Office XP Note Microsoft Windows also contains a version of this IME. If you are running Microsoft Windows 2000, Microsoft Windows XP, or Microsoft Windows Server 2003, you do not need to download the Global IME (Japanese). We recommend that you use the Windows version of this IME instead.   Before you install Before you install the Global IME for Japanese for Office XP, do the following: Install Office XP (any language version). If you have not installed a Global IME before, install the Speech or the Handwriting feature in the Office XP installation (Office Shared Features, Alternate User Input). If you are not running Windows 2000 AND you are not running a Japanese language version of the operating system, install the Office XP Tool: Japanese Language Pack. To install this download (Japanese language Pack) Download the file from the Microsoft Office Tools on the Web site by clicking the Download link above and following the instructions in the dialog boxes. Double-click the ie_ja.exe program file on your hard disk to start the setup program. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation.   Download and Install Global IME for Japanese Download Office XP Tool: Global IME (Japanese). To install this download (imejpn.exe): Be sure to complete the Before you install steps above. Double-click the imejpn.exe program file on your hard disk to start the setup program. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation. Once you have installed the Global IME and started the Office XP program you want to type in, you can use the Language bar (appears by default in the upper-right corner of the screen in any document.
  • Global IME for Simplified Chinese on Office XP Microsoft Office XP Before you install Before you install the Global IME for Office XP, do the following: Install Office XP (any language version). If you have not installed a Global IME before, install the Speech or the Handwriting feature in the Office XP installation (Office Shared Features, Alternate User Input). If you are not running Windows 2000 AND you are not running a Simplified Chinese language version of the operating system, install the Office XP Tool: Simplified Chinese Language Pack. To install this download (Simplified Chinese language Pack) Download the file from the Microsoft Office Tools on the Web site by clicking the Download link above and following the instructions in the dialog boxes. Double-click the ie_zhc.exe program file on your hard disk to start the setup program. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation.   Download and Install Global IME for Simplified Chinese Download Office XP Tool: Global IME (Simplified Chinese) To install this download (imechs.exe): Be sure to complete the Before you install steps above. Double-click the imechs.exe program file on your hard disk to start the setup program. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation. Once you have installed the Global IME and started the Office XP program you want to type in, you can use the Language bar (appears by default in the upper-right corner of the screen in any Office program) to switch between input languages and then select IME options.  
Microsoft Outlook
  • HillConnect Resources Microsoft Outlook Hamilton's e-mail system is HillConnect, powered by Google. The information provided below is designed to address some of the more common questions related to using your e-mail account at Hamilton College.  If you have specific questions regarding the functionality or your account (e.g. how to create "groups"), please try using the Help feature  built-in to your HillConnect account (click on the "gear" icon in the upper right corner of your HillConnect e-mail screen).  If you find that to be insufficient, please contact the ITS Help Desk at 315-859-4181. Topics Covered Requesting an e-mail account Activating your HillConnect account Accessing your e-mail via the Web Using your HillConnect account About the HillConnect environment Changing your existing password Forgotten password Accessing your e-mail via an e-mail client application Configuring your mobile device Mass mailing lists (ListServ) Graduate E-mail Account FAQ Requesting an e-mail account New Student Accounts: ITS automatically creates e-mail accounts for students when they are admitted.  Consequently, there should never be a need for a student to request an e-mail account for their own personal use. New Employee Accounts: ITS automatically creates e-mail accounts for employees when we receive official notification from Human Resources.  New faculty accounts are created when we receive official notification from the Dean of Faculty office. Temporary Employee Accounts:  To request a temporary employee account, please complete the form found at: https://my.hamilton.edu/survey-manager/survey?id=1304.  Please notify ITS as far in advance as possible when requesting an account as there are several processes that must take place to ensure your temp has access to all the resources he/she will need. Departmental Accounts: Accounts for departmental use can be requested by contacting Debby Quayle at x4031 or by e-mail at dquayle@hamilton.edu. Organizational Accounts: Student organizations can request accounts when they register on the Student Activities web site.  If the organization elects not to register, they must have an employee/faculty sponsor. Back to top Activating Your HillConnect Account Your Hamilton e-mail account must be activated before it can be used. Instrucstions can be found at: https://my.hamilton.edu/youraccount Back to top Accessing your e-mail via the web Regardless of whether you are off campus or on campus you can check your e-mail from any computer as long as it has access to the Internet (World Wide Web). Once you are connected to the Internet, point your browser (Internet Explorer, Safari, Firefox, etc.) to http://hillconnect.hamilton.edu. You can also access your e-mail via the e-mail channel in My Hamilton at http://my.hamilton.edu. Back to top Using Your HillConnect Account About the HillConnect Environment Mac/Windows Understanding conversations Google Apps Overview Video How to set up forwarding in HillConnect From Google How to Configure Filters From Lynda.com To view these videos, please email learnit@hamilton.edu for an account Gmail Essentials Video Calendar Essentials Video Changing your existing password There are two ways to change your password. The Change Password Form allows you to enter a new e-mail password that will also become your new network password.  The Synchronize Password link will use your existing network password and will make your e-mail password match it. Change Password Form: Changes your e-mail password and your ESS/SSS at the same time. Synchronize Password Form: Changing your HillConnect Password to Match Your ESS/SSS Password.  Forgotten Password Current students and employees need to contact the ITS Help Desk at 315-859-4181 or e-mail us at helpdesk@hamilton.edu for assistance.  Instructions for other members of the Hamilton Community. Back to top Accessing your e-mail via an e-mail software application You can access your Hamilton e-mail account using e-mail client software that supports the IMAP mail protocol. ITS supports the use of Mozilla Thunderbird and provides comprehensive documentation for configuring and using Thunderbird. College-owned computers for employees have Thunderbird installed and configured for the computer's user. If you want to install and configure Thunderbird on your personal computer to access your e-mail please contact the ITS Help Desk. Thunderbird Installing & Configuring for HillConnect E-mail Outlook How to Configure Microsoft Outlook 2010 Apple Mail How to Configure Apple Mail Windows Mail How to Configure Windows Mail Others If you are comfortable using another e-mail program without support from ITS, you can use the generic settings below as a guide for setting up one of these e-mail clients. If you need further assistance, use the Help feature in the program or refer to the support webster for the respective software company. Settings for any client Configuring Your Mobile Devices Configuring my mobile device for mail, calendar, and contacts Back to top Mass mailing lists (ListServ) The Hamilton ListServ system allows you to quickly send an e-mail to a group of individuals, such as a club or organization, the entire campus community, or certain class year of students. The ListServ groups for the entire campus, all students, all faculty, all employees, or a particular class year are mass mailing lists which are subject to certain policies. For more information on mass mailing policies and how to use ListServ, see the information on our ListServ web page: ListServ Mailing List Info Back to top
Microsoft Powerpoint
  • Embedding Video in Microsoft PowerPoint on Mac OS X Microsoft Powerpoint Embedding Video in Microsoft PowerPoint 2007 on a Macintosh Computer Using a compressed video 1. First create a folder and place the movie you want to add to the PowerPoint inside the folder. NOTE: If you want to be able to play this video in PowerPoint on a Windows computer, use a compression type such as wmv.   2. Save your PowerPoint to the same location of the movie. 3. To embed a compressed video clip in Microsoft PowerPoint, go to Insert -> Movie, and then navigate to the folder that contains the movie. Once you highlighted the movie you want, click the Choose button. 4. PowerPoint will ask you if you want the video clip to play When Clicked or Automatically. Chose your desired setting by clicking on either button. 5. To change the size of the video hover over one of the corners until a diagonal double-sided arrow appears,  then click and drag the video to a desired size. 6. To change the location hover over one of the sides of the video until a four arrow cross appears, now click and hold down the mouse while dragging to a desired location. 7. To view your PowerPoint video click the Slide Show button. 8. Save the PowerPoint and Copy the folder with the video and PowerPoint to the location you want to store it (i.e. SSS, USB Drive, etc.) NOTE: Not all computers have the same specifications; so make sure you are using a compressed file type that will work on the computer you will be presenting.
  • Embedding Video in Microsoft PowerPoint on Windows XP Microsoft Powerpoint Embedding Video in Microsoft PowerPoint 2007 on a Windows XP Computer Using a compressed video 1. First create a folder and place the movie you want to add to the PowerPoint inside the folder. NOTE: If you want to be able to play this video on another computer, make sure the file type you are using is supported. 2. Save your PowerPoint to the same location of the movie. 3. To embed a compressed video clip in Microsoft PowerPoint, go to the Insert tab, click Movie-> Movie from File, and then navigate to the folder that contains the movie. Once you highlighted the movie you want, click the OK button. 4. PowerPoint will ask you if you want the video clip to play When Clicked or Automatically. Chose you desired setting by clicking on either button. 5. To change the size of the video hover over one of the corners until a diagonal double-sided arrow appears, now click and drag the video to a desired size. 6. To change the location hover over one of the sides of the video until a four arrow cross appears, now click and hold down the mouse while dragging to a desired location. 7. To view your PowerPoint video click the View Tab and click the Slide Show button. 8. Save the PowerPoint and Copy the folder with the video and PowerPoint to the location you want to store it (i.e. SSS, USB Drive, etc.) NOTE: Not all computers have the same specifications; so make sure you are using a compressed file type that will work on the computer you will be presenting.
  • Setting up an 11x17 Poster Using Microsoft Powerpoint Microsoft Powerpoint Using Microsoft PowerPoint (images from Microsoft Office 2004 running on Mac OS X) 1.  Launch Microsoft PowerPoint and choose New Presentation from the File menu. 2.  Decide if your poster will use Landscape orientation (wider than tall) or Portrait orientation (taller than wide) and then choose Page Setup… from the File menu. Landscape Orientation: In the Size section enter 16 for the width and 10 for the height.  This will format your poster for 17” wide x 11” high paper size. Portrait Orientation: In the Size section enter 10 for the width and 16 for the height.  This will format your poster for 11” wide x 17” high paper size. Portrait Orientation Landscape Orientaion   3. IMPORTANT! Press OK in the Page Setup dialog box. A dialog box will appear alerting you that the current page size exceeds the printable area of the paper.  Make sure and choose OK, and NOT the default choice of Fix. Choosing Fix will cause your poster to be sized for 8.5 x 11 paper and not for the large format paper.  4.  You may now begin authoring your poster.
Mobile Device
  • Create a High-Quality Videoconference Mobile Device Environment Optimization Regardless which videoconferencing solution is chosen for the communication, it will be important to prepare the location where your call will take place so as to realize the most optimal, standard experience for all involved parties. General Considerations Regardless of the conversation type, if the communication is high-risk/high-value, at least one test should be performed with all participants before the actual conversation. Remember that accidents can happen: pets can meander into the conversation and voice their opinions, cell phones have the potential of ringing, and items can fall and clatter. While all participants should attempt to prepare for these eventualities, it is best to just accept that they are a part of the conversation, a normative experience, and therefore look past them. Remember that participants within the domain of the webcam and the microphone are involved in the videoconference: anything uttered or any act performed within range of either device will be transmitted to all participants. It behooves everyone to be aware (by dint of the Preview available on all computers/software) of what will be seen and heard before the videoconference begins. As the character Doctor Emmett Brown opined in the movie Back to the Future, "no wonder your president has to be an actor, [they] have to look good on television." Lighting Proper lighting is an essential ingredient for a successful, high-quality videoconference. "A webcam isn't the most flattering piece of technology," according to Stephen Winzenburg in an article for the Winter/Spring 2012 edition of the Chronicle of Higher Education, "[it can] make you appear gaunt, overweight, beady eyed, or narcoleptic. And often you look all those things at the same time." To ensure that all participants see each other in the best possible light, everyone should: Ensure your environment is well-lit--turn on as many lights as possible; Be mindful of such issues as camera angle, background, and any other light sources that might affect the conversation; A room with a window might be a nice place to have a chat, but the sun streaming in can wreak havoc on the quality of the conversation; If you must have a conversation in a room with a window, be sure to test your setup around the same time you anticipate having the conversation to ensure a uniform experience; Test, test, test, test, test: almost all software and computers have the ability to provide participants with a preview and this preview is what other participants will actually see--make sure the contents of the preview are what you want the other participants to see.  If a high-quality conversation is desired, it may behoove participants to purchase a dedicated webcam. ITS has enjoyed success with devices like the Microsoft LifeCam HD-6000. Sound Problems with sound are reliable sources of videoconferencing woes. In addition to the ambient noise issue covered in the "Location" section, there are other potential problems one should be aware of: Echo/Feedback A problem arises whenever a sound input is colocated with a sound output: If you put a microphone IN FRONT of a speaker, a positive feedback loop will be generated, i.e. loud, screechy, piercing sound that is painful. Be sure either to place the speaker far away from the microphone, wear headphones to ameliorate the problem, or invest in a microphone with integrate anti-feedback technology. Most laptops, all-in-one desktops (e.g. the iMac), and smartphones have built-in webcameras, microphones, and speakers. While they are sometimes configured to interoperate without generated feedback, one cannot rely on them working perfectly, especially for high-value conversations. All participants are STRONGLY encouraged to wear headphones to eliminate echoing/feedback. Configuration The peripherals required to perform a videoconference interoperate well, but are susceptible to problems.  If participants are unable to hear each other, see each other, or connect, there may be a problem with the configuration of the peripherals, the software for the chat (e.g. Skype, Google Talk), or the drivers that the computer uses to communicate with the devices. While easier with the built-in microphone, webcam, speaker setup, problems can plague those setups. ITS strongly recommends testing the full setup before any videoconference. If problems are identified before the actual conversation, chances are better that they can be troubleshooted and resolved without conflicting with the actual conversation. Accessibility Issues Hearing Aids/Lipreaders All communications conducted using these solutions will be affected to varying degrees by synchronicity issues. For example: participants may notice that mouths move independently of the sound they generate. While this is becoming a normative experience, it can be jarring, especially for those who need to read lips to understand what is being said. Proper balancing of audio is also key to ensure that participants whose hearing is impaired can participate equally in the conversation
. Location Through the miracle of modern technology, these conversations can now take place at any time and in any location, e.g. cafés, libraries, street corners, dorm rooms, hospitals, vel sim. Just because they can take place in every location does not necessarily mean they ought to take place in every location. Both parties should consider: The ambient noise in their respective environments--loud environs equals bad conversations; The people whom they might affect with the conversation--not everyone needs to be privy to the conversation; The speed of the internet conections at the locations--a low-speed DSL connection will not create a good videoconferencing experience (You can test your bandwidth here.)
  • Google Sync versus IMAP Mobile Device Return to configuring my mobile device Return to HillConnect Homepage Sync Supports push technology which delivers data to your device as new data is available. There is a single setup for e-mail, calendar, and contacts. The setup is easy. Most devices support only one sync account. Depending on your device, any push connection may use more power than fetching data at scheduled intervals. In some cases the difference in power usage may have a noticeable impact on your phone's battery life. To save battery life, turn off push and set device to fetch data every 30 to 60 minutes. Beta software. IMAP Supports pull technology which fetches data at a scheduled interval set by the user. One setup for e-mail and a separate setup for calendar and contacts. The setup is easy. Devices support multiple accounts. Pull technology allows you to set the interval to fetch new data and therefore improving your phone's battery life.
  • HillConnect Resources Mobile Device Hamilton's e-mail system is HillConnect, powered by Google. The information provided below is designed to address some of the more common questions related to using your e-mail account at Hamilton College.  If you have specific questions regarding the functionality or your account (e.g. how to create "groups"), please try using the Help feature  built-in to your HillConnect account (click on the "gear" icon in the upper right corner of your HillConnect e-mail screen).  If you find that to be insufficient, please contact the ITS Help Desk at 315-859-4181. Topics Covered Requesting an e-mail account Activating your HillConnect account Accessing your e-mail via the Web Using your HillConnect account About the HillConnect environment Changing your existing password Forgotten password Accessing your e-mail via an e-mail client application Configuring your mobile device Mass mailing lists (ListServ) Graduate E-mail Account FAQ Requesting an e-mail account New Student Accounts: ITS automatically creates e-mail accounts for students when they are admitted.  Consequently, there should never be a need for a student to request an e-mail account for their own personal use. New Employee Accounts: ITS automatically creates e-mail accounts for employees when we receive official notification from Human Resources.  New faculty accounts are created when we receive official notification from the Dean of Faculty office. Temporary Employee Accounts:  To request a temporary employee account, please complete the form found at: https://my.hamilton.edu/survey-manager/survey?id=1304.  Please notify ITS as far in advance as possible when requesting an account as there are several processes that must take place to ensure your temp has access to all the resources he/she will need. Departmental Accounts: Accounts for departmental use can be requested by contacting Debby Quayle at x4031 or by e-mail at dquayle@hamilton.edu. Organizational Accounts: Student organizations can request accounts when they register on the Student Activities web site.  If the organization elects not to register, they must have an employee/faculty sponsor. Back to top Activating Your HillConnect Account Your Hamilton e-mail account must be activated before it can be used. Instrucstions can be found at: https://my.hamilton.edu/youraccount Back to top Accessing your e-mail via the web Regardless of whether you are off campus or on campus you can check your e-mail from any computer as long as it has access to the Internet (World Wide Web). Once you are connected to the Internet, point your browser (Internet Explorer, Safari, Firefox, etc.) to http://hillconnect.hamilton.edu. You can also access your e-mail via the e-mail channel in My Hamilton at http://my.hamilton.edu. Back to top Using Your HillConnect Account About the HillConnect Environment Mac/Windows Understanding conversations Google Apps Overview Video How to set up forwarding in HillConnect From Google How to Configure Filters From Lynda.com To view these videos, please email learnit@hamilton.edu for an account Gmail Essentials Video Calendar Essentials Video Changing your existing password There are two ways to change your password. The Change Password Form allows you to enter a new e-mail password that will also become your new network password.  The Synchronize Password link will use your existing network password and will make your e-mail password match it. Change Password Form: Changes your e-mail password and your ESS/SSS at the same time. Synchronize Password Form: Changing your HillConnect Password to Match Your ESS/SSS Password.  Forgotten Password Current students and employees need to contact the ITS Help Desk at 315-859-4181 or e-mail us at helpdesk@hamilton.edu for assistance.  Instructions for other members of the Hamilton Community. Back to top Accessing your e-mail via an e-mail software application You can access your Hamilton e-mail account using e-mail client software that supports the IMAP mail protocol. ITS supports the use of Mozilla Thunderbird and provides comprehensive documentation for configuring and using Thunderbird. College-owned computers for employees have Thunderbird installed and configured for the computer's user. If you want to install and configure Thunderbird on your personal computer to access your e-mail please contact the ITS Help Desk. Thunderbird Installing & Configuring for HillConnect E-mail Outlook How to Configure Microsoft Outlook 2010 Apple Mail How to Configure Apple Mail Windows Mail How to Configure Windows Mail Others If you are comfortable using another e-mail program without support from ITS, you can use the generic settings below as a guide for setting up one of these e-mail clients. If you need further assistance, use the Help feature in the program or refer to the support webster for the respective software company. Settings for any client Configuring Your Mobile Devices Configuring my mobile device for mail, calendar, and contacts Back to top Mass mailing lists (ListServ) The Hamilton ListServ system allows you to quickly send an e-mail to a group of individuals, such as a club or organization, the entire campus community, or certain class year of students. The ListServ groups for the entire campus, all students, all faculty, all employees, or a particular class year are mass mailing lists which are subject to certain policies. For more information on mass mailing policies and how to use ListServ, see the information on our ListServ web page: ListServ Mailing List Info Back to top
  • iPad Loan Program Mobile Device iPad Loaner Program In May 2012, ITS announced new iPad loaner programs. Semester or academic year iPad loaner program For faculty who are interested in exploring the use of iPads in connection with their courses. Our intent is to enable you to explore ways of improving the learning / research environment for your students.  There are initially ten iPads in the loaner pool. Current faculty use and feedback There are currently 10 faculty members using the loaner units. Each month, faculty are asked to post their reflections about using the iPad to a blog.  Call for proposals for spring 2013 Proposals for five units available for use during the spring 2013 semester will be solicited in mid-November. Applications will be reviewed by representatives of the library, ITS, and the Dean of Faculty. The criteria/questions we used to evaluate the proposals are as follows: Does the use benefit from the mobility factor? Does it involve a curricular use? Can the use be accommodated by the classroom computer? Is there a direct student activity? Does the activity support student research? Does the use require multimodal use/data collection, e.g. visuals, data, GIS info., etc. Does the use change the classroom experience? Short term iPad loaner program (program launch is pending)  A small pool of five iPads will be made available to faculty or staff on a first-come, first served basis for short term use (up to two weeks) e.g., for use during conference travel, or just to try out. The goal of this short term loan is to expose employees to new tablet technology and different ways of thinking about the uses of technology. This program will also help in the exploration and identification of good apps. Related Documents Setting up a New iPad Setting up a Passcode for an iPad iPad wireless configuration  
Movie
  • Audiovisual Services (AV) Movie Audiovisual Services   AV Services Personnel Support Services Offered Requesting Films and Videotapes Media Use and Rental Policies Available Equipment Videotaping & Streaming Services Video and Audio Copying Services Duplication Policy and Prices Hamilton College's overall Copyright Policy Copyright Policy (AV topics)   Mission Statement The Audiovisual Services Team of the Information Technology Services department provides quality service and support to the Hamilton College Community for their teaching and multimedia presentation needs. AV Services Personnel The Audiovisual Classroom Services Team is located in Burke Library, Room 363 (within the ITS office area). Tim Hicks Director 315-859-4790 (To be Announced) Staff Assistant/ Film Specialist 315-859-4120 Graham Espe  Multimedia Systems Technician 315-859-4793 Forrest Warner Multimedia Systems Technician 315-859-4076   Support Services Offered Presentation support (sound reinforcement and data projection). Video recording or streaming of campus events (e.g. performances, lectures, and sporting events). Rental of films and DVDs for academic and non-academic use. Maintenance and support of technology enhanced (TE) classrooms. Classroom delivery of projection, video and audio equipment. Loaning of various types of audiovisual equipment. Production work including duplications, editing and off-air recordings. Video conference facilities.   To schedule Audiovisual services, use the R25 room reservation system if applicable. In the Event Options section, check the box for "require A/V support," then write details of your needs in the Comments box.  If R25 is not appropriate for your situation,  or to request equipment loans, please contact the AV Coordinator at 315-859-4120. Equipment requests should be made at least one week in advance so student workers and delivery can be scheduled. To rent movies, please contact the Audiovisual Film Specialist, 315-859-4120. Movie requests should be made 2 to 4 weeks in advance, to allow time for research and ordering. For more information about Audiovisual Classroom Services, please contact the Audiovisual Department Office, 315-859-4120. Requesting films and Videos The Burke Library and the Media Library have materials for researching videos and films available for educational purposes. Contact a Reference Librarian using the Ask a Librarian Form, or call 315-859-4735. To show to your class a DVD or videotape from the Media Library, you must check out the movie and show it yourself. Contact Linda Brennan at 315-859-4923 for information about the media collection and borrowing items. In virtually all classrooms, the AV equipment is operated via a touchscreen control. If you need help getting started, contact AV Services (x4120) to schedule a brief personal training session in your classroom. Audiovisual Services will provide a projectionist if the media item (rented or from our library) is a 16mm film or another unusual format. To request a projectionist, send a written or e-mail request to the Audiovisual Film Specialist (x4120), at least two weeks in advance. Please include the following information when requesting movie rentals: SHOW DATE(S) SHOW TIME: Indicate the start time(s) and whether you plan to show a film in the latter part of a class. LOCATION: If you plan to show media materials at a time or place different from the assigned class period or location you must make room reservations with the Registrar. TITLE: Include the full title, plus an English translation of any foreign title. Other helpful information could include director, actors, country and year, especially if there has been more than one production of the same title. FORMAT: Indicate the format (video, DVD, 16 mm film), only if one type is preferred over another. SOURCE: If you are aware of a source, please provide it. PUBLIC PERFORMANCE: Will the screening be only for the students in your class, or do you plan to advertise it or invite other viewers? Media Use and Rental Policies Most materials from the Media Library are licensed only for classroom-use showings, and cannot be advertised. A public performance license can be purchased for an open showing in many cases, with at least two weeks' advance notice. The Audiovisual Film Specialist will help you with licensing questions. Movies available on videotape or DVD from the Media Library will not be rented in another format unless the instructor can show the necessity of using the other format. The AV Department's film rental budget supports curricular needs and is to be used for classroom-use rentals only. Any academic open showings (public performace with advertisement) and all entertainment showings will require public performance licensing. The AV Film Specialist will order the rental movie and/or licensing for you, but it must be funded by the requester's department or organization. No rented materials can be put on reserve in the Media Library. For additional information about copyright compliance in the use of library materials and rented media, please read the Audiovisual Copyright Policy.    Available Equipment Contact Audiovisual Services one to two weeks in advance to request audiovisual equipment. Many of these items may be borrowed and operated by the requester. Upon request, AV will deliver equipment or provide instruction to those unfamiliar with the equipment. Some types of equipment will require set-up and operation by an AV technician.   Projection Equipment Data/ Video Projector Document Camera 16mm Projection Projection Screen  Video Equipment Camcorder, mini-DV  DVD/VHS Player Laserdisc Player   Audio Equipment Sound Systems, Various  Digital Audio Recorder Compact Disc/Audiotape Boom Box Miscellaneous Equipment Easel  Laser Pointer PowerPoint remote control (Kensington) Slide Projector (35mm)   Videotaping and Streaming Services Location Videotaping Description of Service: Videotaping of classes, lectures, athletic and special events at specified locations on campus. Operation: In most cases, AV provides operators. Restrictions: Written permission to videotape lecturers and performers (including persons affiliated with Hamilton College) must be obtained and given to the AV Department prior to the start of videotaping. Written permission from the publisher is required in order to videotape theater productions and music performances of copyrighted scripts or scores. A printable permission form for a single individual is available or blank forms can be requested f